Instruction in the Elements of the Art of Astrology

(Kitab al-Tafhim li Awa'il Sina'at al-Tanjim
- Book of Instruction in the
Elements of the Art of Astrology)
English translation with parallel Arabic / Persian text.

Antioch Gate
www.AntiochGate.com
Birmingham, United Kingdom
Published by Antioch Gate 2007
© Mayeen Uddin 2007
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may
be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or
transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic,
mechanical, photocopying, recording or otherwise,
without the prior permission of the publishers.
The entire collection of Antioch Gate
eBooks is available as a CDROM series,
with several titles on each disc. The
price per CDROM in the series is but
£15 plus a reasonable delivery charge –
see the website for details.

THE BOOK OF INSTRUCTION
IN THE ELEMENTS OF THE ART OF
ASTROLOGY
ABU'LRAYH~~N MUHAMMAD IBN AHMAD
Written in Ghaznah, I o 29 A.D.
Reproduced from Brit. Mus. MS. Or. 8349
The Translation facing the Text by
R. Ramsay Wright, M.A. Edin., LLD. Tor. and Edin.
Ernerims Professor of Biology
University of Toronto
I934
LONDON
LUZAC & CO.
46 Great Russell Street

PREFACE
NOTE.
This work had occupied Dr.
Ramsay Wright for many years.
The whole of the text, translation
and notes had been printed
and the title page and most of
the preface finally revised by
him before his death on 5th September
1933. The remainder of
the preface was awaiting his last
aorrections. An index has been
added.
The edition is limited to
one hundred copies of wnich this
i S
No. ...
The History of Science is cultivated so aasiduously
at the present time, as one may judge from the periodfoals
exolusively dedoted to it, and from the important
books which appear from time to time elucidating
the history of certain subjects or of certain periods,
that the translation of a book whiah served as a primer
of Science for two or three hundred years efter it was
mitten requires no apology.l
This applies with special significanoe to the
~afhfm of Al-~irk'i because its author is one of the
most outstanding figures of the eleventh oentury, which
has been desoribed as the blossoming time or Mohammedan
nulture, and as the climax of mediaeval thought.
So dharacteris tic for his age is 1 ts author that
Sarton in his admirable "Introduotion to the History of
Soienoew Styles the first half' of that century the
nTime of ~l-~irllnx.
Intimacy with Sir Willlam Oaler, whose fine Ubmy
was asse bled in ill.ustration of the History of
Soienoe19 and with Dr. Charles Singer whose notable
aontrlbutions to it are well-known formed a favourable
atmosphere for Increasing interest therein and lad to
8ly undertaking the task of this translation.
The suaestion that the ~afixm was both worthy of
being translated, and alsa suitable as a representative
Of its period was made by Professor B.B. Browns to
DF. Singer who kindly placed a rotograph of the Persian
veraion (PL) et my disposal. It was from this that
the translation was made in the first instanoe.
&n answer to a question as to the Persian source
Greaves* wAstronomFca quaedamw brought me into oom-
Uunioation with Professor Wiedemann of Erlangen. Re
Chron. ~ext, m.
Washington,- 1927, vol. I, 69s-737. I am indebted to
Professor Fulton of Yale for tris reference.
Bibliotheca Osleriana, Oxford, 1929.
Ueber die Sohrift nutronomica quaedamn von GJXaVeS;
B- Rqsaz might mit einem zusatz von E. Wiedemann,
Be1 traege , -1.
Made and Printed by the Rcplika Process in Great Britain by
PERCY LUND HUMPHKlES CO. LTD.
11 B&W$ square, London, W.C.1
and at Brodfwd

had translated various passages flxm the Taf'hfm in his
*Beitraege zur Oeschichte der Naturwissenschaftenw communicated
to the Physico-Medical Society of Erlangen,
an3 was good enough to look over my translation of this
ndrk and to make a number of valuable suggestions which
have been incorporated iqto it. Ee advised that the
Arabic versions should be collated with the Persian,
lending me with this object photographs of the two Berlin
bSS.(A.B.AB1.) and presenting me with copies of his
numerous papers on Arabic Science, Be was about to
write at my request a short' Introcluc tion to this work,
which he did not live to compsete, in which he proposed
to compese the life and works of a-~XriinI in the East
with those of his oontemporary Ibn al-Baitham, better
known in the West as Alhazen, so distinguished for his
researohes in 0ptica.l
A warm tribute to Professor Wiedemann, by his former
aesistant H.J Seemann, discusses his aontrtbutions
to the History of Arabic Scienoe, and gives a list of
his numerous papers, which testif to the extent an&
diversity of his studies thareln.3
I take this opportunity of associating myself with
Dr. ~&~mann in expr&ssing my admiration of Professor
Kiedemann's achievements, and my indebtedness for the
interest he showed in my work.
Sartan thus characterizes U-~frfhf in comparison
W th his more widely-known contemporary Avlcenna (Ibn
Sfnl) wAl-~IrUnf reprenents the more cdventuroga agdcritical
spirit, Ibn $in8 the eynthetic; 81-Biriini was
more of a discoverer and In that respect cornea nearer
to the modern scienti@t*s ideal; Ibn 5InS was easentially
an organizer, an encyclopaedist, a philo8opher."
Two other oon'temporaries may be mentioned; Ibn
YUnus dl,stinguished for his astronomical work in Cairo
and v811 ibn rfsii for his researohes in ~~hthalrnolo~~.~
'1 One of Wledemann'r papers deals with the lives and
works or Ibn $1-Haithem and al-Kindi; Jahrb. f. Photo.
d.Reproduotionstechnik, 1911. 8 Isis,May 1930 166-186.
3 Not to be confused with the Astrolabe-maker (p. 119)
who lived under the Caliph ~a'miin nearly 200 years
earlier,and whose tract on the Astrolabe has recently
been edited by Father L. Cheikhu S.J. Ibn ~ h u refers a
to him with enthusiaem (Not. et Extr. VII, 54) ranking
he ~arhirn is a BOO^ or Instruction on the Principle~
or the Art pi Astrology (xltsb al-taihxm l1 awaril
qinlrat al-tanjim) but may be regarded as a Primer d
.selr~nth century science,Secause apart from the elaaglta
of ~eomtry and Astronomy, ( 'ilm 81-nujib, rilm al-falak)
and the use of the Astrolabe for astronomical and as*-
logical purposes (~strology is d irferentiated as rilm
al-tanjIm, 'ilm ahkh al-nujUm) i t has sections on Geography
and Chronology both fnvouri te topics st this
pried. It is, therefore, often classified with other
works designated as ocsmoqraphies 5ut the suthor places
it at the head of his list sf works on Astrology. Al-
~1-r insists that no one is entitled to cell himself
an Astrologer unless he possesses a thorough knowledge
of there ancillary sciences.
The author, ~bu* l-Raypan L!u$emad ibn mad 81-&id
(~-~~hwc?rizmi) generally known by his nisbah, which meens
that he belonged to the suburbs,outside (birlin) the wds
of the xhw&iPnian Capita1,but also often referred to
by him lcunyah,which is occasionally written Abu RayQBn.
KO mtion is made or dl-3IrUnI1S offspring nor is there
any lndioation why *rayJ#n* (literally sweet-basil, but
al.o a not unoonmon name) should have been selected as
him kuuyah. Sprigs of' this fragrant plant are often worn
by L;caba,and it may have been as characteristic for hlm
am an orohld for a distinguished politioian. In its reminllu
torm,liayh8nah,it is a woman's name like any other
talP.n from f lo&er or plant like Pyrtle. One of . 'S
~1Vom.a highly-educated Jewish girl from Wal b a z
so-aalled. It is also the name of the lady,Ra*Bnah the
Ithririunian,daughter of Al-Vasan,to whom thia-book is
dpdioated,:nd at whlse request, indeed, it raa written.
The ~afhrrn occurs In both Brclbic and Persian vermions,
nel ther of which according to Rleu purports to
hare been translated the one from the other. Bromo
BWakf~ of the bilingual TafhIm (Lit. Eiet. 11,102) and
of it8 having been composed simultaneously in both languq.8
(~hah~r rzaqElah) while a Paris hB. (D) has been
regarded on inadequate grounds as favouring the view
that it had been translated from the Persian by the
BUthor- ( P - ~ V under a. )
.
with Ptolemy and Galen. Nor is he to be confised
'fag ibn *dlI, a physician of the 3rd century atuohe*
to the court or Mutawakkil (and Murtamid?)

RayGRnah being a native of Khwkrizn would necesse
ily be more familiar with Persian than with Arabic,
which would acoount for the Persian version. Al-~ikflnT
wrote in aablc and was accustomed to make use of assistants
in his literary output. There are some indications
that the translator into Persian was less
familiar with Arabic than ~1-3Irflrd. (v. note p. 81)
The following sketch of the life of ~l-~IrDnfis
oompiled from that by Sachau in tile Preface to the Arabic
Edition of the Chronology,and from material translated
by Wiedemann from YHqUtts Biographical Dictionar
??I, 30@ md references by *l-Baihaqi and Ibn Abi Oabbifa8
gl-~lriini was born in 362 A.H. (973 A.D.) in a suburb
(blrtin) of the Capital of the Principality of mr-
izm, corresponding roughly to the farmer Khanate of
Khiva,at that time a province at the Senid Empire under
?l@ Ibn Flan~flr (ob. 987/997-8). The Capital, ~Sth,
situated on the right bank of the Oxus,where is now
Shaim C~Sbzs V'alI,was the seat of the last 1Chwiirizmshih
,Abu Abdallah ?!u@mad, a direc t descendant of the
Khusraws,but the greater part of the Province was ~overned
by the Emir Ma'mtin ibn hbbammad from GurgBnj, an
important city,now Kuhna Urgenj,a hundred milea to the
N.W. situated on the branch of the Oxus leading to the
~as~ian.
He overthrew the ancient dynasty of the KhwGrizmsh&s
in 385 A.H. ,appropriating the title. 3 BY this
time the Oxus had already destroyed the Citadel of the
Capita1,and was making further inroads in the city.
These ciroumstanpes may have led to ~l-~IrtlnI's leaving
for the court of FIangrUr, for in a verse quotgd by
YEqUt, he refers to him-as his first patron.*
Little is known up to this time of ~l-3IriinT*s
early history; he kn W little of his grandfather andnothing
of his father,5 but he must have profited b
studies under ibu Na?r Manpur ibn 'Lli ibn Tr~p,! hti:
he had already mitten a number of scientific papers,md
had had discussions wi th his younger contemporary Avicenna
before leaving Khwlrizm, and while Avicenna wee
still in Sukhz~a.
r e emann U. ; E . z. eec . . s urw ss. U.
'e;: S, 973. ' ~ e~:ede:~~, 3elt~aeg~,~,X%~II,t.
v. . note 3 D. 186. \~ledemann,~eitraege,II,p.6l,N0.
2. 5 ~iedebnn, Qeitraege, LX, p. 62, NO. 4.
Wiedemann, Beitraege, LX, p. 61, No. 3.
mile at the samgnid cpurt he probably met ~zbiis
ibn nashrngrr Sham: al-IKa~~li~ who had "sken refuge
there, and when ~abiie regained his rrlncipelity in 388,
Al-sriinI at his invitation joined him in GurgZn at
the S.E. angle of the Caspian. To hitn Al-BIriinTts
first important work, the Chronology of Ancient
Nations, is dedicated; It was finished in 390-1/100~
A-I)., and, although not his first work, represents
the sumation of his researohes U till that time.
1% is uncertain when ~1-B~rtinB returned to
~hwgrizm, certainly before-399 A.H., for he speaks or
his kind reoeption at Gurganj by Abu'l-qasan *ai,
the eldeat eon Of MaqmUn who succeeded his father in
387.2 r~1i died in 399, and was followed hy his
brothel? ~ bu~l-*~bb~s Xarm6n ibn Matmiin, with whom
~i-~zriinT occupied an honourable position3 as councillor
during the whole of his reign till 407, when
he was murdered by rebellious subjects.
~t was to revenge this murder that Mahmcd of
Gheznah I,!atmiint s brother-in-law,4 set out to oonquer
KhwSrizm, placed Altuntash on the throne, and carried
the surviving members of the Royal family and other
nobles to Afghanistan in 408, and with them AI-
B T ~ and I two other savants Abu'l-1:hair ibn EZhammBr
the physician, and Abu Nasr ibnrIriq, the rnathematioian.
MaQmCd had previouily tried to attract the
learned men or ~uygbj to his own court for-already
Aviaenna (~bu ibn ~in5) and Abu Sahl ?SE ibn
Y y'h al-MasThI6 had fled from GurgBnj, ppobably in
3% betore Alh3hidts arrival, rather than acoept
MaPmudcs somewhat peremptory invitation.
l At 6 later period of his life he must have met QE~~s
grandson, rtmgur, author of the gtibas nsrnah who was
oompanlon of Masriid from 422-432 and married his sis-
Yon DieZ, Buch des ~Bbus, p. 136 seq.
$;i.d*mann, Beltraege, U,
Wledemann, ;ceitraege, LX, p. p. 6:, 61, No. No. I.
5.
' b. Subuktigln, Ma@nudts sister was first
married to VA~I and subsequently to MatmUn.
else married a sister of Ma*mTln,name not recorded. MaIpiid
&Z."baur,ganuel de Genealogic et de Chron3logie,l927.)
Plrdawai had fled from Ghaznah seven years before
thi a.

In one of his verses ~l-SIriini says Mahmud did not
cease to load him with benerits;l he may hive ocoupied
an official position as ~stro1oger;Z but many of the
twelve years between 408 and the completion of his
seoond great work *Indiam (Talrzkh al-Hind) in 421/
10m must have been spent in travel and study in India,
ss well as in the extraordinary and encyclopaedic
literary activity, including the TaihIrn in 420/1029,
which may be gathered from his own bibliography of hie
writings up to 427, contained in the Leiden EaS.GOllUt3
133, printed Qy Sachau in his Prefaoe, and translated
by Wiedemann, with the appendix of Al-Gha anfar (630-
692 A.H.) who is responsible for the detai P s on which
the figure of ~l-~IrnI*s horosoope p. 191 is founded.
~apmcd, to whom the Indica would probably have
been dedicated, €lied (421/10W) before the work was
actually finished, so there is no dedication.
When MasfUd suoceeded his father, Al-l$rUnf composed
his third grincipal work, the Canon P,!asudious,
and was in reoeipt of a pension which enabled him to
devote the rest of his life to his,scientific studies
and his literary work. YEqiit relates that !,?asr6d
sent him an elephant=loap of silver coin for the
Canon, but that A1-BizUni returned it tow Treasury.
Ye survived llas+'ud, dedicated a work on jewels
to his sucoessor L!awdCd, and died at Ghaznah in
440/1048.
TO return to ~aybiinah to whom the ~afi?lim is dedioated;
she must have been carried off to Ghaznah
in 408 A.H. with the rest of MahmGdls involuntary
It has been su~ested' that she was a siatar
of ~bu*l-~dbbk3, but in such event she would have
beon fbint al-~a'miin'not bint AI-gasan.
gbull-Hasan is a common kunyah which doe6 not
neoees.rily' imply the existence of a son Al-Haean,
otherrirs one aght euspe2t a relationship tb
Awcl-Basan rAli ibn ba1mun, whose only recorded
son ~bull- srig eucceeded his uncle Cbul - S for
few montS(8; or to Abull-psan ?Ali 1: ?:l-
Fa l ~l-KhhseI to whom, accordin to IjBjjl Khalifs
(If, 585) an edition of the Tafhfra was dedicated in
421 A.& ~l-Khiisa was a village near the anoient
Capital or Khwtirizm, (Talrikh-i Rashidi, p. 45) and
was evidently one of the exiles in"
~l-~irbd occupied such a prornlnent position in
Gurglnj, it is possible that Rayhgnah was a namesake
(aamiyyah), daughter of some friehd at LIaimtin's court
Whatever her cirigin she is marked out among oriental
women by her oravine; for saientific knowledge, and
bp the rare distinction of having a book dedicated
to her.
- - -
Wiedemann, Beitraege, LX, p. 61, No. 6.
v. ~hahgr Zlaqslah, XXIII; Browne, Lit. Fist. of
Persia, 11, 97; DIEIerbelot, under Abu RlhRn.
3 Sachau, Preface to Chron. Text. pp. XL-~VIII and
Hiedemann, l. c. pp. 71-77 and notes to p. 96.
I urn obliged to H.A.R. Gibb for the rest of the quotation
from the Leiden B., and to Dr. Fotheringham
for calculating the cusps of the houses from the data
there given.

TABLE OF coN'.I!mrs.
The paragraphs (abw8b) are referred to in the text by
numbers alone.
GEOMETRY
1-28. Deal with definitions and propositions of Euclid
Book I.
29-se. Or Book 11. 33-36. Of Books I11 and N.
37, Ratio of diameter to ciroumference.
38-51 and 55. Detinitlons of BOOK V. 52-54. Of Book VI.
56-71. Definitions from Books H and =I.
ARITHMETIC
72-95. Names and properties of the various kinds of numbera
96-108. Arithmetical Operations. Decimal Notation.
109-115. Algebra. 116-119. Representation of numbers by
letters of the alphabet.
The Spheres. 125. Stars and Planets.
Celestial Movements. IIorizon. l?eridian. Cardinal
Points. Indian Circle.
Day and Night. Dawn and Twilight. Hours.
Equinoctial. Ecliptic. Parallels of Declination and
of Latitude. Lfuqantarahs, Equinoxes. Solstices.
Subdivision of the circumferenoe of the circle.
Relation to it of the diameter.
THE SIGKS. 147. Declination and Latitude of Stars.
THE PISSJiDS. Superior and Inferior. The Epicycle.
Combustion and Conjunction with the Sun.
Waxing and asning or the FKoon. Phases peculiar to
the Mom?
The Fixed Stars. Their arrangement in Constellatlas,
Zodiacel, Ilor thern and Southern. Tables of
these.
Star names. UTSION3 OF THE 5100hT. Their Ascension.
The Galsxy. Crder of succession of Signs. Northern
and Southern Sidns and Mansions.
Munaththal Orbit or Parecliptic. Apogee of Sun.
Its Excentric Orbit. Its MeanMovement, Mean
Argument end Equation. The anount of its movement
in the Scliptic.
116-1e5. Inalined Orbits of Planets, their nodes. Epicyole;
DBferent ; Equan t . Apogee of Epi cycle, lCean
rate of Planet, "ear? and True Anomaly. Yean and
Corrected Lowitude. Equation of Anomaly.
position among the ntars.
True
166-190. Orbits of the ElOOn. Its Elovements. Those of the
planets. Revolution of the planets.
191. The Trepidation Theory.
198-196. Latitude of the Moon and of the Planets.
of their Apogees and of their Nodes
Position
io7-198. Daily-rate of &o+enent of Planet, BUHT.
199-201. t?sqbat, ~ibatZt, ~itiiqlit.
802. planets. ~scending and Descending.
eos. Inorease and Decrease of the Planets.
204. World-Days and World-Yehrs.
205-e09. Size of Planets. Distanoe fron the Earth. Size of
the Sarth end surrounding Elements.
Distribution of Land and later.
PO s ture .
Squator. Erect
Latl tude and Longitude of Locality.
Ortlve Amplitude. Day and Night. Diurnal ~rc.
stars of Perpetual Apparitio~ and Occultation.
Altitude and Zenith Distance.
Gnomon and Shadow.
Azimuth. Meridian Altitude and Shadow. Relation to
time of Prayer. Azimuth of Qiblah. Direction
of Meoca.
GEOGRAPHY
X56-240. The Seven Climates. Their Extent and Ci:eracteristios.
Qubbat al-ara. Other Methods of dividing
the Earth.
241. Cities in the Seven climates.
242. CO-ascensions of Equinoctial and Ecliptic.
243. lEpoohl of Star with Latitude. Degree with which it
rises, sets and crosses the Yeridian.
244. ~z1ir. BC of parallel of e. ster traversed from the
horizon at a given time.
245-248. Asoendaqt. Houses, Cadent and Succeedent. Their
Angles.
249. Anniversary.
Jupiter .
250. COI~~CTIONS of Saturn end
250-254. Conjunction and Oppositl3n of ltoon. Phases (F~@SZ~)
255-267.
at which forecasts are made, Bthazer (al-tas~irht).
Bolipses or Moon. Eclipses of Sun. parallaxis.

CHRONOLOGY
869-173. Xonths. Solar and LMar Years. Leapyear. Intercala
tion.
2128. IIindu Names for Days of the Week.
271479. Months of the Varioua Nations.
280-881. Dates. Cycles. Eras. 282. Feasts and Fasts or
the Nations.
885-290. Jewish. 291-300. Christian. 301. Muslim.
302-310. Persian.
311-315. . Days in Greek Calendar. 316-320. Soghdian and
321-323. THE
WwHrizmian.
CALENDAR. Page of a Persian Calendar.
324-346. The Astrolohe. Its Parts. Various Kinds. Uses.
ASTROLOGY
THE SIGNS
347-358. Their Nature and Charaoteristics. Relation to
Points of the Compass and to the Winds.
359-371. Tables giving Indications as to their influence on
Character, Figure and Face, Profession, Dis.ease.
372.
Crops. Animals.
Years of the Signs.
373-376.
377.
Signs and Flanets in Aspect and Inconjunct.
Relations other then Aspect.
578.
379-380.
Ascending and Descending halves or the Zodiac.
Triplicities and Quailrants or the Zodiac.
THE PLANETS
381-395. Their Kature and Cherscteristios. Relation to
pints 3f the Compass. As Lords of Fours and
Days of the Week. Relation to Climztes and
Cities.
394-395. Their ylZARS. Periods (RRDlJtIA) of control of
Suman Life.
396-435. TABLES giving Indications as to Soils. Buildings.
Countries. Jewels. Foods. Drugs. Animcls
Crops. Parts of the Body. Disposition and
Manners. Disease. Professions &c.
4'36-439. ORBS and YEARS. Details of Firdaria.
440-444. Domiciles and Detriments. Exaltatiori and Fall.
445. As Lords or the Triplicities.
446-447. Planets in Aspect. Friendship and Enmity of
Planets.
X
DIVISIONS OF TRE SIGNS
448-452. Ralves. Faces. paranatell onta.
ptolemy* S thirds.
Decanates.
453-454. TERMS and their Lords. 455-456. Ninths and
Twelfths.
457-460. Characteristics of DEGREES of the Signs.
THE HOUSES
461-414. TA- gr Indications at Nativities, at Rorary Questions,
as to Organs, Powers, Joya and Powers of
the Planets. Sex. Characteristics of Groups of
!?ouses in Threes and .Sixes.
TIlE PART @F FORTUNE
475-480, Tables of other LOTS cast in a similar way.
481-488. Relative Position of Planets and Sun. Cazimi. Orientality.Influenc8
changed under certain conditions.
TABIS.
489-490. XPPLICATION and SXPARATION. 491. DEAD DEGBES.
492. Conjunction in longitude and in latitude.
493-505. DIGWITXIB. Order of precedence. Favourable and
unfavourable situations or the Planets in the
Signs snd Houses.
506-X9. Interference with their conjunctions, Reception QC.
510. Substitutes for conjunc tion and aspect.
511.
512-513.
Opening the doors.
Strength and Weakness or Planets.
514. The Combus t Way.
515-519. The Five Divisions and the estrol9gical principles
on which inquiries are to be based in each.
520. The Lord of the Year. SBlkhudE.
521-523. The deter:~inin~ conditions at a nativity, Iiyleg,
~adkhudg, :scendant, Horoscope, Figure of the
Fieavens.
Direation or Aphesis (Tasyir)
JBnbakhtLr. Gifts of length of life. Position
of the maleflcs (garrPHti*) which terminate it.
524-526. Procedure et birth. Use 67 NumiidEr. P. siniilar
substi tute for Ascendant (Rec tification) .
527. *Elections'. Selecting suit2ble time for action.
528-53~. General Questions. Thought reading. Dr.nger of
hasty conclusions.

A note IndiOateS that the EB., writteii in gonia, was
bought in Siwas in 732 A.H.
PERSIAN
1. PL. Br;t. ?S. A!d. 7697. Cat. Pers. b4SS. 11, 451
2. PL'. 23566. " 452
n II W
3. PP. ~ibl. Nat. Paris 774.
49
,I
ARABIC
4. BL. Frit. ITUS. Add. Or. 8349. Recently acquired.
5. AO. Bodl. Marsh. 572. Cat. Arab. =S. I, 221
6. AO*. 9odl. 281. W 11, 262
7. a. Kb;igl. 9ibl. Serlin 5666. " W V,150
I W 5667. " II v?
d. AB'.
1. " 443
9, U. Bibl. Nat. Paris 2497 '*
The translation was originally rnade from PL., was afterwards
collated with and amended from A0 and AOq , while the
reproduction of AL which acoompanies the translation has had
some lecunae supplied fro& 80 and AO* .
PL.
This MS. is unique in being ?receded by a list of the 530
paragraphs (abwHb) into which the work is divided. This is
more detailed than that given in the Bodleian Catalogue of
Arabic MSS. 11, 262-8. Further it is the only m. in whioh
the peragrephs ere numbered, nnd in which there are figures of
the constellations.
There are certain lacunae, viz. 91-95, 193-196, 206-7,
476-481; all of these can Se supplied from PL* excevt the
last, which, h~wever, is in PP.
The script is described in the Catalogue as a fair naskhi.
The teble in 453 has been substituted for the Arabic one as a
specimen of the neat calligraphy. Professor Srowne in a letter
to Dr. Singer refers to the arohaic writing; this is
chiefly noticeable in dEl being written dhHl between vmels
and efter s vowel at theend of a wwd, and in forms like ank
and & i'3r enki ~nd acchi (v. Yarn,-Seu-Persische Sprache,
pp. 81 and 121).
The MS. is det,ed the beginning of RanaQBn, 6b6 A.H.
(end of October 1286 B.D.): and was mitten 'by the most weak
hand* of Al-Hellq ibn Ghul-m al-QunHwi. It is interesting
that Ibn ~ h u i is a the copyist (692 A.B.) of the Leiden I.E.
Soli~s 133 (Cat. 11, 29C) in ivhich his master ~l-Ghadanfar, a
great cdnirer of the Tafhh, discusses the life and iorks of
il-2irllnI. (Chron. T. XV. )
231
, g m. of the 19th century: complete except tor ebsence 3f
paragraphs 473-489 and 513-523. This 18. is referred to in
the B.K. Catalogue, XI, 451, and elsewhere as giving the date
of miting (321) as 425 A.H. instead 3f 420 as in other !SS.,
but this is due to a mistake of the copyist as will he seen
fiom the subjoined passage:-
"pas in fiz sih shambih ast ki brat U panjum
Ramad6n andar sll chahirgad va b$st U an urn
az ~ i ~ r va a , ham hoitum az TlshrI
andar siil (hazgr va szpad va. chihil yakum est
az Iskagdar va riiz ardibahisht siwum AbZnm6h
andar sal)
sFpae va nuvad va hashtum az Yazdiglrdw
The words in brackets are omitted. The Calendar Is the same
as in PL with son8 ineccurecies.
ilthough this MS. is complete (as is AO) it has many
dropped lines and other nistakes. The script is very legible;
if. 39 and 110-1 are by another and more elegant hand. It is
dated Modonday 19th RamaQEn 668 A.H. (12th Elsy 1270 A.D.) The
date of writing the ~aihIm is as In PL, 'bistum ast' for bist,
f. 66r. M. Blochet in speaking of this ??S. refers to an
Arabio edition, which he regards as probably the original.
This is the VS. which has been selected for reproduction
On account of its legibility. A few folios are lost which are
copied fim A0 and AO' . These are from A0 pp. 52-3, 60-62:
AO1, 90, 115-9, 130-1, 138: from A0, 219-22, 240-3. The
oolophon does not indicate the date or the name of the copyist,
but two owners have written the dates on which the bc3k
oame into their possession, viz. Auhad b. As'ad b. Mihrlar el-
Eastawrl in the month of Allah, Rsjab the dear, 839 X.%,
1435-6 and rAl*B b. al-vunain b. 'A18 al-Sahrqr, 889 A.H.
I uer-5 A.D.
PL'
PP.
This ?,E. is dated the last day, salkh, ~f ~ h c al-qiVd'dah,
833 A.H. (20 Aug. 1430 A.D.) It begi=th paragraph 42 and
Omits 64-67, 150-165, 460-490.
AL.

AB'
This MS. is dated 636 A.H. (1237-8 A.D.) It begins with
paregraph 120: r. 18 should oome between if. 10 and 11; ti.
98-99 should follow i: 34. Paragraph8 280a-346 are omitted
with exoeption of part of 321 on if. 60-61; 350-372 are omitted;
f. 119 should follow f. 104.
AP
This b$S. is dated 9 RamaQEn 1035 A.X. (4 June 1626 A.D.)
23 kyysr 1938 is given as a ooncordant date but is equivalent
to 2 June 1627, allowing ten days for O.S.
The text is preceded by a confused and rambling account
of the contents, whioh does not ooour in any other of the ?&SS.
examined, and is certainly not attributable to ~l-~IrGnr, in
the course of which the writer eays "we have translated this
into Arabiow.
Joseph Asoari summarising this introduction says "the
work has been translated fiom the Persian by an anonymous
authorft, and De Slane describing the MS. refers to it as a
translation of a Persian work on the Elements of Astronomy by
A1-BfrUnX. I have not found in the MS. any statenent to the
effect that this is a translation from the Persian by the
author himself.
Kallino refers to this MS. I p. LW, and later I. p. 239
to the passage on f. 28 where the position of the aujzt of the
planets in 420 A.H. is disoussed. (195)
The text, which is imperfect, agrees as far as it goes
with the other Arabic texts; it begins with paragraphs 116-
119, continues with 147-E00 and finishes mith 904-359.
A0 and aO1
These MSS. are desoribed at length in T~odl. Cc t. 11, 262.
Au' is mentioned for the legibility of its script, AO. for
its age and accuracy. The scripts may be compared in the
paragraphs referred to under AI, above.
A0 was mitten for his own use, by a Cnpt, Abu Shakir
TumB1 b. Abi al-Farah, a Cairene writer known as Ibn al-
'Ushsha'. It was fin3shed on a Monday being the Feast of the
~~ostles,l Id al-rusul, 21st RabI1 al-anal 681 A.H. (29th
June 1282), or the 5th Ebib (~rfrf) 998, Era of the Martyrs,
E.M., and the 29th yazfrin, 1594 (should be 1593) of the
Ssleuoid Era, S.E., and the 26th Shahrir mlh, 651 of the YaZdigird
Era, Y.E., in Cairo (Migr al-makrusah) at Qapr al-Shd.
[Qaar al-Shan' remained a refuge for the Copts till after the
English occupation of Egypt. (Encyol. 1slam) ]
1 The Feast, a fixed one, is now celebrated on the 11th JUTS,
N.3. (Lane, :'anners and Cus t ~ms , $veryman $d. p. 547) The
Greek and -iestern Churches have retained Old Style.
This m. is undated but belongs to the 9th or 10th century
of the Hijra. In addition to the usual title it has an
alternative rhymed one, apparently invented by one of its
former owners. Yusuf ibn Bhmad iSn Ibrahrm al-NabliisI alghaff'f,
nhioh does not occur elsewhere:-
xitab inbat al-halak, fT ?iniiqat 'ilmi al-falak ). book
to lighten our darkneis in the art and science of the sphere.
It 1s camplete exoept for a lacuna including paragraphs
m-443. Between AO* and hI3' there is evidence of direct
filiation, e.g. the suSstitution of the word muraghamah for
muzl*amah, 493.
Niooll in his account of AO' explains that he gsves a
list of the AbwBb of the Taihim, because the answers to the
questions posed not only serve to show the scope of the
sciences cultivated by the Arabs, but also furnish explanations
of many terns the meaning of which is not always obvious.
It is hoped that these have been adequately dealt
with in the following pages.
As there are several places in the ~afnfm where dates
other than A.H. are cited, the c3nversion of these into A.D.
may be effected by the following formulae:-
To.oonvert E.M. (p. 173n) into A.D:- as 1st Thoth, 1
&M. I 89th Aug. 284 A.D., add 283 years + 240 days:- e.g.
(date 80) to 5th Ebfb 998 (997y + W5d) result 1281~ + 180~3,
89th June 1282.
To oonvert S.S. (Alex.) 28oa, into A.D. :- as 1st ~ishrrn
I, 312 S.E. = 1st Oot. 1 B.C., deduct 311 i f the day of the
mnth is in the last 9 months of S.E. (first 9 of A.D.), 312
li in the first 9 of S.E. (last 3 of A.D.); e.g. (321) 7th
Ttqhrfn I lSIl s,E. - 312 1 7th Oot. 1029 A.D., and (date 80)
tQth Bazrrk l593 - 311 = 29th June 1282.
To oonvart Y.E. (p. 1721-1) into A.D.:- as the 1st Farrardfn
DI& 1 Y.g. . 16th June 632 A.D. (631y + 167d), this has
to be added to the y.E. date to obtain A.D., but, owing to the
tact that the Y.E. y,ear is shorter by quarter of a dey than
the solar year, the number of leap-years has first to be deducted
from the 167:- e.g. (321) 3rd AbHn n8h 396 Y.E. (597~ +
21a) - 7th Oot. 1029 A.D., for, deducting 398/4 fron the
above 167 leaves 67 days and adding 631g + 67d to the Y.E.
date givea 1028y + 280d = 7th Oct. 1029.
XIV

MOTES AND CORRECTIONS
Paragraphs (abnHb) are referred to by numbers alone; pages
with a prefixed p. paragraphs ore nurabered at top of
page; pages at bottom.
With regard to transliteration 9 is represented by in the
type-script and f- by a slight modifioation thereof
1 The baslema and first paragraph from PI,.
3 lcote, Badl. he. Thurston 11.
11 The passage on proportion, 39-55, tralislated by
Wiedenann, Beitrag, XiIV.
39 Note 2. Wielei tner finds that X is derived from an
r 1 in use for res in the middle ages.
45 Note 1; in his translation of Bar Hebraeus? "Livre
de l'ascension de l*esprit."
47 Note 2. Srehm's Thierleben.
52 Note 1, by liedemann.
57 Mote 1 for 378 read 377.
79 Ideler,-Ursprung U. Bedeutung d. Sternnarnen.
82 for hid1 al-najm, .the leader, read @dI al-najm,
the driver.
95 The diagram is modified from Manutius* Translation
of Ptolemyls Syntaxis, I1 p.-413.
114 The Book of the Thousands (Kitab al-ulcf), V. note
p. 320, deals among other things with tbe emergence
of new religi3ns. Astrologers commonlp assooiate
this with the entry of the vernal equinox
into a new sign. v. Dupuis, origins de tous les
cultes.
194 Chauoer, v. Skeat p. 194 note 1.
143 The Uountains of the Moon regarded now as applying
only to the Ruvenzori range.
144 Note 9. v. De Goeje, De Vuur Van Cog en Magog,
Versl. d. Kon. Akad, Amsterdam. Letterk. 4th
series. 1st Part p. 87.
160 Aooidentally omitted: see inaerted alip.
268. M5 al-ayyw al-ms$H al-muladdalah. If
the sun had no eastward movement and simply continued
revolving in virtue of the firet
movement,
177 and 195 a and b; umm has acquired an initial ' by mistake.
178 The rule for finding Easter requires to be modified;
if the number to be deducted is grtater than 27,
Easter is four weeks later than the result arrived
at.
The figures plaoed here on account of available
space refer to p. 205.
The method adopted in constructing the figure is as
follows:- Two great circles, the meridian and a
oirole, of declination through the point of the eeliptia
ascending divide the heavens into four
quadrants. The two Eas tern quadrants are unequal :
the HI, H and X houses are each made the arc of
the ecliptic corresponding to one-third of the
semi-diurnal arc of the ascendant, and the I, I1
and 111 houses to the arc corresponding to onethird
of its semi-nocturnal arc. The houses of
the Western quadrants are the Nadirs of those of
the Eastern.
~ote, see figure on p. 225.
a convenient edition of the Tetrabiblos is contnined
in Junotinusl Speoulum Astrologiae.
Chaucer says; v. Skeat p. 194.
Text, last row, for haiyah read harbah and for
tinzn, thalzthin. rans slat ion; note, sfsad is 300
although there is some excuse for Steingass trenslating
it 3000; formerly sisad.
Text Zrd line; note Arab transliteration of
genitive of Astaratos with otiase alif.
note 2, read 290 seq.
Madkhal ~abxr, Abu Malashar, Bodl. MS. Hyde 2.
No. 51, for al-taqkil read quttzl, 91. of qHtil,
killers, anaeretai, usually qawgti*, qati'
a highwayman (pl. in latter sense qut;Anf: Qa;:Bfi
in addition to its astrological meaning is also
used for incisors and migratory birds in oontrast
to perennial realdents (awllbid). Qa)a*a in the
sense recorded by Dozy 11, 367a, does not occur in
the TafhTm, nor does he refer to the astrological
~eWl% of qE)il. of. p. 323 1.8 and note 5.
last line, for " read
N3. 6. Iron, a peculiar mop, but badid and ahin
occur in A and P.
The urjuzah is not the only Arabic astrologioal poem,
it consists of 372 verses; the Mugni* or Al-SQsT
with 97 verses has several commentaries.
See Not. et Extr. XXIII for tmo Byzantine poems, the
one by Theodore Prodromus in politioal metre, the
other by John KamatEros in twelve-syllable iambics;
the latter cmtains relere~ces to two Babylonian
Astrologers Sele!

The Chronology ox Ancient Nations and the Indica of ~l-~IriintnI,
texts edited and translated by Sachau, are ipdioated by
Chron. and India.
Dictionaries by the names of their authors. ~ine, Dozy,
Steingass, 'Jullere; the Mu$It al-MU$ t appear8 as lfu~F$,
the Dictionary 3f Technical Terms used in the Sciences
of the 1:usalmans (Blbliotheca Indica) as Dict. Sci.
Terms and Barbier de Keynard's Dictionnaire Geographique
de la Perse as Dict. Geog. Pers.
~ouohk-~eoleroqt S, L Astrologie Grecq1le appe8rs in the notes
as BL, mfatrp al-*uliim as wb.
Nallino, when unspecified, refers to his nagnifioent Alsa
ttanf .
Nau, to his translation of Bar-Sebraeus, vL'~scension de
llesprit."
Pococke , Specimen;
for Specimen Historiae hrabum.
Junotinus is for Junctinue* Speculum Aubrologiae wMch together
with the two following works give an adequate
account of Arabic Astrology.
Xlbohazen-Helg is for Abull-gasar: 1,;lI b. Xbill-Rijgl. His
Urjuzah appears in a recent summary of Arabic Astrology
bl Ghazll al-Miisamri. . His 'De judicifs Astrorum' and
the 'Tractatus de Aetronomia' 3f Bonatus (Guido Bonato)
were both issued at Basilea 1571 and 1550.
8ilson for Bilson's Dictionary of Astrology rohich is referred
to for defini tion of terms.
My thanks are due to L:essrs. Percy Lund, EUmp2rie~ Bi Co.
for the excellent manner in which they have reproduced the
!!S. and type-script.

[In the.Name of Cod the Merciful, the Compassionate.
Him do we ask for aid.
The Teaching of the Master, Abucl-RayhBn Muhammad ibn
gpmad al-BIW(May the Mercy of God bi upon bim) on the
Elements of the art of Astrology by nay of ~ntroduction].
The comprehension of the structure of theuniverse,
and of the nature of the form of the heavens and the
earth and all that is between them, attained byrehearsing
information received,l is extremely advantageous in
the art of Astrologg,because thereby the listener acquires
practice, he becomes accustomed to the tern
current among astrologers, the apprehension of their
meanings is facilitated, so that when he again meets
then in his study of the various problemsand demonstrations
he brings to these a mind freed from having to
deal aith difficulties from both sides (the problem and
its terms).
It is on this account that I have prepared,at her
request ,an aide-mdmoire for RagQBnah [the Khfirizmlanl
daughter of al-Hasan, in the form of question andanswel;
which is not ody elegant,but facilitates the formation
of concepts.
I have begun with Geometry and proceeded to Arithmetic
and the Science or Numbers, then to the structure
of the Universe.and finally to Judicial Astrology,ror m
one is worthy of the style-and title of Aatrologerz who
is not thoroughly conversant with these four sciences.
-
May God by His grace,and in the fullness of His
mercy,favour accuracy of statemnt in the vork.3
1. 81-handasah. Geometry is the science of dimensions
and their relations to each other and the knowledge of
the properties of the forms and figures
GEOMETRY found in solids. By it the science of numbers
is transferkd from the particular to
the universal, and astronomy removed from conjecture
and opinion to a basis of truth.

2. Ma a1 ism. A solid body Is that which can be
felt by &of
touch;standing by itself ,it occupies
only its own share of space but en-
THE SOLD tirely fills that to the extent of its dimensions,
so that no other solid substance
can occupy its place at the same time.
3. ~b~gd al-maka'n. The dimensions of space are
three in number,lengtL,breadth,and depth;these tern
are not applied to the dimensions in them-
DIMENSIONS selves so as to be invariable,but relative
OF SPACE ly,so that as soon as one of them is called
length,that which crosses it Is breadth,
and the third,which traverses both,depth,but it Is customary
to call the longer of the first two,length,the
shorter,breadth or width,and that which is extended
downwards,depth[or thickness],while if its extension
upwards is considered,height.
4. Al-jihzt al-sitt. The boundaries of these three
dimensions at both ends are known as the six sides,
those of the length being described as
THE SIX
SIDES
THE
SURPACE
front and back,of the breadth,as right and
left ,and those of the depth as upper and
lower.
. The solid is necessarily terminated on
es by a boundary;this is 'a surfacet
like the roof of a house,is called
because of being on the top,or also
because it is,as it were,spread out
solid. It possesses length and
breadth,but one dimension less than a solid,viz.thickness,because
if it had that it would be a som,and we
have assumed it to be a boundary thereof. When a solid
is of a deep opaque colour,it is the colour which is
seen on the surface,because whatever there is below is
concealed from vision. In this way it is easy to picture
a surface to oneself,and still easier if you put oil
and water in a glass and observe that they do not mix
but are in intimate contact at a 'surface* between thean.
A surface is of two kinds,either plane or not[according
to the solid].
-4
%.he roots a and bs both mean spread out, so that
M may be a pavemen as well as a roof.
2

6. 81-Ehattj. If a surface has boundariee,these are
necessarily lines,and lines have length without breadth
therefore one dimension less than the
THE LINZ surface,as that has one less than the
so1id;if it had breadth,it would be a
surface,and we have assumed it to be the boundary of a
surface. A line can be imagined by observing the oil
and water at the side of the glass,or the line between
sunshine and shadow,contiguous on the aurface of the
earth,or,also, it is possible to picture all that to
cneself from a thin sheet of paperCalthough it has
thickness],until the familiar sense-perception leads
gradually to the intellectual concept.
7. Al-nuqtah. If a line is finite its extremities
are points, Points have one dimension less than lines,
viz.length;they have neither length,
THE POIm
breadth,nor thickness,and are indivisible.
The point of a sharp needle may be taken
as an illustration from the sensible mrld,but surface,
linesand point,although they occur on the solids which
bear them,apart from them cannot be apprehended except
by the intellect.
8. Al-sazb wa1l-khatt, al-mustaqImEn. A plane surface
is the shortest surface between two lines which
are its boundaries,and a straight line
PLANE SUR- is the shortest line between two points
FACE AND which are its extremities. If on a sur-
STRAIGHTLINE face there are lines which exactly correspond
to each other,lthe surface is a
plane surface;and similarly,if in a line the points are
exactly oppositel to each other it is a straight line.
9. Al-dwi ah An angle is the termination of a
surface &'at
which two lines meet each other,
but not in the same straight line. If
THE ANGLE both the lines are struight,the angle is
a rectilineal angle,otherwise it is not.
Ibargbar yak dIgar.P The translation by Is49q ibn
Efunayn of Euclid's definition is preferableitthe plane
surface is that which conform everywhere to the -
straight lines upon itt.

10. Km anwEr al-zed$. Such angles are of three
kinds, When one straight line falls on anotherclike the
tongue-of a balance on the beamlif the
ICINDS OF resultant angles on either side are
ANGLES equa1,they are called right angles,
"imah,and the one line is said to be
perpendicular, h o the other. It the angles are
not equa1,the line in question is not perpendicular;
the larger angle is styled obtuse,nlunfarijah,and the
smaller acute ,Gddah.l
11. A1-shakl. A figure is that which is surrounded
FIGURE by one or more lines.
12. Al-dBrirah, A circle is a figure on a plane
surface bounded by one line,the circumference, ?Fs
dam. In the middle is a point, t e cenlxe
THE CIRCLE -az, from which all straight lines
reaching the circumference are equal.
13. Al-qutr wall-watar. A straight line passing
through the centre of a circle and reaching the circumference
by its two ends is a diameter,
DIBMETW U r,which cuts the circle into two se6
BND CHORD c rcles. If such a line does not pass
through the centre,it is a chord,mtar,
which cuts the circle into tvo unequal parts,andx
circumference into two arcs,-,one larger than the
other.
14. Al-sahm. A sagitta is the line between the
middle o f m d and the mlddle of the corresponding
arc. It is part of a diameter of the
SAGITTA circle,and is longer than half the diameter
if the arc is larger than a semicircle;shorter,if
not.
15. 81-jaib al-argam. The half-diameter or a cir-
THE RADIUS cle is called a whole sine.
l~he figure on the left illustrates t perpendi cularr and
right angles, that on right 'not perpendicularr and
obtuse and acute angles.

16, M-jaib al-muetaw2, A natural sine is the half
of the chord of a doubled arc,or if you prefer it,the
perpendicular dropped from one end of
NATUFUL
SINE
natural sine.
the arc on to a diameter passing through
the other end. If the expression jaib is
used wlthout qualification, it means a
17. A1- jaib al-ma%is. A versed sine is the sagitta
of the doubled arc or the line from one end of the
aro to tl,e extremity of the sine opposite
VERSED SIl05 it. The greatest of all versed sines is
a diameter, as that of all natural sines
is a radius,
18. Tam€im al-qaws wa ta- al-jaib. The complement
of an arc is that which,when added to the arc,makes it
a complete quarter of a circle, and con-
COhlPIBMEWTS se uently when you subtract the arc from
OF ARC AND 908
its oomplement remains, Also the
SINE complement of a sine is the amount required
to be added to it to make a radius.
19. AnwZiC al-muthallathIt, Every triangle has
three andes - and opposite each is a straight line,the
side; yr. In accordance with the-re-
KINDS OF lative ength of the sides the triangles
TRIBNGIXS are either equilatera1,mutas~rX al-adlZir;
isosceles, mutasEoJX al-sgqain, when two
are alike and the third either longer or shorter; or
eoalene, mukhtalif al-aQlaC, when all differ in length;
A
arc ED-

in accordance with the angles, either right-angled;
20. rhiid wa qEridah. The perpendicular is the
line proceeding from one of the angles of a triangle
at right angles to one of the sides;and
PHLPENDICULAR the base is the side on which the perp-
AM) EiASE endicular falls.
21. Masqit al-l~ajar. The place of fall of the
stone is the point of the base which the perpendicular
reaches. Some people call by this name
WHEFCE TIlE
STONE FALLS
meaning require.
the smaller of the two parts into which
the base is thus divided, but such use
is remote from what the word and its
22. Asst al-aQIEr Rhayr hadhihi. The side of a
triangle - opposite a right or obtuse angle is the longest
side, if it is a right angle, the
OTHW NAMES hypotenuse, U r or natar. Of the
BOFI THE SIDES other sides,+they~diiierent, one
is designated the shorter of the short
sides, the other the longer of these.

23. DhaMt al-arbarat aQ1Hr. Of quadrilateral
figures, the first, murabbar,X the square in which
all %he sides are equal, and all the
QUADRILATERAL angles right angles [like a tile] and
FIGURES
the diagonals joining opposite angles
equal. The second is the oblong,
mustatil, which is long&, has all the angles right
-;,the
diagonals equal, but only the opposite
that one half of the beam of a balance steelyard) is
longer than the other.12 It has all the'sides equal,
the diagonals different, and the opposite angles equal
but not right angles. The fourth is the rhomboid,
shRbih bill-murayyan, which differs from the foregoing
fn having only the opposite sides equal.
Any other quadrilateral fiwre is called a
trapezium, muqaraf . As to polygons, mudallar8t, which
have their -sTdexd angles equal, these are named
after the number (5,6,7,etc.) of the sides, mukhammas,
musaddas, musabbar, etc.
l~ccordin~ to Steingass, "the eye in which the tongue of
the scales playsw, but here used as the equivalent of
A. %,"the inclining of the balancew, Lane, p.2, 217.
z~xan~le of explanation of dif ficult Arabic words in
the Persian version.
7

24. Al-khu%s$ al-mtaszi h. Parallel lines are
those on m e surface, whosfdistance from each
other remains constant, and which
PdR.tULEL LINES when produced continually in both
directions do not meet.
25, 81-zaMy5 al-mutaqa'bileh. ?hen two straight
lines cro-les
result, and the
OP2OSITE ANGL;ES opposite angles are equal,
26. 81-zaorHyi3 al-mutab5dilah. Then a straight line
is drawn between two parallel straight lines, the angle
which is at one side of one of
ALT-TE
these two lines is said to be alter-
ANGLES . nate to the angle at the other side
of the other line; the alternate
angles are equal.
27, ziwiyah kh2;ri jahl min al-muthallath. Nhen one
side of a triannle - is produced, there is formed an
angie called the exterior angle, and
ANGJ.3 EXTERIOR each of the two angles not adjacent
TO TRIANGLE to it is called an interior and opposite
angle.
The distance] the same as
.X Q
here is the distance here
shakl
.&L-zawZyp
al-khZri jah
min al-muthallath
'AI, has Bdithah.
8

28. Zaaiyah &ri.ah min al-kha)$ain al-mutawzzi-
If the line drad between two parallel linen
nroduced. there result, outside these,
E- - - -
ANGLE EXTERIOR two angles called exterior, each of
TO PARALLEL
STRAIGRT LINES
which is equal to the interior and
opposite angle on the same side of
the line.
29. Mutawiizf al-a+lSf. A parallelogram is a quadrilateral
figure of whichthe opposite sides are equal
and parallel to each other, and the
PgRgLIXLOGRAIul line which is drawn between opposite
angles is called a diagonal,
30. h!utammh, men two parallelograms are constructed
on the diagonal of a parallelogram in such a
way that the extremity of the diag-
COI,PLJZ!.IENTS OF onal of one of the former is in con-
PARALLELOGMd tact with that of the other, each of
the two remaining parallelograms is
called a complement, mutamm.
31. rAlam. The two complements with one of the
parallelograms constitute a gnomon, ralam, which are
shown in the diagrn segments of
m
'C,
yL -4;
GNOMON
a circle, passing through the three.
lThis is numbered 27 in PI;, while under 28 are, out of
place, numbers 36,37,38, of the table of contents.

32. Darb al-kha$$ fi'l-khatt. If of two lines an
end of on6 is placed at right aiikles to an end of the
other and caused to pass over it so as
LINE X LINE to describe a rectangular figure, the
plane so described is a square if the
lines are equal, an oblong, if unequal,
33, FlutamEssiin. Tangency may occur between two
circles, internally if they are of different diameters,
and externally whatever their relative
TANGENTS di&nsions; also between a line and a
circle if the line is straight and is in
contact with the oircle, without the one cutting the
other,
34. Shakl U-t bl'l-rSvirah, A reotilineal figure
Is said to be des6FIbed about a oircle when all its
FIGURE ABOVE sides are in contact with the
A CIRCLE oirole.
35. Shakl muhit bihi al-d8'irah. A rectilineal
figure is said to*66 inscribed in a circle when
FIGURG WITHIN the latter passes through all the
A CIRCLE angles of the f omer.
36. zlwiyah allatti taqbaluha al-qaws. The angle
which is received by an arc is the interval between two
lines proceeding from the ends of the
ANGLE IN A
SEGMENT
arc, and meeting in one point thereof,
[and any equal angle is said to be accepted,
pizrufta, by that arc].

37. Dam al-dh'irah idha utruhh W&:!. If the
diameter of a circle is one rczbimspan or any
other measurement) , the- circumference
RATIO DIAMETER- is approximately three and a seventh
-CIRCZRdmCE
times as much according to the investigations
of Archiaedes, who found
that it is between two numbers, being a little less
than the larger and a little more than the smaller.
If half the diameter be multiplied by half the circumference,
the result is the area of the circle, and in
this example (diameter one) would be a half' and two
sevenths or 11/14.
38. Juz' wa aathsl. If one magnitude is used to
measure another, and found to enter It several times
without remainder, the former is
BLIQUOT AND called an aliquot part, E, of the
MULTIPLE latter. The former is necessarily
smaller than the latter, which is
described as a multiple, amth61, a=, of the former,
because it contains it so many tites.
39. Nisbah. Ratio is the relation between two
things of-me kind, by which we know the measure
of the one as compared with the
RATIO
other. Thus we aall a man 'fatherv
when we oontraat him with his son,
and the latter 'son' when comparing him with his
father. Similarly we call one thing half of another,
which is double the former.
40. TanEsub. Proportion Is the equality of two or
more ratioseen a series of terms, at least three
in number, e.g., the iirstl is onefifth
of the second and the second
one-fifth of the third, as 1 is to
5, as 5 Is to 25.
one rive twenty five
1 l.al-awwal Xhums al-thXd =*l-thfnI Khuma althZlith.
l l

41. Aqdgr mutanasibah. When there are four terms,
the ratio-the
second being the same as
that of the third to the fourth, whether
PROPORTIONAL the second and third are equal or no,
liIAGNITUDES then the first multiplied by the fourth
is equal to the second multiplied by the
third, also the third divided by the first is equal to
the fourth divided by the second thus;
Multiplication between those which
1 3 are diagonally opposite always gives
is to : is to the sane product, as does division
5 15 between those on the same side, not
diagonally.
42, Muqaddam ara ttilz. Of two terms between which
there is a ratio, that which is mentioned first is
called the antecedent, mu addam and
)rNTECEDBhT AID that whlch in mentionadbathe
CONSEQUENT consequent, U.
43. ?Us al-nisbah. Hhen there are four proportional~,
and the second is to the first as the fourth
is to the third, the proportion is
rNVERTED said to be inpert$, 'aks or khiliif
PROPORT ION &l-nisbah, [bashgunapn.g. ,m
..
44. 1bdGl al-nisbah. When there are four proportionals,
the first of which is to the third as the second
to the fourth, the proportion is
PERMUTATION said to be by permutation. Our example
is one-third, ag., l : 5 :: 3 :
15.
1 5 1
first second first econd
l..
r
\
G
8 h
7 W
P C b

45. TarkIb al-nisbah. When there are four proportional~,
and the sum of the first and second is to the
second as the sum of the third and
COBPOSITION
fourth is to the fourth, the proportion
is said to be by composition. Our
example is a multiple and the fifth thereof, 5:1::15:3
6:)::18:3.
46. Tafgil al-nisbah. men there are four prop
tionals, the excess of the first over the second is
to the second, as the excess of the
DIVISION third over the fourth is to the fourth,
the proportion is said to be by division
or separation. As the first term in our example is
smaller, than the second, 1:5::3:15, proportion by separation
can only occur after inversion, thus; 5:1::15:3
yielding 4:1::12:3.
When there are four proporto
its excess over the
second, as the third is to its excess
CONVERSION over the fourth, the proportion is
said to be by conversion. Our example
after inversion, 5:1::15:3, gives 5:4::15:12.
48. Nisbah al-musawEt al-muntagimah. When the
ratio of Fhe first to the second is =same as that of
the third to the fourth, and that
PROPORTION BY of the second to the fifth the same
ORDINATE EQUALITY as that of the fourth to the sixth,
and so on for any number of proportionate
terms, then the terminal numbers are also in
proportion, as in our example, the first is 1/5 of the
second, and the second 1/4 of the fifth, so the first
is 1/20 of the fifth, as is the third of the sixth.

49. Nisbah al-musLwi3t al-mdtaribah. When the ratio
of the first to the second is thd'ms that of the
fourth to the sixth, and that of the
PROPORTION BY third to the fourth the same as that
INORDINATE
EQUALITY
of the second to the fifth, the middle
terms are not proportionate as in
the last case, but the ratio of the
first to the fifth is the same as that of the third to
the sixth, then the proportion is said to be by inordinate
equality, e.g.,
the ratio of the first
to the second is 1/5, as
is that of the fourth to
the sixth, while the
ratio of the second to
the fifth is 1/4 as is
that of the third to the
fourth. The seoond and
fourth are not proportionate,
while the extree
terms, first and fifth,
and third and sixth have
the same ratio 1/4 of 1/5
50. Nisbah muthan&& biTl-takrIr. When the same
ratio is continued between a long series of tenas in
such a way that the ratio of the
DUPLICATE RATIO
first to the second is the same as
that of the second to the third, and
that of the third to the fourth etc., then the ratio of
the first to the third Is said to be the duplicate,
muthannzh, ratio by repetition, takrlr, of the ratio of
the first to the second, and the ratio of the first to
the fourth, the triplicate, muthallathah, ratio thereof,

and so on according to this analogy. Do you not see
that if the ratio between these numbers is, for exaqle,
1:2, then the first is 4 of the second, and 4 of L of
the third, (the half occurri 9 twipe), and 8 of &'of
of the fourth, and Q of h of , of of the fifth, (the
Q recurring four times) .
The analogy is the same if you assume some other
ratio, such as 1:3 or 1:4, or any other fraction or
multiple.
51. Nisbah mutallafah. This ratio resembles the
foregoing, the duplicate, except that in the latter the
ratios between the term are identic-
COMPOUND FtATIO al, while in this, the ratios are
different, such as 1:4, or 1:5. For
instance, between two proportionate terms a third is
interposed, and the ratio of the first to the third is
said to be compounded of the ratio of the first to the
second and that of the second to the third. Just as in
the case of a road between two towns the distance
The copyist remarks that this line x was added inadvertently.
15

is made up of the stretches between the various stages.
Sometimes instead of the expression compound, tatlif, it
is described as duplicate, tathni &,it beinmthat
the ratio of the first to t&s equal to the
ratio of the first to the second multiplied by the
ratio of the second to the third. But compound is preferable.
As an example of the compound
ratio,let 2 and 12 be two terms and 2 4 12
let 4 be interposed. The ratio between
the first and the third, one sixth, is
composed of the ratios between the first
and second, and the second and third,
viz., one half of one third;while if the
proportion be inverted,the ratio between
+
the third and first, viz., six times, is
composed of the ratios between the third i
and seoond, three times, and the second
and first, twice, viz., three multiplied
by two.
52. lrtiiGr al-shakl, The altitude of a figure is
the greatest perpendicular from an angle
ALTITUDE of the figure [internally] to its base, or
OF FIGURE [externally] to its base produced.
53. MuthallathZit rnutaah3bihah. Any
triangle,
- .
the angles of which are sever- /",
ally equal to the angles
YIMILBR of another triangle, is a
TRIANGLES similar triangle, and the
corresponding sides, A
- na@*ir, (which are-opposite any-two
equGngles of the two triangles) have
the sane proportion to each other.

54. Nisbah dhgt wasat wa tarafain. men a line is
divided into two parts i n ' x m h a t the lesser is
to the areater as is the greater to
1.W AND the whoie,the ratio is said to be
=REIS RATIO dhiit wasat~tarafain;the line is
cut in me& and-me ratio.
1
I
I
I
55. ~akfifil al-nisbah. This kind of proportion differs
from that dealt with in paragraph 41,in having the
second and third terms on the same
THE STEELYARD side. It is-well seen in the steelyard,oaras$un
2 where the ratio of
the distance of the hook- -'
ra rab which carries the
+ sca e chains, from the
fu1crum:ilE ah, is to
that of j~~table]
counterpoise, rummana,z
from the fulcrum,as the
weight of the counterpoise
is to the weight
of the load,thi 1 which
is being meadd
56. Quwwah wa tiil. A square is called a power,
quwwah, and its sid6,)iil. '#hen the pow8r of a certain
line is spoken of as equal to the
POTiER D ROOT product of a certain line by a certain
line, know that its square is
equal to the rectangle designated by those two lines.
57. Al-mwrab. A cube is a solid body like the
dice in eYY
bounded by six squares disposed in the
six relative directions so that its
AI,-MUKArrA13 length, breadth, and height are equal.
1. The sixth form of kafI does not occur except when
used for kafaWa,so thmhe form takafu is preferable
which contains the two meanings o m i t y and inversioa
2. From xapto~ icuv ;v.Lane under ;IT abban from P.kapEn.
S. A pomegranate;P.&;a stone ~ i b this ? shape.
4. 2: kind of backgmon: v. H~rde, Historig Nerdiludii,
p. 250.
+ v b
'19 U#
&&&,~&&\:h&
C f . .* C
C f . .* C
L&&,~&&\:h&
m
*AL+~G\~-~FJ+&\L
9 #a
' I #H
' t

58. AI-manshiir. h prism has for its sides three
surfaces, square or rectangular,and two triangles,one
above - -. and one below. Sometimes the squares
THE PRISMmay be replaced by rhombs and the rectangles
by rhoaboids.
59. UstuRBnah B* imah. A cylinder, ustuwCInah, sut€lnP
is an elansated ro$d body, bounded above a n m w b y
eaual and parallel circles,the centres
RIGET CYLINDFB of which are joined by the axis of
the cylinder, which is the shortest
line between these two pointqwhile the side is the
shortest line between their circumferences. It is generated
by the rotation of a line perpendicular to the
circumferencas of the two circles,
60, Ulbtuwznah d'ilah. An oblique cylinder is one
where the axis is not perpendicular to the ends. The
top and bottom of a column need not
-.-
OBLIQUE CYLINDER
be circles, but may be any similar
and equal figures,such as two tri-
angles or two squares or other many-sided figure,
mudalla
61. 81-makhfit, A cone is a solid whose base is a
oircle or other fi&re,from whioh it diminishes to a
point. It may be regarded as a cylinder
THE CONE tapered from the base, the one end remainihg
as before, the other, the point, being
the centre of the circle above. If the cylinder is a
right cylinder the cone is a right cone,if oblique.ohliqUe

A cone is always the third part of a cylinder [having
the same base and altitude]. The axis, sebm,l or the
cone is the straight line from the vertxo the centre
of the base; and the side, the straight line from the
vertex to the circumference of the base.
62. al-makhrii$ . [There are five different
planes by which a cone may be cut into sections, as if
by a saw], the first , through the
CONIC SECTIONS vertex, the result being a rectilinear
triangular figure;the aecond,parallel
to the base,producing a circle,[smal$er than the base];
the third, parallel to a I , /
I , I
sid8,resulting in a para- ,
I L
bola,mukEfi. If the plane
of se-the fourth,is
not parallel to the side
of the cone ,but meets the
side within the cone towards
the base,and when
produced emerges there,
the section is an ellipse,
Si; while3 if it meets
owards the vertex and
emerges there, the section,
the fifth,is a hyperbola,
zl'id.
These are the only sections of the cone, unless it
is oblique, in which case the plane of section, although
not parallel to the base may stili produce a circle if
adjusted to the axis.
63. Al-kurah. A sphere is a rounded body bounded by
one undivided surface; within it is a point, the centre,
markaz, from which all straight
THE S-
lineswhich reach the surface are
equal. If you imagine a circle
rotating on its own diameter which remains stationary,
1 PL and PP have niz for tir.
2 PP has ma rU$ throughoutand drops a line describing
the parab*
3 should read:- while if ,instead,it intersects the base
and when produced towards the vertex reaches the side
of the second cone (as in P and above) it is a hyperbola
etc.

on its own diameter which remains stationary, until the
circle has come baok to the point from which it started,
a sphere has been described.
64. Bi kam ehakl tuhit al-kurah. How many figures
(polyhedra) can be insori66d within a sphere? When the
faces of the polyhedra are equilateral
POLYHEDFtA
IN A SPHEFE
and equiangular and all equal and of one
kind, only five [ the five (Platonic)
regular bodies]; and these five are re-
lated by resemblance to the four elements and the
sphere. When, however, the faces are of various kinds,
there is no limit to the number.
With regard to the five referred to; these are,
first, the cube, bounded by six squares, called earthy;
second, the icosahedron, by twenty equilateral triangles;
it is the watery one; third, the octahedron, by
eight equilateral triangles, the airy body; fourth, the
tetrahedron, by four equilateral triangles, the prickly
body, Qassakf, fiery; and fifth, the dodekahedron, by
twelve m Iatere.1 and equiangular] pentagons, [the
sphere] .l
65. DawEVir rizh wa si ar. The terms great and
small circles are u~rmi+&those described on the
surface of a sphere. The plane of a
GREILT AND great circle passes through the centre
SMALL CIRCLES of the sphere and divides it into two
hemispheres; it has two poles equidistant
from the centre. If it is desired to draw a
circle on a plane surface about a centre, the compass
must be opened to the extent of a radiu~.~ Similarly,
to describe from a pole a great circle on a sphere, the
compass must be ope~led to the extent of the side of a
square inscribed in the circle.
The plane of a small circle, on the other hand,
does not pass through the centre of the sphere; it
divides the sphere into two unequal parts, and in consequence
the distances from its centre to the poles of
' r.
~.$d?~i
;~&&~~~~ / &L
',
U
r*P/_.ik
8 j\>*b
* * t C)..
.a
1 It will be observed that paragraphs 1-64 are substantially
from the definitions of the first six, and
the 11th and 12th books of Euclid.
2 The Persian rendering.

the sphere are unequal. All great circles on a sphere
are of equal size, being the largest possible on the
sphere. The dimensions of small circles, on the other
hand, are not only less than those of great circles,
but are unequal in size, and vary from what is just
less than a great .circle to the smallest possible size.
66. Khawass hadhihi al-dawii'ir. Great circles on a
sphere, i-*'of the fact that they are all of the
same dimension, and cut the sphere
PROPERTIES OF into two halves, necessarily intersect
THESE CIRCUS each other because their being
parallel or independent is absolutely
excluded. They cut each other into halves at two
opposite points, and whenever one great circle passes
through one of the poles of a second great circle, [it
necessarily passes throu@fi its other pole] and it
perpendioular to it, cuts it at right angles; likewise
the secona passes through the poles of the first.
The area of a great circle is quarter of the area
of the sphere on which it is described, and in acoordance
therewith, when the diameter ia multiplied into
the circumference, the area of the surface of the
sphere results.
With regard to small circles on a sphere, in view
of the fact that their dimensions are less than those
of great circles, and that they offer an uninterrupted
sequence in decrease of size fron these, they may be
parallel to each other and to great circles, and may be
cut into halves or unequal divisions by other circles
great or small. They cannot be described by opening a
compass to the side of an inscribed square, as in the
case of great circles, but by different measures.
67. Qutb wa miGwar. We have already referred to
the poles o f m r n r o m the point of view of drawing
a great circle thereon; the pole
POLE AND AXIS represents hem the centre of a circle
dram on a plane surface. But we also
speak of the poles of a sphere from the point of view

of its movement, for then if it moves in its own place,
revolving by itself, there are two points opposite each
other which are obliged to remain stationary as in a
turnert S wheel, shahr al-kharr8tIn.l The line joining
these points, the axis, is also'stationary while the
sphere is revolving.
68. Min$a at al-hsrakah. The equator of a sphere
is the grx him between the two poles
of the movemnt of the sphere. On this
EQUATOR OF account it is called minta ah
MO- sembllng a girdle; this&&; ~ ~ v z z s
itself but its plane is not marked externally.
Other great circles, however, are then marked
externally on the sphere, or sections of it like the
hoop of a tambourine, shanbar al-daff .2
69. EdadGrEt. Small circles on the surface of a
sphere parallel to each other are called
PARBLULS mad2irzt.
70. ~usl mutashgbihah. Similar arcs on a plane
surface are those which are intercepted between two
straight lines proceeding from the centre
SIMILAR
ARCS
of a series of concentric circles towards
the largest of these. On the surface of a
sphere, however, they are the portions of
parallel circles intercepted between two great circl0S
passing through the pole of these. Similar arcs are
either all arcs of smell circles or one may be an arc
of a great circle; they are said to be similar because
they are the same proportionate parts of the circles of
which they are parts, whether on a sphere or on a plane
surface. [If, for example, one is a third of its own
circle, all the others are thirds of theirs.]
1 charkh-i huqqa ar8n. P. Charkh is the ordinary
Persian word forga wheel, ~caslonally appears as
jarkh in Arabic; v. Bocthor, Dict. Fr.-Arab. Vulg.
under troue*, while ?tour1 is as usual mikhratah. Shahr
(or jahr) is an unusual word for a lathe, but is n x
by Dozy; here by misteke, e.
8 Arabic form of chanbar P. Meaning of last sentence
obscure.

71. Shakl al- utS'. A spherical transversal f igure
results, &?-arcs
of great circles intersecting
each other,each two unite in one
'SECANT FIGURE' point;as when the points of the
middle fingers of each hand are In
contact,and the points of the index fingers are brought
against the middle joints of the opposite middle fingers,
as in the diagram.
In view of the fact that geometrical propositions
make use of Arithmetic in the saiences of Astronomy and
Astrology, we shall proceed in the first place to
describe the properties of numbers.
ARITHMETIC
72. Wzhid. 'One' is that to which the term Unity is
applied. Complete in itself it does not admit of being
added to or subtracted from, nor is it altered
ONE
in substance from its original condition by
multiplication or division. It has the powers
of all numbers and all the properties pertaining to
these, and has in addition a special teahnical
function to discharge with regad to things which
are numbered. In this sense it occupies an intermediate
position between the higher numbers, which result
from the continuous addition of units, and the lower
fraotions into which it may be divided, and differs
from both in that it does not alter by being multiplied
or divided by itself,whereas the fomr are respectively
The spherical transversal proposition was of fundamental
importance in the evolution of spherical trigonometry;
~l-~irfnI develops it in the hlasrudi Canon, and wrote a
separate work on the subject. v. Bjorbo, Thabit's Werk
tlber den Transversalensatz, Erlangen, 1924, p. 84.

espectively increased or diminished, and the latter
diminished or increased by these processes whilelonet
occupies its own position between the two,
73. icaif yatajazata al-wQid wa ila kam juzT.
Although tonet is in reality indivisible, nevertheless
the unit, one as a technical expression,
SUBDIVISION employed in dealing with sense-objects,
OF ONE whether by weighing, measuring by bulk,
;W, d e
degree,dara'ah,it is divided into sixty parts,smaller,
first and these are called minutes,
aq: iq, on this account. This method of division is
cus omary in dealing with money, the dirham is divided
into sixty fulCs,2 and in mensurationT'arIb5 has
sixty rashir. Again these minutes are dividhto
sixty seconds, (the second tine of division) and the
second into sixty thirds and the thirds into sixty
fourths, and so on for the whole series of natural
numbers as far a4 the arithmetician desires in any
particular case.
74. rAdad.. A number is defined as a sum of units:
one is therefore excluded from the category of numbers
NUPdBER and is not called a number.
natural series of
addition of a unit
to one and is, therefore also known
NATm NUMBERS as mutawElI*, consecutive, like 1,
2,3,4,5.
1 For muQg read mujallz. 2 ishiz P:v.Wied. Beitr. XIV.
3 ~arI6ls measure of corn akland sown therewith,
3,600 s6,cubits. The rashIr, 60 sq.cubits is one-tenth
of a qafiz which, t h m e , is here one-sixth of a
arib. ~arf P is any standard of measure, also of time,
hi 1% ghari.24 minutes, 1/60 of 24 hours.
%he fifths up to the tenths are specified,khawhis,
sawEdis saebir, thawhin, tawiisi fawiishir, all on
measure m instead of %he usual afrE1.

76, m. Even numbers are those which are divisible
into equal parts, i.e., halves; the first of these
is two, and the successive even numbers are 2,
ElXN 4,6,8,10,etc.
77, Fard. Odd numbers are those not so divisible,
except bymaking use of a fraction; the first is three
and the successive odd numbers 3,5,7,9,11,
ODD etc.
EPEmY-EVEN
halves, and so repeatedly until the
quotient is one,
79. Zawj al-fard..Unevenly-even numbers are those
which admit once of division by two yielding an odd
number as quotient, not one, like
my-EVEN ten,
80. Zawj al-zawj m.1-fard. Evenly-even-odd numbers
are those which admit of being divided into halves
more than once, but the division
EVENLY-EVEN-ODD does not extend so far as to yield
a quotient of one, like twelve.
81. Fard al-fard. Oddly-odd numbers are those
which are divisible by an odd number with an odd number
as quotient; such as nine, into which
ODDLY-ODD three enters thrice, or f ifteen, into
which five enters thrice and three five
times.
82. MS al-radad al-aml. A prime number is that
whioh has no other factor than unity,and no fraction
except that resulting from division by
PRIME NUMBER itself and called after itself, like
five, in which one is oontained five
times, and of which fifths are the only fractions; or
like seven, of which one is the seventh part, sevenths
the only fractions, and into which no other number enters
without remainder.
83. M al-"adad al-murakkab. A composite number

has more than one factor, and has fractions other than
those bearing the same name, like
COMPOSITE NUMBER sir,in which one is contained six
times,two three times,and three
twice,the corresponding fractions being a sixth, a third
and a half.
84. M al-?'adad al-musattah. A plane, musaj$_al?,
number is that which results'f~6m the multi~ation of
one number by another. If the two
PLANE NUMBER numbers are the same the result is
a square, murabbar, and one of the
two numbers multiplied, its root, jidhr. For example,
if three be multiplied by three the product,nine, is a
square,the root of which is three. If the two numbers
differ by one, the plane number is said to be altered,
I; this is the case with twelve whioh is the pro-
%F of three and four, while if they differ by more
than one the result is a rectangular number,mustatll.
Twelve is also an erample of a rectangular number,
for it is the product of two and six, a difference of
four between them, and so from one point of view it is
Bayri, and from another mustat1l.l
85. MR &adad al-mutnmmnm. When the root of a
square number is multiplied by the root of another
square nGber, the product is a
COWLETE NUABER
complete number,mtammam, because
the sum of the two squares plus
trice the complete number yield another square number,
whose root is the sum of the two roots in question.
For example six is a oompl6te number, being the
product of two by three, the roots of four and nine,
and twelve 'added to the sum of these squares gives
twenty-five, vbserocrt is five, the sum of two and three.
The plane numbers- are important because the ancients
in multiplication considered the faotors as lines, the
products as planes. Wiedemann.

86. l& al-ar&d al-mushtarabh. These are numbers
like 15,25,30, which share shgraka) a common factor
other than(-r each of them is dl-
NWWERS nITH visible by five wlthout remainder ,and
COIVQ~OI? FACTORS shares in h'aving the fraction called
after five viz. a fifth. And these
fifths have a definite relation to each other and to
the numbers themselves, for the fifth of fifteen is
three-fifths of the fifth of twenty-fivesand the fifth
of twenty-five is five-sixths of the fifth of thirty,
The number which is shared by them, the cmon factor,
is called S, and when they have all been divided by
it, the quotients are styled matwiyyBt.
87. 1:B al-ardad al-lnutabEiyinah. These are numbers
like seven and ten, which have no common factor other
than one, and do not share in other
SEPARATE particulars. They are therefore
spoken of as separate numbers.
88. MB al-radad al-tiinrm. A perfect number, tk,
is one the aliquot parts of which being added tomer
yield the number in question, like
PERFECT NUINUIBER six; for half of six is three and a
third two, and a sixth one, all of
which being added together make six.
89. h6 al-radad al-Gqiq wa al-25' M. A deficient
number, U?, is one the fractions of which added toaether
amount to a sum less than the
DEFICIEIJT AND knber in question, like eight; fa'
ABUNDANT NUMBERS its half, four; and Its fourth,
two; and its eighth, one; amount
to seven, less than the eight itself.
An abundant number on the other hand, zc'id, is one
whose component fractions amount to more than the number
itself, like twelve; for its half, six; and its third,
four; and its fourth, three; and its sixth, two;
with its twelfth part, one, add together to sixteen.

90. al-ardEd al-mutah8bbah. These are any two
numbers, %he fractions of on6hich being added together
are equal to the other num-
AMICBBLE NUMBERS ber. One of each such pair is always
abundant, the other deficient.
An example of such a pair is furnished by 220 and 284,
The former is an abundant number; its fractions are:-
a half, 110; a quarter, 55; a fifth, 44; a tenth,
22; a twentieth, 11; a hundred and tenth, 2; a
twenty-fifth, 4; a forty-fourth, 5; a twenty-second,
10; an eleventh, 20; ' and a two hundred and twentieth,
1; which numbers being added together make 284.
The other number of the pair is a deficient number;
its fractions are:- a half, 142; a quarter, 71; a
hundred and forty-second, 2; and a two hundred and
eighty-fourth, 1. These add up to 220, and the numbers
or this pair are therefore called amicable numbers.
91. al-aTdBd al-mu jassamah, These so-called
solid numbers result from the multiplication of one
number by another and the product
SOLID NUMBERS by a third, If the three numbers
are all alike, the product is a
cube, mukarrab qnd one of the three, the cube-root,
ka%. Sometimes this name is given to the cube itself,
mhich case the root is spoken of as a side, Qilr,
For example, if three is multiplied by itself and
the product again by three, the result is 27. This Is
the cube, mukawb, and the cube-root, kafb, 3; or the
cube, karbands side 3. If t w n the three
numberxe alike, and t e hird smaller, the result is

like a brick, libni
I multiply the
three by t h r e e d ~ ~ : o by ~ two, ~ ~ the ~ result- l ~
ant eighteen is a libni number. On the other hnnd if
the third number i d e r , the reeult is horn as
tiri resembling tIr, the main beam of a house,P or
the trunks7 trees.
d,
For example; I multiply the three by three agd
the product by four, the result is thirty-six, a tiri
number. Should all the numbers be different the r d
is a lauhi number, [lauh, a table;] for exemple; I
multiE& thne byT6r and the product by fire
making sixty; this is a lauhis number.
92. l& al-ardzd al-muthailathah al-mtawEliyah.
Successive triangular numbers result from the summation
of consecutive natural numbers
TRIANGUUFl NUMEERS beginning with one. They are
aalled by the Hindus sankalita,
One which has the powers of all the numbers, ia the
first triangle; one added to two makes three, the
second triangle; the third triangle, six, is formed
by the addition of one, two and three; while the
fourth, ten, is the sum of one, two, three and four;
and so further on this analogy. The figure is intended
to show the relation of the triangles.
f

93. 1JE al-ardSd al-murabbarah al-muta6liyah.
Successive square numbers are arrived at by the sumrnation
of successive odd numbers.
SQUARE NUMBERS
One is the rirst square, which
with the addition of three yields
four, the second square, the product of tw-two.
By adding five to four we have the third square, nine,
the square of three, which with the addition of seven
gives sixteen the fourth square, four by four.
The figure verifies the foregoing.
94. Ma al-ardGd al-makhriitiyyah, Conical numbers
are obtained by the summation bf successive triangular
numbers; they are called by the
CONICAL NUMBERS Hindus sankalita. The first aone
is one, to which the second triangular
number three being added gives four, the second
conical number.- the addition of six, the third
triangular number, we have ten, the thTFd conical
number, [and by adding ten, the fourth trian ular number,
we have twenty the fourth conical numba?~.
The f igurel facilitates the conception of these.
'~11 the N.SS reproduce this figure which when completed
is evidently a summation of the odd numbers as seen in
the successive squares. One W gives an elegant oonical
figure here reproduced, which however, like the other
has the numbers 1,3,5,7 instead of 1,3,6,10.

95. ME al-ardBd al-ahrhiggah. Pyramidal numbers
are piled up like the arrangement of the weights of a
balance, one above the other, the
PWmA.L
NlTMBFRS
smaller uppermost, like steps and
stairs. When the steps haw the same
height like successive squares, as
1,4,9,l16,25, the sum is called by the Hindus var(%a2
sankalita; when different, like successive cubes, g-
sankalita, 1,8,27,64.
.The properties of numbers and the technical terms
applied to them seem to be interminable just as numbers
are; we shall, therefore, proceed to mention some of
the processes in which they are used.
96. S al-hisa'b. Arithmetia is the treatment of
numbers and their properties in solving problems by way
or addition and subtraction, i.e.
AR I!MDET IC increases and decreases.
97. b6 al-garb. Multiplication is the taking one
of two num~a~adding together so many fold3 of itself
as there are units in the other
MCJLTIPLICATION number. For example, if we wish to
multiply five by seven, this is
equivalent to adding seven fives, the sum of which is
thirty-f ive; similarly the addition of five sevens
gives the same result; for the meaning of our expression
five by seven is the amount of five taken seven timss
or seven taken five times.
98. MB a1 ismah. Division is the ascertaining of
a single '-h,
[bahr P,] of e quantity, the
dizdend, al-maqsiim, which has to be
DIYISION divided into a certain number of
parts by the divisor a1 ma sim
T~laihi. Such share is called the quotie-
For example, I have to divide thirty-five, the
dividend, by seven the divisor. Let us call the dividend
1 The MS has 8 for 9.
2 The MSS have nazk or tark. Sankalita means addition;
var a, square ; *a, ciZK
d r 1 f is not-65iiflnea to doubling, but extends to
trziing, four-folding, etc.

a sum of money, &., and the divisor a number of men,
the share of each man will be five and this is the
quotient.
99. ME al-tamwI1 watl-tajdhzr. When a number is
multiplied by the same number the product is the
square, a, of that number, the opera-
SQUlLRE ANTI tion, squaring, being called tamwll.
SQUARE-ROOT For example, if seven be m u l t m by
itself, will give the square in question, in this case
the number seven. This is oalled the root,
100. al- idhr al-munta m'l-asamm. There are
rational, nun*aqI and rrati~-d,~~rumn, roots;
the foher, known also as manii~ W,
RATIONAL BM, mutlaq, mart- [and d$aJ,an be ex-
SURD ROOTS
pressed -ale numErs, like three in
relation to nine, or four in relation
to sixteen, but the latter cannot be so expressed. It
is impossible, for instance, to find a number which
multiplied by itself will yleld ten,l and the e fort to
do so merely ends in a surd root, oalled a?=, 8
because there does not exist any method o'i" arriving at
it except approximately.
101. ME a.-takrlb watl-tadlIr Cubing a number,
takpIb, is multiplying it by i%zlf and the product by
the original number;3 the result is a
CUBE AM)
CUBE-ROOT
cube, mukarrab, For example, three
multiplied by three gives nine, and
nine multiplied by three gives twenty-
seven. The extraction of the cube-root, tadlzy is the
finding of the number which after being Z'Geated
1 delete sittah.
2 I4S has aidan.
3 fi mithnhris omitted.

gives the cube in question, in this case the three
whose cube is twenty-seven. This number is called the
side of the cube, G? Sometimes it ia oalled kaq,
but by the people generally the cube itself is as
kaYb for short, so we are constrained to name the root
dil' instead of kaTb to avoid ambiguity.
-
102. ME al-takhalpI. TEe method of trial and emr,
takha$$L, is used in exTracting the square or aube mat.
You neglect one or more ciphers, and
TRIAL AND [assume an approximate value for the
ERROR unknown auantityl sayinn in the case of
the aqua& root;- akiin it akiin,yakiin,
[it is,it is not,it is;] and in &&&be
root,
akiin,lli akiin 1E akih kk. Some people instead of
&&*F-- 1 give (the answer) - until the
iast pos~tion'is arrived ac,which satisties all the
ciphers.
103. MB a1 mukhra .l The denominator of a fraction
is the nr-ts into nhiah the integer 18
divided, and the fraction is less than
IIENOMIEIATOR
that number. Take for instance, the
three of a third, for the latter is one
part of the integer if that is divided into three parts.
So also two-thirds are two of these parts. Similarly
four stands in the same relation to a fourth, as does
five to a fifth. The denominator should alwaye be the
smallest in which the fraction can be expressed,for tntenths
an6 three-fifteenths are each of them one-fifth,
and while there is no limit to higher terms, there Is
to the lowest, wherefore the latter are preferable.
104. IdG a1 ta'nxs. In prder to make integers and
fractions EE&& tajnis, the integer must be
multiplied by the denominator of the
REDUCTION fractionandthenumeratoraddedtothe
sum, so that the whole is now of one
kind. For example, three and a quarter may be expressed
as three wholea and one of four parts of a whole; to
make them homogeneous we must multiply the wholea by
the denominator, four, making twelve fourths to which
1 So vocalized in Eliast Eng.-Arab. Dict. Ma Bm is the
usual expression for denollinator, as is bk+r numarreally
refers to the lozt terms in
can be expressed. v. Dict. Sol. Terms.

there has to be added one fourth in all 13/4. Or if
there are two different fractions such as 217 and 3/5,
and you desire to add them, then the denominators must
be multiplied, 7 X 5 P 35 which becomes the denominator
for both fractions. Now 2/7 of 35 Is 10 an& of 35
is 21, so that when these are added the combined
fractions rendered homogeneous become 31/35.
In the case of fractions in the sexagesimal saale
used in Astronomy, such as minutes and seconds,
thawhi, and whatever fractions are beyond these, when
m e s i r e d to make them homogeneous, the highest
denomination must be multiplied by sixty, the next
lower must be added to the product, and the operation
repeated until the loweat is reeohed, and all are of
the same denomination. rmanzil . p.1. manhzil]
For example, we have to make homogeneous three
minutes, four seconds and five thirds, thaelith, then
3' X 60 r 180" + 4" = 184" X 60 r 11040'"+ 5"' =
11045 "' -
105. Ka raf al-radad. When we have a number in
one of the denominations of the sexagesimal system,
more than sixty, we raise it to the next
ASCENDING
REDUCTION
degrees.
higher denomination by dividing It by
sixty, and this operation is repeated
until we have if possible only whole
For instance we have 11045 seconds which it is
proposed to raise to a higher denomination. Divided
by sixty we have 184 minutes and five seconds, and
when this is repeated the result is 3O 4' 5".
In the table of contents of PI, tarfIr ocours under 105
PL. The term is a synonym of bw-tan-i radad under
which title raf v al- vadad is di scussed in PL 106. The
numbering of the paragraphs readjusts itself, PL 108
being 107 & 8.
iyiedemann refers to this passage in Aot. Orlental.V,
153, where he observes that ReductiOn Is expressed by
forms of bat$ VII.

106. m al-t=.l This is the reduction, taqlF1,
to their l-terms of two numbers which share a
common factor, by dividing each of
REDUCTION TO them by their highest oonmon factor,
LOVEST TWUEl m+. For exwe if I have the two
num ers seventy two and three hundred
and sixty, seventy two is the flgiq between them,
divided by which, they yielU one and five their lowest
terms, and 1/5 is equal to 72/360.
107. h6 al-mariitib al-)abIri eh. When one is multiplied
by any other number d r o d u o t multiplied
repeatedly by the same number, there
NATURAL SERIES results a series of proportional
POWERS
numbers the so-called powers of that
product. The first power, martabah,
after the one posited, is called the root; the second,
the square; the third, the .cube; the fourth, the square
of the square; the fifth, the square of the cube; and
the sixth, the cube of the cube; and so further on this
analogy. The ratio of the one, with which we begin, to
the root is the same as that of the root to the square,
and of the square to the cube, and of the cube to the
square of the square etc.
The example shows the first to the sixth powers of
two and three.
1 The Persian expression is navardidan whioh is a
translation of A. al-$am, folding (into the smallest
oompasa) .

--=%
108. l& al-marItib al-wapri . The conventional
~roupina - - - of numbers, depending on t eir relative posi-
-tion, used in the operations of
DECIMAL NOTATION arithmetic, is one of the methods
of arranging the separate numbers
in multiplioation and division. It is a decimal system
and so the ratio between the various groups is based on
the number ten.
The first group is that of the units from one to
nine, advancing by one ; the second, the tens, from ten
to ninety, by ten; the third, the hundreds, from one
hundred to nine hundred, by a hundred; and the fourth
the thousands, from one to nine thousands.
This fourth group in so far takes $he place of the
units that the tens of thousands follow it in the same
way as the tens follow the units, an& the only
difference between them is that the increment is by
thousands.
Again when the actual position of a number in a
particular group is established, it is invariably onetenth
of the number occupying the same position in the
succeeding group.
Should any group lack a number, a sign is used to
indicate the vaoancy. We employ for this purpose a
small circle,^, and call it a cipher, fifr, or zero1
but the Hindus use a point,.,.
The accompanying figure illustrates numbers in
their respective groups, indicated by the separate
columns.
kp$e~%\&&&4&!3dLb23~~3
• : .. *,G )
'/
&~&&~&A&3*&J.d&~cG,&3>~ 5 ,
-pr~6ti~~-r&~41&b~:~34\
.* 'L. .' $ +? 1 e
.
1 Zero, as well as cipher, is derived from pfr, empty;
cipher being afterwards extended to the nine-gits.
Carra de Vaux, Penseurs de 1' Islam, 11,109, suggests
that cipher in its other meaning is traceable to m,
a book, or writing, with sin instead of qgd.

If we desire to mite this sum or to express it by word
of mouth, we say nine thousand thousand thousand
thousand and eight thousand thousand thousand, and six
hundred and seventy-five thousand thousand, and thirtyfour
thousand and one hundred and two.
[Nine billion eight thousand six hundred and seventy-five
milllon,thirty-four thousand one hundred and ImoJ
109. bfii al-jabr wacl-muqzbalah. If things of
different nature in the scales of a balance are in
equilibrium, the scales remain parallel, the
ALGEBRA
tongue vertical and the beam level. It is
obvious that if you take anything from one
of the scales of one kind you must remove the like from
the other both in kind and amount so as to preserve the
equilibrium and the previous condition. Similarly, if
you add anything to one scale you must add a like
amount to the other.
Should there be a minus quantity on o e side it is
neoessary to remove it and to restoref the equilibrium
by adding a like amount to the other side. This is the
operation of a; for example,if we have on one side
100 dirhams minus 14 dinars and on the other 13 staters
1 'abara; cr. Wjabbir, A bone-setter and Spanish
A l h t a , El que profesa 1a agebra, 6 arts de
concertar 10s hues08 dislocados. (Canes, Dict. Esp.
Arab. )

atatersl of iron plus 12 dirhams, the operation of jabr
eliminates the minus quantity and completes the 100
dirhams so that we haw
100 dirhams 13 staters - 12 dirhams + 14 dinars
and if the same operation be carried out on the other
side we have
112 dirhams E 13 staters + 14 dinars
When the operation of jabr has been concluded, we
from both sides. For example:- if we have
112 dirhams U 13 statars+ 12 dirhams
by deducting the last i%en we have
100 dirhams = 13 staters
110. ~ii al-mufradzt al-muta%dilah. Algebra deals
with three elements: l/ a simple number unrelated to
the others; 2/ Gather number so related,
SZMPIB mudzf, the root of a square number; an8
EQUATIONS 3/ the square number itself. In simple
equations mufradgt, these are associated
in three different p a i r m o t s equal to number; 2/
square8 equal to number; 3/ squares equal to roots.2
1 Gr. UTCIT~~~, ~.ist~r, ~.sitIr. The stater = 43
mlthqals or dinars, and the dinar = 1 3i7 dirhams. The
stater, therefore, is 6 3/7 dirhams. The equations abm
come out 7 and 7,7 respectively. For Arabic wei@;hts,see
Wiedemann's account of these fmm IdQ, Beitr.XXI1,SO.Q.

111. MH al-muqtarangt al-naztac~dilah.l These equations
of the second degree result from the association,
muqtarinah, of a third term, either
COMPOSITE squares, roots, or number nith the two of
EQUATIONS each of the foregoing simple equations.
The first of the three resultant equations
is SQUBRES + ROWS = NUMBER, which means that one or
more squares asabciated with one or more roots are
equal to such and such a number. For example:- a square
plus ten of the root is equal to thirty-nine; the
square is nine and the root three.
The second maqrth is SQUmS + NUMBER = ROOTS.
This particular form in some cases admits of two answers
e.g., a square plus thirty is equal to thirteen
roots and this is satisfied either by a hundred with
root ten or nine wlth root three.
The third maq* is ROOTS + NCTMBER E SQUARES e.g.,
six plus ten of the roots is equal to the square; the
square is thirty-six and the root six.
112. al-shai *? This is a technical term for
an unknown quantity; it means 'thingv; and correspond8
to *X* in modern algebra. When multiplied
*X( by itself it gives shai square.
v. Muhammad b. Misi al-Khwtirizmi; Colebrook, Algebra
from Sahskrit, 1817, p. IXXV; and Karpinski, Univ. Mlch.
Stud., XI, 1915, p. 71.
The solution of these is arrived~t as io1lows:-
.ax2 10x 39. X VKW -5 3.
x2 + 30 13x. X - 6.5 2 d6.52 - 30 = 6.5 2 3-5.
XZ - 51 + 6. x a V2*5Z + 6 + 2.5 r P.
In his last example A and PL have 10 instead or 5,
and PP dah an Karpinski remarks on the persistegce
ofdknple'fron BwZrid, borrowed by Al-
~ l r k 200 ~ : years later and by Omar Khayyh 100 years
after him.
2~n early books or algebra translated 'reat; the transliteration
into Spanish 'xei* has been suggested as the
source of the modern 'X*. (Arabic words in Spanish such
as sharllb (sherbet) were formerly spelt wlth an initial
X, m t h j, jardbe.)

P- -
113. Kaif Garb al-shait. Shall when multiplied by
a number g-s n shalt, whentiplied by minus
( il-) shalt gives a minus square,
x2 m mustathn8; when minus shail is
~t&id by a number the resultisminus
n shai', and when minus shait is multiplied by itself a
positive square, & zB9f d results, because the minus
sign, istithna*, is nmolished except by multiplication
by Itself.
114. M;; hiszb al-airham watl dfnk. his is a
method of =Eoning derived from Algebra. Ae there are
sometimes more unknown quantities than
y. z one, it becomes necessary to have names
for them. Some people call them dinars,
dirhams and fulus, while others adopt the Hindu method
of naming the ashgal black, yellow and gray.1
115. &$isEb al-khatGtain. A number is assumed
which appears to be suita6ler solving the problem;
if a test indicates its accuracy, it is
RULE OF unneoessary to proceed further, but if
TWO ERFlORS it has led to an error, the amount of
that must be noted and the process repeated
after the unsuccessful guess, when either you
hit upon the correct answer or else you have a second
error. Then the answer oan be deduced from the two errors
by a method which is knom [to ~rithmeticians].~
116. Kaif ithbht al-ardhd bi purllf al-rarab. The
notation of numbers by Arabic letters is a matter of
agreement and convention; for it
ARABIC Ul"I'ERS would have been possible to use the
FOR NUMERBIS letters in the ordinary order of the
alphabet, a, b, t, th, etc., because
there are nine units, nine tens, nine hundreds, which,
rith a sign for a thousand, are provided for by the
twenty-eight letters.
-
'v. Colebrook, l.c.p.139. For akhab read ashhab.
2 Carra de Vaux quotes an exammrom ~l=izmT,
l.c.I1,117. X - 1/3 X - 1/4 X 8. Try 12, result 5,
(-3); try 24, result 10 (+2); 12 -3
24 X +2 multiply
diagonally, result 24, and -72; add, beaause signs
contrary, result 96/5 r 19 1/5.
40

However,people selected the order of the QurUf G-
ummal because this was ridely diffused among p m e of
+TT- t e ook before the time of the Arabs. The mode in lkh1c.h
the letters are apportioned to the several numbers is
shown in the accompanying table.
117. Ha1 ikhtiliif fiha. The object in using
these letters is economy of space and ease of writing
numbers especially in astronomioal
WROcCAN USAGE tables. Among astronomers there is no
disagreement as to their use, but there
are perverse people outside the profession who put
sarrad for sarfag, thus making s 60, and d 90, and
iim%s&t for qarashat, basing their ob jectf ons, some on
linguistic, others on religious grounds; but this is
all nonsense. Were it not that a general agreement has
l A mmria technioa is made by the insertion of vowels
as indicated In the transliteration above. Pococke,
Speo. Hlst. Arab., p. 300, refers to the use of the
first six words for the days of the week from Saturday
to Thursday, Friday being al-ragbah.
%he Muslims of Morocco make the last four words,
ga YaQ, qarasat , thakhadh, qaghash.

een arrived at as to this order by its users, their ob
jection might be allowed, but it would constitute a departure
from an established custom.
118. Kaif yakb tarklbhz. Certain rules have to be
observed in combining these letters. Of the units, tens
and hundreds, the hundreds come first,
COMBINATION the tens next and the units last; thus
115 is written m, and [when written in
blacklp must have a line over it to show
@at it is not a word. So 105 is written 3, and 42
OF LETTERS
a,
mb and 1002 . On the other hand 2000 is written
the smal P er number coming first to distinguish it
from ghb, and to show what is intended.
The customary way of writing these letters is that
jh 3, is written without a tail to distinguish it from
&iit 8; little attention need be given to khllg 600, a6
astronomical calculations are concerned with numbers
less than 360; [it is pointed wlthout a tail]. YE' must
have its tail dram backwards, in case it should be astaken
for a nlln with its point. G f must be written
horizontally, so as not to resemble l&, a* niin must be
written larger-than 28' and pointed, for zal also is
pointed, and ra9 unpointed. Shin 300, must be pointed
to distinguish it from sxn 60, and attention must be
paid to other pointed letters.
When niin or yli* are combined with unitsl irB 51,
ra 11, niin must be pointed, and indeed the ya9 also
should have its points.
When zero, sifr, has to be written in places lacking
a number, itircle must have a line over it, V
touching, to distinguish it from hB', but in the Indian
notation this line is unnecessary, for there, there is
no resemblance to hl' .
Generally the right end of the line in question is continued
downwards to the left to join a very small circge2
, or the cirole has two horns,% ; compare % and
ha' in future tables.

119. Ha1 tustaTmal hadhihi 'l-huGf fI gha r alardgd.
The same letters are used fo? another pu&ose,
namely, for designating the signs of the
FURTHER U S zodiac as in the followin6r: table:-
Names of Signs. Symbols
Arie S
Taurus
Gemin
Cancer
Leo
Virgo
Libra
scorpius
Sag1 t tarius
Capricornus
Aquarius
Pisces
T% 0 The foregoing amount of
b'll arithmetio will suffice
Itd 2 for anyone who desires an
3 introduction to it.
SL3 4
7Tpo 5 NOW, however, we must
-h9 6 proceed to the description
%l 7 of the form of the heavens.
+P2 8
xb 9
==A10
3C 611
120. Mii al-falak. The celestial sphere is a body
like a ball revolving in its own place; it contains
within its interior objeats whose move-
THE C?F,LESTIAL ments are different from those or the
SPHERE sphere itself, and we are in the centre
of it. It is called falak on account of
its circular moverrent like that of tnirl of a spindle,
and its name, athxr, (ether) is current among
philosophers.
121. A huwa dhid au akthar. There are eight suah
spheres enolosed the one within the other, like the
ekins of an onion; the smallest sphere
MORE SPHERES
THAN ONE ?
is that which is nearest to us, within
which the moon is always travelling
alone, rising and setting, within its
limits. To each sphere there is a certain amount of
spaoe between the outer and inner boundaries so that
the planet to which it belongs has two distances, the
one further, the other nearer. The second sphere above
that of the moon belongs to Mercury, the third to Venus,

the fourth to the Sun, the fifth to Mars, the sixth to
Jupiter, the seventh to Saturn. These seven spheres1
belong to the planets, but above them all is the sphere
known as that of the Fixed (or desert)p stars. The accompanying
diagram represents them.
122. Mii alladhi wariil al-falak al-thhin. A number
of people consider that beyond the eighth sphere there
is a ninth entirely quiescent; it
WBdT BEYOND is this which the Hindus all in
BIGBTH SPHERE
their language brahmZnda, g i .e . , the
egg or Bariiham, because the prime
1 %, pl, of ukrah; unusual as pl. of kurah. v,
Dozy, I, 30.
2 Brahmii+da means the a

mover must not be moved, and it is on this account that
they describe it as motionless. But it is possible that
it is not a body like the other spheres, otherwise its
existence could be demonstrated, and that to apply this
name to it is an error. Many of our ancestors considered
that beyond the eight spheres there is an infinite
empty space, others, a boundless quiescent substance,
while according to Aristotle there is neither substance
nor void beyond the revolving bod1es.l
-
123. MZ al-samat. The word sd? refers to anything
which is above you or covers you. In a restricted
sense it refers to the clouds or the
THE HEBVENS roofs of the houses, but when used rithout
qualification it corresponds to the
Persian word zdn, and means the roof of the world or
the s~heres o-ch we have been sDeakina. The word
Csnb; i .e. like a millstone, (& &andPr shabih bitlrefers
to the circulsr movemr
124. M; alladhr fi hashw falak al- mar. In the
centre of h e sphere of the moon is theqearth, and this
centre is in reality the lowest part
COmTEHTS OF
MOON'S S-
(and this is a real centre, because
all heavy things gravitate towards it),
The earth is, as a whole, globular,and
in detail is rough-surfaced on account of the mountains
projectihg from it and the depressions on its surface,
but when considered as a whole it does not depart from
the spherical form, for the highest mountains are very
small in oomparison with the whole globe. Do you not
see that a ball of a yard or two in diameter, covered
with millet seeds and pitted with depressions of similar
size, would still satisfy the definition of a sphere.
If the surface of the earth were not so uneven, water
oomlng from all aides would not be retained by it, and
would certainly submerge it, so that it would no longer
be visible. For water while it shares with earth in
1 Dr. W.D. Roas informs me that the words quoted occur
in De Caelo, 278b 21, and 279 11. Bar-Hebraeus follows
81-BTrbni in referring to the same passage. The external
surface of the ninth sphere is in contact with nothing,
because beyond it there is *ni vide ni pleint v.
Nau. p. 11.
2 Translation of the Persian etymological pun.

having a oertain weight, and in falling as low as possible
in air, is nevertheless lighter than earth,which
therefore settles in water sinking in the form of sediment
to the bottom. Moreover mter,although it does not
penetrate earth itself, sinks into the interstices
thereof,and there beoomes mixed with air, and as a result
of the intimate oontaot becomes suspended in the
air. When the air escapes to the outside, the water regains
its natural state in the same way as rain falls
from the olouds. On account of the various irregularities
projecting from the surface, water tends to colleot
in the deepest places1 giving rise to streams.
The earth and the waters
together form the one globe,
surrounded on all sides by the
air;as much of the latter as is
in contact with the sphere or
,j
the moon becomes heate& in consequence
of the movement and pole @
the friction of the part8 in
contact. Thus is produced the
fire whioh surrounds the air,
less in amount in the proxindty
Air
of the ~oles owina: to the
slackening of the-movemnt
there.
125. M; al-kadkib al-thEbitah wavl-saiyzrah.
The fixed stars are those whloh stud the whole heaven,
whose distance from each other is fixed
STARSAMIPLANJ5'IS to all eternity,so that they neither approach
each other nor separate from each
other. In Persian they are called the desert stars
%:Gni, for finding the right way through deserts depen
S on them.
The planet5,on the other hand,seven in number,each
moving in its own sphere,continually alter their diatance
from each other and from the fixed stars,sometimes
being near and sometimes opposite,ln virtue of the difference
in the rapidity and character or their movements.
By wag of declivities and fissures and ditches,
sax shIvhZ va gauhli va magGkhE. P
2 124 is quoted by YRqtit in the Geographical Dictionary.
v. Wiedemann, Arch. Gesch. Natum. U. Technik. ., I. -. 26:
and cf. chron. p. 247.

126. M: al-harakat al-Glii al- arbi ah. Everyone
sees that -d,the moon and stag arey:ngaged in a
first or westward movement; they rise
FIRST RESTERLY
MOYEI-
gradually, attain the summit of their
course ,and then descend little by little
till they disappear,thereafter
returning to the place where they rose.1 It is owing to
the heavenly bodies that this movement is perceived; it
is well-known to animals as they disperse in search of
food, more so indeed than to man,for there are animals
whose movements correspond with it like the chameleon,2
which facing the sun turns with it,as do the leaves of
many plants,notably,vetch,~, and liquorice, s . 3
It is called the first movement as it is this
movement of the heavenly bodies which first attracts
our attention,
,because the goal of the
course reached by t em is setting in the west.
P==@
127. al-harakat al-thgni ah al-sharki ah. The
second or
movement of aG planets is gwards
the quarter where they arose; but
SECOND EASTERLY the movement of the fixed stars is
MOvEI.dENT very smal1,and on account of the iact
that the distance between them remains
the same,they are called fixed,whereas the motion
of the planets is much greater,more obvious,and also of
varied nature.
It is most obvious in the case of the moon on account
of its rapid movernent,for,from the time when the
moon appears in the west,it moves further away from the
aun and any star which is between it and the sun,and ap-
1 ~i-~Iriinf says, India, I, 277, that all astronomical
phenomena can be equally well explained by the theory
3f the rotation of the earth.
See Lane under QirbB*. Brehms VII, 245 says that
though its colouri~ries with the intensity of
light the chameleon is the most sedentary of animals.
susan, lily, for &.
3 Mahk in Persian, misspelt in PL, PL* , and PP.
A O ~

approaches any star which is on the other side of the
sun from it. When it occults one of these,it does so
with its eastern border and clears it with the western.
This second movement is cornnon to all the planets;
it is an inverted replica of the first,but is not an
exact counterpart,for it deviates from it slightly. It
is called second,because it is different in amount for
each planet ,while the first is uniform and prevails over
all the second m~vements~although in the opposite direction.
It is like the movement of a ship whose passengers
may walk in the direction of the current,while
they are all being oarried up stream by the ship; the
uniform movement prevails over the contrary one by
reason of greater ef ficiency.l
The second movement is not obvious like the first,
but requires some consideration and reasoning based on
observation. It is called shar T,eastward,on account of
its direction towards the & of the sun.
128. Mii a1 uf . Only about half of the vault of
heaven is d o the observer; It is like a dome
placed over the earth, its margin
THE HORIZON forming a circle round about him. Whatever
ie above this circle, known as the
horizon, is visible to him.
There are tvo kinds of horizon,the one sensible or
vlsible,hiasT, the other true or astronomica1,ha 3 I.
The sensi616~orizon is that already referred & k c h
we always see when on the surface of the earth,and
which divides the celestial sphere into two parts, an
upper smaller one, and a lower invisible to us.
The true horizon is parallel to the other, but on
a plane passing through the centre of the earth and
cutting the celestial sphere into two equal parts. That
which is between the two horizons is small in amount so
as not to be obvious when the sphere is large [the celestial
sphere] but large when the sphere is small [the
earth].
L "Like a ship floating downstream, a passenger may
walk in the opposite direction,so that he is at once
moving both forwards and backwards, but the direct
movemnt is more effective than the contrary one.

129. M6 falak nisf al-nahiir. Everywhere in the
world day is caused b? the track of the sun from its
rising to its setting; its course is call-
MERIDIBN
ed the arc of day, and the circle which
passes through the zenith and everywhere
divides the day into two halves is called the meridian.
Every point in the celestial sphere which becomes visible
rises towards this circle, reaches it, and then begins
to sink till it disappears towards the west.
130. l& jihit al-rilam. The cardinal points are
the places, mahhbb, from which blow the four familiar
finds. The zephyr, whiug comes iron
CdRDINAL POINTS
the karbah; the dabur comes from the west from behind
the katbah; and theorth wind, al-shsl, from the
direation of the pole, i.e., from the left hand,
shiGl, of any one facing east; it is oalled irbi g
in Syriac (a name which is familiar although MAur
language ) .P
The south nind,
from the opposite
pole, from the right,
facing east; it is
on this account that
called Jdib and
yaman, and in Syriac, ta amnH .
The nams of the &&late quarter. are not
very current (except among the Hindus, where they often
conflict with each other), but any wind blowing from
one of these is called a side-wind, nekbEt.
131. Fa lcaif istikhr6~ hadhihi al-jihiit. In order
to establish emctly the direction or these four quarters,
level a pieue of ground as far
INDIAN CIRCm &S ~O~sible, until YOU get it in 8~0h
a condition that water poured on it
haphazard flows evenly in all direations, without any
tendency towards depressions in any one of these. When
the ground is levelled then draw a aircle2 on it of any
diameter, and fix in the centre a sharp-pointed stick
the length of half the radius. This must be perpendicular
to the surface as determined by a plumb-line3
passing from the point to the centre of the circle.
1 Z;khyZih, usually the seat of a wound, but zakhm is
'ic US as well as 'vulnus'.
2 The Indian Circle. see Wiedemann, Acta Oriental.V.156.
3 Plummet, shiiqiil.

Then watch the shadow in the first half of the day as
it extends to the west and gradually shortens, and when
it enters the circle, mark that point of the circumference;
similarly, in the afternoon, when it lengthens
and passes out of the oircle, that second point. Join
these two points of entrancle and exit by means of a
cord or rule, bisect the line so obtained and join the
middle point to the centre of the circle by a straight
line which can be produced to the north and south
points of the circumference. This is the meridian
which divides the circle into east and west halves, the
quarters of the rising and setting of' the sun. Then
divide each of these halves into two by a straight line
at right angles to the meridian passing through the
centre of the circle, and mark the east and west
points. This is the east and west line or khatt alirtiditl,
while the meridional line is kno~n7i'Btt
-1. By these two the circle is divided into four
quadrants, called after the adjacent cardinal points,
south-east, south-west, north-east, and north-west, as
in the diagram.
NS, Meridian or khattal-zawEl,
EW, East s d
West Line or khatt ali'tidE1.
M, Mlddii;
middle of 1 e joining
entrance, S% and er-
E it, she, of shadow. G.
the gnomon,
The oopyiet is unhappy in his nomenclature of the
quadrants.

132. & al-yam wa 6 al-nah6r wa 6 al-lail.
The nychthemeron, S a Bn -mz , civ am, is
thttbspze o;tine tkt%z~ ksun* S
DAY BND NIGRT leaving one half of a great circle by
the first movement and returning to
the same half in the course of completing its revolution;
the most obvious of such circles are the horizon
and the meridian.
Day, nah6r, is that space of time during which the
sun is vismabove the horizon, and night, S, that
in which it is hidden under the earth.
The Arabic word, yaum, is sometimes used for
nychthemeron and sometimes for day, if, therefore, it
is intended to use it in the former sense, say, to make
sure, the day and the night, al-yawn bilailatihi,
There is no star nor point in the heavens where
there is no nyohthemeron and no night and day, When
theee are mentioned in connection with something unspecified
it is the sun which is referred to.
133. al-fajr wa mr? al-shafa . Night in reality
consists in our being in the darkne% of the earth's
shadow. when the sun is still hidden
DAWN AND from us under the horizon, but is ap-
TWILIGHP proaching, we first see the emergence of
those rays which surroun& the shadow, the
advance-guard1 of the sun, forming the dawn, fa r
sa 1dahP, in the east, and when the sun has s+ihe
*&t
, shafaq , in the west, its rear-guard.2

In the east the first light which succeeds the
daybreak, sahar, is a long thin whiteness directed upwards.
=' s called the false dawn, al-subh al-kgdhib,
-. subh-i durUgbFduring which no religiou~~vances
are enjo ne . It is compared to a wolfvs tail, dhanab
al-sirhan, on account of its length, slendernessand
it persists for some time. Then comes
the horizontally diffused light of the true dawn, the
time of the morning pra~er,~ and fasting (for those
keeping a fastp). Thereafter the horizon beaomes red
owing to the proximity of the sun and the diffusion of
its rays through the impurities, kudiirzt , tiraMP, in
the vioinity of the earth (which consist of vapour and
dust)P.
The same phenomena occur in inverted order in the
west on the setting of the sun, first the red horizon
persists for some time, then the red disappears and the
white Biffused light, the nadir of the dawn follows,
both of which determine the tims for the sunset and
evening prayers.4 Thereafter the white light fades
away and the long and high light appears, which corresponds
to the false dam, and lasts for a part of the
night.
The Hindus call dawn and twilight sand (sa&dhi15
and do not reckon them as parts of the day and of the
night respectively, but some of them (who see the absurdity
of that)P do not recognise euoh an intermediate
period between night and day, and speak of sand as that
time when the centre of the sun is on the hmon.
1 Islam 1II.Heft 1/2, where this paragraph is translated,
t~r~kf for bgrIkI P. [and the light regarded as ziodiacsl.
80's int-or inti~s.
Qaliit al-fa r. The oG'prayers are; saliit al-zuhr,
t h e d T e g i n s shortly after nooii; palat &pas2
when the sun is midway to setting; salat al-ma r ,sun-
set; saliit al-lishz* , early night p$ayer.Cf .=
and ~sank, Sitz. Erlangen, - - Vol. 58, - p.20. -
zeiten im- Islam.
5 India, I, 364.
52
Die Gebets-

134. l& mbdf* al-yam mrl-nah& wall-lail. It is
permissible to select any time you please for the beginning
of the nychthemeron, but the
BEGINIU'ING OF arrival of the sun at the horizon and
DAY A,ND NIGm the meridian are the host convenient
for this purpose. Astronomers prefer
the meridian to the horizon, as easier for carrying out
some of their operations, some selecting the upper part
(midday), others the lower (midnight). Pew pay attention
to the horizon except the astrologers, who do, on
account of the rising and setting of the sun, both of
which are more obvious phenomena than the arrival of
the sun et the meridian. Those who place the night before
the day (the People of the Book and Muslims) always
regard the setting of the sun as the beginning of
the civil day; other sects who give precedence to the
day over the night regard sunrise as its beginning.
There is no conflict of opinion as to the beginning
of the night, which is always considered to be
sunset. So also the beginning of the day (nahar) is by
general consent regarded to be sunrise, except by Muslims;
whose theologians of all sects are agreed that it
is a fundamental principle of the law (iuriir al-fiqh)
that dawn should be regarded as the beghning of the
new day, following in this the custom of the people of
the present day, and their rule as to this and as to
fasting at the appointed time. With us the period of
the fast is the whole day with a certain limited portion
of the previous night joined on to the beginning
of it.
135. MA al-sL%t wa and-. Hours are of two
kinds, equal and unequa . e ormer, mustawi
each tke Eenty-f o u r t d e 8 r e
HOURS civil day, and are all equal in length.
At the equinoxes there are twelve equal
hours in the day and.twelve in the night, but as soon
as the day or the night is longer, the equal hours are
unequally divided between day and night, the surplus in
the one being equal to the shortage in the other.

The unequal, 'crooked', mu wa ah, hours are in
each case the twelfth part of+or night, of
whatever length these may be. An hour of a long day is,
therefore, longer than an hour of a short day, and except
at the equinoxas, the day hours differ in length
from the night hours.
The equal hours, however, although their number
in the day may be different frm that in the night,
are always equal in length, while the unequal hours
differ in length but agree in nmber. The eaual hours
are also called murtadilah, even, and the unequal hours
zdniyyah, temporal,
136. 11; kam juzv tuqsamu al-sarah. The hour, as
well as everything which can be measured in length, or
bulk, or weight, is divided into sixty min-
DIVISION utes and each minute into sixty seconds,,
OF HOUR The Jews divide the hour into 1080 fractions,
called in Hebrew hala but they make
no smaller division than perhaps haid*. l
137. Kaif @l al-~i5~Zt rinda al-hind. The Hindus
recognise thehour, but call it half a sign of the
zodiac; in their language it is h k
INDIAN DIVISION and not szrah; they only use it
OF HOUR
astrological purposes, while the
people generally divide the civil
day into sixty parts called g%ari, (twenty-four minutes)
and the 'hari into sixty parts-called by some Qassah
and Qakabd by others biyEri;2 these again i s i x
pr~nachich unit coincides with the average respiratory
rhythm of a healthy man. The g%aris, like equal
hours, are a fixed quantity, and, unless day and night
are equal, the number of mris in a day is different
from that in the night. To convertgharis into equal
1 PL jilaq; PL? ,AOv ,hllaq; A0 khaliq. v. chron. p. 64,
and 387 note, where i regGr equals 1/76 of a Qalaq;
but of. Jewish Encycl. 111,503, for a different subtivision
of the hour, and another value for the regZr.
cashaka, vinSQI, India, 337. PI, ashah, pabkah,
banazi . PP jashshah, hakkah, band . A0 Qashah , Qakah,
bangrx. 809, passa, pakah, biz6ri.

hours it is necessary to multiply by two and divide
by five,l (and houro into gqharis, to multiply by two
and a half).
Another unit is also employed by the Hindus, the
muhiirta, which is equal to two 6fharis. If day and
nigfitre equal, each has fifteen equal muhiirtas; if
they differ in length, the muhiirtas also differ in the
same way as do the crooked hours.2
138. ME muraddil al-nahiir. The pole and circle on
the surface of a sphere have already been discussed.
For the movement of the sphere there are
EQUINOCTIAL
necessarily two poles and a great circle
between them; one of the two poles of
the first movement is visible to people in the north,
while the other towards the south is concealed from
them. Since the globe moves on an axis between these
two poles, the movement is most rapid at the oircle
intermediate between them, and slackens at circles
parallel thereto in proportion to their distance therefrom.
This great circle is compared to a girdle and is
known as the equinoctial or girdle of the first movement.
139. Mii mints at al-burii . The zodiac girdle or
ecliptic i m *which
is the girdle,
nit8 or mints ah, of the second move-
ECLIPTIC men3 it ~a*known as the circle or
sphere of the signs, falak al-burif
whioh the sun in its eastward movement adheres an
does not leave. It is inclined to the equinoctial and
intersects it at two points opposite to each other, so
that one half of it is north and the other south of
the equinoctial; the poles, therefore, of the two
Literally, write the number i n two places, double the
one, halve the other and ad& the results.
2 India, I, 338. Therefore, not always forty-eight
minutes, but 1/15 or day or night.

movements are distant from one another by the extent of
this inclination (the obliquity of the eoliptic) both
in the north and in the south. The great circle, (the
solstitial oolure ) which passes through all four poles
recreives its name, al-m8rrah 'aliI al-aq$€ib al-arbarah,
from this circumstance.
140. M5 al-madZr5t al-yaumiyyah. Circles parallel
to the equinoctial towards the north and south are known
as day-circles, (determining the length
PARALLELS OF
DECLINATION
of day). They cut or touch points of
the zodiac, or other stars or points in
the sphere to which they are related as
parallels in which they keep revolving.
141. ME madgrzt al-'ar#. Circles parallel to the
ecliptic north and south are oalled parallels of
(celestial) latitude,
PARALLELS OF
LATITUDE
142. MZ a1 mu antarzt. These are circles parailel
to the hor.*~rds
the zenith are muqantaatls
of altitude, irtifEr, those towards the
MUQJdpFWE antipodes, mumu?iEi$Eahs of depression,
LnbiQ! t
149. ME nu tat5 al-irtidSl wall-in iliib. One great
circle a p p d s another on a sphere t:11 they meet
and inte sect at two points dimetrica3lly
EQUINOCTIAL oppositef to each other, and at the
POINTS same time attain their greatest distance
from each other at two other opposite
points. It is thus that the ecliptic and the equinoctial
intersect each other at two opposite points and
separate as far as possible at two others. The points
of intersection are known as the equinoctial points,
beoause when the sun arrives at them there is equality,
irtida, of day and night all over the world; that
whiohe sun leaves on its journey over the northern
half of the ecliptic ia the vernal equinox, nuqtah
For mutaqan3arain read mutaq8tarain.
56

al-i rtidgl al-rabx fI, [bahariP] and *he opposite one
W ere it enters e southern half, the autumnal
akuinoz, nu fah 2-iTtidEl al-kharifT tirx~hi)~.
For equal*, istifit is used as well Ls irtidB1.
The middle .points of the northern and southern
halves. the most distant from the equinoctial (the sum-
.- -
northwards' towards its ascent, g*, and from the
fomr southwards towards its descent, hm$ after its
ascent .l
-
144. Bikam tu sm mu$i%8t al-aalriivir. Astronomers
have agreed t: divide %e cimumierence of
circles, whether great or small,
DIVISION OF CIRCLE into 366 equal parts; those of
the equinoctial are called
amlib, units of time, because its revolution and time
run together like two horses running a race, so that
time, zdn, is called after these divisions, and is
indeed counted by them.2 Those of the ecliptic are
named degrees,. darajah, because the sun on the two
sides of its course ascends and descends among them as
by the steps of a ladder; in other circles they are
simply called divisions (W) .
145. Bikam tuqsamu aq38r al-dawf'ir. Our ancestors
believed the diameter of a circle to be one-third
of its circumference, but
RBTIO DIgMETER
TO CIRC-CE
Archimedes and others showed that
it is nearly a seventh more, so
that if the circumference had 360
divisions the diameter would have 114 6/11 in accordance
with the statement of Archinredea. On account of
this fraction and its unsuitableness for reokoning with,
for really it is like a surd root, Astronomers abandon
The ecliptic is divided into ascending and desoendirrg
halves by the solstices; cf. 378.
2 a m is the pl. of zaman, time.
57

it and employ instead some other number which they
select deliberately and properly so, for they cannot
dispense with some approximate number which will allow
them to study the ratios of the chords to each other.
That which Ptolemy chose wes 120, and that which we
find in the tables of the Sindhind in our possession
is five1 divisions. [less?]
146. ME a1 burii . If the ecliptic be divided into
twelve e q u w g l n n i n g wl th the vernal equinox,
and great circles be drawn through each
SIGNS OF THE division-point, the six circles inter-
ZODIAC sect each other at the two poles of the
ecliptic with the result that the sphere
is divided into twelve se~tions,~ like a melon with
twelve grooves. These sections are the signs of the
zodiac, bur 1. bud , which are 30° long measured
along the e!iigtic, ani 90" broad, north and south from
the ecliptic to its poles. The annexed diagram represents
these signs on one half of the sphere, because it
is impossible to show the whole sphere on a Tlat surface.
Eq
Ec.
N,S. North and
South Poles of
Ecliptic Ec.
or Equinoctial Eq.
1-6 signs, 7 Vernal
Equinox. 8.9. Summer
and Vinter
Solstices
1 So A and P. - 1152360 would make * 3.13. v. India I,
168 W ere the proportion used by Pulisa is stated to be
: 3 l97n250-= 3.1416.
read sharieah - a slice.

147. I& al-mail m G al-kawilkib. The distence
of a star from the equinoctial north or south is called
W, declination, and is measured
DECLIn'ATION AND on the great circle passing through
LATITUDE OF STdRS
it and the poles, while the divergence
from the ecliptic towards
the north or south is called varQ,latitude,and is
measured on great circles passing through the poles of
the zodiac sphere.If the expression mail is used alone
it refers to the sun or the degrees o fhe ecliptic
which it does not leave,but if it refers to the moon or
a planet or a fixed star that must be definitely stated
The expression lard is never used alone,but always
associated with E 6 moon or a star.
In consequence of the fact that the ecliptic and
the equinoctial diverge from each other,it is possibleZ
that a star sho Id be north of both1 or south of both,
or north of oneY and south of the other,4 or distant
from the one and near the other, so as to have a certain
declination and o latitude,5 or no declination and a
certain latitude8 as indicated in the figure.
148. Ma dara 'ah
a l - M ah&. The degree
DEGFtEE ( longi&de)
q
OF A
STAR
of a star
possessing
latitude
is the degree o
the ecliptic intersected
by the
vertical circle
on which the
latitudeis
measured.
N.S.
North &
South Poles
E C ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ C , E O . N ~ .
of Equinoctial,
1 / 7 / / Eq.Great circles
passing through these
on which latitude and
declination are meawned
TPhe copyist remarks that he found this circle empty on
his original. A O ~ and PP also deficient .
59

149. ICam arpm rariid al-si Srah wa avsam mi -lhii.
The decliniZEToTT'IiZ7un is tie same as t&
ecliptic; its Ihaximum, (the obliquity
LATITUDE AND of the ecliptic) as we have found by
DECLINATION observ~tion is 2Z035*. [Same as al-
OF PLBNETS BattEni. Newcomb calculated for 1000
A.D. 29°34'6", Ptolemy 23O51', Ulugh-
Beg, 2~~30~17~, now 23°86v23w.] men this is added to
the highest latitude of a planet we have its greatest
declination. This is represented in the accompanying
table ;
Greatest Greatest Greatest Greatest
Names North South North South
of Latitude Latitude Declination Declination
Planets' , '
0 l
Sun
Moon
saturn
Jupiter
Mars
Venus
Mercury
.
5
3
2
4
6
4
The latitude of the fixed stars is known and does
not vary. Whenever one of them coincides with a
solstice, and the declination of the solstice and the
latitude of the star are both northern or southern, the
sum is the declination of the star north or south. If
the one is north and the other south, the difference is
the declination towards the side of the larger figure.
If the star is not exactly on the solstice, the above
does not apply and it w i l l be necessary to mike a calculation
in each case.
150. ME al-mutapairiyah min al-kawgkib. The following
are the planets, Saturn, Jupiter, Mars, Venus,
and Mercury. They are called mutaQai irah,
PllrNETS erratic, because from tlme to=e+
retrograde from that quarter to which they
are travelling by the second movement, and are still
carried westward by the first. It is this retrograde
movement whi h res&ble s confusion, tahayyur,
andarmgndan . 8
.
1!
5
21
22
5
0 *
!i
3
2
7
6
4
6
8
7
22
5
23
28
26
25
27
29
27
35
35
37
40
56
57
40
0 *
23
28
26
25
30
29
27
35
35
40
43
42
57
40

151. Kaif tatruku QarakathZi wa tarjir

152. I,% al- rulwiyyah min al-kawiikib wavl-sufliyyah
miM. Saturn, Jupiter and tdars are superior planets,
while Venus and hlercury are infbrlcr,
SUPERIOR AND
INFF3IOR PLANETS
as is the moon; but the moon is not
to be reckoned with the other
planet S. The expressions superior
and inferior refer to the position relative to the sun.
They say that the Arabic wore for the sun, shams,
(which also means a collar) refers to the f m h a t the
position of the sun among the planets is as if it were
surrounded by a necklace, iladah [P has shamsah.] All
the conditions of the p l a n h certainly referable
to the sun, especially the luminosity of the moon and
the retrograde movement of the planets.
The difference between the inferior and superior
planets is that the distanoe of ths former from the sun
is restricted and never exceeds a oertain maximum
elongation either in the East or in the West. when they
precede the sun (are east of it) they leave it so far
behind that they become visible after sunset in the emnings.
Their visibility increases wl th the distance
from the sun until the greatest eastern elongation is
reached. Thereafter their movement becomes slower, and
they again begin to approach the sun, when their slow
movement corns to a complete stop. This is the stov
before retrograding, the mqIm lil-rujiir. After this
stop, iqBmsh, they turn back and their retrograde movement
becomes more rapid until. at inferior conlunction. a
they become invisible in the rays of the sun,

But the distance of the superior planets from
the sun is not thus restricted; the sun moves quicker
and outstrips them so that they escape from its rays
and become visible in the east in the morning, their
tashrIq or orientality. 481. Every day their distance
from the sun is increased as they proceed on
their direct course, until at sunrise they arrive at
a point in the heavens, which, if the sun were there,
would indicate a time between the early and late
afternoon prayers. They then attain the stationary
point before retrograding, after which, their distance
from the sun incmasing every day, they reach the
middle point of that course, they are in opposition
to the sun, and have thus attained the greatest
distance possible within their spheres. They then
begin to rise in the east at sunset like the full
moon at the fourteenth night of the month. Thereafter,
the distance between them and the sun begins to
decrease till a point is reaahed at sunset, which,
if the sun were there, would indicate the forenoon.
That time corresponds to the stationary period before
beginning the direct course; thereafter the sun gradually
approaches them till they come within its rays,
and they become invisible in the nest, a condition
described as their ta&rIb, occidentality.
The difference, therefore, between the inferior
and the superior planets is this, that the former are
never further from the sun than the sixth of a circle,
and in the middle of their retrograde course are
occultated, their apparition and occultation occur
both In the east and the west; while the latter
attain the greatest possible distance from the sun
within their spheres, are not concealed at the middle
of their retrograde course but are there in opposition
to the sun. Their apparition is only in the east, and
their ocoultation is restricted to the west.

153. ME al-igtis . A planet is said to be combust,
matariq, v h d comes into conjunction with the
sun, the expression being due to the com-
'COMBUST* parison or the sun with fire, am3 the nonappearance
of the planet when it enters
the sun's rays, suggesting its combustion or destruction.
This phenomenon is cmon to all the planets, and
occurs when they are at the summit or apogee, dhirwah,
of the epicyole. The superior planets differ f n
inferior ones in that the latter show the same phenomenon
at its lowest point or perigee, hat$l~, whereas the
former do not, but are then in opposiricn to the sun.
154. Kaif dhiilika fi'l-qamar. The moon exhibits
the same a-described
as its conjunction,
i 'tima". After its first
CONJUNCTION appearancehe west as a slender
OF MOON crescent in the evening at the beginning
of the month, the illuminated surf ace
grows with the increasing distance from the sun, till
on the seventh evening, halfway between east and west
it looks like a half-circle. When the moon has
travelled 180° from the sun by the fourteenth evening,
it rises at sunset and the whole surface is illuminated.
Thereafter as the distance decreases, the bright
surface diminishes, so that by the twenty-seaond
evening the dark part is again equal to the bright
part; after which the dark part gain8 on the bright
till the crescent shape like that of the new moon is
attained, visible in the east in the morning. In all
phases the luminosity of the moon comes from that
surfece which is towards the sun, consequently when it
enters the rays of the sun, it is concealed, sarilr,

m-*E
we s2'
till after two days it again appears new in the
During these two days it is in conjunction with
the sun, close union, ittigSl, as Ptolemy describes it
in the Majisti, and sorhas come about to speak of
this as companionship, muqEranah, rather than- as
combustion, iQtiraq.
The o~posite position of the moon, full moon,
badr, imtii6' , when it confronts the S&, is knowh as
m q b r
155. Kaif zi Bdah n6r al-' anar wa nu sinuhu.
The moon is a non!luminous glo:ular body k-
brightness is due to the rays of the sun
WAXING AND which fall upon it as they do upon the
WING
OF MOON
earth, mountains, walls or the like,
the other sides of which are not
illuminated. men the moon is in
conjunction with the sun, it is between us and the sun,
because it is lower and the rays fall on that surface
which is towards the sun, while we see only the
surface facing us, and are unable to distinguish the
dark mass of the moon from the blue1 of the sky on
account of the dazzling light of the sun, until the
moon moves a little f'urther away from it. Then a small
part of the illuminated surface comes into view if
the evening twilight is not too bright, and we have the
new moon.
Owing to the spherical form of the moon, the
margin of the sun's rays which fall upon it is necese
ily circular, and so much of the illuminated half as
comes into view is also bounded by part of a circle
P. kabiidl, A. lSzwardiyyah, from P. 1.19 jward, lapislazuli
.
65

so as a result of the intersection of these two circles
on the spherical surface, the interval between them is
at first crescentic like the slice of a melon. As the
distance from the sun increases, the illuminated
surface grows until it equals the dark part, and this
is oalled the first quarter, tarbip, because the sun
and moon are distant from eacmer by quarter of a
circle. This equality or the bright and dark parts
occurs also at the second quarter. At full moon, when
it is separated from the sun by half a cirole, the
whole of the surface illuminated by the sun is visible
to us, as may be seen from the d1a~ram.1
Modified by the substitution of parallel rays for the
sun, and by the representation of the real conditions
of illumination, together with the appeerance of these
from the Earth.

156. Lam ikhtzss al- amar mln bain al-ka*kib
bizlyidah wa nuq4En.a-nu:. Opinions of intelligent
-differ
as to wky this
PHASES PECULIAR waxing and waning of the moon is
TO MOON? not shared by the other planets, and
as to whether the planets are selfluminous
like the sun, or merely illuminated by the
rays of the sun falling on .them.
lr!any assert that light is exclusively the property
of the sun, that all the stars are destitute of it, and
that since the movements of the planets are obviously
dependent on those of the sun, it may be assumed by
analogy that their light is in the same position.
But others believe that all the planets are luminous
by nature with the exception of the moon, and
that its special peculiarities are its paleness and
absenae of brilliancy. Thia opinion is more in accord
with the truth (as long a8 there is no evidence to the
contrary) and that their concealment under the rays of
the sun is just like their non-visibility in diffused
daylight, which by its intensity so affects our vision,
that we are unable to perceive them. But any one who
looks out from the bottom of a deep pit by day may see
a planet which happens ta pass over the zenith, because
his vision is relieved from the intensity of light by
the surrounding darkness and strengthened by it, tor
black conaentrates and strengthens vision, while white
dissipates and weakens it.
Whether the higher planets are self-luminous or
not, they are always to be seen in the same condition.
For if the moon were above the sun, it would cease to
present the phenomena of waning, inthilh, and would
always appear as full moon.
The si$uation, however, with regard to Venus and
Meroury is this, that if they are not luminous, there
would be a difference in the amount of their light when
at their greatest distance from the sun, and when
approaching their disappearance in its rays at conjunction,
for indeed they are lower than the sun, and no
such dif rerence is observable.

It is therefore preferable to regard the planets
as self-luminous, while the special characteristics of
the moon and the variety of the phases of its light
are due to C three things, its captivity (by the sun,
conjunction), basta I irifta x,P] its pale colour
and absence o f d & M t a position below the
SU .
157. Km al-kalPlikib al-thsbitah. The fixed stars
in the heavens are so multitudinous that it is
impossible to enumerate them, yet those
FIXED STARS diligent investigators who have
endeavoured to recognize them and to
determine their positions in longitude in the signs,
and their latitude north and south of the ecliptic,
observed that they differ in size and have consequently
established a scale of magnitude$ qadr, fuxn, to the
two first degrees or which astrologers giT&-the name
of glory, sharaf. Of the first magnitude there are
fifteen stars, of the second, forty-five, of the third,
two hundred and eight, of the fourth, four hundred and
seventy-four, and of the fifth, fifty-eight.
Among the stars of the sixth magnitude there are
nine stars which Ptoleny described as 'dark', mu~lim,
apart from three others not counted with them,xich
together are called dhiiV8bah and QafIrah, the tresses,
(Coma Berenices) , gZsn-dRrr, the l z a r e r
Stars which are smaller than the sixth magnitude
cannot be separately distinguished by our vision, or
if they are can only with difficulty be kept under
observation.
.

Apart from these there are five stars of the
character of the milky way, like fragments of cloud
latkhat which are called nebulae. With them the number
3 stars registered is one thousand and twenty-two in
all.
168. Fa kaif maPrifah hadhihi al-thaebit. It
would have been possible that a separate name should
have been invented and given to each of
HOW TO the fixed stars, were it not for the
KNOW THEM length of the task, and the difficulty
of keeping them in mmory; but all
nations, espe oially the Arabs, Hindus and Turks, have
imagined them grouped into figures, with which they
have associated various romances and fables.
The Greeks also have imagined lines round these
groups, and out of them have ~0nSt~cted constellations,
so aa to make it easier to point them out when
discussing their import or references to them in books,
or when two people, familiar with the outline of the
constellations, refer to the position of a star as in
the hand or foot of such and such a figure.
Of such constellations there are twelve in the
zodiac belt, twenty-one north thereof, and fifteen towards
the south. Associated with sorne or them are certain
Stars, which are described as 'outside * .
159. M5 al-suwar allati TaliS mints at a1 bum .
The constehations in the zodiac belt -er
ZODIBCAL
CONSTELLATIONS
which the signs of the zodiac are
called. Beginning from the vernal
equinox they are:-
1. ARIES, al-gamal; barrah,l represented in the
form of a ram hm--recumbent,ut looking backwards
with the mouth resting on the back.
2. TAURUS, al-thaur; Bv, in the form of the forepart
of a bull, cut in two% the navel, and with the
head bent down as if about to gore.
The Arabic names of the constellations are followed
by the Persian ones, separtited by a semicolon - these
only occur in the Stabtables of the Persian IBS, ff.
37-38 PL. 25-26 PP.

3. GEMINI, al-taatamHn; du aikar, two boys
standlng erect, one of them h&m round the
other's shoulder:
4. CANCER, -il-sarat~n;. kharcheng, like a crab.
5. UO, al-&sad. G,
6. V I R G o ~ dlshiza. b ~ bB khlsha, in the
form of a maid with two wlnes and a flowing skirt. (in
her hand an ear or two of corn directed t,oolthe bottom
of her skirt)P.
7. LIBRB, al-den; tarEzii, like a balance with
scales;
8; SCORPIUS, a1 a rab kazhdun ' as a scorpion;
9. S A G I ! r T A . R I U ~ ; ~ i in ~ the z , folm of
a horse as far as t h e m f the neck, from which
there projects half of a man from the region of the
loins upwards; he has long tresses, is fitting an
arrow to his boa, which he has stretched to Its utmost.
10. CAPRICOR~S, a1 ad: Bla, the front
hall like a kid, the h&ik-to
the end of
the tail,
11. AQUilRIUS, SE ib cl-mlf *; rIzanda Bb, a man with
both hands o u t s t r e t m e of them a pitcher
which he has turned upside down, and from which water
is flowing towards his feet and runs down from them.
12. PISCES, samakah; ~ h l represented ,
by two
fishes whose ta1l'~oi~together by a thread
called the thread of linen, -3 al-kitt8n.
Although the Arabic name for Aries is al-QaI'ual,
a lamb, kabsh would be more correct, becausert,ismore
like o r= account of its horns; similarly
Capricorn, In Arzbic jadl, a kid, should really be
called tais, a goat, on eccount of its head; the Hindus
call it?, (mugger or crocodile) which is the name
of a mar ne animal.
The common people call Gemini al-'auz8' instead
of al-taulamEn; Virgo, al-sunbula i n h o f
al-Fa'adhrtil; Sagittarius a aus for al-rhr; Aquarius,
al-dalw instead of sBkib%; and Pisces, al-Qiit
for al-samakah, but the nbines given in the first place
are the correct ones.

160. ME al-suwar al-shamhliyyah. The following
are the Northern Constellations. 1. URSAMINOR,
al-dubb al-ag-r; khlrs kiich&c.
NORTHJ3R.N 2. URSA XAJOR, al-dubb al-akbar;
CONSTELLATIONS khirs buzur . Bot are p c ured as
d n n a wA tail: iutstretched.
3. DRBCO, al-tin&; AzhdahR, is represented
as a very long serpent with~onvolutions;
it is coiled round the north pole of the ecliptic. -
4. CEPHEUS, qifgiis or fiqiiiis, is a man with a oonical
hat alansuwah, and is resting on one knee. He has
bothhstretchecl, as is the case with 5.
BOOTES, al-raww8', the shouter, who-is erect. 6.
CORONA B- al-fakkah, al-iklil al-shamiili,
aqrat al- a t a waTl-masakin; afsar, is generally
&own as tye eggart s dis . ~T~ERXJLBS, al- 'ithz
rukbakig; zkii nishEstah, is repreBen&
man kneeling. 8. LYRA, liiri, al-sanj; chang ram'i, as
a Greek lyre, but it is sometimes called a tortoise,
-. sulhaf 8h. 9. CYGIWS , a1 da '8'ah mZiki an, i s like a
duck- neck and winRi%i&h~hdhe act of
ghoul. 12. AURIGA, . numsik al- %nEn; ~Irandah-~anZn,
is a man with a whip in one hand and holding the reins
in the other. 13. SERPElTMIUS, al-ham5 * miir af ss'
the serpent-charmer, standing over a serpent,+'
al-ga ah; Gr, the head and tail of which he holds
~ f - v e ~ s head.
15. SAGITTA, al-sahm; tir, also called al-bulahL and
al-nauk; becaGF?f3-is a long, thing of indefinite
form, and beys many names suggested by its resemblance
(to an arrow) . 16. AQUILA, al-'uqiib is an eagle
seated on the arrow.
biilah a short sword, naukP* for beak or nib.

+
17. DEISHINUS, a -dulfIn, a marine animal like an
inflated water-skin; it is friendly to man, accompanies
boats, rescues the dro ed, alive or dead, (and plays
about in groups of tenp. 18. EQUULEWS, al-fares alawual,
pictured as the head and neck of a horse, and
therefore referred to as rat al-faras. 19.
FEGASUS, al-faras al-th&ftthe fore part of a horse
with two wings; there is no man with it, for it is cut
in two at the navel, like Taurus above described.
20. ANDROMEDA, anddda, she is the woman who has
never seen a husband, i: al-marat allati lam taS baqan,
also al-musalsalah; zan bB. zanjir, the chained woman,
who stands erect, and according to Abii al-EJusain al-
@ifr this chain Is around her feet, while ArE$us,3 who
described these constellations, placed the chains on
her hands, so that she is as it were suspended by them.
21. TRIANGULUM, al-muthallath; sih SE, its figure
oorresponds with its name.
161. MH al-suwar al-janabiyyah. The southern
oonstellat'ions are fifteen in number. 1. CETUS,
pus, this is a sea-monster with two
SOUTIIERN eetand a tail like a birdrs. 2.
CONSTELLATIONS ORION a1 abbb auz8 , the tyrant
with be&h&r*k.
ERIDANUS,
al-nahr; B, like a river with many bends. 4. IDUS,
suggest . 11. CENTAURUS, ~taurus, like Sagittarius
is represented as half man end= horse I just as the
Centaur is described in the Greek books).P 12. LUWS,
al-sabUr; shh. This is a wild beast which the Centaur
haszedbythe feet, and holds aloft. 13. AFtA, ale-bumer.
14. CORONA AUSTRBLIS ,-
.afsar. 15. PISCIS AUSTFtALIS, g-
1 giqq. P. khrk.
avbpa P? EiTibe.
3 SO in P, but Azarftas in A.

The translation of the matter
on the oppostte page is to be
found at the top of p. 73.

The last two constellations must not be confused
with those of similar names (Corona borealis and PiscsE)
in the northern and zodiacal constellations.
162. Fa kam kawkab fi kulll siirah. There are
differences of opinion as to the iiumber of stars in
each constellation, both as to number and
NUMBER magnitude, also as to whether a particular
OF STARS star should be regarded as outside or not.
The following tables present a catalogue
oonvenient for referenoe and study.
Northern Magnitudes
Constellations 1 2 3 4 5 6 '8arlC nebulae
1 Uraa minor
2 1 4
S?
7
0utside
1
1
2 Ursa major
6 8 8 5
27
Outside
1 2 1 4
8
3 Draco
8 1 6 5 2
31
4 Cepheue
1 7 3
11
Outside
11
2
5 Bootes
4 9 9
22
Outside 1
1
6 Corona bontalis 1 5 1 1
8
7 Hercules
6 1 7 2 9
28
Outside
1
1
8 LYra 1 2 7
10
9 Cygnus
1 5 9 2
17
Outside
2
2
10 Cassiopeia
4 6 1 2 1
I Summars 12110140194131181 4 1 - 1189

Northern
Constellations Magnitude8
continued 1 2 3 4 5 6 'darIC nelmha Sum
The total number or stars in the northern constellations
is therefore 360, of these 3 are of the first
magnitude, 18 of the second, 81 of the third, 177 of
the fourth, 58 of the fifth, 22 of the sixth including
the dark onea, and 1 of the cloudy ~ate~ory.1
The MS has 28 and 167 in this sumnary for 18 and 177.

Zodiacal
162
Mamitudes

southern
6 Canis minor
1 Fomalhaut omitted, already assigned to Aquarius.
2 The tablee are identical with Ptolemyvs except that
l/ Heroules and Libra have respectively 6 and 2 stars
or the third mag: instead of 5 and 3; 2/ outside Libra
there is an additional star of the 3rd and one of the
6th Lacking, 3/ that Argo has 10 of the 3rd and 20 of
the 4th inatead of 11 and 19 respectively.

163. Fa ha1 turraf hadhihi al-th8bitah bi a d *
- ukhar. All peoples, especially desert-dwellers, have
given names to the stars in aocordance
STAR NAMES with resemblances which they suggest.
Those which are best known in our day
are names given to them by the Arabs, acaordlngly I
shall mention those which are most current.
In Ursa minor at the tip of the tail there is
a bright star of the third magnitude aalled the kid,
judaiy,l (the pole star) the signifiaanoe of with is
great as it is regarded as occupying the place of the
north pole; in our times there is no bright star
nearer it. On account of this position it is of great
service to my one d recting himself to the qiblah
[or for orientation, 4 ] beoause it does not sensibly
alter its position.
On the fore part of the body are two bright
stars of the second and third magnitude, al-far ad-
(the two calves) and betmen them2 and t h e '
group of inconspicuous stars confronting them disposed
in the form of a myrobalan, halzla I Some people call
it a iimh, and others the m i d ; fa's al-raM,
( BsiyH P) on account of their belief that the pole is
in the midst or the roup, [and that these stars are
revolving round i tl.#
A11 of the stars of Ursa minor are sometimes
called the smaller children3 of the bier, banat narsh
rB, owing to the similarity of their dis-
""?F- on to stars of like name in ~rsa mador, bast
narsh al-kubrE. On account of the closeness ofthe
north pole to these baniit, it is sometimes called the
pole of the banat navsh.
diminutive of jadT.
2 supply al-farqadRn before kaw&kib.
3 banat is generally interpreted as plural of E,
daughter, but Lane points out that when ibn, son, is
applied to an inanimate object, its piu-is also
ban8t.

The larger banzt al-nafsh of Ursa major are seven
bright stars ( oalled in Persian hart varan ) Pour of
which disposed in a quadrangle f s t d s h or bier
while the other three on the tail are the bani3t (or
mourners). That on the tip of the tail, furtheat away
from the bier, i called a1 S'id the one in the
middle al-vlm6 B lose t&ia a -11 star just
within 4 ; s of vision %l-sub&, while thgt at the
root or the tail is oalled a m
Below the banat napsh &legs of the bear are
a number of amall atars in pairs which are called
alazibE*, leaps of gazelles, astan-i ahwh P, and are
me= to their hoof-prlnts.%he bier is
a semicircular group of stars named the tank, Q=$.
The four atars on the head of Draco are oalled
fawi3*idh, (camels mich have recently foaled) ad sometimes
the falling cross al-galIb al-wEi iv, an& betwe$n
-em and the farqadm a n ~ O d al- s ,
and al-Wbiin3 bulls or wolves.
On the left foot of Cepheus there is a star called
a shepherd, al-ri1X, another between the feet, hi8 dog,
and a numbern body, his sheep.
Outside Bootes there is a star opposite the b a ~ t
called al-simHk al-rBmih, (the high spear-bearer
Arcturua) ; his spear is'formed by two stars from IWWI&S.
It -is called simlik on account of its high altitude. In
a line with it towards the south is another star large
and bright ,al-sim8k al-awzel, (the high unarmed one) ,
because there is no other star near it to serve as a
weapon. ( Spica virginis. ) Arcturue is sometimes called
the guardian of the northern heavens b'iris al-shid-51.
Stars which are on the breast and arm or Hercules
form the northern row, al-nasaq al-SW, while some on
the forepart of the Serpent of Serpentarius make the
eouthern row, al-nasaq al-yamiIn'i. Between the two rows
is the garden, al-rawdah.
usually translated 'kid*, but according $0 Tallgren
*Us nombres de las estrellasw p. 664 vannaq Wnbracing'
(the little ~uhd? kpco-r6AoS v. Boll, Sphaera p. 81)
For legends renardin~ the two stars, cf. R.H. Bllen,
tar ~&es p. z46.
9 misspelt in YLS. 3 for dhi?bEn or ru*bZn.

The bright star in Lyra, al-nasr al-wzqi: (Vega)
called the falling or the sitting vulture, because its
wings are folded, two small stars, which to ether with
Tega resemble a trivet, uthfi ah, dI i a$. Vega and
the hewt or s~orpiu~, 6 r are e called alharr(lr(ln.l
[dogs bark12 on accouzt of the cold]
[because they are so clearly visible in w1nterp.j
The stars on the breast and wings of Cygnus are
called the horsemen, al-fawgris, and the bright one on
the tail, the follower or pillion-rider, al-ridf.
A bright star on the chair of c a s s i o m known
as al-kaff al-khaqIb, or the henna-stained hand of
y , the ~ leies, the nebula of Perseus being the
t is also called the camelt$ hump, san8on, by
the Arabs who make a camel out of the stars of Cassiopeia
and others.
Capella, the large bfight star on the shoulder of
Auriga, is cal ed Eil-rai the smaller one lower
down, al-fanz,i t h d k , and the two further down
the g o m d s , al- adiHn it is on this account that
they call Capella -&: t e goa herd, al-fauSz.3
Altair, the briat star on the nin~ of A~uila, is
called the ilying vul-ture, al-nasr al-$gvir, and the
four stars (like a rhomb on the head]P of-the Dolphin
are known as the flying cross, al-salIb al-pltir.
The four areat stars forminst %be bodv om~asus
are called the-bucket, al-dalr, &d betwekn them-and
the Fish there is the f m a , baldat al-tharlab.
Now this fish ia not Pisces but one which the Arabs
picture to themselves out of some stars of kndharuddha
aqd others. Two of the stars of Triangulum are
oalled the companions, al-anisain.
The Arabs do not p'icture the constellations of the
zodiac in the way described; there is no trace of them
exdept in three cases. The first ia Aries where the two
stars on the horns are called na$h and natk@, which is
an indication that they were tmding or6 ram butting.
The second is Scorpiue which is conceived entirdyin the
Greek my. The third ia Leo: but their lion is fashioned
1 P. ha&rELn,AO huu&riIn;Al-harrSrEn, v.Lane under harra :
also the oold Syrian months Kanlln I & 11,Dec. & Jan.
2 P. buz, buzghElagEn, buzvZin and buzb-:
3 usually read fin&z, she-goats or A0 ranHq, but see
Dozy and Tallgren p.675 - d8z is more usual than
'annEz, for asgoat-herd.QazwIn1 (Ideler p.90) *they call.
Capella and the kids In my copy of Q. ritiq.
.)l
c;! 9 d
.b1-;3u;
f 9 ('=+g\
*!&,+~L&L++
cJ ' C /
,,,~~;~&&~~\4$b+3btb~1~q~
G: b.
> * I*' ' '.

out of sane five oonstellations,only the eyes, forehead,
neck and shoulders, and the tail-tuft belong to Leo,
while they make one fore-leg out of the heads of
Gemini, the other out or Canis minor, the nose out or
Cancer and the hind-legs of the two simtiks.
The Pleiades, thurai a arvfnp, they set down as
a head with two han&if%~~h is the khadxb whioh
was mentioned in Cassiopeia, whose finger-tips, aniPmil,
are stained with henna; if we proceed from thesetowards
the Pleiades we find a series of stars which
represent the mist, the elbow, the shoulder, and the
shoulder- joint, rLtiq,l The other hand is the kaff alfrom
stars in the head of Cetus;. it i s m
', amputated, beoause the row of stars *iah
to it from the Pleiades is shorter.
Al-dabarHn is aalled rani%, a big male camel;
round m are a number of young-females alBtie like
the y z g of the old females, n+, rhil; th.k.small
stars. his dogs. are near each o her in the narrow gap,
him and the Pleiades, (*ioh brings -
They call the heads of Gemini the exterded arm,
dhirEr al-mabsiilah, of their lion, and the two stars of
Fanis minor, Procyon, al-shirrd al-shaPlyyh, and its
companion, mirzam, the contraoted arm, dh al-
-AB In the ~-- bodv of Cetus are swken of as
ostriches narh2it,2 ahd cows, ba ar, irhile the large
one in themogether d th &-in the mouth of the
Southee Fish, Fomalhaut , ram al-hiit, are the two frogs
Qif da 'Bn.
O r i o n is called jauz8' instead or 81-jabbllr, and
his belt a string of pearls, ni?&n, or a row of maids,
,jawy&lr; out of mm. of the stars of ~rldanu.8~ they make
a c
r for him, and of some from Lepus a throne. The
large bright star (Sirius) in the mouth of Orion*s dog,
Canis major, is nemed al-shirri al-ya~@niy~rah, and the
, for taxy relate4that (both or
1 That part of the shoulder on rhioh a cloak or
a shoulder-belt rests.
'camel-birds* ; nar5, the species
a single ostriohglmal na*BmELt; it ha8
another plural nprHtim. naram, pasturing aattle
including camels or oamsls alone, plural, 8n#frim.
3 PL has h ad* by mistake for nahr, PP, jS3.
v. poaoike, Specimen, p. 136.

the dog-etara are si sters of Canopus, suhail, and that 1'
the greater dog-star crossed over the -way to the
south with Canopus, while the lesser remained on the
Syrian side and became blear-eyed,
Among other stars of Canis
known as the oath-takers and oath-breakers, muhlirain
and ithai ha in, because any one who does notxSr"---
~anopua~mistakes these stars when they arise for
Canopus and its mirzam, [and takes oath to thia effeot;
when Canopus really appears he is perjured?l They are
known as the two stars.
In the neck or Hyara there is a star known as alfard,
the solitary one ; stars of Corvus form the ~riitj
m, khibE*, and the throne of the sim6k; those or
~raterxmanger, Wlaf;] y d those in the body of
Hydra are the ribs,-sIf, and within them horses
and foals khail2 wa ail&*. The stars of Centaurus and
Lupus are bnown as bunches of grapes, shdrlkh, while
those of Corona australia arg regarded as a cupola or
as an ostrioh's nest, udhi~ry al-nark, that is the
place where it lays its eggs.
With regard to other star-names we have not
brought them forward, either because there is much
disagreement about them or beoause we have not heard
them sufficiently dietinctly.
164. Fa mii mankil al-qamar. Ae the zodiao, the
oouree or B e 8un in a year, is divided into twelve
equal signs, so also the path of the
WSZONS OF moon aslong the fixed stars is divided
THB MOON
inta daily stations,the mansions of the
moon. Of them there are twenty-seven
according to the Hindu8 and twenty-eight accorUng to
the Arabs. Just as the signs are oalled after the conatellatlone,
so the mansions are oalled aiter the fixed
stars in which the moon is stationed for the night.The
begin as in the case of the sun at the vernal equinox. 3
1. al-shara)ain, (two signals), the first mansion,
is marked y WO bright stars on the horns, sarff
of Aries; the: are disposed in a north and s d z 8 .
the apparent distance between them, about a fathom,
being the same as that between the southern one and a
third smaller star. Also called the butters,
1 The translator into Persian was unfamiliar with thia
word; he translates it the Championle head sar-i asrf
a1 sar-i pahlavan (aaTt, a skilled swordsman),
2 misspelt. 3 read irtidgl.
81

Generally, and especially by poets, the number is mpposed
to be seven, but this is a mistake. Although
the term is applicable to everg star, thuraiya
alone is specially distingyished as 'al-najm*.
4. Al-dabarh is a large shining red star in the
easterly eye of Taurus. The head of Taurus is shaped
like a bowl with its mouth to the north, (while the
muffle1 of the bullg(mouth and lips) are directed
south. )P Aldebaran, the 1 follower' of the Pleiades is
also called tSbir al-na jm.
S. Al-ha is formed by three small stars from
the h e a d d n arranged like a trivet, so olose
together that they look like one. On this account
Ptolmy regarded them as a single nebula.
6. 81-hanra, two small stars from the feet of
Gemini, the one smaller, the other somewhat brighter.
7. U-dhirZiC, the extended foreleg bf the Arab
lion, for the contracted one is formed by Procyon and
its mirzam (a mirzam is a small star, coupled to
another bright one). 81-dhirgr is formed by two bright
stars from the bads of Gemini, distant from eaoh
~ther as much as the distanoe between Al-sharelain.
8. Al-nathrah, the nose of the lion, formad of
two small stars of Cancer which are interpreted as
the nostrils. Betweem them'is a nebula whiah some call
the lion's uvula,lah8t, malzzah,~, but the Greeks call
the stars the two asses, QiGrain and the nebula, the
manger, maflaf, (praeaepe)-
9. m i , the eyes of the lion; these are two
bright sEsTne from Leo, the other from outside it,
apparently about a cubit3 from each other.
L * '
~&5+&l-;J1$3U;;1\3
-L
<
\ ' \";J(&\g~&~'$\ v +/S&&
348 .. 6 'a-> t
4 ~'c.LreLb3
* G # ,
J[~&M;LL- Ls,psacid>,~\~~~ P&\.+\ i.
'. \ t, -. *E
,\:~,+*L>~G;L~ - . 9!L&~&-3
~J>~~t~+b.elj~,&,315\ ~i\
A, * / .* 2
9 *
t
P i
Z, t
1 bzniyash PL. PP has pish.
2 and hEdI al-najm, the leader. t'ibir also ocoure as
diminutive tuwalbi r v. Philby , Arabia of the Wahabis,
60. Ptolemy calls it Azpna3 i a ~
B'Tho measures rumh, dhirEr and ehibr, spear, cubit,
span, appear in P as nlzah, arsh, and bidast .

10. Al- abhah, or jabhat al-asad, the lionls
forehead, i-
S formed by four bright stars, not in a
straight line from north to south. The largest .and
bri~htest and most southerly is the heart of Leo.
lion, formed
by two stars from the hind-quarters of Leo, distant
more than a cubit. Also known as al-khar~tEn.1
12. A1 arfah is a bright star at the tip of
the tail +ut according to the Arabs on the
tail itself, (and is regarded by them and the
astrologers as the scrotum.P) 81-dafirah (coma
Berenices) is the nroup of 8marimike the
Pleiades forming the tcft of hair, hulbah, at the
tip of the tail.
13. Al- rawwZi: four stars running (from north to
southlp and curving at last like the letter l&;
they are from the breast and wings of Virgo, and the
Arabs speak of tham as dogs barking behind the lion.
14. Al-sMk, the unarmed one of the two
considerea by the Arabs to be the hint3 legs of their
lion, but acoording to the Greeks al-%zal is an ear
of corn,cr~xu~ , in the hand of Virgo which the
transl-ators have rendered by sunbulah, (Spica). It
is mnbulah by whioh the sixth sign is so well-known.
It occupies a similar position to that of al-taflrah
(in its relation to Leo.)
15. ~l-~hafr is formed by two small stars on the
train, dhail, of Virgo, quite inconspicuous; the name
is deri-rom their ooncealment.
16. 81-zub-, the claws of the scorpion, two
stars from the scales of Libra, whioh are at a spear's
length2 from each other.
17. ~1-iklI1 or the crown, three bright stars
from the forehead of Scorpius, arranged in a slightly
ourved line from north to south.
1 as in PL~ fnd ~e2.XharE$ih in PL and PP. KharBthh
in A0 and A0 . v. Lane I1 p. 717.
qidi mmQ.

18. U- alb, i.e. qalb al-raqrab, the heart or
Scorpius,&s, is a red snd trembling star
astrologers describe as having the nature or Mare; in
front of it is another star, and behind it a third,
the three being disposed in a curve.
19. AI.-shaulah, the sting or scorpius, which is
turned rorrards over the joints of the tail; two stars
bright, but not large, separated by about a span fram
eat& other.
e0. Al-nar~~im,l the ostriches, four bright
stars from the bow. arrow and foreleg or the horse
of Sagittarius fodng a quadrangle. The Arabs compare
the milky way to a river, and these stars to ostriches
going to the river, nark wiiridah al-nab, while there
are four others which they speak of as narh sgdirah,
returning from watering.
21. Al-baldah, an area or the heavens behind
Sagittarius, devoid of stars, and compared to a desert
or to a gap (betweeh the eyebrows)P. The stars which
border it (on the mst)P from the tresses of
Sagittarius are called al- ilZdah, the necklace.
22. Satd al-dhibip~iilcer;
here are
two stars, not bright, disposed horizontally with
more than a cubit betmen them; both are on the horn
or Capricorn. Near them is a third star which the
Arabs aall a sheep about to be sacrificed.
23, Sard bulav, the glutton, marked by two stars
on the left hand of Aquarius, between them is a third
about to be devoured by the glutton.
24. Sard al-suPud, three stars in a row from north
to south from the tail of ~~pricornus and the shoulder
of Aquarius.
1 According to Ideler p. 186, narb unlikely, probably
originally naram, cattle; but Brehn, VI, 198, speaks of
. troups of Ostriches watering daily.

25. Sard al-akhbiyahl is marked by four stars
on the right hand of Aquarius; the outline of the
group resembles a duck's root; three of the stars
form a triangle which conceals in its interior the
fourth, the lucky one. According to the Arabs these
are not the only fortunate stars, for there hire many
outside the manaions of the moon - whioh - . are.
- - - - -
26 and 27. dl-far& el-em1 and al-thEd or
muqaddam and mlakhkhar, are each marked by two
stars, situated a speari S length from each-other, and
all from Pegasus. The Arabs compare the four stars to
a bucket dalw, but the eleventh siga of the zodiaa is
so known;= really means the place for pouring
out the wa T-er, but these are often 1 terpreted as the
upper and lower handles, uwatm. !
.
28. Batn al-hat is m a h w o bright stars
from the hei~mromeaa, near to mhioh is a group
of mall stars in a ourved line, out of whioh the
Arabs make a fish, and these stars are falling into
the wide-open mouth of the fish, whence the name
belly. Others call this mansion riehiIt comparing the
fish to a rope, 80 that the buc3kZ-E iegasus should
not lack a rope.
165. Fa kaif al-tariq 116 marrliah hadhihi alman8zil.
Al-thuraiyah, the Pleiades, is the most
TO KNOW noticeable and the best known
m MAN~IONS of all the mansions of the moon;
it is therefore a uonvenlent -- -.
starting poiht for their study; although any
other point which is familiar on the path of the
moon will serve. Proceeding from thuraiyah, however,
seek first Aldebaran a spearts length towards the east,
Plural of khibE7 a teat , hibeta, to conoeal.
2 The crossed pieces of wood which prevent the leather
bucket fim oollapsing.

a spear's length towards the east, and sharatgn two
spears* length towards the west, then halfway between
shara$En and the Pleiades look out for bu$ain. The
distance between the other mansions is approximately
the same as asoertainsd for these three, 80 that they
can easily be recognized by this procedure. It w ill be
neoessary to inoline slightly to the north or south ao
as to inolude all the stars mentioned.
166. MS rd bitulfir al-manIzi1. The expregaion
ascension idkiEions does not mean their rising
above the horizon, which ocours onoe
ASCENSION OF
TEIE MANSIOHS
every day, but this ascension is like
the condition of orientality, tashrrq,
which we considered in connection aith
the three superior planets. Because when the sun is
near one or the tired stars it conceals it by its
radiance; the star rises by day and sets before the
disappearance of the twilight. This oondition is
described as its ibah, time of invisibility in the
west. This persis $"1T S un 1 the sun moves away somuhat,
so that when the star rises before the sun, the pale
light of the dawn is not sufficient to overoome it.
The beginning or visibility in the east in the
morning, this is the real ascension (heliaoal rising)
and is know as nau' as if the star were rising with
difficulty. ~ustTout the time we hahave described
when the mansion has arisen, its nadIr, the fourteenth
from it, sets. This nadir is alsoxed ra Ib, and its
setting su 3. Between the ascension of tAjacent
mansionsdkre is an inteival of approximately thirteen
1 The root of nau* pl. anws' is diva to rise with
difficulty, but the word has come to mean the setting
of a star in the morning twilight, while at the
same time another rises opposite to it in the east.
The setting of a mansion is supposed to be more
significant from a meteorological point of view than
its rising, which perhal;s explains the change in
meaning of nauv .

days, not exactly, because of the difference in magnitude
of the stars concerned and their divergence to
the north or south.
The tern anwS1 is associated with the rains,
becauee the tixof their occurrence are related to
the setting of the mansions in the morning in the west,
while that of ba-rib refers to the Kinds and is
related to othmea of rain on the ascent of a
mansion escaping from beneath the rays in the morning.
What has been said with regard to rain and other
atmospherical phenomena refers to Arabia, for these
differ very much in places distant from each other,
indeed, in places quite near if their situation with
regard to heat, low-lying or elevated ground, alkaline
desert (or bodies of' water)P, dirfera.
167. E al-ma jarrah . The milky way, kahkash~n,P
ie a colleotion of countless fragments of the nature
of nebulous stars. They form a nearly
TBE GALAXY
complete great circle which paases between
Gemini and Sagittarius, the stars
densely-packed in some places, more soattered in
others, the way sometimes narrow, sometimes broad, and
occasionally breaking up into three or four branches.
Aristotle considered that it is formed by an enormous
assemblage of stare screened by smoky vapours in front
of them, and oompared It to haloes and nebulae.
168. ME al-ta6lI wa ghayr al-tawglI. The proper
order of succession of the signs of the zodiak and of
the mansions of the moon is from one to
SUCCESSION that which lies east of it, for example
OF SICiNS from Aries to Taurus then to Gemini
and then to Cancer; or in the case of
the mansions from Sharath to Bu)ain, then to the
Pleiades and then to Bldebaran. But if one prooeeds
from Aries to Pisoes then to Aquarius and then to
Capricorn, or from ~harathn to Batn al-grit then to
Far& al-mulakhkhar and then to F&& al-muqaddam,

this reverse direotion is described as contrary to
suocession. Now the proper order of succession is in
accordance with the second or easterly movement, but
when a planet is described as in advance of or behind
another this refers to the first or wasterly movement,
oontrary to the order of succession; so the planet in
advanca is towards the west and that bhind further
east.
169. ME al-bufij wa alrmangzil al-shamgligyah
wa al-janabiyyah. Six of the signs are northern, viz.
-- Aries. - Taurus. Gemini, Cancer, Le0
NORTHERN AND and Virgo, because the ecliptic
SOUTH?3RN SIGNS running througb them is north of the
equinoctial; the six others are the
southern signs. vlith regard to the mansions, fourteen
of then are northern, namely those from SharatEn to
Sidk which fall within the northern signs, while the
fourteen from Ghafr to Ba;n al-Gilt are southern.
170. 1"s al-falak al-mumsththal. The plane of the
ecliptic cuts the spheres of all the planets,describing
a circle in each concentric with the ec-
PARECLIPTIC liptic. This is the falak fil-nunaththal,
apsimilated orbit of the planet (the
parecliptic or Nallino). It is oalled assimilated, because
its centre, plane, and divisions are the same as
those of the ecliptio, of which it is a counterpart.
171. Au' al-shams m2i huwa. The au' or the sun is
the highest ioint which it attains idts orbit: the
circumstance that there is a highest
APOGEE OF SUN
point Is explained by .the fact that it
does not travel on the circumference
of its own mumaththal orbit, but rather on the
circumference of another orbit in the same plane but
with a different centre. This is its excentric orbit
al-falak al-au'. The earth is inside this orbit,
consequently tdere is one point where it is nearest to
the earth, and another opposite to that, furthest from
the earth. The latter is knovm as the auj in the Indian
language on account of its height, and in Greek as
afojfyun (apogee) on account of its distance from the

earth. It is the summit dhirwahl of this excentric
orbit. The nearest polnt, on the other hand, is called
in Greek afri (perigee) and af the lowest point
of the or-own
as al-padfa.
Necessarily there are two-GZfnts opposite each
other in this orbit where the distance from the earth
is the men of the greatest and least distanceer;z this
.
is the burd al-auaat, the mid-distance, as may be seen
from t h E n m g u r e
2. mia-distance. 3. mean rate of movement. 4. point
on excents3.0 opposite y.5. sun: 6. its corrected
position. 7. line C-5 produced. 8-5. mean argument.
8. its angle. 9. angle of corrected argument. 6-7.
equation or eun. 10. its angle.
172. E t al-shams 6 hum. The rate of movement
of the sun varies, sometimes it is quicker and sometimes
slower, but necessarily between
MiU3-l MOVEMENT the quick and the slow, there is a
OF SUN mean rate ascertainable by wasuring
its progress in relation to time.
This movement takes place on the circumference of the
1 misspelt in MS.
2 Those points of the excentric to which equal line8
C-2. CV-2 ~roceed from the oentre of the excentric and
the' ointre* of the world.

excentric orbit, and that arc thereof which extends
from a point in the numaththal orbit answering to the
beginning of Aries to the sun's position there ia known
as the mean movement of the sun wasa$ al-sham-.. (4-5 in
figure last page ) .
173. ?KZ al-hiasah al-mstd lilshams. The mean
argument orthesin its ex6entrio or6it is its
distance f mm the apogee, and consequarrWy
MEAN ARGULEEl' if you subtract the distance between
OF SIN the apogee an8 the beginning of Aries
from the man movement of the sun,
there remains the mean argument.
174. Tardil al-shams mFi huwa. If the sun is situated
at the apogee or et the perigee, lines drawn to it
from the centre of the world and that
EQUATION OF SUN of the excentric orbit practically
coincide. That is not the case, however,at
any other point of the orbit,for then the two
Lines meet at the sun but diverge so that the one ??%ches
one point of the mumaththal orbit,and the other another,
the arc of the gmmaththal between the two is the equatlcn
of the sun tardil al-shams.This is an approximate way of
expressing the equation so as to get an idea of it,but
a nore accurate way is dependent on the proposition of
Geometry that angles at the centre of a circle are proportionate
to the arcs opposite them.Thereiore we generally
employ the angles instead of the arcs,and as the
progress of the sun on the circumferenae of the excccentrLc
orbit is equal in equal times, those angles which subtenl
such stages of progress are also equal.It is therefore
the same if we describe the man motion of the sun as
its distance on the excentric orbit from a point oppodte
the beginning of Aries,or as the angle at the centre of
that orbit between a line going to Aries and another to
the sun.Similarly the mean argument is describa8 as the
angle between a line going to the apogee from the centre
of the excentric orbit and another to the sun,and the
corrected argumnt hissah al-mu amamah,as the angle at
the centre of the r6Fla betweenqa line to the apogee and
one to the sun.The two arguments being thus understood,
the difference is the equation of the sun,and its angle
is that between lines from the two centres jcdning 6% the sn.
175. Fa miq&lir al-barakah fI kurat al-shams kam
%.The sun by its mean movement travels every twadiFfbur

hours, fifty nine minutes, eight seconds, twenty thirds
in the order of the succession of the signs. When it
has trawrsed all of these and has arrived back at a
starting point, 365 days, 5 hours and 47 minutes have
elapsed. Such a period is a solar year. The apogee also
moves in the same direction, one degree in every 66
solar years as modern observers have found, but this
differs Prom the estimate of our predecessors in the
matter.
The ratio of the distance between the centre of
the world and that of the excentric oxbit to the radius
of the latter is as 2; 60.
176. ME al-falak al-mZ*il. Like the sun the six
planets travel along the ecliptic, but deviate from it
so~netiGs to the north, sometimes to the
INCLINED south, because they revolve in planes which
ORBITS are inclined thereto, just as the ecliptic
.is inclined to the equinoctial. Their
orbits therefore are inclined orbits, which have different
amounts of Inclination, as well as different points
of greatest inclination and of intersection with the
ecliptio.
The centres of the mumaththal orbits and of the
inclined orbits are identical, viz., the centre of the
world.
177. Ma a1 auzahar. These orbits being inclined
to the eel-ibed,
there are necessarily two
opposite points of intersection, just as
NODES OF in the case of the ecliptic and the
THE PLANETS equinoctial. when theae have to be
distinguished from each other, the one
from which the planet moves to the north is called the
asoending node, e, and the other point of intersection
where it moves to the south, e, the tail.
Although the nodes or points of intersection or passage
of the planet from north to south on its inclined orbit
are called majaz from the root, jgza, jawaza, the word
jauzahar is not related: it refers to the moon where
the nodes are of particular interest: it is an
Arabic form of P. gaviz'har. *In the MEh Yasht the
moon is invoked by the epithet gaochithra, cow-faced."
Haug, Sacred Language of the Parsees, p. 200. In the
case of the moon the nodes are known as the head and
tail of the dragon.

If used without a. y qualification these expressions
refer to the moon; otherwise the planet must be
specified. The nodes are also called fuqdah, knot,
(P. girih) and majaz, point of crossing so that ra's
is called majsz al-shamEl, or al-ruqdah al-shamEi1iyya.h
and the h b , ma jEz al- janiib or al- 'uqdah al- janiibiyyah.
Annexed is a diagrtyn (althou* it is difficult to
represent the inclination on a flat surface P)
M.mumaththa1, 1-inclined Orbits. C.
Nnrth~m
A. Centre of world, B.of de-
178. Falak al-tadw3r m5 hum. An epicycle, taddr,
is a small orbit which does not surround the e a r v t
is entirely outside it. The planet moves
EP1CYCI;E on its circumference with the motion
peculiar to it. 151.
179. IS al-falak al-Qhil. The centre of the epiavcle
travels contj.nuouslyTt he direction of
-L
succession of- the signs on the circum-
DEFERENT ference of an orbit called the deferent,
QBmil, which is in the plane of the
inclined orbimut like the excentric, has a different
centre from the centre of the world.

180. S al-falak al-nuraddil lilmasTr. If the
centre of the epicycle traversed equal arcs of the deferent
in equal times, then the mean
THE EQUANT
rate of the progress of the planet would
be on the deferent, and the angles
opposite these arcs would also be equal; the angles of
the arcs, however, traversed by the centre of the
epicycle in equal times are
not equal, but are so at a
point as far from the centre
of the deferent as that is
from the centre of the world-
This point is the centre of
equal progre ss, the equant,
and is the same for Venus
an& the three superior
planets. All three points are
in the same straight line. It
is necessary to regard this
point as the centre of an
orbit like the deferent, and
to calculate the progress of
the planet on its circumference
from the position pf
the centre of the epicycle,
which may be done by lines
drawn to this point (without
drawing the orbit)P
A, Centre of world.
B C D, of deferent,equant and epicycle.
E F, Apogee and Perigee of deferent; EtF*, of equant.
181. Ma al-dhirwah al-wustd wavl-marliyyah. The
term dhirwah, summit, is used to indicate the apogee
of the epicycle, just as auj is for
APOGEE OF
EPICYCLE
that of the excentric orbit; opposite
it is the perigee, QaQIa. But there
must be distinguished the dhirwah al-
marviyyah .i.e. the summit as seen from the centre of
the world, corresponding to the line drawn from the
centre of the world through the centre of the
epicycle to its upper part, and the dhirwah al-mst6
corresponding to a line from the centre of the equant
in the manner indicated in the diagram on next page.

Centre of world.
Centre of daferent.
Centre of equant.
Centre of epicycle.
Apogee of deferent.
Perigee of deferent .
Apogee of epicycle
from centre of world.
from centre of equant.
182. Iasat al-kawkab ;nB huwa. The man rate of
progress o f clanet is the distance of the centre of
the epicycle from a point on the equant
MEAN RATE opposite the beginning of Aries. The
OF PLBTTET measure of the distance is the angle at
the centre of this orbit formed by a
line to the beginning of Aries and another to the
centre of the epicycle.
183. M5 al-khLggah al-wustd wa7l-muTaddalah. The
distance of a planet on the orgit of the epicycle
from the dhirwah al-wus$6 is known as
BdEAN AND the khgssah al-wustg, argumentum
TRUE ANOMALY rnediK'iean anomai y , and that from
the dhirwah al-mar7inah as the
khgggah al-muraddalah , argumentum ve%, true anomaly,
x l e the difference between the two kh8g;~ah is
called the tard?l al-khzssah al-ii1A.l eauatio
argunenti. The measure oi'the two lkst is the angle
at the centre of the epicycle between the lines proceeding
to the two dhirwah, equation of the centre.2
In Al-Battani, QQgah., portion, but as Nallino observes
11, 329, for the most part other astronomers
call this portion the proper motion, khAggah, of the
g1$zt160tion in longitude of a planet is that or the
centre of the epicycle on the deferent; its movement
on the circumference of the epicycle is anomaly.

184. l& al-$cl al-ausa; warl-muraddal. Mean longitude
is t h m of the angle bounded by two lines,the
one proceeding from the centre of
MEAN AND the equant to its apogee,and the
CORRECTED LONGITUDE other to the centre of the epicycle.
Correc ted longitude , on
the other hand, is the size of the angle between lines,
the one proceeding from the centre of the world to the
apogee of the equant and the other to the centre of
the epicycle. The difference between these two angles
is the size of the angle formed at the centre of the
epicycle by the two lines in question; sometimes it is
called the longitude of the centre.
\
A. Centre of world, B. of deferent, C. of equant, D. of
epicycle. E. apogee, F. perigee of deferent. G. true,
H. mean apogee or epicycle. K. planet. G'H'K', continued
to ecliptio, Ec. G H, equation of centre, 1, the corresponding
angle. G K, true, H K man anomaly, 2, angle
of mean, 3, of true longitude. 4, of position of planet
in ecliptic. G K, equation of anomaly.
The other letters refer to paragraph 203.
95

C
184a. F& tardI1 al-QL9gah al-thbiyyah. The
second correction of the argument, the equation of the
anomsl~. is the size of the angle at
EQUATION OF the ceiiire of the world, which-is
THE ANOMALY formed by lines proceeding thence to
the centre of the epicycle and the
planet respectively .
185. M5 taqwb al-kawkab. This is the point or
the rmunaththal orbit which a line reaches dram from
the centre or the world through the
TRUE POSITION body of the planet. This is its true
OF PLANET position in which it is seen among
the stars.
186. Kaif af1S.k al-qamar. The following are the
various orbits of the moon:- the nnunaththal or
parecliptic, the inclined orbit associated
ORBITS OF
THE MOON
with it, and the excentric or deferent
which carries the epicycle, on the circumference
of which the moon itself revolves.
187. Ilaif al-QaraHt fI kuratihi wa maqiidirhii.
The two ~ohe of the moon's inclined orbit are always
turning in the direction contrary to
MCRIONS OF the succession of the signs round the
THE MOON poles of the rmunaththal orbit; they thus
move the ascending and descending nodes
3' every day in that direction.
The moon itself revolves on the circumference of!
its epicycle; as soon as it begins to move towards the
west from the sununit thereof it travels contrary to
succession every day 130 148, while the centre or the
epicycle turns in the order of succession on the circumference
of the deferent every day 24O 23' ; this is
twice as much as the moon becomes distant from the eun
in a day, and therefore the movement of the centre of
the epicycle is spoken of as the 'double distancet.
Then the centre of the deferent is always turning
in the contrary direction to succession of the signs;
its apogee moves back 11° 9' every day,
Moreover the dhirwah al-mar'iygah of the epiaycle
is always opposite a point, the distance of which from
.'
* .
- S-" 5 . . . - 9
, f
L ,
5' "'Y '
. , LJL X;&L'i
,.,-
pi;:;
..c,>S' ;j\bl~.-~a;~tj!~;~~&~~, i(
6 .* l* L
W
9 .*.' ' * . W
C ::,,,.'.' . C
7
L-x.d>\'jr, '~&'&~~,-2&&>
+>J,~., L
A d,
S L ..
".\I*\ \
. J~-&S.._;J.~~B;$ .- , +<
';A . S . # / :. .' /
Y
.' ..
(r
! L"~"'*~*L.-&'L, Cr t\l
I
0
7. C

\-/'
187-188
the centre of the
world towards the
perigee of the de-
f erent is the Same
as the distance be-
tween the centre of
the deferent and the
centre of the world.
Thi s d i stance
is to the radius of
A, centre of universe and of
inclined orbit, F. B, centre the deferent as
of deferent; BC, circle on
which it moves. C, point
126 : 60, while the
opposite the apogee of the
epicycle, D. DE, diamster of radius of the epiepicycle
oppos te C.
GH, 124; AI, 4; GJ, 60. cycle is : 60.
188. Fa kaif hadhihi al-aQwSl wall-maqEdIr fI11-
kawEkib. All the planets are constantly revolving on
the circunference of their epi-
THESE CONDITIONS cycles; beginning from their
IN TIIB PLBNETS
summits they trarel towards the
east in the direction of S U C C ~ ~ ~ O ~ ,
and therefore in the opposite direction to the moon,
which travels westward and contrary to succession from
its sun;nnit.
The daily movement of the plyets on their epicycles
are as follows:- Saturn, 57 , Jupiter, 54',
Mars, 28*, Venus, 37*, Mercury, 6'; while the
eastward movement of the centres of the epicycles

themselves in their mean movercent relative to the
centre of the equant is for Saturn daily 2', Jupiter,
5', liars 31T, Venus, as much as the sun, 59' and
Biercury twice as much, viz: - 1°58*. IIoreover, the distance
of the centre of the equant from the centre of
the world tzking the radius of the deferent as 60,
is for Saturn 6 3/4, Jupiter 5 1/2, EIars 12, Venus
2 1/12, and the centre of thd deferent is half'way
between these two point S. Agcin in the same proportion
the radius of the epicycle is for Saturn,
6 1/2, Jupiter, 11 1/2, Hers, 39 1/2, Venus, 43 1/6,
Mercury, 22 1/2.
189. Fa kaif anfasil QtEirid minhg. Mercury
requires to be sepZrate1-6ted because the centre
of its deferent elviays turns on the
HOW 1GRCURY circumference of a smtill circle,
DIEXRS whose radius is equal to the distance
between the centre of the equant and
the centre of the world. The centre of the equant is
halfway between the centre of the small circle and the
centre of the world, and all three are in e straight
line,so that the distance of the centre of the deferent

from the centre of the worla is not uniform, the
greatest distance being to the least as 9 1/2: 3 1/6.
As the centre of the deferent turns on this circle, its
apogee moves in the reverse direction to succession of
the signs daily as much as the movement of the sun,
59'. From this it follows that the centre of h1ercuryrs
epicycle and that apogee meet twice every year, just
as the moon's epicycle-oentre and the apogee of its
deferent meet twice a month. Also from the amount of
the movement it becomes necessary that the epicyclecentres
of Mercury and Venus are always with the sun on
the same diameter of the world, whence it follows that
they are combust on the summits of their direot
courses as well as on the lowest points of their
retrograde courses. The superior planets are only
combust when on the summits of their epicycles,
because the centres of these move more slowly than the
sun, remain behind it, and are only beside it when the
planets have arrived at the summits. The diagram shows
the orbit of Mercury.
A. centre of
universe. B of the
equant. C of the
small circle on
which the centre of
the deferent travels.
D the greatest
distance of the
centre of the
deferent from the
centre of the universe.
E the
deferent . F the
inclined orbit. G
the epicycle. The
Copyistrs lettering
must be neglected.

190. Fa fi !cam tatimm adwar hadhihi al-~arakat .
It has already been mentioned that the sun takes5653
days all but the 1/111 part of a day
REVOLUTION OF to- traverse the whole zodiac. That
TEE PLANETS is the solar year, and it is by it
that other complete revolutions are
measured. The movements of the planets are more
con?lex, being compounded of that on the circumference
of the epicyole, and that on the deferent, accordingly
there are two kinds of revolution to consider. As
regards that on the epicycle the complete revolution
in the case of Saturn occupies a solar year and twelve
days; of Jupiter, a year, a month and three days; of
Mars, two years, a month and eighteen days; of Venus,
a year, seven months and five days; of ELercury, three
months and twehty-four days; and of the moon, twentyseven
days, thirteen hours and eighteen minutes.
The revolution of the epicycle on the deferent,
on the other hand, throughout the whole zodiac takes in
the case of Saturn twenty-nine years, four months and
eleven days; of Jupiter, eleven years, ten months and
four days; of Mars, a year, ten months and seventeen
days; of Venus and Meroury, eaoh a solar year; and of
the moon, twenty-seven days, seven hours and fortythree
minutes. The nodes of the moon make a oomplete
revolution in eighteen yeare,seven months and nine dayq

while each of the fixed stars and the apogees of the
planets take according to the calculations of our
anoestors thirty-six thousand years, but to those of
our own tim twenty-three thousand seven hundred and
sixty years (viz. l0 in 66 years) .
191. Fa mB harakat al-falak. T eon of Alexandria
discussed thebment of the orbit which he derived
from those masters of the horoscope, the
!CREPIDATION astrologers of Babylon of ancient times,
OF SPHERE [who were regarded by the people generally
as sorcerers.~~ They were of
opinion that the orbit (the 8th sphere) moved eight
degrees in the direction of the signs at the rate of
one degree in 80 solar years, and then as much in the
reverse direction; [so that multiplying 8 by 80 gives
640 years for the onmd movement and 1280 for that and
the return.]P When the movement is in the direction of
the signs, 1 bE1,that of all the stars and planets is
accelerated% in calculating their positions, it is
necessary to add this amount, while similarly, when in
the opposite direction, idbZr,all move more slowly and
the dunt of this movementmust be deduoted. mether
these statements are true or fa1 se it has not been
possible for any observ r to devote the time necessary
for investigating them. B
192. Fa kaif ra+ al- amar. The inclination to the
ecli~tic of' the inclins&of the moon is constant;
its maximum is 5O north and an equal
LATI!CUDE OF amount south. This is the greatest
THE MOON latitude of the moon; the epicycle is
not affected thereby, because its plane
is in the same plane as the inclined orbit. As the
ascending and descending nodes move in the direction
contrary to the signs, the greatest amount of latitude
or indeed any latitude which may be determined is not
at one point therein, as is the case with the declination
of the sun, which is constant at every point of its
course, its maximum declination bein$always at the
first points of Capricorn and Cancer.
P
Wiedemann IXIV. 207.
Apparently ~1-~IriinI shares 81-BattZnIts view of the
falsity of the trepidation theory.

193. Fa Dif al-~6iGkib alzulwiyyah. Each
of the three superior planets has an inclined orbit,
the amount of the inclination of
LATITUDE OF THE which is constant: their apogees
SUPERIOR PLANETS are in the northern halves of the
orbits. The planes of the epicycles,
however, are not in the same plane as the inclined
orbits, as is the case with the moon, but in one
inclined thereto, in such a way that the perigee of the
epicycle is always inclined in the same direction as
the inclined orbit is from the ecliptic, that is to say,
that if the place which the epicycle-centre occupies in
the inclined orbit is north of the ecliptic, then the
epicycle-perigee is also north, and if south, then
south. This inclination of the epicycle is in the
diameter which passes from the summit to the perigee,
and this for purposes of definition is called the first
diameter, while that diameter vhich is perpendicular to
it is called the second. Rowthis second diameter is
always parallel to the plane uf the ecliptic. So it Is
obvious that when the centre of the epicycle arrives at
one of the nodes of the inclined orbit, the plane of the
epicycle coincides wlth that of the ecliptic, and the
first diameter comes into that plane; then when the
centre of the epicycle passes beyond the node, the
first diameter begins to incline in the oi-posite direction
and arrives at the maxim inclination at a
point midway between the two nodes, there where the extreme
inolination of the inclined orbit is also situated.
So it results fron what we have said that the
superior planets have two divergences from the ecliptic,
one due to the inclined orbit called the first or
mean, dependent on relation to points of the ecliptic,
and a second, due to the epicycle and dependent on distance
from the sun.

194. Fa Kaif rarQ al-E;awkabain al-sufliyyain. In
the case o? both of the inferior planets the inclination
of the inclined orbit is not
LATITUDE OF oonstant but rnoves fron one extreme in
L0;4"r;R PLANETS the north to a similar mount in the
south, this movenent occupying a solar
year. This is called the latitude of the excentric
orbit, Thus there occur in the epicycle two latitudes
one dependent on the movement of the first diameter,
called the latitude of the epicycle, and the
other dependent on that of the second diameter, called
the deflected latitude rs: al-whab or al-iltiwzt.
With regard to the latitude of the excentric orbit,
if the centre of the epioycle is situated in one of
the nodes of the inclined orbit, the plane of the latter
is coincident with that of the ecliptic, while if
it moves into one of the halves of the inclined orbit,
that half begins to incline in the case of Venus to
the north and of Mercury to the south, and reaches its
extreme point with the arrival of the centre of the
epicycle at half-way between the nodes, i.e. at the
apogee. and perigee.
With regard to the latitude of the epicycle dependent
on the first diameter, when the centre of the epicycle
is at the apogee its summit in the case of Venus
begins to move towards the north, and of IJIercury towards
the south, while if it is at the perigee the converse
is the case.

The deflected latitude dependent on the second
aiameter begins with the arrival of the centre of the
epicycle at a node of the inclined orbit, when it moves
into that half in which is the apogee of the excentric
orbit, the eastern side inclines in the case of Venus
to the north and of Mercury to the south, and the western
side in the opposite direction. On the other hand
if the centre of the epicycle moves from a node intothat
half In which is the perigee of the excentric orbit,
the eastern side inclines in the case of Venus to the
south and of Mercury to the north. The inclination
continues to increase until the centre of the epicycle
reaches the apogee or perigee of the excentric.
The latitude of the epicycle and the deflected
latitude are continuous from beginning to end, and the
result of our observations is that the centre of the
epicycle of' Venus is always fo the north of the ecliptic,
and that of Mercury to the south.
195. AujHt al-Kawiikib ain hiya. The movement of
the apogees of the planets in the direction of succession
of the signs makes it impossible
APOGEES OF
PLANETS
to specify their position except for a
definitedate, although themovement is
so slow that it takes 66 years totrav-
erse one degree. At the present time, 420 A.H., 1' their
situations in conparison wlth the results obtained by
1,kQammad bin JEbir al-BattEnT are as follows:-
Sun in Gemini 240 32'
Saturn in Sagittarius 6O 48'
Jupiter in girgo 16O 439
Mars in Leo 8O 339
Venus in Gemini 240 39 *
LIercury In Libra 23O 4st2
-P-
1 There are two other paragraphs in wh. the date of
this work is mentioned viz. 321 and 460.
2 The above figures correspond with those in 80' , D,
ABt,except that Saturn has 60.48' as has A0,corrected on
margin to 6O43' - Nallino 1.239,nho translates thisparagraph
from AP,points out that the difference from Al-
BattiinIts list should be 20 15*,which requirement is
satisfied by the above except for Saturn and Venusdch
should be 240.29'(and is so in PP). The confusion of 3
and 85Zand 20 and 30dj has been referred to in 118.

196. Jauzahariit al-KawSkib ain hiya. The nodes of
the planets according to the observations of the western
oeoples ( the Greeks of RW P) move in
NODES OF the iirection of the signs at a rate
Tp PLANETS equal to that of the apogees and the
fixed stars. This is due to the circumstance
that the movement of the ecliptic orbit is
towaras the east as is that of all the orbits. The
ascending node of Saturn, the distance of which from
the apogee is 80°, is at the present time in 26O 43*
of Aquarius, that of Jupiter, 700 from its apogee in
260 43' of SCOrpiUS.
Those of Mars, Venus and Nercury, each 90' from
their apogees, are respectively in 8O 33' of Scorpius,
24' 29* or Virgo and 23O 43* or Capricorn. But the
ideas of the Hindus [and Persians] as to this matter
are that their movements are different from each other
and contrary to succession like the nodes of the moon
as to whioh there is no confliot; according to their
ideas, in our time the ascending node of Saturn fs at
23O lb* or Gemini, of Jupiter at 12O l* of Cancer, of
Mars at 21° 55* 0f.Aries of Venus at 290 48' of
Taurus, or Mercury at 21b 11' of Aries. In consequence
of the rapid movement of the ascending node of
the moon It is impossible to determine its exact place
without oaleulation.
197. MB al-buht. This is a Hindu mrd for the
daily progress of a planet; they pronounce it bhukti.'
Our associates always apply it
DAILY MOTION corrected rate, but the Hindus dis-
OF PLAKET tinguish between the mean and corrected
rates, (bhukti miy6na and bhukti taq~h9.~
1 PI,, PP have bhutki for bhukti.Bhakt1, faith, devotion;
enjoyment ac. to Burgess, SUrya SiddhSnta 1.27.
bhukti madhyama and sphu$a. India 11, 195.

Ne have already discussed the mean progress, 102, but
it is impossible to determine the corrected rate, there
being no definite limits in which to estimate it, for
sometimes the movement is rapid and the buht high, and
sometimes slow, and the buht low, and again it ceases
entirely when there is no buht or retrogrades when the
buht becomes a minus quantity.
198. ME al-buht al-muraddal. This is the difTerence
betneen the daily progress of the sun and moon or of
two planets moving in the same
DIFFERENCE BETWEEN
RATES OF TWO PLANETS
direct ion but at different
rates. Whenever you desire to
know the time of meting of two
objects travelling in the same direction, one of which
is quioker than the other, you cannot arrive at a solution
without knowing this dif ferenoe, be cause the
changing distance between them is proportionate to it.
The difference is also called hissat al-mash (argumenhm
motGs) and by the Hindus bhukt$=itara.l Sometimes in
place of the foregoing it is necessary to employ the sum
of the two rates of movement, when the planets are
moving in opposite directions one of them being on the
direct and the other on the retrograde path; this is
called by the Hindus bhukti o
re haw no spe oial
cgmbiaed rate' - (but
199. Ma xt.2 Are numbers (of corrected anomaly)
applied to*et
at all points of its excentric orbit,
such that when its distance from the
A TRUE ANOMBLY apogee of the epicycle is equal to the
number, the planet stops and makes no
progress in the zodiac. If the maqk is less than six
signs, it is called [the first maqh, after which the
planet becornss retrograde, but if more than six signs,?
the second maqh after which it enters on the direct
path. Whenever either of these stations is known it is
only necessary to subtract from 360° to find the other.
'1 India I1 195.
The paragraph refers to Ptolemy's Tables,Almagest,Bk.
XII.Cap.8. in which are given these distances at the
various positions of the epicycle on the deferent. cf.
also Nallino I1 138-9. The Dict. Sci. Terms p. 1228,says
Meqb has two meanings 1. the place of the station on
the epicycle (as here), and 2.the stoppage itself for
pich iq5nah is preferable (as often in the TafhIm).
Line dropped in MS.
106

200. Ribiife. This is another name for these stopping-place=t
among our predecessors there were those
who considered the above described conditions
BANDS to be apparent not actual. As they knew that
the movements of the planets were related to
the movement of the sun, they Imagined that the planets
were suspended to the sun by connecting bands ribGtHt,l
hich were sometimes slack so as to allow of m=&=
when near the sun, and sometimes taut, when the planets
were distant from the sun so as to prevent movement and
cause retrogression. This is a foolish idea to which no
attention should be paid, since there is no advantage
to be derived nor results obtainable from it.
201. Ni$E ~ t Zones . ~ or sectors of the orbits are
of two killb>,&se of the deferent and those of the
epicycle. The first are formed
SECTORS OF THE ORUITS by two lines which divide the
orbit into four
parts; one of these
line S come ct s the
apsides where the
rate of movement is
at its maximum inequal1
ty, being slowest
at the apogee
and quickest at the
perigee: at these
points there is no
equation an8 the mean
and corrected positions
of the planet
are equal. The other
line is at right
angles to this and
A centre of universe. B of passes through the
the deferent. C apogee and D centre of the world;
perigee of deferent. E points at its ends the
of maximum equation an mean equation is at its
movement. 1-4 lSt to 48
h
naximum and the rate
nitBas . - of deferent.
of wwnrsnt the mssn mb.
1 In addition to the original meaning of halters, rlDEftEit
were fortified frontier stations,afterwards convents,in
5forocco in which murSbi~~n,l,f~abouts, lived, whence Almoravides
.~ccasionall~ applied to lunar statjms. Cbrmg.3'A.
Nitgq means both ceinture and enceinte.See Nm p.62,who
supposes this expression to he wed l?x the flrst tfme W Bar-

Of these four ni$Eqs the first extends from the
apogee in the order of succession to the point of
maximum equation, the second as far as the perigee, the
third from that point to that of maximum equation and
the fourth to the apogee as in the figure.
As to the extent of these areas if regard be had
to the centre of the deferent, then the first begins at
the apogee, and the others at intervals of 900: if on
the other hand fron the mid-distance,l71, whioh they
call the unequal centre, then the beginnings of the
nI!gqs are shown in the table.
EIif;gqs
1st
2nd
3rd
4th
SUn
sat urn
Jupiter
0 '
. .
..
. .
0 '
91 59
96 31
95 15
0 t
180
180
180
.
.
.
0 '
268 01
263 29
264 45
The second kind of nitEq is that which divides
the epioyclel into four pa&s also in this case by
Saturn in MS. has 268 for 263.
Venus in MS. has 263 for 268.
Msrcmy in EdS. has 264.59 for 266.58,
The figures under the 2nd and 4th nitaqs should add to
360'.

three lines one of which passes from the centre of the
deferent through the epsides of the epicycle, and two
others from the sane point which are tangents to the
epicycle. The conditions as to equation and movement
are the same at the apsides of the epicycle as in those
of the deferent, and the place of contact is anew the
point of maximum equation. These four sectors are
therefore ni$8qEt; the first being at the upper apsis,
on the side of the
direotion or
movement of the
planets proper in
the order of
C C succession of the
signs, and in that
of the moon contrary
thereto.
The others follow
in the order described
for the
deferent as
represented in the
figure. The extent
of these zones if
the tangents are
drawn iron the
centre of the
world or that of
the equant are
A centre of d ferent. B of epi- different in amount,
cycle. 1-4 is'-4th nitlqs of i- but if dram from
cycle of planets. 1'-4' 1st-*%E the centre of
of moon.
the deferent
C. Points reached by tangents
from centre of deferent.

they do not depart from the figures in the acaompanylng
table. When these are compared with the argument
of the planet it beaomes obvious in whiah quadrant it
is.
.Nithes
Moon
Saturn
Jupiter
Mars
Venus
202. al-sirid wa al-Mbit. The expressions aacending
anmgnding are used in various ways, (1)
A planet ascends in the north to the
ASCENDING BND
IBSCENDING
1st 2nd 3rd 4th
. 103 09 180 256 51
96 13 180
263 47
101 03 180 . 258 57
. 131 09 180 . 228 51
135 59 180 . 224 01
. 112 02 1 180
.
0 0 0 O *
.
.
.
.
Mercury I .
limit of its latitude, then it descends
in the north when its latitude
begins to diminish. When it passe8 be-
yond the node and gets into the southern half of its
inalined orbit, as its latitude increases, it desaenas
in the south until it reaches its extreme point, after
which the latitude begins to diminish as it ascends in
the south.
(2) A second use is from the point of view of the
earth, a planet being desaribed as descending when in
the first and second ni$lqs,and ascending in the third
and fourth. (3) Some referring to the mid-distance call
it deaaending when in the seaond and third, and ascending
when in the first and fourth sectors. (4) eafn,
a planet is said to be ascending when between the first
point of Capricorn and the last of Gemini, anddesoendlng
1 Note IdS. has Moon 13.09 for 103.09.
.
. 1 247 58 1

when between the first point of Cancer and the last of
Sagittarius. (5) Finally when described from the point
of view of the meridian as ascending when in the east
and descending when in the west.
203. l& al-zi -dab wall-nu sRn. Increase and Decrease
are of two kEds,one wlthq%~erence to places
on the deferent and epicycle,and the
INCREILSE AND other to situation relative to the hor-
DECREASE izon. Of the former there are various
sorts. 1, Increase of rate of movement,
when the planet moves quicker than its mean rate; this
Is called zBTid fi'l-masIr; when slower, fI1lmasrr.
2. Increase in number.1 The equations o-
+ts are set down in tables2 opposite numbers in
two (vertical) rows,one of which continues to increase
up to six signs,and the other continues to decrease
from the twelfth sign.* Vhen you wish to introduce an
argument number of a planet into these two rows with
the object of ascertaining the squation,if it falls in
the first row,it is called zL'id fi'l-radad,and in the
second naqis fill-radad.
3. 1nc5ease in equation. If the equation is increased
by the addition of the portion,Qiggah,belonging
to it,it is said to be zE1id fill-tardxl,this will be it
the 1st and 3rd nitEqs,but if diminished in the others.
l~ai~~nah must have found this kind of increase as sell
as 3 and 4 incomprehensible without further explanetion.
2~ables of equations of planets, such as Ptoleny, Hegberg
I1 436; Ptolemy, Manitius I1 261; Al-Battani, Nalino
I1 108.
3Comnon ar-nt numbers of mean longitude.
4'8hen both are read d0wn.P
l0
In A they are read up.
360° The argument numbers are so arranged because
the equation is the same for equal
distances from the apogee or perigee; e.g.
180' 180' 135 and 225 have the sam eouation. The
first column corresponds to the 1st and 2nd ni$Zqs,the
second to the 3rd and 4th.
%?tolemyls 3rd column contains the equations calculated
as if the centre of the epicycle were on the equant; the
4th,the difference due to the fact that it is on the deferent:this
difference has to be added in the 1st and
4th nii~~s,above the nodes of the two exoentrics,and deducted
in the 2nd and 3rd. See figure in 184. The angle
DwAZ has to be added to the equation of the centre AM:
above the node to obtain its position on the equant;
D'AZ deducted below. See ?,4anitius I1 413

4, Increase by calculation. This occurs when the
equation of the anomaly has to be added to the true
longitude of the centre to obtain the true, position of
the planet in the ecliptic; it is called zz'id fItlhis2ibt
if it has to be deducted, then na P? i* - is&.
-;crease occurs in the 3rd and 4thAaq: o: !he
deferent, and 1st and 2nd of the epicycle.1
5. There is also incpase-and decrease in luminosity
and magnitude, z2i9id fill-nur watl~zm, due to nearness
or distance from the earth. Some people refer to
the increase as dependent on the constant approach to
the earth from the apogee to the perigee of the epicycle,
and the declease, nE l? fi'l-niir, to the increasing
distance as the planAves from the perigee towards
the apogee. Others speak of the incrsase as being
from the perigee of the deferent as far as the mid-distance,
and the decrease from that towards the apogee;
that is to say, that the mean is at the mfd-distance,
decreases towards the apogee and increases towards the
perigee. Consideration compels the view that paigttion
on the epioycle is chiefly responsible for the dffferenoe,
but the custom of astronomers is to restriot it
to the zones of the deferent. In the case of the moon,
however it is the distance from the sun which counts,
so from the 1st to the middle of the month,they speak
of it as being on the inorease,while others use the expression
zlIt.id fi*l-nUr for the time when it is larger
than half i.e. from the 7th to the 22nd of the month.
6. The other kind of increase and deorease which
is referred to the horizon is that the eastern quarter
between the east horizon and the meridian, and the qua*
ter opposite to it, its nadir, are spoken of as in exoess,
beoause both day and night respeatively are on
the increase in these, and on the decrease in the remah
ing quarters.
1 See l&+nitius 11.414. The second correction of the
ararunent (the eauatlon of the anomals.185) has to be
adzed to the tnie longitude of the cstre-of the epicyole
to obtain the true position of the planet when
it is In the 1st and 2nd nitzqs of the epicycle, deducted
when in the 3rd and 4th - whatever the p&iition
on the deferent. ocK* + G' gives K'. GIL? - G' gives L'.

204. E& ayyh al-'Elm. Vorld-days are those periods
in wach the planets with their apogees and their
nodes take to make a complete revolution
WORLD-DAYS (without remainder)P; and indeed every
nation has endeavoured to elicit them
with the ob ect of keeping in mind the movements (and
situations) h of the planets, in accordance with what
their observations have taught them as to their movements,
but the measure whiah is best known is that of
the Hlndu kalpa, the days of which are called ka paharganl
and are born to us muslims as Sind-hind$ daya,
but improperly so, for in their language the word is
Sadhhd (SiddhBnta), a name which is given to all their
important astronomioal marks, and which means aacuracy
without orookedness. According to their books there
are five SidBhBnta, the first called after Siiraj, (the
sun), the seoond after Vashpasta, the third after
Pulisa, &he fourth after Riim, and the fifth after
BartUlam.
Theee daya are oalled world-days because the Hinihrs
believe that two kalpas oonstitute a nychthemeron of
BarBham, i.e. aature,4 one being a day and the other a
night. The beginning of such a day 2s when the planets
set out from the first point of Aries, on a Sunday,
and when this kalpa is flnished,5 the night kalpa comes
on during which all things which were moving beoome
quiescent, and so a night and day in the life of Bar5-
ham are 0om~leted.6 Hla life is a hundred years.
The complete exposition of this question is a very
long matter which we have dealt with in another
place. A table is annexed in which the number of revolutions
of the planets in a kalpa are given according
to Hindu notions, not according to our astronomical
tables. Side by side with these figures, are the data
of those 'thousands* which Abii Narshar has recorded
from Persian sources.
So in PL; A, aharki; PP, har kih; India, I 368,each
plpa equal to 4,320,000,000 solar years.
So in PL. A, Sindhad. PP. Hind U Sind. India I 153,
Siirya, V~sish?ha, Paulim, Ro~Xilm, Brahma, 1.C.
India I 94.
When all are again in oonjunation in 0' Aries.
India I 331. 360 tixme two ktilpas making a year.

According to Hindu notions and The Thousandsof
Abii Ma rshar
Number of days in a kalpa, 15779164500001 1341493240
(days Inworlb
Days elapsed up to era of
Yazdigird, June 16 632 AD 7206358063132
year)
1365598
Revolution of sun-Years in
a kalpa 432000000C 360000~
Revolution of its apogee 480
(yearEl In uorU1-
year)
11
of moon 57753300000 4812778
W of its apogee 488105858 19365
n of its nodes 232311168 19360
n of Saturn 146567298 12214
n of its apogee 414
W of its nodes 584
n of Jupiter 364226455 30352
W of apogee 855
n
W
of nodes
of lkiars
63
2296828522 191402
W of apogee 292
W of nodes 267
n
W
of Venus
of apogee
7022389492
653
585199
n of nodes 893
W of Mercury 17936998984 1494751
W of apogee 832
n of nodes 521
n of fixed stars 120000
a.!
1 v. India, 11, 16.
2 The number of years multiplied by 365,258.
A smaller world-year is that of 36000 years, derived
from the assumption that the vernal equinox in oonsequence
of precession is shifted through the whole zodiac
in that period; the 1predecessorsv,175,estimated a degree
in 100 years,Blpparohus in 72,a sign in 2160,and the
whole zodiac in 25920. The Vernal Equinox entered Aries
about 2200 B.C.and Pisces about 100 B.C.Jeremias,Altorientalische
Geisteskultur 1929,p.242. He draws attenticn,
p.303,to the similarity of the Indian and Babylonian
world-years,and believes that these reaohed India from
the Greeks and that the Greeks had them from Babylon
Ihrough Berossus.
Has 14 by mistake. There is a lacuna in this MS.from
paragraph 205 to middle of 209 supplied from Ff .36-38 AO1.

205. Ha1 yurraf maqlidxr a jrh al-kawgkib. The
diameter o m ra6ius of
the earth: Ptoleny,deterxnined this by the
SIZE OF differences of hisApoint of view (parallax)
THE STARS ikhtilzf al-mangar, He also determined
the diameter of %e sun in the same ratio
from eclipses in Book V of the Almagest. The ratios of
the diameter of the planets and fixed stars to that of
the sun.is obvious to the eye. What these are is explained
in the Book of the lJanshiirEt2 and we have recor&-
ed them in the accompanying table, in accordance with
the opinion and results of Ptolemy since no other has
hitherto established itself with us.1
Sun
Moon
Saturn
Jupiter
Mars
Venus
Meroury
Stars 1st magnitude
2nd
W
3rd
W
4th n
5th n
6th
W
1
1 (at mid-distance)
1/18
1/12
1/20
1/10
1/15
1/20
4/81
5/109
1/24
2/55
1/36
.......................................................
1 PP, zfflkl tB aknUn kasf-rE andar In sukhun va jahd
kardan naeftfm va nah andIsha kasMdan. Because up to
this time we have not found any other person working at
his topic.
of. Nallino, bl-EKittZnI 1 288 and 11, IXYI and delete
nr? in bJ3.

206. Fa ha1 kull- mcflbkit 111 adr ka utr al-
-. tard. The distance of the sun and moo: from t:eocentre
of the earth in terms of the
DISTANCE BM) SIa earth's radius is also made clear
OF PLILNETS in the fifth Book of the Iblajisti;
astronomers are agreed that the
furthest distance of any planet is the nearest of that
which is immediately above it, and thus the ratio between
the nearest and furthest distances is horn in
the case of each planet.
When one of these distances is knomn, all are
known, as well as the distance of all stars from the
earth in terms of the earth's radius, their diameters,
and the ratio of their volumes to that of the earth.
The annexed table contains the result of Ptolemy, of
the accuracy of which we are assured. f
Nearest distance Diameter Volume in
in terms of In terms of termsofvolwlle
radius of earth,l diam. 0-1 of earth, l
MO on 33,351
Mercury 64,20'
Venus 169,46'
sun 1161,45*
Mars 1260,15*
Jupiter 9169,14'
Saturn 14881,2gt
Fixed stars 20774,3gt
1st Magnitude
2nd Magnitude
3rd Magnitude
4th Magnitude
5th Magnitude
6th Magnitude
1 This paragraph is at the top of 37V.
116

1
Nearest dis- Diameter in Volume as comtance
in para- parasangs as pared with
sangs compared compared with volume of earth
with radius of diameter of 166744242,
earth 1081, earth 2163, 14'33" cubic
.l9'21" 7*,11" parasanga.
Moon 36395 639,2af 4168606
Venus 183656,2* 3" 642,2gt 4353877,26*
Sun 1254638,7'1lW 11936,03* 27901869897,42*
Jupiter 9919443,1t3n 9880,36' 15879610019,29*
Saturn 17914241,2'33W 9772,25* l5362702867,59*
Fixed stars 22974394 ,W
1st Magnitude
10241,13* 17683226w17'
2nd Magnitude 10096,57* 16946773170>7*
3rd Magnitude
9375,45* lBB0230t3Xi5j48*
4th Magnitude 8546,21 * 10254770908,37~
5th Magnitude
7464,32* 684763022l,55?
6th Magnitude 5697,34' 3045861494#9'
This figure which occurs in all the 1~Iss. has apparently
dropped an initial five, see 209, p. 121 where it
is given as 5,305,498,5897 parasangs. The copyist of
A0 has alone noticed the mistake for he has here a note
givin Efisd b. ~hEkir*s rule for volume of a sphere:-
diam.8 x 3l/7 x l/6 dim.
2 4 stands in severe1 ISS. in this place. Perhaps the
initial figure in a volume calculated from 45.

207. Lam mi dLr a1 ard. Measurements of the stars
ca3 only bm-the
earth as a unit, just as
we use the cubit or other weights and
SIZE OF THE measures. Now the flgures for the earth
EBRTR are as follows:
Diameter
2163 l/3 parasangs
Circumference 6800
n
Surf ace 14712720 1/4 square
volume 166744242 l/5 cubic
Consequently to determine the distance of a star from
the earth in parasangs, all that is necessary is to
multiply its nearest distance by the number of parasangs
in the radius of the earth, while the comparative
dimensions may be translated into parasangs by using
the above figures, as set down in the table on the preceding
page.
Similarly the dimensions of the eoliptio can be ek
pressed in parasangs as in the subjoined
Table of Zodiac Girdle
Diameter
44964005 13m parasangs
Cir oumference 141315446 2/3
Length of a sign 11776287 21/80 W
Length of a degree 392542 9/10
Length of a minute 6542 23/60 m
208. Ha1 ikhtalaf fI ml dzr al- ard. It is inevitable
that there should be co~troversies*regarding the
dimensions of the earth for it is one
DISPUTES AS TO of those matters which must be based
SIZE OF EBRTH on experiment at a distance and on
reports on observations. All nations
have recorded their observations in the measures employed
in their own countries, e.g. the stadium of the
Greeks and the jauzhan fyojana) of the Hindus. When
therefore their books were translated into Arabic,
and the real value of their units was unknom,

then the Caliph FIg'mih son of Hafin al-~aschzd commanded
an investigation to be undertaken anew,1 and with this
object a number of the savants of that time, (such as
Khelid ~arriiar, m-~turT3 ghe geometrician4 and
%l1 b. TsB. the astrolab6-maker ) were ordered to proceed
to the desert of SinjHr and take the matter in
hand. They found the value of one degree of a great
circle on the earth to be 56 and 2/3 miles, and multiplying
this by 360 arrived at 20400 miles for the circumferenae
of the earth. Each mile is a third of a
parasang or 4000 black cubits; the trade cubit is well
known in ?rZq, and is used in Baghdad for land-surveying;
it measures 24 finger-breadths (isbar).6 I have
investigated the matter in Hindustan by'another method7
and have found no discrepancy with the figures cited
above.
209. &$gr aFanEsir al-arbarah ha1 hiya. Is it
~ossible to sctate the dimensions of the four elements
in these'terms? The earth with the
DXMBNSIONS OF mountains projecting from it like
THE FOUR teeth is solid, and the water sur-
E-S
rounds it occupying the hollows, but
these two elements fora the one globe,
whose dimensions have been above stated. Now when the
radius of the earth is deducted from the distance of
the moon at perigee, the remainder is the distance between
the surface of the earth and the moon's orkit occupied
by the air, viz. 35213 1/10 parasangs. ;Then the
Suter, Bbh. Gesch. lath. liss. X P 209., and Not. et
Extr. V11 P 94. The history of the determination of a
degree of the meridian has been given by Nallino, Cosmos
di Guldo Cora, XI 1892. He concludes that the
Arabic mile had 1973,2 m. corresponding to a cubit of
493,2 mm,
Sauvaire, Jour. Asiat. 1886 p. 479 seq. discusses
the various cubits in use by the Arabs. Two of them
seen to have been inherited from the Persians; the royal
cubit of 32 digits (igbar) and the oornmon, legal or cornmer~ial
cubit of 24 digits. The last named dhira- altijirrat
is the equivalent of the Persian arsh-i saudl
which may account for the Arabic name of tblackt cubit:
the story that it was taken from the am of a black

measurement of the volume of the earth, viz. 5,305,498,
589 4/5 cubic parasangs is deducted from that of the
sphere whose radius is the nearest distance of the moon
from the centre of the earth, viz. 200,356,658,322,333
1/31 parasangs there remain 200,351,352,823,743 8/15
parasangs. This is the dimension of air and fire together,
but it is impossible 'to determine the amount of
these elements separately. Above the air in the moist
vapours occur the various phenomena of wind, cloud,
enow and rain, also thunder, lightning, thunderbolts,
rainbows, haloes and the like. Above it likewise in
the dry smoky vapours are the stars with tails and
locks, shooting stars &c.
210. Kaif mar al-ma%hh. The plane of the
eauinootiaITiETthe earth at a circle called the
equator khattu*l-lstiwat into two parts,
DISPOSITION northern and 'southern hemispheres. A
OF LQM) great circle drawn through the pole8
divides these into four quadraata, two
eunuch by ~l-~a~hia or ~l-l&atmk is not oonvincing,
Probably the neo-babylonian cubit or 496 mm. (Jour.
Asiat. XI11 1909 p. 98, 24 digits or 20,66 mm,, the measure
of six barley-corns) persisted in 'Iraq with slight
modifioation and was employed for this survey.
Occasionally the digit was measured by grains set
on edge instead of lying flat, in nhioh case 192 were
assigned to the aubit inetead of 144 (Sauvalre p. 504).
The sawiidi cubic useg by Omar for surveying the
blaok lands of 'Iraq (Samd) is sometimes confused with
the lblack*-ogbit,and is supposed to have been the ro@
cubit, Idrisi (6th climate,gth sect.) gives the measurements
of the Great Wall' in sawiidI cubits. According to
Sedillot (Sci. Math.-Arab, I1 755) ~ 1 - Q u d reokoned
4000 cubits (al-sama?) to the mile.
f'or Marwarriidhi v. Dict, Geog. de la Perse p. 525. Fb
names in Arabic version.
3 &*l-Wturl 'Alf ibn al-wturi v. Suter.
4 AI-ma s a8Q, the surve yor .
r~lI b. vIs6 - Asturlsb-gun PL,As urliibi PP.
6 Sir Bnglish barlkjr-corns average fl m.
hl-~f runf determined the height of a mountain in IaSLa,
measured the angle of depression of the horizon from
the top and calculated from them the radius of the earth.
1 These figures are written out in woras in PI, and A0'
two hundred thousand thousand thousand thousand etc. in
A0 200,356 ,+658 $322,333.
5

northern ant3 two southern. Those who have investigated
the matter find that the dry land does not extend bey&nd
one or the northern quadrants; this is therefore
called the habitable quaarant rubfmarfira. It is as it
were an island surrounded by the sea. In this quarter
which men are constantly traversing, they find seas,
islands, mountains, rivers and deserts, also towns and
villages, until towards the north pole a desolate tract
is reached of exoessive cold, where snows are heaped on
snows .l
211. Kalf qral-bapr lin al-marmUrah? The sea
which is f n thest of the dry land, on whose
shores are Tangier and Spain, is called
DISPOSITION the surrounding sea, the Ocean of the
OF SEB Greeks. Whoever ventures therein does
not go far from the coast, (on account
or the roughnese, darkness and traoklesenesa of the
sea, but hugs the sh0re.P) Beyond the countries mentioned,
the sea passer by the lands of the Slavs, and a
northern section of It penetrates into the land until
it approaches the country of the Bulghars who are Muslims.
Thirr is the Varangian Sea, and these Varangians
are ve virile people, and have their chief town,
mlid,von the shore. Beyond t b is the oountry oi
the mks to the east; between Turkestan and the ooean
to the north the oountry is unknown, fill of desolate
mountains; no one penetrates there.
From Tangiers southwards the Ooean paasea by the
oountry of the Western bTeg.088, and then turns to the
left so as to get to the other side of the Mountains
of the Moon, whence the ile arises, (and there it
reaohse Sotala al-Z.nJ.)g Ships bo not enter this sea,
if they do, they do not escape into safety.
1 208-10 are quoted by liedemann, Aroh. Gesch. Naturr.
U. Teohnik. 111.253, while in his Beitrag XXVII he has
translated and iully annotated the passages of geographical
interest in 211-2, 214-5, e20, 236-9, 241.
he passage quoted by Nallino I. 170 from al-KharaqI
closely resembles this paragraph except that it is sup-
8lemented by the dimensions of the seas.
PI,* palid; Baland PP may be Poland - Nuzhat al-Quliib.
Trans. p. 230 and 249 n: Not mntioned in A. merely
wthese are people on the shorew.

Following the ocean from the north to the eastpast
the limits of the Chinese Empire (chh va nEchinP),
it is found to be trackless and dangerous, and no one
goes there. At the southern extremlty,however, there
is a gulf which is the beginning of those seas called
after the adjacent countries, of *hich the first is the
Chinese sea and the next the Indian Obean. From the
latter there are gulfs penetrating into the land, forming
as it were separate seas, like the Persian Gulf the
eastern shore of which extends from Basra to NakrBn;opposite
the latter is the port mdat A 'b3r&hp of Vmtuan.
~eaving%mman and proceeding south the Arabian shore
(sher) is reached whence frankincense undrii, lubfn
comes, and then Aden. Thence two great g- project,
one of these (the Red Sea) ia well known at Qulzum, and
passes by the country of the Arabs,whioh is in fact an
island between this sea and the Persian Gulf. As the
Abyssinians are opposite Yemen, the sea is here called
both the Sea of Yemen and the Abyssinian Sea,while near
the Hij6z it is known as the sea of Qulzum. This is a
city seated on the shore of the Sea where it endstowmb
Syria, so that the traveller must turn here leaving Sgria
behind and sailing along the ooast of Egypt and the
Beja territory.
The other gulf is that which begins at a point,Ras
Berbera,opposite Aden and is called the Berbera sea,$nd
this great Sea goes as far as Sofala above referred to,
No ship passes this point on account of the dangers of
navigation; beyond 1s the Western Ooean but the nature
of the connection therewith is unkno .) 4
In the eastern part of this seepars numerous i&md8,
first those of ZRbi j P al-zanj A al-zan J then the DXV~P
~ i bjht a A and ~umair~ groups, ( small in size, some of ehem
arising anew out of the water,others as a result of
erosion,becoming Invisible) ,P3 Then there are the islands
ci, India 1.210. "The gold-islands Zabi j areintheE8at,
those of the Zanj in the West and the Diva and Qumair
groups in the middlen- the association of the Qumair
with the Diva group (Laceadi.8es &c) points to the Camoro
Islands and Madagascaz - cf. De Vic Fays des Zenj. Ferrand,
30our. Asiat. 1910 and Storbeak, Mitth. Orient,
Seminar Berlin XVII, 1914. In these MSS. there is the
usual oonfusion between Zanj, ZZnij and Z'ibij.
2 A0' and BBt have QusWr.
Cf. India I. 233 and 11.106.

of ~an~isthp al-zanj A,P and A ma s al-zblj, large
and celebrated islandg like Serandfb (Ceylon) known to
the Hindus as Sangaldib. From it come various precious
stones and diamonds. Then the Islam3 Kalah from whioh
tin is obtained, and sarbud, sarxra A from whioh amphor
oomes, (and other islands from whioh oloves,
sandal-mod, aooonuts, ebony, barhank (Kanbar f coir .) ,
rattans, aloe-wood and the like ase obtained.*)
In the middle of the habitable land is another sea
oalled Pontua by the Greeks in the country of the Slavs
and Ftuseians. Our people call it the Sea of Trebizond
from the Greek port on its shore. Henae a great body of
water prooeeds whioh becomes narrower as it appraohes
Constantinople, and still narrower before it opensinto
the Sea or Syria. On the southern' shore of the Syrian
Sea are the countries of Morooao and 1friqIgya (Tunisia)
as far as Alexandria an8 Egypt, opposite these are
Spain,the Roman Empire, Asia Minor and Antioch, while
between them are the cities of Syria and Palestine.
This sea oonstantly flows tonartls the ooean through a
narrow place known as the Passage of Heroules and now
better known as the lzuqzq*. The sea contains several
well-known islands such as Cyprus, Samos, Rhodes and
sioily,
Near Tabaristb there is another sea and the
Capital toin (bgrg&P furpat, port A) of ~urgiin, On
the shore is a city Bbiskun by whioh name also the sea
is knownl From this point tee coast-line follows
Tabaristan, Dailam and Shiman, Derbend of the Eihazars,
the territory of the Alans, and arrives at the aity of
the Khazars where the river Itil (Vo1ga)-flows into the
sea; thereafter passing the country (diyar,habitations
A) of the Ghuzz it reaahea Abiskun again, The sea is
also known by the name or the adjacent countries, perhaps
best after the Khazars; our ancestors lmeu it as
the Sea of GUY?&, Ptolemy as the Hyroanian Sea. It is
notoonnected with any other sea.
The habitable land contains numerous lakea,ba$8i$,
1 Wiedemann quotes a parallel passage from the Mas'\ldi
Canon. Beitrllge XEX.

1. Caspian, 8 .Turks. 3 .China. 4. Java. 5.India. @ .Flakran.
?.Persia. 8.Khurasan. 9.Persian Gulf. 10.0man. 11.Aden.
12,Qulzum. 13.syria. 14.Iraq. 15.Pontus. 16.Mediterranean.
17.Alexandria. 18,Egypt. 19.Sudan. 20.RaS Berbera.
2l.~ou+ts.of the Moon. 22.Sofala al-zanj. 23,Morooao.
24,~uqaq. 25,Andalusia. 26.F&. 27.constantinople.
28. Slavs. 29.l;hazars. 30,Baltic and Varangians. 31-
Surrounding Oman. 32 .Dibhoha Islands. 33. Islands of
the Zanj Empire.
and mm times they are called am11 seas, ~uhalr6t,liks
those of Apamea, Tiberias and the Dead Sea in Syrlrt,
and &he Sea of &wEriza(Aral) and Xssiq-kul near Barsukh&,
The above figure approximately represents what we
have described.
212. Bin kha3) al-isti.6' wa mE khawhshu. The
eauator nasses from the east into the ~hin&&yand
Indian Ooeans and through several
EQUATOR AND ITS of the Islands there. After having
CHARACTERISTICS traversed the boundaries of the
1 Bahr Zughar, instead of BaQr Lat; derive& from the
tom*~oar or Lotls daughter. ~arsukhlin, v. Tarikh-i
Rashi.di 350n.

~anjiharrivea at the deserts of the Sudanese, who are
engaged in the slave-trade, and thence passes into the
Western Ooean. Those who &well on the equator have
their nights and days always of equal length, both nor-th
and aouth poles are equidistant on their horizon, and
the parallels or latitude are perpendicular to the horizon,
not inclining to either side. The sun crosses the
equator twice a year, first when at the first point of
Aries, and seoond when at the first point of Libra, on
whioh occasions it passes to the north and south respectively.
The equator is called kha$$ al-istiwfis and
khatt al-irtid81 on account of the complete equality of
day'tind night. As for the opinion expressed by some
people that the nature and constitution of the inhabitants
is of even temperament, there is evidence to the
contrary in the burnt-up condition of the people and
their neighbours because they vary much in their complexion
and their hair, and are not alike in their
physioal characteristios, although all of small stature.
Who, indeed, could be of equal-tempered co~tution in
a place where the sun cooks the brains of the inhabitants
from above, till it moves out of the zenith at tfrrse
two periods whioh we oall summer a winter, and brings
about a little coolness and relief. 9
213. Kaif intif8b al-q&t '816 wa jh al-arg. Anyone
who considers the question of the erect posture at one
place naturally thinks that his
ERECT POSTURE ON posture is parallel to that of everg-
SURFACE OF EARTH one on earth, and that the same is
the case with the line of falling
bodies. But whoever reflects on the matter at different
places, and gives some oonsideration to the subject
knows that the erect posture is in a line with the
diameter of the globe, the head directed to heaven and
the feet to the centre of the earth. (For this reason
everyone prays to what is above h1n.P) But what Is upright
to him is not upright to others and may be quite
inverted, If we oonsider the situation of the Chinese
L*&\;..L\~.,, ;d\>$\g&&.L3,j,L$
*
'L;& .
L
.
&u~J~&~U~~~.L~
Ihy ~ k
--
1 Cr. Wiedemann, aroh. gesoh. Matarv. a. Tech. V. 56.

and the Spaniards who live on the two opposite margins
of the habitable earth, the one on the east, the other
on the rest, (and we are watching the phases of an
eclipse of the moon with them,P) we find that the soles
or their feet are directly opposite each other. If one
of those logicians who are accustomed to judge matters
high and low by their own standards, not according to
their actualities, were to picture to himself the
situation with a ball made of wood or other material,
whose centre is outside the centre of the world, and
were to observe the conduct of an ant creeping on the
under surface, he would feel faint in contemplating the
condition which he calls falling off, but which we
regard as leaping or flying.1
214. MS rare al-balad. The latitude of any town is
its shortemtance from the equator in a northerly
direction, because all toms are thus
LATITUDE situated. Corresponding to it there is an
OF TOWN
arc of a great circle, its meridian,
between the zenith and the equinoctial. The
elevation of the north pole is equal in all places to
their latitude and therefore this is sometimes used
instead of the latitude. The depression of the south
pole, although it is also complementary is concealed
from us, and we are not cognisant of it.
215. MS t6l al-balad. Longitude on the other hand
is the &is=& from the extremity of the dry land
whether calculated on the equinoctial or
LONGITUDE the equator, or on a parallel circle,
OF TOWN because these having comparable parts can
be substituted for each other. In consequenoe
of the fact that our astronomers have adopted
the customs or the Greeks in this matter, and that the
Greeks have selected the western extremity of the land,
the longitude of towns is now calculated from that
point. But there is some discrepancy as to this extremity
for some people take it as the shore of the
Western Ocean, while others adopt the Fortunate or
1 Quoted by Wiedemann, Beitrage, LX p. 57 Bd. 52/53.
126

Eternal Isles - six1 islands situated 200 parasangs off
the coast of West Africa. This is an unimportant matter
as long as all longitudes are measured from one point,
but in those cases, some of which have been measured
from the one and some fron the other point (or where
two longitudes are given in the books for a place with
a difference of loO)A, people who have not the requisite
knowledge and are not proficient in this science are
unable to distinguish the one from the other.
216. MZ alladhi sammi mzbain al-tiilain. The
difference of longltug between two pla6- arrived
at bv subtract in^ the smaller from
DIFEWUNCE OF the iarger, the result is equal to
TWO LONGITUDES the difference of time units between
their maridians, calculated either on
the equinoctial or the parallel of either or them or
some other parallel.
217. Mii alladhi yurriq mln ikhtil~f @a1 1-
baladain idha tas8wI rarQBhumB. Should the latitude of
two places be the same and the
WHEN LATITUDE longitude dif ferent, there is
U A N D only the difference of time
LONGITUDE DIFFEFEKC between them, for sunrise and
sunset do not occur at the same
time, being earlier in the eastern place proportionally
to the difference of longitude; the climate of both
will be alike unless proximity to the sea, or mountaias,
or sandy desert, or a difference of level occur to
account for a difference.
218. Ikhtiliif Carear al-baladain idha tasiiwl
- hW. If on the other hand two plaoes agree in
longitude but dif fer in latitude,
WHEN LONGITUDE midday and midnight occur in
SAME AND both simultaneously and all stars
LATITUDE DIFlClGUWT which have no declination rise
and set each at the same time as
does the sun during the equinoxes; when however the
Canaries? Palmais some 400 miles from the coast.
81-BirUni does not distinguish between the Fortunate
Islands (Isles of the Blest) jaz6'ir al-sar2idah and
the Eternal Islands jaz8'ir al-khSlLdZt.
See Bloohet - Les sources orientales de la divine
comddie - 1901.

218-219
sun or planet leaves the equinoctial, if to the south,
then the rising is earlier and the setting later in
the place or lower latitude, and if to the north,
then the reverse is the case. The mount of difference
between rising and setting in the two places is
different with each parallel of latitude, as are the
length of day and night, the ortive amplitude, the
meridian altitude, the shadow at noon and the number
of stars of perpetual apparition and occultation.
The place with the higher latitude is necessarily
colder, unless some of the circumstanoes enumerated
above intervene, as e.g. Gurgan whioh has a hi
latitude than Rai, but has less air, and Ghazn 8""
(Ghamah A) which although on the same parallel as
Baghdad is a cool place while the latter is hot.
219. ~khtiiiif al-tiilain wall-?ardain. If
latitude a m ' * are both diff esx, then
the natural characteristics or the
BOTH LATrrUDE two places are compounded of' the
AND LONGITCTDE ;'actors adverted to above. The
DIFFlFRlCNT riseand settingoiany star
never cccur at the same time,
unless at one of the two points where their horizons
are in aontact with each other.

220. MZ satat al-maahri . A t the equinoxes the sun
rises and sets opposite the &S or the equinoctial
line which re drew in the Indian Circle
ORTIVE 131, but when it moves to the north, sun-
AMPLITUDE rise and sunset occur at two points of the
horizon north of the equator, the ends of
a line parallel thereto. Every day this line becomes
more distant irom the equator until the sun enters the
first point of Canoer, when the points of summer sunrise
and sunset are known as mashriq na maghrib alsaif.
The reverse oocurs when the sun moves south, and
it reaches the first point of Capricorn, the
points of winter 8unrise and sunset are called mashri
s =&rib al-shits*. The arc between the point+
rising of the sun on the horizon and the equator, the
ortive amplitude, is called satat al-mashri , and
similar1 y saVat al-raahrib is the arc betwezn the point
of setting and the equator, the occasive amplitude. In
the case of places rrith latitude the amplitude is
greater the higher the latitude. A diagram follows.
Above is the S. point, below the N. the vertical
line joining them is the Meridian, al-zawEl. he
line joining the B: and W points, al-iftidRl, has,
right and le it, the squinoct ial sum8 t and sunrise
points; the lines parallel to it above and below
respectively the winter and summer pointa. The copyist
makes the summer nun rise in the West and set in the E.
E, W. Equlnoctial Sunrise
and Sunset points
A, B. Summer, C.D.
Winter Sunrise and
Suneet points
A. E. and C. E. Ortive
Amplitude. B. V. and
D. W. occasive do.
ne o o sa sen m S n n paragraphs
- 2
8
a r 2%
129
1 and re'.

221. &air a$Uu al-nah8r wa al-lail fI'1-bilBd.
The &ally d i o n oi the sun takes place either on
the equinootial or on circles parallel
LEK&TH OF thereto; all having the same pole, the
DAY AND NI= pole of the universe. men the horizon
passes through the pole (it 18 only at
the equator that this occura) it cuts these circles
into two halves, that above the horizon being equal to
that which is below. It is for thia reason that at the
equator day and night are equal. As soon as a place is
away from the equator the north pole rises from the
horizon proportionately to the latitude of the place.
When the horizon passes beyond the pole, it is only the
equinoctial that ia cut into two halves, both of them
being great circles; it is on this acoount that day
and night are equal all over the earth when the sun
is in the first point of Aries or Libra, because the
sun is then revolving in the equinactlal. But the
horizon cuts the other circles unequally, the result
being that larger parts of the northern circles are
above the horizon than below, and consequently ahen the
sun is in the northern constellations the day is long
and the night short. With regard to the southern
circles the parts above the horizon are shorter than
those below and ooneequently the day is short and the
night long. If two circles be taken at equal distance
from the equinoctial, the excess of the day or night
in the one will be complementary to the deficiency
in the other, i.e. that the night of the one wlll be
equal to the day of the other.

222. MB qaus al-nahEr wa faclhu wa tardIlhu. The
arc of day is as much of the circle as is above the
horizon, and the arc of night as much
ARC OF DAY as is below. The comparison of this
ITS EXCESS AND
EQUATION
arc to a bow is particularly appropriate
when a place has latitude.
Its length can be expressed in
degrees of the parallel of latitude of the place, or in
hours, the equinoctial day .being 180' or 12 hours. The
difference of the length of days is the excess over or
deficiency from this, and the ' tardIlu *l-nahZrt the
equation of the day is the half of the diffarmce.
NS North and South Poles
ZNa Zenith and Nadir
ZN Height of Pole
DE Semi-diurnal arc of
equinoctial EE~
CA Semi-diurnal arc of
Northern Parallel AA1
FB Seni-diurnal arc of
Southern Parallel BB
CG,HF equation of day, the
amount to be subtlaoted
and added to make
equal tc the equinooial
semi-diurnal arc.
DC ortlve amplitude
223. al-kawgkib al-abadiyyah al-zuhar watlkhai8.
If en imaginary circle be drawn rdund the north
~ole. the circumference of which
STARS OF PERPETUAL iouches the horizon, then all
APPARITION AND
OCCULITATION
circles within that do not touch
the horizon, and consequently all
stars which revolve on these am
always visible, i.e. are stars of perpetual apparition
and neither rise nor set. If they are not visible it is
due to the brightness of the daylight,while darkness
renders them visible.Al1 the stars of the Great Bearere
always visible througZlout Transoxiana,e .g. while at
Mecca and Aden the three stars of the tail rise and set.
Similarly round the south pole there is a circle the
nadir of the above,within which are stars of perpetual
ocaultation for the above mentioned places. Canopus may
be taken as an example which is never visible in
Transoxiana,while for a part of the year it does appear
above the horizon in ?rRq and some parts of KhurZsSn.
131

224. Hadharl-tarabbud ffrl-Wiir m'l-khafii pa I Z
am lab tapgayyur. The distance of each of the A X ~
stars from the ~ole of the
IS THLS PERPETUITY REAL ecliptic is the*s&e i d is
OR SUBJECT TO CHANGE never departed from, because
the movement of the fired
stars is with that pole, but their distance from the
univereal p013 ie not uniform. So it is possible that a
star which has never been one of perpetual apparition
or occultation, and has formerly risen and set may move
eastwards into one or those two circles touclhing the
horizon and there carry out its circular movements,
while one that has been in perpetual apparition or
occultation emerges from the cirale on the other aide,
but such changes of position can only take place in
immense lapses of time owing to the slowness of the
movement of the stars. Indeed they cannot happen to
every star, and the rule for that is this:- To decide
whether a particular star which is pemnently visible
or invisible at a locality may sometime rise and set
over it, deduct its latitude from 900 and compare the
remainder with the differenoe between the latitude of
the place and the obliquity or the ecliptic, if more,
then it is possi$le; if less, the star wl11 never alter
its position with remrd to that locality.
225. ME al-irtifSr wall-inhitzt ra taxuih8humii. If
a great circle be imagined passfii-throub the zenith
and the &or a star or-any given
ALTITUDE AND point in the heavens above the horizon,
DEPRESSION it is perpendioular to the horizon and
the altitude of the body is the are or
that circle betueen it and the horizon. That portion of
the same circle between the body and the zenith whiah
is one of the poles of the horizon is called the
complement of the altitude or zenith distance. If the
body is below the horizon the arc between the two is
named its depression inhitiit or inkhifiid, and that
between the body and =6-%di r t-lenrtht or the
depression.

226. M: al-irtii&y al-ausat. The mean altitude is
the arc of such a oircle between the horizon and the
equinoctial, and its complement that
MEAN ALTITUDE between the equinoctial and the
zenith.
227. blEi al-miqyiis wall-2111. A gnomon and its
shadow. The style, shakhs, made of wood or other
matermarpened at eaah end and driven
GNOMON like a peg perpendioularly into the
AM3 SHADOW ground. When the sun is out, the shadow
of .the style with its divisions is
measured to see how they ompare. The line joining the
point of the style and the point of its shadow is called
the diameter ( hypothenuse) of the shadow.
228. Ajzi* al-miqy8s kam hiya. If the style is
divided into twelve equal parts these are named fingers,
a$e'b~~, if into sixty, divieions,&*,
DIVISIONS and if into seven, feet,aqdh (Some people
OF GNOMON use 6 1/2 for the last).
229. BnwEral-azlhl km hi a. There are two kinds
of shadow, the one ~ M i z o n t a l the . other on a
vertical surface, when e. g. the gnomon is
KINDS OF fixed perpendioularly to a wall. The former
SHADOW shadow is oalled mustaw'i (umbra recta),
while the latter i s d muntagib on
aocount of being perpendicular to the ground, and
maws beoause the point of the shadow is direoted to
-0-d (umbra versa) .

230. I&; al-samt. The point of intersection of a
vertical circle of altitude of the sun or a star with
the horizon ie called samt (azimuthal
AZIMUTHAL point.l If the distance the samt from
POINT the equinoctial is taken, then the complement
of that is the distanoe from the
meridian, (azimuth) and vice versa. If from the centre
of the Indian Circle you dram a diameter through the
middle of the shadow, that end of the diameter which
is towards the sun or star is its samt, and that end
of the diameter which is towards the point of the
shadow is the nadir of the samt, and the distance of
both is equal, but in different direotions, i.e. if
the shadow points nest the samt is east, if east,
rest, and similarly with regard to north and south.
z
Eq. Equinoctial. H H ~ Horlzpn. .
E its east point.
N. North Pole. Z Zenith. HZH . Meridian. S. a star.
DS Its declination, SN. complement of declination,
A its lsamt', Azimuthal point, AE its distance from
Equinootial, AH complement thereof *azimuth1.
SZ. Zenith distance, AS. altitude.
1 Chaucer 1.0. p. 31 'Senyth'.

231. dhElika fI nigf al-nahEr. All great
circles vhich pass throu~h the zenith are- called
ciriles of altitude,l and the
X4ERIDIA.N ALTITUDE meridian is one of these
AND SHADOW distinguished by passing through
the zenith and the pole of the
universe. When the altitude of the sun is taken in the
meridian, it is the highest of all altitudes, and as
the shadow corresponds to this, the meridivl shadow Is
the shortest of all shadows or the day. The meridian
intercepts the horizon at two points, north and south;
these are the nreridian sumtit, but the distance of any
point from these is not taken notioe of.
232. 114 kam n asimu azlil nisf al-nahgr wa
irtifAQu. The ext?m:ty of a*-& shadow always
points north in those places
DIVISIONS OF lrfiose latitude is greater than the
MEFlIDIBN ALTITUDE obliquity of the ecliptic, and the
BND SHADOW
meridian altitude is south, its
complement being the distance from
the zenith southwards to the sun. The meridlan altitude
or the sun is or three grades, 1. highest in sumner,
when the sun arrives at the first point of Cancer - the
shadow is then at its shortest, 2. lowest in winter
when the sun reaches Capricorn - the shadow then is
longest - and 3. both altitude and shadow are intermediate
betneen these two when the sun is at the first
points of Aries and Libra; the shadow is then known as
the equinoctial shadow, and the altitude is equal to
the colatitude of the place.
In those places whose latitude is equal to the
obliquity or the ecliptic, the conditions are as we
have described, except that the altitude at the first
point of' Canoer, which is equal to 90°, is neither
north nor south, and then there is no meridian shadow
In those cases where the latitude is less than
the obliquity of the ecliptic the conditions of
1 Aa distinguished from parallel of altitude.
135

altitude and shadow in winter and spring are of the
nature already indicated, but the altitude at the first
point of Cancer is in the north not in the south, and
so when the sun begins to ascend towards the North and
also to descend from the North, and when its
declination is equal to the latitude of the place, it
stands overhead and there is no shadow. When its
declination increases beyond the latitude of the
place, the sun passes from the zenith towards the
north, the meridian altitude changes from south to
north, and its complement is the distance of the sun
from the zenith towards that quarter. At that tlm the
meridian altitude decreases as it incmased in the
south and becws less until the first point of
Cancer is reached, then it begins to increase. RQen
the altitude becomes north the point of the shadow is
directed south. Therefore, those plaoes are designated
as 'of two shadows* because the point of the meridian
shadow is som times directed north and sometimes south.
233. MH al-irtifgr -'l-zill alladhi 1g samt
lihum6. That circle of altituhe which passes through
the two points of intersection of the
PRIME
VEITICAL
equinoctial with the horizon is known as
the circle without samt, and also as the
circle of the beginning of the sumiit
(prime vertical). When the sun is in this circle its
altitude and shadow are described as without sat,
because it is then over the equinoctial point and
there is consequently no interval betwean the samt
and the equinoctial point until the sun diverges
northwards.

234. M: pill al-rasr. This in the opinion of the
DnWs is tKlength of iEadow which determines the time
of the end of the early afternoon
SHADOW OF THE prayer G=, and the beginnihg or the
rqR PRAYW late afternoon prayer, rs?;, and its
end. If the length of the mridian
shadow is known, called fi'l-zavS1, then the shadow is
observed until it is twice as long; this is the
beginning of the %sr according to the Imhs of the
Hi jRz, and is called, ziyadah al-nithl md is marked on
the instruments, amal a -'asr.
If the shadow is obierna until it is twice as
long, this is the time of the ragr according to the
Imams of 'Iraq, is called ziyzdah al-mlthlain, and is
marked on the instruments akhir al- 'asr.
235. l.6 samt al-qiblah. The point of the horizon
corresponding to the qibla is that where the horizon is
intersected by the circle passing
throua the zenith of the locality and
that or Mecca. Its distance from the
equator or the mridian is the nsasure
which it is incumbent on
any one at prayer to use
in determining the
situation of the qibla.
EW. E~uinootial. ZM. Zenith
of Ldeoca. ZT. of a town.
SN. Meridian of Town.
P. North Pole. Q. Samt Of
the Qibla. W. Distance
from the wridian of
Tom.
QW. from the equator.
ZML and P. Latitude and
Colatitude of Meooa.
ZTP. Colatitude of Tom.
In a modern Arab daily calendar the.times for prayer
are marked thus:- e.g. March Zlst, 4 for fajr, dawn
4,19, Jfor shariiq, sunrise, 6,01, f/ for gharab,
sunset, 6,07, for ragr, 3,30 and & for VIahQ,
early night prayer, 7,37.
2 There is a lacuna in this MS. invol ing paragraph 236
which is supplied from 44v and 45r A0 9 .

236. ME al-a Blim. Members of this profession d ie
the habits-o seven long strips from east to
reet parallel to the equator called
*CLIMATeSt tollmatest. The principle of the division
is that the middle points of contiguous
strips differ from each other by half an hour in the
length of the lowpt summer -.For the change in these conditions
is dependent on latitude and is not affected by
longitude dich only causes differences in the begiof
day and night,a matter wbich is not obvious without
oonsideration. In the central climate, the fourth, the
longest day,is fourteen hours and a half ,in the first
thirteen and in the serenth,sixteen. In view of the flsct
that the books contain contradictory statements as to
the latitudes of the climates ,dependent on differences
of opinion as to the obliquity of the ecllptic,dlfferent
methods of subdivision de temining sine s ,and the ability
of the calculators to distinguish between truth and
felsehood,I have made calculations myself and recorded
them in this table with the utmost accuracy.
ional 15 introduced lower down. Ao has moved 2.19 into
the equator line, and introduced an additional 4.19 to
fill the ap.The firsf three shadows point south; jirm
Inb0aodA8 forjantlb! US has 8.11 and 49 for 3
Cf. Wiedemann Beitrage, XXVII p. 11. Bar-Hebraeus 3efines
the length of the day at higher latitudes.N~U,~.
138

237. E& alladhi yurr'raq fi'l-aqElim wa ha1 bacdhB
'amgrah. Ptolemy considered that the limit of the
habltable land is the Island of
CHARACTERISTICS Thule (situated in the country of
OF CLIMATES
the Slavonians in the Varangian
s8a.P) Its latitude is nearly the
same as the complement of the obliquity of the ecliptic,
viz. 66O. As for the people who live In the last part
of the seventh climate as far north as the Island of
Thule, they are more like savages than human beings and
as regards the oonditiona of efistence, are living in
the extreme of misery. The further you penetrate to the
north the more do the conditions described prevail. The
points of the horizon at which the sun 15 ses In summer
and winter keep getting further apart until eventually
they ooincide with their sunset points at that latitude
which corresponds with the complement of the obliquity
of the ecliptic. Then the parallel of the beginning of
Cancer is always visible, and the longest day is 24
hours [without night: that of the beginning of Capricorn
is never visible and the longest night is 24 horn?
without day. There also the pole of the ecliptic passes
over the zenith once every day, at which time the zodiac
belt coincides wlth the horizon, (and nothing is a en
of i t until the pole passes away from the zenith, rhcn
suddenly six constellations rise altogether. Here also
is the beginning of those places where the shaclow of a
gnomon revolves round it uninterruptedly(when the sun is
at the first point of Cancer, and the further you
penetrate to the north the number of circles in which
this condition obtains is increased. )p
238. F e alladhI yurracj fiG warz hadhl al-rnaugi-C
Beyond this point in additio.~ to the parallel of 00
Cancer, other parallels be corn visible,
BEYOND 66O and, as long as the sun is there, day
persists, and the longest day instead of
being one of 24 hours, lasts for several days, and
increases in length until it becoms a month or months.
In the south, the prallels mund about 00 of Capricorn
are invisible, and when the sun is there, the longest
night in the north becomes first days and then months
in length,in proportion as you penetrate further north.
Line dropped in MS.

In such places at oertain times the rising of the signs
takes place contrary to the orde of succession as e.g.
Taurus, Aries, Pisces, Aquerlus.f Bnd just as at the
equator the circles of declination are perpendicular to
the horizon (for that reason the orbit here is spoken
of as the erect sphere falak mustaqIm or kurah
muntasibah, [
n places posmng
~~~hesf%%!; ~Ec~me inclined to the horizon,
and the revolution of the heavens is then oblique like
a shoulder belt, pamlilil.
The highest 1-e is when the pole is overhead,
and the eauinoctial is on the horizon, the parallels of
north deciinations are all visible [and coincide wlth
the muqantaras of altitudelp, those of the south are
inviaible [pd coincide with the muqantaras of
depression] and the movenrent of the heavens overhead
is like that of a millstone. As soon as the sun moves
north from the equinoctial it becomes visible; while
when it move8 south it disappears. So the riod [during
aich the sun traverses the zodiac andp which we
call a year is like a single nychthemeron,day lasting
for six months and a night for the remainder of the yew.
239. ubbat al-arc. A central point of longitude
between E a JYes h of the habitable world is oalled
the cupola of the earth ubbat al-ard.
CUPOLA OF Sometimes it is describe-*
rard,
THE EARTH latitude, because it is on the equator. ''
me do not know whether this is an
expression of opinion of the Persians, or others, at
least the Greek books do not mention it. The ~indusz
however say that it is a high place named Lanka, the
home of (devils (shaygzin) and peris)P, and that under
the North Pole there is a mountain called ~Irii, thq
abode of angels. On the line joining Lanka and ~ xru is
the city ApIn (Uj jain) in the EfElwti Kingborn, the
fortress RuhItak (Rohtak), the plain of Tanishar
(Thaneshwar) ancl (the district of the Jaman (Jumna)
where are)P the anow-clad mountains which separate
India f mm Turke stan. 3
'
Jagmini, Zeits. Deut. Morgenl. Gesell. XLVII, p. 204.
India I 316.
v. Sedillot, Lfateriaux 11. 651 seq.

240. Fahal qismat al-arp bighayr al-aqzlh. Other
methods of subdividing the land exist besides that of
the seven climates. A tale is told
OTHER DIVISIONS of ~fridiin, one of the kings
abEb1rah of the Persians, that he
divided the world i ee k portions between his
three sons. The Eastern part including Turkestan and
China he gave at his death to ~iir,l the Western containing
REn to Salm and the Central part embracing the
Iraaian countries (frbshahr) to ZrBj. This is a
division by longitude.
Then there is thst of the Prophet Noah (on whom be
peace) which is by latitude, but also into three parts.
At his death he gave the South where the Blacks ere to
=m, and the North where the Whites live to YiZfeth, and
the Central part the abode of the Browns to Sm.
The Greeks also, have a threefold division, differc
ent from the foregoing. In the first place they divide
the world into two through Egypt, the Eastern part
being spoken of in a general way as Asia,2 while that
towards the West and the Mediterranean is divided into
two, Libya to the South including the black and brown
inhabitants and ~urope3 to the North with white and red
inhabitants. In view of the fact that Asia is many
times larger than the two Western &ivislona, they
separated rIri3q, FErs and KhurBsh from it under the
name of Asia Minor, the rest being Asia Major. These
methods of division are represented below.
S
Blacks to @m
E
Ira '
Division of Faridfin
Browns to SBm
;7hites to Y'afeth
N
Division of Noah
S
I
ASIA Libya
Division of
I
the Greeka. Major Minor Europe
W
'1 APL Taj. PP TUgh.
~isiyyg AO. ~nsiyg MS.
3 AuraqI.
IY
Absiyli PP.
14 1

The Persians divided the world by the kingdoms
into seven regions (kishwarst) and attributed this
division to Hermes.. It is represented in the following
figure.
n
The Hindus divide the world into nine portions
oalled nikand (navakhanda) to eight or which they give
names in their own lansage corresponding to the points
of the canpass, whlle the ninth is the central part as
represented in the figure .l
E
S
s -
Lgniya Dakshiga Naircita
E
Ptirva
Xladhyade
6a
Centre
or
Pashchim
I
Empire
I
S
W
W
the Kha9Ga are represented in India I, 296.

241. ME f~*l-a~Bl'lmin al-bilRd. Since the latitudes
of the beginning and end of each climate are given
in the table In 236,it is easy to know ln
CITIES IN
THil CLIMBTES
whioh climate a city is situated if its
latitude is known. But the latitudes of
such cities as are reoorded in books are
very inaccurate. We have hitherto not had the opportmity
of getting accurate results,except to a certain extent,
accordingly the follolring list of the cities situated in
the various climates is only approximate, but certainly
nearer to the truth than has hitherto been published.
We have stated that,followlng the equator from the
east where it begins in the sea to the south of China,
it passes through the ~anjl Islands (2Evah)P known as
the 1 nd of gold,then moves b tween the two islands
Kalah 3 and Sarrra (Sarbaeah)~~ to the south of thelsof
Sar$#dib (Ceylon),and through the ~Iba it Islands
(~Ira) to the north of the and people,3 their ishxls?
coasts and low-lying Founds,5 ~aseing thence north of tb
Mountains of the Moon to end in the Western Ooean.
The first climate begins with the east of the
Chinese Empire, traverse8 the Chinese Sea,and contains
those cities whioh are its ports, and where are the
rivera on which the merohants' b ats ascend into the
interior like KhlnJfi and Kh~nqu.~ The Island of
Sarandlb belongs here,and of the Yemen oountry everything
that is south of $anGt,like Dhofar,!Ja$ramaut and
*Aden; then In Afrioa It inoludes Dongola,a city of the
Rubians, and Ghdnah of the Western Sudanese, after
which the Western Ooean is reached.
The second climate begins with some of the cities
of China, traverses IIlndustan north of the QBmmk
Mountains and contains Kanauj. Baranasi, and Ujjain,
and several of those oities whioh are on the sea-coast
like Thanah, ~Irnur and SindEn (SaYljhn) ,also oities of
1 ut . n other bi .. P haa quite olearly v5h Jtwa
U~ZUDI: Malaze%ns?,la. 3 Smatra. ! MaEive \@l.
5-k:Gi. ~.--Zi&a;i&n. 6 like Zanzibar. P has here
~oisla-al-mnj lRhich is far south of the Eq~tor.
8 Or White Mountains,qtanr,instead of qamar,reierring to
the snow-oapped Ruwenzori,Kenya and Kilimanjaro. See
Storbeck,l.o. p. 19 and Sedlllot, Mm. 11. 752.
9 These name8 suggest Hang-ohow and Hang-kor; the latter
might be Khanffi the port of Hang-ohow. Devio,Livre des
lerveilles de l'Inde, 1883,~~ 215 - Nalllno, however,
thinks both refer to Canton (ghuang-chowiu,) and Hong-
Bong,Atti Linoei 1894 11. 43.

Sind like Manstlreh and Daibal; thereafter TUmman and the
Arab districts of Hajar,~ejr~n,Yemki,Mahra,Sabli
TabElah , A ~-TBI~, Jiddah ,Mecca and Maanah Yathrib .
Then the Abyssinian Kingdom and the country of the Bejah,
the cities of dswk and Qiis, ~l-Sa'Id al-hflT, and
south of the cities of Ifriqiyya (Tunisia) and Morocco
before arriving at the Restern Ocean.
The third climate begins in the east of China
and includes the Capital of the Empire: then comes the
centre of the Indian Empire wlth ~adshar and QandahEr
and the cities of sind,MfiltBn,~ah&La,1 and KarUr; then
the mountains of the Afghans, on to ~bulist'in,2~alistan
si Jisthn, Eirman, FBrs, Igfahan, Al-khwaz, 81-Bagra,
Al-Kfifa, and CIrHq and the cities of Xeesopo amia,syrla3
and Palestine, Bait a~-ma~dis,~ and Qulzun, S U-Tih and
Egypt, Alexandria, and the cities of Barqa an8 N. Africa
the tribes of the Berbers and so by TZihart and Siis to
Tangier and the Western Ocean.
The fourth c imate begins wlth China and Tibet,
~ltgI and Khoten,& and the cities within these, continues
across the mountains of Rashmir,BalCr (Bolor) Wald@n,
and Bzdakhshm towards Kabfll and GhUr,HerBt,Balkh,
T~kharistan,~ Merv, ~uhistiin,8 Nishiibiir, Qiimis, Surd&
( Gurg~niP Tabari stEn ,Rai,Qumm,Hamadiin,Mausul, Adarbai jan,
(ddharbadg&n)p Manbi j ,Tarsus,&IarrBn, the ]?asses ( of the
~hristians)P and Antioch,the Islands of Cyprus,Rhodes
and Sicily,ending at the straits separating Andalucia
from Morocco called zuqZiq.
The fifth climate begins with the country of
the Eastern Turks, and the territories of Cog and Magog,
YEi 3. and MS fi ,with the surrounding wal1,Q pasees the
&ains
Turks with their well-known trlbes,
1 Several MSS have niha at.
2 p. ms have zsruldacoorang to Wllera a
colloquial form). b~listan or mliiht~n absent in PI,
but IEltisEn in PP, perhaps a fragment of the coll. form
3 EB has sh'apfir for 81-Shacm.
4 Jerusalem, MS has muqaddis.
5 Near suez.
6 Misspelt in MS. KhitEI,Northern China,from the Ehitiin
nation which ruled over'it in the 10th and 11th centuries,
the Cathay of mediaeval Europe, atill used in Russian
and Turk1 for China.
7 South of the middle Oxua, v.~arquart ,gran-shahr .
8 KflhistiXn P.
9 The great wall of China was attributed to Alexander,
wa sadd-i Sikandar EnjZst PL' .
144

and arri es at KEtsh
241-242
ar, ~al~d~hiin,' ~h~sht, '~er~hana.
1sb1 jab ,l Al-Sh6sh,pUshr6shna, Samarqand, Bukhara ,
EChwllriun and the Sea of the Khazars (known also as
~bisk~in)f'[the Caspian] and passes Bgb al-absEb (Derbend
of the Khazars)P, Bardata, Maiyaf~rq~n, 5 Armenia, the
Passes into Aeia Minor, the cities there, then crosses
over Ramiya the Great, the country of the ~alicians~
and the cities of Andalus to end in the encirclingOcean.
The sixth climate begins among the dwelling-
places of the Eastern Turks wlth the Q@ and QUn, the
KhirkhIz and Km& and ~aghazghaz~ towards the Turcoman
country 8nd FdPb, the city of the Tzars (ItilIg to
the north of their Sea and the Albs O [and AS ]P who
occupy the country between that sea and the Sea
Trebizond which leads to Constantinople, Bur jzn, a
France and Northern Spain where it ends in the Western
0 cean.
The seventh climate contains little habitable
land; however in the east there are forests and
mountains which shelter groups of Turks in a miserable
condition, then the Bashkhirt mountains are reached and
the boundaries of the Ohuzz and Pechenegs,the two
cities of S U W and ~ ~ ul-r, Russia, Slavonia,
Bulghariya and Ma jrar,f3 and finally the Western Ocean.
Beyond this climate there are few peo le living, except
groups like the Ansu, the Varangians,i4 the Bardah and
the like.
242. MS natiili' al-bufi wa dara al-sue. The
daraj al-sei.0 the equal iegrees ii!to which the
ecliptio is divided, each sign having
CO-AsCEl?SIONS thirty degrees. since the ecliptic is
related to a pole different from that
of the first mommnt, the degrees of the signs as they
ascend do not correspond to the divisions of the equinoctial,
and so in the case of each sign the arc of the
P-
1 See the long and interesting note,Tarikh-i Ra~bZUp.361.
2 There is a KhSaht on the frontier of Ferghana, Lands
East. Caliphate p. 48s.
3 SipjZb or Sip3 jab P SipenjZb in ShahnBmah. Modern
Salran near Chimchenb.
4 Chach P. Old Tashkend.
5 Now Farkin near Diyarbekr, Martyropolis.
6 v. ~op&s, Trois faits de phonetique historique Arab-
Rispanique ; Internat. Orien. Congr. 1905 p. 245. PP has
Jaliqiyah for Galicia,as in Idrisi,Rome 1592,Sheet 32

equinoctial which rises with it is different fron that
which rises with another sign. [Similarly the degrees
of' the signs as they set do no3 correspond with the
divisions of the equinoctial.] At the equator the
ascensions being vertica are said to occur in the em&
sphere, and there the ascensions of sets of four signs
are equal if the signs are equidistant north or south
of the equinoctial points. Thus Aries and Pisces which
are at the same distance from the vernal epuinox as
Libra and Virgo from the autumna1,have all equal
ascensions. The same is true of Taurus and Aquarius and
Leo and Scorpius,as well as of the four other signs.
Again the descensions of these signs are equal to their
ascensions. But these facts are only true at the
equator; as soon as a place has latitude the signs equidistant
from the equinoxes have still equal ascensions,
this is true of Aries and Pisces,and of Libra an& Virgo,
but these groups are no longer equal to each other. If
however the ascension of a sign be added to that of its
nadir, the result is equal to the sum of their ascenaiw
at the equator. Moreover the descension of any sign is
equal to the ascension of its nadir. The table shows
the ascensions of the signs at the equator and in the
middle of each of the seven climates.
7 Qgy occurs in a list of Turkish tribes, Browne Vol.
Orient. Stud. p. 407. Kien-Km? Czapliaka, Turks of
Central Asia. p. 66.
8 Kirghiz, EiMk and Tughuzghuz (Toqquz-Oghuz) (MS has
initial B for T) PP has Elldk, all three neighbours.
9 Near Astrakhan.
10 P ~l&, 1)s~llboth without pain. MS has al-sarir?
betwem the Caspian and. Black Seas. The Alans and AS
are represented by the Ossetes.
The Bulghars on the Danube were also oalled Eurjh,
Encycl. Islam I 806,
12 Surrltr and Bulghar were two large cities of the
Bulghars on the Volga south of moan.
13 A has Bulghariya alone,PL Maj 'ar alone PP both
Bulghariya and BiIa jrar. Bul$aria lies south of the 44th
parallel and is therefore largely in the 6th climate,
while a large part of Hungary is in the 7th. Hunery
is generally apelt hla jzr without fain.
14 The spelling of these names is so varied that it
is impossible to identify them except the Varangians.

243. ME dara ah al-kawkab wa dara ah mamarrhu wa
tulcrhu wa ghurilb&~: If a star has no latitude, the
de~ree of the eoli~tic on which it -.
9DEGRXEf OF is-situated rises,* sets and passes
ASTAR themeridianwithit. pt if it
has latitude, its degree is that
point of the ecliptic which is intersected
1 e~och according,to rJau p. 153 and Delambre I1 575,
but not I-'tolemyQ nlroxr).

y its oirole of latitude, i.e. the great circle passing
through the star and the poles of the ecliptio.
If the latitude is north, the star rises before its
degree, and sets later, while if south, it rises later
and sets earlier. So it is plain that the degree whioh
rises with a star is different from its 'epoch', and
must be distinguished as the degree of its rising, and
similarly, that which sets with it as the degree of
its setting. If the degree of the star with latitude
should be on a solstice, the arrival of the star at
the meridian will ooincide with that of its degree,
whether its latitude be north or south. If the degree
of a star, not on a solstice, is on the ascending
half of the eoliptic, 377, from the beginning of
Capricorn to the end of Gemini, and its latitu e is
north, the star arrives at the meridian bef'oreP its
degree, if its latitude is south, after its degree.
On the other hand if its degree is in the desoending
half from the beginning of Cancer to the end of
Sagittarius, and its latitude is north, it arrives
at the meridian after its degree, if south before.
So it is plain that the arrival or a star at the
meridian according ts the above-mentioned condition8
takes place wlth a degree other than its own, and
that is known as the degree of passage, mamarr. The
oond.ition at the meridian under the e a r t m e
same as that above it, the degree of passage being
the same in each case.
Cf. JagmInI. Zeit. deut. morg. gesell. XLVII, p, 268,
Both A and P MSS have rafter' instead of 'before? and
V.V. in this passage. Correct in Nau, l. 0. p. 153.

244. M; al-dz ir min cl-fal& . When you know how
many hours of the day have passed, then if they are -1
hours 135 multiply by fifteen, and
ARC OF UTOLUTION if Hindu gharis 137 by six, end if
crooked1 (unequal) hours by the
number of degrees of the equinoctial contained in onetwelfth
of the arc of day, the result is called the
dffir or arc of revolution of the orbit,or the number
n g r e e s (amEn) of the equinoctial which have risen
from sunrise till -that time. The same procedure must be
followed with the number of night hours elapsed, only if
these are orooked hours they must be multiplied by the
number of degrees in 412 of the arc of night,or which
is the same thing,by those of the nadir of the day.1
245. &IS al-pir. That portion of the zodiac xhich
arises on €IiTZ&astern horizon at any particular time is
called the sign of the ascendant or
ASCENDAWL' horoscope, 2 and the particular degree
thereof, the degree of the ascendant.
246. a1 bu -t. If starting f mm the degree of
the a s c e n d d i a c belt be divided into twelve
unequal parts,3 the first of these
THE TmLW 'HOUSES1 is known as the first 'houser the
second in the order of succession
of the sigas as the second,and so on to the twelfth
which cones back to the ascendant. The degrees of any
house are identical with those of the seventh from it.
This prooess is called the equalization or adjustment
of the houses.
247. ME al-autzd wa rGfilIhZ wafl-zawiT'il. Those
houses which are situated on the east and west horizons
and on the neridian above and below
AlJGLm bVCClDENT the earthyare called the four EngLes
AID CADEIPI? or cardines or pivots (autad): the
first of these is the ascendant.the
second, the fourth house, also called the earth-pivot
1. gee fig. after 390.
2 Wa, the degree ascending - Garnett Class. Rev. 1899.
Horosoope later used for a figure of' the heavens at a
nativity. Figs. on pp. LW, 190, 191.
The houses are twelve equal parts of the visible
heaven^ divided by great circles passing through twelve
equal divisions of the prime vertical, 2S3: as the ecliptic
is not in the sane plane they are u-equel divisions of it.
0 , ', U$/
v;, h, U\U,b
-
JpS,.--,
',J
. LL\, &V L, L~:~*
.* rl

(m medium coelum) I.C.,the third the seventh or
occident angle and the fourth the tenth house or *medium
coeluml lbI.C. Those houses which t'ollow the angles in tb3
order of suocession of the
M C
A
I C
signs are said to belmZitili
al-autad ' ( succedent ) , they
are the 2nd ,5th, 8th end U-,
and these are ready by the
diurnal movement to occupy
the cardinal positions.
Those which are adjacent to
the slagles in the contrary
direction viz. the 3rd, 6th,
9th and 12th houses are
called ZawB~il,(cadent),
because they have already
been in the cardinal positions.
Some people use the
expression 'SBqi$' for
zEtil,but I prefer not to
do soyas that has another
A. the Ascendant is at the 154 neening ( incon junct) and
degree,cusp,of the first ham. ambiguity is apt to arise.
248. Mjlb al-autEd al-qZtimah wa ghairhz. The cardo
of ?&.C. is the tenth house, if its degree, cusp, should be
in the tenth sign from the horoscope the
ANGLES ERECT cardines are called B'im,erect ;if in
OR NCrr the llth,succedent,a~ in the 9th
cadent.
249. I& tahwil al-sinIn. A solar year is the period
during mhi-6 sun makes a complete circuit of the
ecliptic,and by universal consent of
BNNIVEFtSARY authorities the solar year is completed
by the return to the first point of BrrLes.
A year of life (the anniversary of birth) is completed
by the return of the sun to the position it was in when
the Birth took place. Similarly with the beginnings of
other affairs: the ascendant of the time determined by
the Sunls return is the ascendant of the anuiwrsary W.
250. Tlii al-qir8nSt. Conjunction occurs between two
or more plane'cs wnen 'c1147 meet at one point within the
length of a sign. The conjunction of
CONJUNCTIONS Saturn and Jupiter which occurs once
every 20 years is the qirtn par exceUW3

fmutlaq* and is known aa a lesser conjunct1on.l If this
be studied in relation to the mean rate of progress of
the planeta,2 it wfll be found that the next conjunction
will take place in the 9th sign from that in whioh it
last occumd,and thus the situations of consecutive
conjunctions proceed in the same triplicity for 12
tirnes,after ahich conjunotion oocurs in another
trip11 oit y. For example, i f the first conjunction takes
place in Ilries,ths seaond dll be in Sagittarius, the
third in Leo and the fourth in Aries. After the twelfth
conjunction has taken place which occurs in Leo, the
next meting occurs in the triplicity of Taurus, the
first in Taurus, the second in Capricorn, the third in
Virgo,and so on for 12 times. The chan* from triplicity
to triplicity takes place in 240 years end is known as
the middle conlunct ion or transfer of the Dassane to
the new group of signs (inti 81 al-mamarr); whiie the
taQwxl (249) of the year in %ich it takes place is
cailed the taQwI1 of the transfer. As there are four
triplicities,viz. those of A.ries,Taurus,Gemini and
Cancer,it takes 960 Tears for Saturn and JUpiter to get
back to conjunction in Aries,and this is called the
great con junction.Astrologers also make use of the conjunction
ahich occurs between Saturn and Mars,but only
in one sign viz. Cancer; this takes place every 30 years?
251. ME al-mamarr alladhz yustu W1 fItl-qir2iGt.
The expression transit (mamarr) in relation to con junc%
ions is not used unconditionally wlth
TRANSIT IN regard to the superior and inferior
CONJUNCTIONS planets, because if it were so, no
inferior could be said to pass over a
superior one, since its orbit is inferior, as e.g. the
passage of the moon over Mercury or Saturn is absurd
and impossible. However as it is constantly said that
the moon passes over Mercury or the Sun over Saturn,the
meaning is that regard must be had separately to their
positions in relation to the mid-distance on the
Cf. Chron. p. 91 on the connection between length of
life and these con unctions.
2 Jupiter move. SOd in a year Saturn 12°.tharetore when
Saturn has traversed 8 signs from a starting point
Jupiter has made a complete circuit + 8 signs. See 190.
3 The explanation is that in 20 years Saturn traverses
240 more than 8 signs of the zodiac, which in 240 years
amounts to a complete sign. Cf. fig. 373.
Ip W .
< /
W)/ 6
v ~9~$2\\;~,>&
/ 4 '4"
-1* .>&,,3~~.';.,C,CI;\c~l~bt
3 (P /cq3&
(D'
J , ~ \ ~ ~ ~ \ J ~ ~ ~ \ ~ " # ' &
' A ' / , e7'&;\&3

deferent and on the epicycle. If both planets were at
their mid-distance on the deferent, or on the same path
on the epicycle, the one would not pass the other but
if one were in the first or fourth quadrant (nitsq) of
its orbit, It would pass over that which wa8 in the 2nd
or 3rd quadrant, although the orbit of the latter were
above that of the former. If both were in the same
quadrant, e.g. the first, that which is iurthest from
the mid-distance, would pass over the other which is
nearest to the mid-distance. And if both were in the
3rd quadrant the one nearest to the mid-distance would
pass over the other which was furthest from it. You
have to imagine that both are in the one orbit, and
then judge by the distance from the earth. But the
knowledge or all this is a separate science.
252. Ta al-ijtlmEr watl-istiqb51. The conjunction
of the sun and the moon takes place at the end of the
month; it is called in the
CONJUNCTION AND Almagest itti+l, the degree and
OPPOSI!TION OP MOON minute of- sign in which it
occurs being called the 'uzt al-
;J;imE;: and the ascendant of that tine the
This conjunction takes place when tb-
Is j un i er the reys of the sun and is therefore
invisible; it is on this account called in Arabic
sir& and mu%. Opposition, isti bB1, occurs when the
moon is in=e seventh sign f h s u n , and the
degrees and minutes of both are equal. This is the
time of full moon, imtil8, and, badr called so on
account of its hastmise et =et, and the
ascendant of this time is tEliv al-istiqbgl. The
juzt al-istiqbal is
understood to be the
exact degree in which the moon is, but astrologers are
in the habit of taking it from moon or sun, whiohever
is above ground.

253. I& al-nImburIn. ',"hen the moon is in the
foukth sign from the sun, and their degrees are the
same, this is the first quarter, and takes
HALF-MOON place approximately on the 7th night of
the month; when in the 10th sign, about
the 22nd night, this is the seoond quarter. These are
called by the Persians 'nPm purXnr, helf-full, because
the moon appears to be cut in two. The degrees or the
ascendants at these quarters are noted just as they are
at conjunction and opposition.
254. l& al-fEsIsiit .l The phases of the moon aye
due to Its various distances from the sun. As these
effeot changes in the atmosphere and also
MOON'S
PHASES
crises of diseases, astrologers study them
from the angles of an octagon from the
position of the moon at the beginning of the
disease by intervals of a sign and a half viz. at 45O,
90°, 135O, 180°, 225O, 270°, 31S0 and 360~. The phases
of the moon are as follows:- conjunction and oppositicm,
12 degrees each side thereof, every 45 degrees and both.
quarters, so that the result is, taken in the order of
succession of the signs, 0, 12O, 45O, 90°, 135O, 16a0,
180°, 1920, 225O, 270°, 3M0, and 3M0.
9
':, '- ;L>?, . *0 u~~G.3
Y r '
" ?' 9 'i" - *
ii\ . p.
,
v,. ' :.
v d.,+$&
L, ,
&J\3
?
' ; + Li~"vc53~~&~$'+'
.- t ,- e' ,
1 From cp&ui5, here f&shIshEt, PL~
tEsish8, AB1
tarsis8t, as has Chron. text p. 40, line 22,
translated (foundations' p. 342 line 13 and 447 n. aa
if from assasa. For the same distances from the sun,
Wilson h n a azer: this can be explained from
Albohazen galy =I. 29 Basilea, 1571, where it is stated
that the athazir, a1 tas Irtt (apheses for obtaining
forecasts as to ra1-
be made at these phases.
Also p. 578,atezic.

255. ~u86f al-qamar 6 hum. As the earth is a
solid opaque body which vision cannot penetrate, the
radiance of the sun falls upon one surface
ECLIPSE
OF MOON
of it and the other is in shadow, just like
a solid body between a lamp and the wall on
which it is shining. Further aa the earth
is round its shadow is also round, and falls on the
zodiac belt opposite the sun. Now when the moon at the
time of opposition has no latitude either to north or
south its face is necessarily within the oircle of the
earth's shadow, the earth intervening between it and
the sun. The radiance whioh always reaches it from the
sun is therefore cut off from it, its luminosity
ceases, and it is said to be eclipsed. When however at
the time of opposition the moon diverges from the
ecliptic if only to a small extent the eclipse is proportionally
partial, and if to a large extent does
not occur at all.
856. Fad 111-rats wa'l dhanab fThi min al-athar.
The latituxe of the 'moon is dependent on its distance
from its ascending and descending nodes;
EFFECT should it be at one of these when in
OF NODES opposition or be as near it as less than
120, there would either be no or very
little divergence from the ecliptic. Its nearness
therefore thereto at the time of opposition brings all
or a part of it into shadow and therefore the moon is
not eclipsed unless the nodes are near the sun.
257. Km andr kusiif al-qamar. A lunar eclipse
may be partial or total, if the latter, it may
continue for some time (delayed oaptivity,
KINDS OF makth) or as soon as it has become
ECLIPSE entirely dark, it may again begln to appeal:

258. Yin ayyati jihat yabdii al-lnisiif. The movement
of the earth's shadow on the ecliptic is the same as
the movement of the sun, but that of the
BEGINNING moon is quicker. The moon therefore at
OF ECLIPSE the full continues to move through that
shadow, first coming in contact with it
by its eastern margin. The beginning of an eclipse is
therefore from the east, either absolutely or with
slight declination to north or south. Anyone who
remembers this will know that the end of the eclipse
will be on the western margin, the beginning or the
luminosity again on the eastern, and the completion
thereof uncovering, inji%al on the western margin.
259. Kam auqSt kustlf al-qarnar. If the eclipse is
partial, three periods may be distinguished, the
beginning, when a notch appears on the
PERIODS OF
ECLIF'SE
margin of the moon, the middle, when
the darkness has reached its maximum
(the exact time of opposition), and
the end, when the moon has become entirely full
again. If it is a total eclipse five stages may be
noted, the beginning, the complete obliteration of
its light, the middle of the delay, the end thereof,
with the beginning of the illumination, and finally
the escape from the shadow. The accompanying figure
will help to make the natter intelligible.

Total
eolipae
orbit /

Total Eol se
Moon wlth delay
Inclined
Circle
shadow
1.Beginning of empse.
2.Beglnning of delay.
3.Middle of eclipse.
4.End of delay.
5 .Complete olearance
injiiiii
t6O. Elal yakhtalif kusiii al-qamar fIrl-bilBd. The
events of an eclipse have nothing to do with the body
of the moon, consequently to all
APPEBRBNCE AT
DIFFE3UWC PLBCES
obtrervers its condition is in the
same state at the same time.
However, since the hours of the
night which have elapsed till the eclipse ooours in
different regions on account of the different tFme or
the moon's rising In these, the hours during which it
is eclipsed are less in one region and more in another,
and the eclipse is visible in one place and not in
another because the beginning of the night in different
places is not the same exoept accidentally.
261. KusEf al-shams 6 hum. The moon at the end
of the (Arabiolr month appears in the mornin~ as a
slender crescent to the west of tiie sun and
ECLIPSE then exhibits the same form in the evening
OF SUN at the beginning of the next month E. of the
sun. When however the new moon appear8 to
the east of the sun it ie obvious that it has passed by
the sun. Should this passage have taken place in a
position between the sun and our vision, the sun would
be partly or entirely oonoealed from us. Consequently
that blackness which we observe in an eclipse of the
sun is due to the body of the moon which conceals the
sun from us.

262. Fahal takhtalif dhalika f ifl-bilgd. Eclipses
of the sun also offer different aspects at different
localities, firstly, due to the
APPEGW\ICE AT same reasons as have already
DIFFEREhi PLACE3
been referred to in the case of the
moon, ( time of sunrise) and
secondly, due to the point of view of the observer,
(parallax) for the noon which conceals is near to us
than the sun which is ooncealed distant. The
phenomenon of the eclipsehas nothing to do with the
nature of the sun, but is solely due to our vision of
it. BIoreover the passage occurs everywhere at the
same time, but is observed at different localities at
different times, and the alnount of the eclipse observed
at one locality is different from that at other
localities, in one case the eclipsed area is two
thirds, in another a half, in a third complete, and in
a fourth there is no eclipse at all.
263. 1\15 ikhtilEf al-manzar. This is the observation
of an object at the sane'xne from different places
involving different points of view.
PARALLAXIS Calculations as to eclipses of the sun
are made from the centre of the earth.
There is therefore only one point on the surface of the
earth where the calculated conjunction will be identical
with the observed conjunction. At any other point there
will be a difference of time, the observation being
either before or behind the calculated period.
Similarly it depends on the place of observation whether
the eclipse will be total or partial or not visible.
The acoorapanyiag illustration will make this easy to
understand.

A centre of earth. B its surface.
M Moon on its orbit.
S orbit or sun.
P Position of moon from both centre and surfaoe of &h.
P' Position from centre.
P* Poeition from surface.
264. Kam auqgt kusiif al-shams. Eolipses of the sun
exhibit three periods, for as there is no delay, only
the beginning, middle and end are
PERIODS OF distinguished.
ECLIPSE
265. Famin agyati jihat yakiin badiihu. Owing to the
moon's being cause of the eclipse and to its more rapid
movement it overtakes the sun from the
BEGINNING west so the eclipse always begins with
OF ECLIPSE the contact of the moon from this quarter,
contrary to what was said of eclipses of
the moon, and ends by the complete clearance on the
east, but there is always a slight deolination from
these two points or the compass.

266. Lima 1; yankasif al-shms fi kulli ijtinaF
wall-qmr Wrr ta th8. That there should be an
eclipsh the sun it is necessary that
CONDITIONS the moon should have no latitude at
OF ECLIPSE conjunction, or so little that it comes
between the sun and our vision. It is
consequently restricted to the times when one of the
two nodes is near, because when distant the moon
cannot conceal the sun being either f'urther north or -
south. The condition is the same at opposition in the
case of eclipses of the moon.
267. Ha1 a-Id li hair al-nai irain kusiif.
0ccultatio~'pla~ets and of' number of the
fixed stars are occasioned by
ECLIPSES OUTSIDE the passage of the moon, the
SUN AND MOON? phenomena beginning on the east
side and ending on the west.
[You have to consider that these originate with the
moon, that they occur frequently and are generally
unnoticed.]P Further, planets occultate each other
or a fixed star, or two planets and a fixed star may
all appear as one to the observer. Of course the
sun conceals these by its brilliance whether it
covers then or no, but it is not affected by them in
such a way that any portion of it is concealed.
b
4
9 , 9
J\I&~>+;~I,~~\ h
? a -Y$I, J ~ Y
r b (P'
3 ;
4 ; 01 I t* ~l&\4)s:*+.JcI)
? *
268. ra al-avv-m al-wustZ al-rnu'addalh If
the sun had no eastward movement and simply continued
revolving in virtue of the first
MEAN DAY movement.

it would regain any great circle from which it set out,
after having passed the 360° (uni ts of time) of the
equinoctial. The sun however during that period moves
east at its own rate of progress and only regains the
oircle from which it set out, whether horizon or
meridian, after having traversed the 360° of the equinoctial
plus the amount of its movement in the contrary
direotion> 175. The rate of this is not uniform, being
sometimes quick and sometimes slow, and in oonsequence
of its varied oharaoter the sun does not pass all circles
at unirorm times. But it passes the east horizon in
acoordance wlth the asoeneion of the looali ty, the
western in accordance with the descension of the looality
and the meridian in acoordance pith the asoension
in the erect sphere, for thia cirole everywhere on acoount
of its passing through the poles of the universe
has the equator as its horizon. So it is obvioua that
the true solar day is that time during which 360' have
been passea acoording to the Sun's observed rate of
progress, and that mean day is that time during which
360 have been passed by the daily mean movement of
the sun.
. * 9 .l
&,J!
&CY
&",&h .A,&,~~,;,~
& 9 F:, ,'l
269. MB al-ahahr. The month is of two kinds,
natural ana conventional, the latter as agreed on
between people. The natural month is that
MONTH
period or time required by the moon, situated
at a particular distance from the sun east or
west, to travel until it reaches the same distance.
As the shape of the illuminated part of the moon
corresponds to its distance from the sun, the month
is that period during which the moon gains the same
shape, and the . same side of the sun, and hss not a
third time shown the same outline. People customarily
speak of one or these phases as the new moon, because
it is the beginning of that series of figures, and
there is no other similar to it in shape and position.
The period is 29 1/2 days and a small fraotion; as it
is impossible to deal wlth a month containing half a
1 59'8". Acoording to JagmlnI the amount of time
necessary to traverse its own diameter. Ref. p. 148.
2 Paragraphs 269-323 may be regarded as an abstract or
pp. 199-334 Chron.

day the sum of two days, 59 days, is divided into
periods of SO and 29 days. This determination is
based on the mean progress of the sun and moon or
by their corrected rates of movement, for it agrees
with the determination of the months by the
visibility of the new moon, whether there be a
sucoession of two or three months greater or less
than the average or no. The conventional or
technioal month, however, is the twelfth part of a
natural year as near aa possible.
270. ~amz al-sanah al- tabIfiyyah wa ghayrG.
The natural year is defined as that period of time
during which the four seasons (hot
NBTURBL AND and cold seasons, harvest and seed-
OTHEB YEARS
time) are oompleted onoe. It is
measured by the return of the sun to
a particular point of the eoliptic from which it
set out: it is therefore oalled a solar year. Its
extent is 365 days and a fraotion of leas than a
quarter of a day as we have found, but more than a
quarter aocording to our predecessore. The natural
year being as desoribed, its months, the twelve
equal parts into whioh it is divided, are the solar
or conventional months not the natural ones. On
the other hand the oonventional gear is composed of
twelve natural months, its length being 354 days and
11/30ths of a day; such a year is styled lunar.

271. Fa kaif tusturmil hadha al-kusiir fitl-sinin.
In the case of the solar Year the fraction of a day
above referred to is ignored for four-
LW-YEAR years until a complete day results,which
is then incorporated into a year of 366
days. This is the custom of the Greeks, Romans,Syrians
and Copts of Egypt since the time of Augustus ~aesar,~
King of ~iim and this leap-gear is styled in Greek (the
royal year$ and the regulator (al-niq~s) and in
Syriac kabf shnii, which when turned into Arabic becomes
kabf sah, i.e. filled in. The Persians influenced by the
Magian religion, which forbids the intercalation of a
day in the year,abandon the quarter days until a whole
month is arrived at in 120 years. This is then incorporated
as a thtrteenth month in the year, the name of
one month b ing used twice. This year is called
*bihtar~kf,~ but after the destruction of their
dominion and religion this bihtarak has not been used.
Before the time of AUgUstUS the Egyptians allowed
these quarter days to accumulate until they made a
whole year in 1460 years and then deducted a year from
the date, because it comes to the same thing if you
deduct one year or if you add one and then reckon two
years as one.
As regards the lunar year, out of the fraotions of
11/30ths of a day, a complete day is arrived at in the
third year, which has then 355 days, similarly in the
sixth and so on, till after 30 years', and the
intercalation of 11 days', the fraction has disappeared.
These years of 355 days are called Arabic kabisah
years, not because they are in general use in Arabia,
but because the authors of astronomioal tables,
in which they are necessary, oalculate by them.
1 Chron: 33/29 refers to the fact that the Jullan
Intercalation was not regularly intr~duced till the 6th
$ear of the reign of Augustus.
malik al-sanah for Sanah al-malik? Not in P.
au li qiyils P. Bot in Chron. I have not found any
of;her expression in Greek for leap-year except
0 taE nrov k r o . ~
4 bhrrk P. and ~01, cf. Chron. p. 54. bhrzk A0 cf.
274 for their method of disposing of the 5 days in
excess of their 12 months of 30 days eaoh.

272. Famt3 al-nasi'. The word nasF* means intercal-.
ating or postponing, aad is used in connection with the
fact thnt the lunar gear finishes about
INTERCALATION
11 days before the solar, and consequently
the Arabio months change
through all the seasons in about 33 years, any month you
name occurring in any season or part of a season. The
Jews are commanded by the torah (the Mosaic law) to
keep both sun and moon natural; this they did by arrang
ing a 1eapAyear containing an additional month made up
by accumulating (for 3 or 2 yeqrs) the difference between
lunar and solar years, so that the year returned
to its proper position after having been too far in ad-
vance; their leap-year is called in Hebrew 'ibbGr i.e.
pregnant, because they compare that 13th month which is
added to the year to the fruit which a pregnant woman
bears in her womb.
The Jews were neighbours of the Arabs in Yathrib
the city of the Prophet. rJow the Arabs not only wanted
their pilgrimage to ocour in the proper month (dhu'lhi
jjat) but also that it should be fixed at theTeaant-
Bst time of the year, so that they might set out and
find travelling and commerce easy. They aaquired the
Jewish method of intercalation not in any learned way,
but in one suite4 to the people generally. It was communicated
to the public by the voioe of the qalamas or
interoalator , a hereditary of rice (before the new mo-on,
and, the caiculation of the period when it was desirable
to interoalate the kabfsah having been carefully
attended to, announoement would be made from the pulpit
that suoh and suoh a month would be postponed.P) Supposing
that were a sacred month, e.g. Xuharram, the
interoalator would say '1 postpone Muharhm and make
this month free from obligationsw so there would be two
Muharrams in the year, the first free from restrictions
and from war, while the seaond (in reality gafar) would
be observed as the real Muprram. This practice was
adhered to till Islam put an end to it in the 9th year
of the Hijra, known as tW year of the Farewell Pilgrim
age, when the Prophet (on whom be peaoe) bade farewell
to the world and to his own people.1

Whoever desires to associate lunar months with solar
years cannot dispense with the 1cabTsah; the qarranians
~f Harrgn ard of Saghdad ,known as gabians ,l who are a
re~ant" of the Greek pagans, also employ it, although
we are insufficiently acquainted with their methods and
opinions.
The Hindus also dupli ate any month when necessary
to complete the rectoning,'oalling the year in question
malmEsaY4which means a year with a month to be discartled.
This word i S, 5however, replaced in the li terary
language by adpim8sa.
272a. Ism15' al-hind lilayfln al-sabrah. This paragraph,present
in the Arabic versions and in PL', is
absent in PL and PP. These Sindu names
HINDT! N&ES for the days of the week are names of
DAYS OF iTEX planets followed by war or bara (day in
composition). See India, I, 213.
A
&lit
r
Sun
I
SOm
W
Moon
I1
I\langal
wiTr
llars
I11
Sudh
war
lleroury
IV
Brihaspat
wBr
Jupizer
SanTchar
war
Saturn
al-sabt
273. Ya kaif asmEv shuhar al-umam. To explain in
detail the various characteristics of the months among
the different nations would take too long;
NAEE OF I have accordingly constructed the
TKE Ib!OLTHS following tables which will make their
naiies clear and easily comparable.
1 See Mallino. Vol. Orient. Studies, Browne, p. 388.
Not to be confused with the real Sabians, Ilandeans, of
Zouthern Mesopotamia, ~iibi'a, pl, Subat, Sabiftina; for
an excellent descriptihn of the present day Subbi 'see
E.S. Stevens, By Tigris and Suphrates, 1923, 'pp. 204-
219, snd not to be confused with the Saheans, the
ancient inhabitants of SabHf , Sheba, in Yemen.
PL and PP have naqrbat for baqryat.
It happens once in three years when two lunations
occur in one solar month.
4 Mal is the pellet, fatfl, of dirt which is rolled
between the palms and thrown away; mas ,is month.
5 kd,hi, super- in corngosition.
V
Shukr
wEr
Venus
al- jumfah

,$
273
I~lfeek ~onths NO of m-- tian - months oi Persianmnths No b
are solar Days I are solar Daya are solar Days
31 1 TUth 3C ' Farwardin mtlh 86
FBU~T
3C ArdTbahlsht -Kh 30
AtUr
3C Khurdldh Mh 30
~aaq
3c ~ i rngh r
30
phi: 30
MgkTr
3C
FaminCith 3C
Febrgrius 28
MtlrtTUs 31
~firlrus 30
MBIUs 31
YunIQs 30
YiillEs 31
Avghus $iis 31
Sectembirca 30
~~tfbr~iie 31
Nu3mbrrfll 30
DCqfgnf;riua 31
Febrhry has 29
days in Leap Year
like ShuM* but
the beginning of
the year 18
different.
l
Farmiit hI 30
FBkiIn
FZih-11
30
30
I
afrfl
1lahsurI
3C
3C
The five extra
days form a small
13th month at the
end of the year
and are called
f ugh&mIn
ezayopivat)
f*
Murdadh mtTh 30
I ShahrIwar m8h 30
Mihr nial 30
HMn ma'h 30
Hdhar d h 30
Dal mZZh 30
Bahman m'ih 30
IsfandEmglh G h 30
The Kabiaah by turns
in these mon,hs. The
live *stolent days
mustariqah in excess
of 360 are now inserted
after HbSn.
Schram says until
Yazd. 375 thereafter
erid of year but Al-
3irS mote In m-
Soghdian months No of
art solar Day
msar4 30
ghiirjan 30
NIsan 30
~isyEk 30
IshnSkhandd
MuzhnaQIda
W
30
Fughgb 30
Abanj 30
Pagh
30
IJIasEifCgh
30
RInd 30
mash& 30
The five following
(lawehiq) daya at the
end-of the year. The
Kabisah in one of the
12 months.
2nd column:- v. Ch. p. 59. In nos. 2 ,9,10,11 the f repres'ents p. Both A0 and ~01'
have the modernized names interpolat ?d:-Tath (Ighrcanti) ,Babah,HatUr,Iflyak,mba,
AmshTr , BarmahBt , Barmudha, Baahans , I3aC lah ,Abf b ,~isrd. See Lam,Manners & Custnns Xa,Peypt
4th oo1umn:- Follows Persian Custom, the beginning of the year is the 6th of
Fa ardIn viz. Khurdtdh. v, Chron. c B 56.
A0 £= has also p. 65 a marginal note 0 1 the Armenian months.These are solar and the
year has 365 1/4 days. Each month ha 3 30 daya exoept the last which has 35,and in
a epeoial year 36,
1, Ngf8artI (NawUz) ;2.HUrI;3.SahmI; I.~arr;5.mghas;6,~r~ns;7.llahIk~;8.~r~k;9.
ZakhBnl ; l0 ,kBrIdT ; 11, IIXrkEs; 12. RarUr , cf. Encyol. Brit. VI.316 and Sohram, Chron.
Tafeln; teipz, 1908 p. 175.
.

274. &J hadhihi al-shuhiir tattafip awZ'ilhZ. TLe
Jewish and Arabian months are equal, and there is no
di f ference between them ex-
WHICH MONTHS CORRESPOND
AS TO BJEINNIMG3
ce-pt for one day occasionally
on aocount of religious considerations
among the Jews.
But the same name would not be applicable to these
months ,because the Jews interoalate and the F4oalems do
not. Similarly the Hindu months are of the aame nature
as those of the Moslems and Jews and their beginnings
nearer to the latter as they reckon from the time of
conjunotion or the moon. The Hindu and Jewish months
also correspond for two or three years until admss
is made,rhen they become different,after which they
again correspond for two or three years until the next
ad,hlmHsa. So the months of the Hindus do not coincide
with those of the Arabs,while they do fiam time to time
with those of the Jews, but not invariably on account
of the intercalation being carried out in different
years.
On the other hand the Syrian and Greek months do
correspond both as to number of days and name for name,
only the beginning of the year is different,the Greeks
taking from KmUn II.
The beginning of the Egyptian year ooincides with
the Persian month Dai,and from his point the months
correspond till the end of' Hban when a difference
comes in due to the fact that the Persians then make
their interoalation of five days (not as belonging to
that month as some people think) and the Egyptians at
the end o the year. The last Persian KabIsah,
bihtarals, f ooourred in the month Ib!Xn,pnd the fire
supplementary days - called andargzhan - lawiiciq A -
are inserted after Bb&n,aa an indioation of the month
which was laat duplicated as bihtarak.2
The beginning of the year and the first onth of
the Soghdians (who are Magians of 'Pransoxania ) is on
the sixth of the Persian FarnardTn,irom whloh point
onward the two calendars progress regularly to the end
of the year,
4
F
P omits Abh.
2 Fills laouna in Chron. p. 55.

275. Ha1 yataghadar maqEdIr shuhiir al-yahfid. The
Jewish vear is of two kinds ordinary bashit5 i.e.
basIt and lea^ (ribbar i.e. ~abxsah) ,
LENGTEI OF and each of these has again three
JEWISH MONTHS varieties; l/ QasErrn (haserah) or
dgficient, 353 days, in which
h!arpeswan and Kisliw have only 29 days, 2/ shalhh,
(Shelemah) complete or rather redundant 355 days in
whioh both months have 30 da.ys, and 3/ kasdar6n
(Kesidrah) or intemediate, 354 days, where they are
aa in the table, Marpeawan being deficient and Kisliw
oomplete. The variation of these two months is
necessitated by the fact that the first day of the
year must not be on a Sunday, Wednesday or Friday.
No other month departs from the number set down.
276. Fakaif yudfi shuhs al-hind shuh& 81-
q.mar. The Hindu. have $ys of different lengths l/
survasna or the solar day, i.e.
CORRESPONDENCE . ifik0th part of a solar year,
OF HINDU ANB 2/ ohandramzna, or the lunar
LUNAR MONTHS day (tithi) i.e. the 1/360th
part of a lunar gear, 3/
nakrshat-na, measured by the mansions of the moon,
1. e. the time spent in eaoh of the 27 mansions, and.
4/ sabamana (sqvanam8na) the time between two sunrises.
This is the generally recognized day, the
people's day. To any one who knows about solar and
lunar years it will be obvious that the solar day is
longer than that between two sunrises and the luxUkr
shorter.
What has been said above with regard to the length
of a lunar month means 29h days aa determined by sunrises,
but wlth regard to Hindu months of 30 days, as
in the table each of these, is the 30th part of the
interval between two mean conjunotions.

277. Ha1 li ay* al-shuhiir asSmI. The Hindus have
names for each das.and the nuardians of these are the
Celestial ceings ,daiva,who are their
NAMES OF angels. ~imilarl~the~oghdians and
DAYS OF lYIONTK KhwErIzmians and the like have names
for each day of the month but these are
not very well known,and become rapidly altered by frequent
oopying. Philologists have suooeeded in tracing an
Arabio name for each of the thirty days of the Arabia
month, but these are not known to the desert Arabs, they
are not ourrent, it is an effort to remember them and irr
difference with regard to them 'is obvious. Among the
peoples of the earth the use of name8 for the days of
the week is genera1,and differences tend to disappear,
but the Persians do not1 use this method; they have a
separate name for each day,and jhey regard these names
as those of God and the angels. They are set &own in the
acoonpanying table,
Y
Names of the days of the Persian months.
7
1. Eurmuz 11. Khiir. 21. Riim 1, Ahllmedh) @
2. Fahman 12. Hgh 22.BEdh 2.Uahlawdh),-
3. krdIbahiaht 13. Tir 23. Dai-ba- 3. -8
4. Shahrrwar 14. JUsh dIn 4. Vahish%)g
5. Isfan&ma&h 15. Dai-ba- 24. bin ashatra 12
6. KhurdiPdh mihr 25. Bra 5. Vahisht,
7. Murdadh 16. Mihr 26. AshtSdh
B
8. Dai-ba- 17. ~riish 27. AsmtSn
zdhar 18. Rashn 28. 2bfidh
9. Hdhar 19, ~arwardln 29, MErasiBnd ri
10. Aban 20. Bahrh 30. Anirsn. R
'si
'1 Read lam for thum.
The f z t s e v m deGoted to Ahuramazda and the six
Archangels, Aneshaspentas, and the remaining 23 to
Angels, among which the names of the Sun, Moon, Mercury
(11,12,13 and Mithra (16) may be recognized. .-These are
worshippe d in the Yashtswhich correspond to the names or
the days - (~aug. p. 184 seq.) The names of the five
sugplementary days given above may be traced in the
five ath has (l. c. 142 aeq. )
1. Bhunawiti 2. Ushtavaiti
3. Spentamainyu 4. Vohukhshathra 5. Vahistoisti -
Nos. 4 acd 5 transposed in the ~afhh.

278. Kaif sunig hi*ulc*i al-urnam. Frm what has
been said above in regard to months, intercalation and
leap year it is clear that there are
YEARS OF two kinds of year, solar and lunar, and
THE NATIONS that of the latter there are two
varieties, the first, simple, formed of
12 months such as the hloslems and Turks and orientals
use, each having as a mean 354 days, but occasionally
353 and 355, this excess and deficiency being outside
the control of man. The second, that where intercalation
is practised, and 13 months result as is the case
wlth the Hindus and the Jews as well as the Greeks in
ancient times and the pre-Islamic Arabs (and
~aiirs)P. On the other hand the solar year has 365
days and a fraction which is nearly a quarter; it is
employed by the Greeks, Syrians, Egyptians, Persians
and Soghdians, but these differ as to their method
of dealing with the fraction.
279. XE al-tarrsrrikh. A 'date* is a point of time
well-established at which something has taken plsce,
know]-edge of whioh has reached and been
DATSS diffused among the people, such as the
ionnation of a new religion or sect, or some
occurrence in a state which, like a great battle or
a devastating hurricane, has arrested attention to
such an extent that it is taken as an artiriclal
point or departure from whioh to reckon years, months
or days, so that whenever i t is desired, the amount
of time which has since elapsed can be known, or the
relative dates of events fixed whether before or
after .
280. MS al-adwtir. Cycles are periods of years
which separate recurrent events, like the 33 years
required by any lunar month, a warram in
CYCLES the beginning of spring, for instance,
to regain its former position in the

seasons of the year, 'or the 30 lunar years required by
Saturn to make a complete tour ~f the ecliptic, or the
time required for disposing or the fractions of a day
which occur in every year.
Again when the number of years in an era becomes
high, oyoles are'used like knots in a rosary (such as
decades and centuriesP) together with the remaining units.
280a. M& tawarfkh al-warn. The Llussulman era [Al-
Hijra] dates from the year L16 July 622 A.D.] when the
Prophet (God be gracious to hin and give
ERAS OF him peace) removed, hS jara, from Mecca
THE NATIONS to Medina: its years are all lunar. That
of the people or the Book is the Greek
one known as the era of Alexander, although it is frfrom
the beginning of the year when Seleucus was appointed
King of Antioch 11 Sept. 311 B.C. I. Christians employ
in it Syrian or Greek years, while the Jews use their
own lunar years with the neoeseary intercalations, and
the EarrBniana, who call themselves ~~biansl have cuetoms'similar
to the Jews. Other eras are known to the
people of the Book suoh as the oreation of Adam (on
whom be peace), and the deluge of Noah (on whom be
peace), the drowning of Pharaoh (may the ouree of God
be upon him -)P the erection by Solomon (on whom be
peace) or the temple in Jerusalem, and the deetruction
or that temple by Nebuchadrezear (Bukhtina~sar), but
there are controversies about these, ~onseqientl~ it
has been agreed that the era or Alexander is most
satisfactory by reason of the fewer difficulties attending
it, and the smaller number of years involved.
During the ignorance the Arabs reckoned from celebrated
battles among themselves, and before the Hijra,
the year of the Elephant when the Abyssinian8 ooming
Prom Yamen to destroy the Karba were routed and in whbh
the Prophet (the blessing of God be upon him) was born.
The Persians have been accustomed to date from the
beginning' of the reign of their reigning king,and on his
death to use that of his duccessor. At the time their
empire was destroyed they were dating from Yazdigird M.
Shahrfir,ibn Khusra Parviz the last of the Khusrawe,the
years being without intercalation [and bihtarag] The
majority of the Vagians date from his murder 20 years
after his ac~essian.~
1 The earranians were entitled as Gnostics to call themselves
Qabians ,Pedersen,Browne ,Vol. Orient. Stud. p. 381.
Murdered at Merv. A.D. 651 .Era of the Zoroastrians: cf.
Chron p. 138. The Parsees da ts from his ac6aeaion 16thd 632
172

The Egyptians on the other hand date from Rukhtinaggar
the First (Nabonaq~ar) ,a praotioe whioh molemy
followed in the Almagest' in determining the mean motions
of the planets,while in regard to the fixed stars he
date& from dntolrinus the then King of Greece. At the
present time,however,the modern Egyptians who intercalate
along with Rome date from Augustus the first of t e
Emperors. In astronomical books the era of DiOcletian P
is always found. He was the last of the pagan Emperors
of Rome; after him they beoame Christians.
Among the Hindus many eras are In use,some old,
new. The best knom and most current of them is a
which means the era of Shaka,that man who beoame viotorious
and all-powerful at that timesand tyrannized
over the people; when they killed him they made this
era from the year of their delivery from him.
Neoessarily every nation has one or more eras;they
are only of two kinds,either knowledge of them has
reached us or not. Rowever this is a long story,and has
been dealt with more conveniently in another place.
281. Fahal yuTlam ~ bain hadhlhi al-tawErTkh. In
oomparing two erassif the words year and month are used,
it is necessary to remember that these
HOW TO COMPARE terms do not neoessarily mean the same
THESE E W period; there is however no ambiguity
ri th days ,and so in the accompanying
table in 'mimbar* form the number of days in each era
till the suooeeding one is set down,and these numbers
are added together so as to show the entire number of
days in any era till the beginning of any other down to
the Persian era. This table is extremely accurate and
very useful to any one who wishes to translate from one
era to another,if he associates the data with years and
months in the manner whioh is neoessary.
1 The Era of Diocletian Lbeglnning 28 Aug. 284 A.D. J
was adopted by the Copt~s as the Era of the Martyrs -
ahuhadii* - although his edict of persecution was not
issued till 303 A.D. of. Chaine, Chronologie p. 14.
The time (~zl) of the ShaBas (~oythians) who acconpanled
the Parthian invader,Nahaplna,who reigned fron
78 to 125 A.D. The Era much used by Astronomers,
begins in 78 A.D.

282. MiI a** al-umam wa ayyhhmn. As the years and months
of the various peoples are different, so the 'special days whioh
they observe as feasts or fasts are also
lrEBSTS AND FASTS
OF THE NATIONS
ditferent. In the former they make merry,
dress gaily and practise various oustaas
transmitted fran their fathers or belonging
to their religion or sect. In the latter they are looking forward
to future rewards in accordance with the commands of the
holy law whioh explains the virtues of such days, or else, on
account of events evoking anguish and grief whioh by common
consent are held to have ooourred on theae dates, keep strict
fast therein.
Of such speoial days another kind is characteristic of
Christians who on these pray in the churohes to their saints and
martyrs, and desire to approach them for intercession.
As the year is divided into seasons, if it is a stable year
the festiwals fall naturally into these at a definite time of
the year, but if it begins
(Namsar 1
Bu?hUna@par Alexander
in eaoh Greek grar Augustus
Ye= from Roman year Antoninus A.H.
tisn Lunar
Year Year
wz(ugiral
Persian
Year
containing
365 days
1 This is the lower half of the table in Chron. p. 193,with the
omission of the Era Diluvli,Era Philipii and the Era Wvta+idi.
The uppermost figures indioate the number of days in each Era
until the beginning of the next ; the vertical columns, the additbn
thewto of the lengths of subsequent Eras,while the lowest row
shows the number of days from the beginning of each Era until
that of Yazdiaird.
The aooepteh- dates for the beginnings of the
table are: -
2. Alexander 103532 103092
3. Augustus 60277 60631
4. Bntoninus
5. Dlocletian
53512
123410
53692
123286
6. Hijra 3623
mvm
Eras in this
l. Nabonassar 26 Feb. 747 B.C. 1448273 p. 19 Number of days qb
2. Alexanhir 1Sep. 311B.C. 1607709 27 to sohram p. m 1
3. Augurtua 14 lkb. 27 B.C. 1711241 33 from 4712 B.C. the
4. Antoninus 25 Feb. 138 A.D. 1771518 " 36 date to whioh he
5. Diocletian 29 dug. 284,A.D. 1825030 39 has carried baok
6. Hifra 16 Jul. 62Z' A.D. 1948440 46 the Julian
7. Yazdigird 16 Jun. 632 A.D. 1952063 11 reckoning.
Deduoting the first day of eaoh Era from that (,r the succeeding
one we have the lengths of the Eras in days.
a/~~:;~;:ove a/~~;;~Zh~m

sometilqes later and sometimes earlier with regard to the
seasons as is the case with the Jewish and Hindu years,
then the feasts change also.
Those people who have a stable year have also
festivi ties of another kind ,namely those in conneation
with agriculture, viticulture, planting and sowing,
harvest and breeding,also with the atmospheric Signs
such as heat,cold winds &c which form a normal series
in such a year. ??hose cornunities have similar festivals
whose year is movable,ior an earlier or later beginning
is not suoh as to make an appreciable difference.
283. Nii 61-fig9 rI ar d al- hiid. Of thc Jewish
featlvalsl Paaaciver; fish 'Tor peEkh ,2 Is the 15th &y
of Alsan. d d !S that dayin which the
m S H children'oi Israel fled out of Egy-pt, were
PASSOVER d&livered iron bondage, and made saorifioe
as they were commanded. It is the first of
the seven days of unleavened bread during which it is
not permitted to the Jews to eat or to keep in the
house leavened bread. On the last of the seven days
Pharaoh was drowned in BaQr sG13 the Sea of Qulzum, and
that day is known as al-kass. 4
284. al-'ansarah. The sixth day of the month of
SIwan is called rislratfrom their assembling together,
rassEr8, rassereth,and is one of the
CONGREGATION Jewish pilgrimages : it coincides with
the ripening of the orops.
285. MB al-kibbiir. Kippur is the tenth day of
TishrIn, i t i s e s on this acoount called
rBehfIr65 (r8sa8r). The word kipptir in
&FOX5iENT - - Hebrew means ex~iation of sins or atonement;
fasting is obligatory on this day
and non-compliance is punishable by death. The fast
lasts for 25 hours beginning (half an hour)P before
sunset on the 9th and ending half an hour after sunset
on the 10th when fast is broken. Kippar mGst not fall
on Sunday, Tuesday or Friday.
Chron. p. 268. seq.
MS has fasI4 by mistake and P sin for @Rd.
Cf. Nall, I. 177. has sub, PI, suwais.
As in M; Kabas AOq al-makss, Chron. p. 275 and 132;
rakas, PP. absent PI,.
5 cr. the rashtlra of Mqarram, 301.

286. Mii al-mapallah. The Hebrew word pesulls means
a shads place: this= feast of the ~abernam
(~ukkoth), lasts for seven days begin-
FEAST OF ning on the 15th of Tishri, during whioh
TAB3EWBCISSS the Jews are commanded to live under the
shadow of booths constructed of reeds,
willow and olive branches,and are forbidden to live mder
a roof, in order to oommemorate the cloud whioh the Ia'd
ccrmmanded to shade them in the desert of Al-Tih.
287. Mii rargbz. The last day of the foregoing
feast is called (in Hebrew) r~rhb; whioh means a willow
(A.khillf, P. bId); it is the 21st day of
WILLOW Tishrf and is aleo a day of pilgrimage.
288. ME al-tabarrrk. Tabarrik, the teaet of
Benedicjiion, oaours two days after
-1CTIoN VarabB.
8
2 Q. ME al-Qanukkah. he feast of Hanukkah or D&-
cation lamreightdays beginning born the 25th of
Kislen. On the first night they light one
DEDICATION lamp at the door of the house,on the
second two,and so on,till the eighth when
they light eight lamps. This is to oolmnemorate the fact
that a certain king oppressed them,and deprived bride8
of their virginity before they went in to their husbands.
Then there were eight brothers who had a sister who was
asked in marriage,the youngest brother from a sense of
honour dressed himself as a woman,went in to the king,
killed him and by his action purified Jerusalem.
290, ?,?S al-burr. Purim which oooura on the four vth
da? of Adhar and is also called the feast of Megilla,
derives its name fron the castin of lots. Its
PURUd
origin is as follows: Halmfin WaZ% of AQa&drua
or Kisra' was badly disposed to the Jew8 then
captive In Babylon,and plotted to extirpate them. The
order however recoiled upon himself,he was killed on Ws
day and crucified. The Jews therefore on this day @?&m&
stir (fea~t)~) hang and bum him in eff.lgy,expresairg U+ joy.
raraba means a desert plain,and is innslated MaPtinR.
Chron. the day pf ter.
The root means dedication,not purification (tan~if) .
Really to commemorate the re-dedication of the Temple by
Judas Maccabaeus after its pollution by Antiochus Epihams
who had set up a pagan altar theraw FwUml U LWb.
i' AnC fifteenth and the Fast of Esther on the 13th.
The Meglllah or *roll* of Esther a c h is read at thb tiE.
176

In the other months there are supererogatory fasts,
occasioned by new grievous trials, on which mourning and
abstention from food aye incumbent on them.
291. Min ar 'd 3.1-nastirf mB al-miCli3d. Of the Christian
festivalsr lv~pR s the night o the birth of ?sd
bin (on Him be :lessinps and ~e%Ze),~
CHRISTMAS which occurred on the 25th of-~anun I at a
village oallea NB?irah al-jalI1 near Jerusalem
which is pit al-maqdis. geople were in the habit
of oalling him Isha al-nagErr , whence the Christians
are oalled nagard.
292. Mr? al-din$. DinQ is the 6th day of Kiiniin I1 on
which day Yahymbin ZakariyB. baptized Jesus the son of
I;bary i.e. irmersed him in the river Jordan.
EPIPHANY
John was acoustomed to baptize people to unburden
them of their sins,and was therefore
known as yuhanz ma rmadh, John the Baptist . The bapti anal
m ter mZ al-ma%udiyyah is that with which Christians
ohristen their children and oonverts from other religians
When Jesus issued f'rom the Jordan the Holy Spirit
descended upon Him in the form of a dove.
293. Mg Saum nrnuwr. The fast of Nineveh is called
from the tom of that name,which is also the town
of the prophet Jonah (May od bless him). The
FAST OF name Jonah is a Greek one; acoord ing to the
~~ Christians he spent three days and three
nights in a fish's5 belly,and this is regatfled
as a sign that Jesus would remain three days and three
nights under the earth. Thie fast lasts for three days
and precedw the great fast by three weeks beginning on a
Monday.
294. ME al-saum sl-kabrr. The great fast of the
~bristianslasts'for seven weeks; it always begins on a
Monday and ends on a Saturday,but Saturdays and
LENT Sundays are excluded frolli the fast with the exception
of the last Saturday. In this fast no
meat or other animal produot is eaten, The following are
the conaitions determining the time of Lent. It must not
be~in before the 2nd of ~iiub~t,nor later than the 8th
1 Chron. p. 282 seq.
2 ffshar is an dramaic form of rid.
3 Yahyd and YaanZ are Arabic and Syriac forms for John
4 bn' etymology sqgested by the re eemblame of YBnah to yWh
5 MS ha8 'unnuihi ! for hiit.

Zdhar,and the generally accepted way of oaloulating it is that it begins
on the Monday nearest to the oonjunotion of the moon in Shubat as
long as that is not before the 2nd. If it is,that oonjunction loses
its validity,the next oonjunction after is adopted and whichever Monday
is nearest to it is the first day of the fast.1
295. M& al-sha'kin wa nd yatlau. The last Sunday of the great
fast is called shafEnIn,meaning praise; on that day Jesus (on Him be
peace) entered Jeruealau on a she-ass,the foal of the
PAW-SUNDAY ass ran after it,and the people kept shouting Hosanna.
[He entered the temple] ordered the performance of the
l a m rites,forbad reprehensible practices2 and rebuked the priests
and scribes, (who assailed Him so that) He oonoealed Himeelf. On the
Wednesday He washed the feet of His apostles,who were His friends and
disciples as a sign of humillty,and on Thursday celebrated Passover
with (His sacrament ofp) bread and wine,and announced to them His approaching
death. Then on the eve of Friday (Thursday night) He asoended
the mountain,and one of His disoiples,a Jew (who was a religious
leader,pointed lIim out,andP) delivered Hlm to the Jews,who seized Him
and tortured Him all night. In accordanoe with their representational
He was crucified at midday on Friday. This Friday is called the Friday
of the Crucifixion. He was then buried and remained in the tomb during
Saturday (which is oalled the Glad Tidings of the Dead from the
and rose on Suncky at dam. This Sunday is the end or the Chrlatian 7 ihst.
296. Mg al-8Qad al- dIth. New Sunday is the first Sunday after
the fast; m p d ~ a y during s the fast,people were oocupied
therewith,but on this Sunday utensils,household
DOMINICA IN ALEIS furniture and clothes are renewed,and deeds and
contraots are dated thereirom.
297 h@ al-sulli . Ascension day is Thursday the 42116 day (40th
Chron. 4 i e b w e P breaking of the fast. On this day the Messiah
aaoended into heaven from among His disoiples, and
ASCENSION DAY promised them he would send them the paraolete
(raraqlIf); this is the ~oly Spirit.
From a marginal note in PL. "Another way of oalculatinn it is frm
Epiphany, the-sixth day of Kanun 11. on whichever da ba &and& rUz
- bild (ordinal added to chand,a; to digar in 517r of the Arabio
month this falls,subtract the number from 32 and oount on ae many days
from the beginning of ShubH). If this arrives at a Mondar.it is the -
beginning of the fast,if not,then it is the Monday next thereafter.
If the latter should be after the 8th of Adhar,then the Monday before
the day arrived at rill be the first day of the fast." The day of the
Arabic month gives the phase of the moon from which the coajunotion of
Shub84 (February) is caloulcated, The method can be used to determine
Easter; e.g. Jan. 6,1933 - Ramadan 9,1351. 32-9 - Feby. 23 a Thursday;
the follorlng Monday127th is th6 beginning of the Eastern fast,March 1
(Ash Wednesday) of the Western Churoh. Counting on 46 days we have in
Maroh,30,in April,l6 days making Easter 1933 April 16th.
2 The phrase is a Qur'Cinic one, 111, 109.
3 Lacuna in Chron. p. 304. A marginal note of the Copyist of A0 (a
Copt) reads,"The washing of the feet took place in the afternoon of
Thursday; He then oelebrated the Passover,but was seized on the night
of Frlda-y (Thursday night) in a garden near Jerusalem and' was not
tortured then but was scourged and crucified on Friday."
. C
- /
,l ,y +s$~~@&Lv;~I
t * > M . 9 .
d..
"L C:;I'&&
* U9
t

298. MB al-bentTcost'I. Pentecost is Sunday the fiftieth day
from the breaking oi-Tast; the word is derived from the Creak
for fifty. On this. day the Holy Spirit desoended m
WITSUNMY the disciples of Je&s.fortified them,(pl has "they
aoquired strength from-HIS radiance,va az nor-i li -
nfrti giriftand") and conferred upon them the gift of twe,aff%r
whioh each sef out to that countrv where his lanmwe was used.
so as to summon the people to the'~.~essiah.
299. MB sawn al-salih~n. The lbst ot the Apostles also lasts
for seven =S. e sa iwna are prophets anbI *,and the iaith
i2ke CEristians in the I A ~ S such ~ S tliat it
rMT OF THR is necessary that His missionaries scatter d
lposTLES throughout the world should be [prophets]. f!
WO. m al-mashUsh. This is one of the impudent statements
made by people ignorant about the Christians to the effeot that
MEshilsh Is a night when men and women meet together
WfmSR to seek Jesus when promiscuous intercourse takes pleoe
as chance dedrmines in the darlc.3 We take refuge in
God from offending anyone whether friend or foe,and especially
the seot of the Christians whose dlspositioa,in spite of their
films do0 trine, is eminentl; distinguished by modesty (read
siflnat), uprightness and kindness to all.
They have many other separate fasts and commemorations of
their saints,devotees and martyrs,which are distinguished by
their names.
301. FamI lilmuslimZn fZ shuhtirhum. As regards apeoial days
in the maim months,tBe tenth of arram is called f~shUrB;4
it was a~~ointed a 2 fast in the first veer of
MTJsLfBb FSTS the ~ijra-but was afteruards abrogated b$ the--
BM) REASTS setting apart of the month of ~ama$gn. It ramtns,
however,a very advantageous day for voluntary
religious aots,and then it coincides with the date of the
murder of Rusayn bin TA~I, so that the Shifites of Baghdad mourn
for him on that day.
The fifteenth night of ShafbBn is muoh esteemediit is known
as the night of exemption,bar8t,and I think that barit in this
oaae means delivefy from the fire.
In Rama@n is the night of power, qadr, mentioned in the
Qu~'BU [the majesty of whioh is alsprent from the ~ur~6nIP (XCWII:
1-3). It is said that it must be sought among the last ten days,
and illdeed among the odd days of these ten; the opinion of the
majority is in favour of the 27th.
It begins ten days after Penteoost. The Feast which terminates
it is celebrated in Egypt on 5th EbIS,July 11,June 29 0.9.
2 anbIy6' dropped.
3 pa tahsra jka Lane_ 2890. Bar Bebraem qwtss frcm eno- mt spedfied
work of si-B~run? a sinilar stmy of pra&ouous intern- aseociated
with a religiaus rite (wbioh the Wsians call 'MBshuueh) in the
case of one of the peculiar seab of Wopotamia (Chron. Eccles I
219;Hoffmann,Abhand. far die nude d. ~orgenlrades,~11,125,seq: P;nd
see Enoyol. Islamunder Shabak and %W-). Lailat al-m8shUsh is
transm the night of the spyw in C m . p. 310, but the word aocordltg
to Juynboll NarBsid al-ittilE* V 544 is rob ably frm aahsh,llm
Ma*sWah. +he date of the teast'is unceitsin Chron. prefers autumn,
but that of the Crucifixion Is also mention~d.~ossihly the feastis
a vestige of a pagan Syrian festival of death and resurrection.
4 Cf. Jewish fast 285.
J:~c,L;-.\
/~sU&;~J
8 1, ~L\I,,&U&LL\\' j
Y # c b
&,=-LP~~.*J
I!, \ 3 ~;,(LL~,&L l+.. fk
+ .
*i
9 .-
+*~~L;.',;I~\~~.~
' '1
.. / 2 * .' .
j,:
j~&~,,&&;u>
h& 9y-
U* G; L. #.
W / *' *0
0
v*
/

301-302
The first of Shavrlll is the feast of fast-breaking on -h
day it is forbMen to fast-l but there is a reward for anyme who
haa iasted throughmt ~ama~d~ if he also fasts for the llsxt aix days.
The first ten days of DhU al-Qi jjah are the days of the htnam.
the snored territory of Mecga; the eighth is oalled tarwryah2*because
on that day the Mgr- have their thirst quenohed;thsrdnt&,
rarafah,as the pLZgrims are then "standingn on Kt.fkzgflIt during
the Great Pilgrimage,while the tenth is the feast of the killing
of the sheep whioh the pilgrims sacrifice rid al-adh5.3 On this
day and three days thereafter Pasting is io-ii~d festival
raiment is donned to elebrat&the close of the oererconies,idbZr
al-salit. (Three daysa after tie saorifi e of the sheep arecalbd
the days of flesh-drying tashrr # and these are oounted
days on which,with sighs, the t a i d ~ a i after d every prayer.p
There are controversies as toxrrmong the authorities,to
describe the nature of whioh is diffioult and here out of place.
There are also in the ltrabla months curtain days agreed on to
oommenorate the birthpeafib or mder of great people. These are
-the8 na@oted,or observed wlth zeal among -8 of pirihlm ss*
302. Fad al-Na- min rum al-furs. Among the customs of
the Persians a e o servanoe o - It is the first day
0: ndth Brward:n~%;soalled *new* belng the
PH(SUN first day of the New Year. For five day6 thereafter
NEI YlUR there is feasting and the 8izth is called Clcat Nsmnz,
because the fiusrars in those five days were acoustomed
to deliver judgments on the requirements of their retinue
and the qople generally,while on the sixth they received their
relations and the nobility.
The Persians are oonvincad that the first Nawriiz was lbihet
day of all tlnu,and aamrt that the spbm began to rmlw cn that day
305. S al-tTr En. TTrg([n is the 13th day of the m~nthfir,~
and duive&a it,^ is the oau with other days .bw
nhlMs are the sams as those of the months in whioh tbsy
TXRCXB are. This is a feast day,and it is reported that on
this day Arish shot an arrow with referenoe to a treaty
between IUnUohihr and AfrSsiiTb to the effeot that the former's
dominion should extend as far is the shot. It is said that the
arrow went from the mountains of ??abarist& to the highland8 OS
TokhZrIstSn.
1 'Id al-saghrr or RamaQ(In Balram.
2 A reoent pilgrim thought It was yaum al-tan1 (repme).
ESjT Khan with the Pilgrlr to Mecoa 1905 p. 1'7k Cf. SUtCn,
Pilgrimage, 11, 289, and Snouok Hurgronje, Het MakIranisohe
Feest, p. 04.
3 ffd al-hblr or.qurb(In Bairh
The first of them is called hum al-qarr, day of repose,
Hurgronje l.o.p.114. At3 is defective hem.
5 -ton ix, 219 and 291. Hurgronje p. 113.
6 Newyear's day was the time of the vernal equinox the sixth
being then the time of the entry of the sun into dies: the
astronomioal New Year. There are various aooounta of the
obsenan6es of Nawruz Riohardson Dissertation, p. 156; a160
M-Kisrari trans. ~aiiman, brma&n Na-.
7 Ahlhm, ;bl al-sahm. P. WagsagSn.
Coinoided wlth the sunrmer solatioe: also known a8 abrrzglln.

304. M8 al-mihrjlln. Mihrajln is the 16th day of the month
Plihr: on th s ay r un obtalned victorv over SIvarasp the
iag?ciagwiz Is known af pa@$~k (Eohgk) and imprison-
MHFtG&l ed hill? in Mt. Dadvand. The following days are also
feast days as was the case with Xawrllz the sixth
being Great Mihrgan which is also known as RB~~-&z.
305. llCH al-farwarda Bn. The last five days of the month
jiban are called ParvardaLn (nourishing] beoause the Megians on
these davs set out food and drink for the sbirits
PARVARDAGXN of-the dead, which it is said is all takenAand
consumed. Since five days are intercalated after
XMn, called andar&h, some people thought that these are the
five parvardagan, and controversy arose about It, a momentous
affair In their sect, so to make sure both sets of five days
are celebrated, the first being the 26th of Khan &h, and the
last, the last of the 'stolen1 days, and thus the whole of the
ParvardagHn lasts for ten days.
306. ruWb al-kasa .4 The month of Xdhar at the time of
the musrawa was the beginnling or spring. On the first Pap or
the month,as a kind of oomsdy (read naqqa:)
MOUNTING THE [P.fEl omen], a beardless man used to arr ve
BIPLRDLESS W seam on an ass, a crow5 grasped in one hand
and a fan in the other, with which he keeps
fanning himself, thus bidding good-bye to the winter, while he
asks for oontributlona from the people. In our day they have
kept up this custom in Shiriz. With regard to the tribute
levied whatever has been colleoted from morning till midday is
handed over to the governor, while that from midday till
afternoon prayers is retained by himself. If thereafter he is
found, he is beaten by the people and ill-treated.
307. M6 bahman'ah. Sahmanjana is the wan (2nd day of
the month b h l r day thby eat white radlshesi wlth
pure milk, on acoount of the fact that it
BAFlWNJiUU stren~thens the melllory. In KhurEeEn they make a
feast by putting all kinds of edible grains in
a pot with the flesh of all permitted animals, and indeed
everything available at that season and in that district in
the way of [animala],P vegetables and garden herbs.
DIb3mnd Dict. Geog. Pers. 224.
The AutUmal equinox REm, 21st v. 277.
3 Fills lacuna in Chron. p. 211.
4 P. Bar-nishastan Wsah or Kusak nish'in. Lacuna in Chron. p.
211. See Richardsonls Dictionary under mHh for a more detailed
account or his Dissertation p. 159.
5 .4s he has also a scourge and a paint-pot the crow must have
been difficult to manage. P. has XulEgh'I badast girifta perhaps
reminiscent of Kulagh ba dastash parIda. 'The *bird' has flown
into his hand1, mesning he has got money for nothing.
bahman al-abyKQ. Centaurea sp. or the flowers mixed with
slpand , harmala "rue for remembrance".

308. fi al-sada . Sadah (the Persian form) is the XMn
dp or the&ahnan,
i.e. the tenth and on the night
between the 10th and lth they light fires [with
SADAH walnuts and alonds,]~ drink (play and enjoy
themse1ves)P round about the;, and some drive in
animals to be burnL2 The name is derived from sad, a hundred
seeing that it is firty days and fifty nig ts t6 Nauraz: they
also say that on this day the first father8 completed his tale
of a hundred children. But the origin or lighting and keeping
up the fires is that BIvarasp oonaoripted two men every day
from his daminions in order that their brains ahould be placed
on the tub wounds o his shoulders. Ee had a vazir oalled
ArmKnTh (AmUt*l) a benevolent man who of each two
oonoealed one alive in Damamnd. When ~tridun seized him and
reproaohed him, BzndVrl said "the extent or my power was, that
I always saved one from being killed, and all of them are
behind the mountain." So a faithful rollorer was sent to
examine this claim, and Azd'T1 sent ahead an order to eaoh
person to light a fir8 on his roof because it was night and
he wished that the large number ofDthem should be evident.
This was therefore reported to Afrrdun who set the prisoner
free, plapd him on a golden throne and gave him the name of
rpuw (i.e. -ump Chief ;r the ~agiane). Five daya
be ore Sadah a day ia called Bar-Sadah or Her Sadah, but we
have no definite information about it.
%Q. MS kitbat maar al- 'aqErib. On the fifth day of
~afandirmB, tBe writing or papers to ward off the stings of
8oorpions taltes plaoe. The papers are attaohd to
SCORPION the doors of houses in the evening. This is not an
CFMWS original Persian custom but has been introduoed
anew by the oommon people. It is also a day
nn~i4",~ on whioh wives Have authority over their huibands
an 0 a m the Mtlsfaotion of their wishes and extravagant
demands ( iqtirQlQ.
310. al-kuhansldt. There are varioua divisions of the
days of the year at the beginning of eaoh of whioh five davs
are-known-as the KuhanMrs. In eaoh-of
SBASONS OF CREATION these ZarEduaht oonoelved that God
~lmighty created one species, suoh as
the heavens water, land animals, plants and man, so that the
creation of' the world ra; completed In sir days.7
1 dhawat al-adMn na'l-lubUb.
2 Birds with inflaramble ma%erial attaohed to their feet, so
that firas should be widely spread. Vullers I1 240 also Chron.
P. 213.
3 Kaytbaerth, the first of the mythologioal Kings or Persia,
mX9at dropped.
mIrmB~1, Shahnhh.
5 P. sin;
6 The word muzhd giHn Zh-n. p. 216 229 or muzdgr6n emphasizes
the resultant present-giving while mard gT&n of the TaihXm
account refers to the mastery of tbe wconsn. (energ. V of
salat) tatasallatanna. Richardson 1.0. 160.
7 ~ahanb~rs, Vullers k Haug. g. 192. Hyde,. Rellg. Veter.
Persarum Cap, 19 & 20. Jaokson. Irhische Religion p. 676.

311. FsnG al- amrLt f i shuhb al-rb. With regird to
special days in th: Greek months, the name J~Z& Is given
to certain days at the end of winter wbn sprirg
JAMRAHs approaches;they say that in these days the interior
of the earth becomes warm and vapours
issue from it. These jamrahs are on the 7th,14th and21st
of ShubB$,and the Arabs say that on these days meteors
fall from the stars of the mansions of the moon.
312. Ayyk al-raJUz ro8 hiya. The days of the old
woman (rajUz) are seven days beginning on b 26th 'ShubBt.
They are not free from ice,cold and winds
DAYS OF THE
OLD W O W
nor of extreme changes in the weather,and
are consequently called the cold days of
the old woman. 14hese are the unlucky days
in which the people of rHd perished in a storm,only one
old woman surviving and continually mourning for them.
Arabs however say that the word is not %jUz but fajuz,
as it were the hinder part of the winter.
313. FamE rajTlz qalam. These days are also known as
the va j Gz-i avq al-~indI has written a book on
qalamihLe :ys and says that the reason of
ADJUSTED DATE the change in the atmosphere is the
arrival of the sun at 90° from Its
apogee,the place where the equation changes frau plus to
minus. Since the apogee moves,Abdullah bin 'AlI al-gssib,
better knom as Abdullah Qalam,made these days to accord
with the position of the apogee in our time,not in Ptolemy
S. Therefore the days became knom as ra JGz-i qalam.
314. F d a ' al-ba'hilr. BahUr begins on the 19th
of TammUz and lairfor day&. The Greeks my that
Orion'a dog,the Southern Dog-star,is due to
DOGDAYS rise at this time; the heat becomes
1 The Coal days. Chron. p. 243. The first jamrah falls
into the air, the second into water, the third on tb earth.
These jamrahs and the sucoeeding cold spell are reccuded
on the same days in a Persian Calendar for 609 (Jalal.)
1099 A.H., 1687-8 A.D. reproduoed and translated by M.F.
Beak 1695. Jamrah he. translates wSolennltasw as if it
referred to the stone-throwing at Mina (Snouok-Hurgmnye
1.0. 105-6. Burton 11. 203. Lane 453) ,and the cold spell
"dies (vetulae) frigoris adultae hyemisw. In an Arabia
Calendar for 1349/1931 the Jamrahs are postponed to
Feb. $0, 27 and March 6, and the cold and stormy spell
(al-pueum v. Dozy) lasts from March 10-17.
2 Chron. p. 245.
183

excessive,and the name is said to be derived from bulpn
a crisis or a decision made,because the authorities try
to gain information as to the state of the weather in
the winter months from that on these decisive days. The
first day of bifhilr is an indication of what TishrIn I
will be like,th& second,of Tishrfn I1 and so on,so that
if there is fog or rain or wind on any of these days,
the corresponding months will have the same. Especially
In Egypt do they accept prognostics from these days as
to whether orops will thrive or not.1
315. Fahal lighayr ha'uld* shaivmln dhalika. All
nations and settled communities celebrate other days by
holding feasts and fairs at well-known
OTHER SIMILAR
DATES
points,but it is difficult to know about
them all individual1y;those we do know
about we have dealt with in a more
sul table place.
316. Fahal limajiiz al-sughd ayyh kadhalika. The
Maaians of Soahdia also have their feasts and festivals
of a religious nature called BghBms,
SOGHDIBN FEASTS but the neoessary knowledge with regard
to them has not reached us.
The people of Bukhld oall the first and second
Soghdian months by corresponding names. In these they
hold bazars,among which are the first and second
mEkhrzaj,2 at whioh we are told stolen article8 are sdld,
great confusion prevails and no returns are made. The
first of these is the 13th day of the third month
and the ssopnd the 15th of the fourth month Basik.%ze
fair of ~amwIs,a large and populous toan,lasts for seven
days fro& the 15th of 1,fazhIkhandg the sixth month,while
that of sharf,4 also the name of a town,lasts for ten
days from the 15th of ~fastifUgh5 the tenth month.
cl Chron. p. 260. MS has zClrr for zurUr.
~iikhrrg j Chron. Makhrrah P.
12th Nisanaj. 12th ~asgkanaj Chron. 221, text 234.
4 P. Charr, Chron. p. 425.
5 Chron. text p. 235, 7, has MasEifUgh in it there is a
feast from the 5th to the 10th and then the Muslims have
a fair at Shargh for 7 days. Trans. has ~arssfigh.

317. Famii Kha*. It is said that ~hazanl is not a
Soghdian expressi n,although the Soghdians use it,but a
TokhEraY one,and the Tokhgrians regard it as
AUTUMN & sign of change of the weather towards cold,
There is a special autumn feast for the upper
classes whioh is on the 18th of ShahrIwar,and one for
the common people on the 2nd of ICihr. Both of them
celebrate the beginning of the usemof the wine-press
(and the treading of the grapesP)
318. MG a m ma iis IChwBrizm. The Pfagians of
~ h ~ r agree2th i m ti!ose of Soghdia as to the tradititns
of their months.and the names of
DAB OF MAGIANS these are not different exoept to a
OF KHV~IZM dialectal extent. Some of the days
is the first of their third month and the sixth of
Khurdiid. In our time this arghii-sn8n is regarded by than
as indicating the time for sowing sesme,and the subsequent
operations. A jgh6r ,which means fire-lighting, is
the 16th of the fourth month on which day they kindle a
big fire at high$ after the fashion of the Sadah, and
drink (wine sIH ) round about it. Prom this day they
calculate the proper times for cultivation,gather ng in
and pressing the grapes and the like. Faghburiyahe is
the first day of their sixth month and on it is the
ex edition of the Shah to the frontiers. There are also
Chfr-rilz which is the Persian R--rflz and ~Xmkhab the
l6th7 of the tenth month,which in our times is in the
middle of winter.
Y
'S-
4"
Y
319. FamE al-a gm wall-shuh5r al-Murtadidi ah.
Ahen the Persians nglected intercalation th&&hs
oame on earlier: ~auriiz arrived be-
MUrTAQID*S DAYS fore the ripening of the corn,and
the payment of the taxas before the
marketing of the oorn. The agriculturists of the rural
1 Khizan AO.
2 Name by which TokhClristSn in the upper basin of the
Oxus was known tb Hsuen Tsang. Tokha'riyya A oorrected
in margin of A0 to Bukhbriyya.
3 Cf. Ehron. trans. 207, text 222.
* 1,fisspelt. Chron. p. 223, text 235 ~iiisErchT. (off.
5 arr ji-siiin Chron. Text 236. adMs ch$z& dress nil b3 put
6 Faghrubah Chron. trans. p. 224. Faghiriyyah A.
chron. text p. 236. Faghburnah P
7 21st Chron.
185

districts became much distressed,and the authoritieawe_re
in difficulty. So li!utawakkil resolved to postpone Nauruz
to a later date,so that it might be easier for the peasantry:
but his purpose was not f'ulfilled for he was assasinated
(247 A.H.) before it was carried out,land it
was reserved for MuftaQid to do so,who was determineq
to effect it. ~auriiz was transferred to the 11th ~azirib,
and the various Persian months with their contained
festivals which follow NauflZ were also transferred; they
intercalated five supplementary days in the same way as
the Syrians,and Xlurtatid added a sixth day in that year.2
320. F ~ ayyh E al-Khw8rlunshShiygah. Similar
changes were effected in Khwarim (in 348 A.H. 959 A.D.)
bv Ahmad bin Muhammad bin CIretq bin
SSHW&?IWS&~S 6nshr Khwiirizmihkh3 who was d6sirous
CALENDAFi thai the number of days which it waa
usual to count in relation to agriculture
and the vintage should start from a fixed point,
so that differences as to seed-time which occurred among
the peasantry should not arise. So he altered the
Xhwarizmian monthi so as to agree with the Syrian ones
and made ~Eiishr~I (their ~aurcz) the 2nd of isa an.
( 3rd) Chron. )
321. ME al-madmb daftar al-sanah. Calendars are
always based on thh Persian months on account of the
ease and beauty of the arrangement. They
CALENDARS are called 1 taqwiml beoause everything set
opposite each day may be depended on for
accuracy.
Similar calendars,constructed in ~ashmIr for the
Hindu year,are used throughout the districts of Hindus-
Sn; they are written on rolls of the thin bark of tGz
and are called 'tithi-pattril or books of lunar days,
but they were not durable and the calculations were
approximate not accurate.
With regard to the calendars in use in our country
you must know that the first column t9 the right of the
table contains the days of the week in abjad letters,so
that A means Sunday,B Monday, Z Saturday and then the
1 Chron. D. 37/32.
2 Chron. 6. 36;
3 ~ bu-sa~~d Ahmad. chron. p. 229. He was the father of
the last pride of this dynasty, Abu 'AbdallZih bin
Mu~mmad,whorn Zlatmiin attacked and made prisoner in 385/
995,annexlng then Khwzrizm.
4 Chron. p. 229/241 NBasErzr P.

week having been concluded back to A again. The second
column contains the days of the Arabib months from the
1st to the 29th, if the month is short, and to the
30th if complete; this is followed by the 1st of the
next month. In the third column are the days of the
Greek months from 1-30 or 31, and in the oase of
Shubl$ 28 or 29. The fourth oolumn has the numbers
of the days of the Persian month the name of which
is w~itten above, from 1-30 and in the case of IibSin
35, while the names of these days are recorded in
column five.
Next come the names of the seven planets, and
in each oolumn under these are three rows, that to
the right indioating the signs of the zodiac from
0-11 in abjad letters (sbeing Aries, 1 Taurus eta. ) ,
that to the left, degrees and that in the middle,
minutes. These three rows opposite a day indicate
the position of the planet at midday for the
locality for which the oalendar is oonstruoted,
and the amount or movement in degrees and minutes
from day to day. If increase in these is continuous
in the direotion of the signs then the movement is
direct, if there is decrease, it is retrograde,
while if there is neither increase nor decrease the
planet is stationary either in the direot or
retrograde course. Further there is a column for
the ascending node of the moon (rats), one for hours
and minutes of the length of day, and a third for
the altitude of the sun at midday. Sometimes a

column is provided for the latitude of the moon but
this is of little use and as such is discarded. Vhatever
else is included in the calendar is provided for
the people generally who regulate their work by the
position of the moon in the signs,and its conjunotion
with the planets.
On the margin of the calendar to the right are
placed the months of the various nations, their
festivals, the conjunctions and oppositions of the sun
and moon and the sign and degrees thereof where these
occur, the time of day or night,and the ascendants at
such times,the last being very useful for eliciting
weather probabilities. Again the time is shown of the
sun's entry into the various signs,and the ascendants
at such times,except in the case of Aries where the
ascendant is the ascendant of the year,and the calendar
is adjusted irom this point,the entry of the Suc into
Aries.
They also show at the beginning of the calendar by
a diagram how to equate the twelve houses, the position
of the planets therein and the resultant prognostics
for the whole year. Before this theme are given the
dates of the Prophets (on them be peace) and the dates
of distinguished kings, beoause an intellectual
pleasure is found in such things. Some people include
pictures of the new moons which occur in the Persian
year showing how each is going to appear when first
seen whether erect or recumbent, also its relation to
the point of sunset, so as to be of assistance to the
observer looking for the new moon. Many other things
are added for the most part useless. If however there
is an eclipse of the sun or moon in the oourse of the
year, this is indicated at the end of the calendar,
because an eclipse is indicative of so many

disqreeable things that it is undesirable to have it at the beginning of the oalendar
In the case of an eclipse the aate is riven, the amount of night or day which wili have elapsed till the
beginninp, middle and end of the eolipss the extent of delay if there is any, the amount if not total in l/lZths
of the diameter of sun or moan and the ohour of the eolipse whether usual
And now sa add by way of an example a portion of a Persian month so a; to facilitate the reading of tha
Calendar.
The asoendant of the ccnjunction of the moon is 3'61 of Aquarius, the hour, Friday 8h 6m. and the degree
of oonjunotion, 2a01f of Libra.
Suppose we are asked as to the peneral oondttions on Tuesday the 25th of ~ameQ&, re look in the column
of the days of the week for a 3 (Tuesday) which oorresponds to the 25th of iamagin in the Arabic column,
havine found this we see that it coincides with the 7th of tho Syrian and Greek months. If thb name is

written above as in this case we at once know that
it is TishrIn I, if not we turn to a table of
Greek months and find that TishrPn I is written
opposite it. We also find in the Persian column
that it corresponds to the 3rd day, Ardibahisht of
the month Xbbn, which name is written above the
table. If we wish to learn the date according to
the era of Alexander, we find it on the margin of
Tishrfn I, of the Hi jra beside Mubarram and of
Yazdigird beside Kauriiz the 1st of FarwardIn, on
the condition that TishrIn and IC3arram are already
past; if not it will be necessary to deduct a
year, the result i s the ate required, viz.
Tuesday 25th Ramapn 420 P A.H., 7th TishrIn I,
1341 Alex. and ArdIbahisht, 3rd of Xbiin, 398 Yazd.
f7th Oct. 1029 A.D.]
Then we look at the position of the planets
and find the sun at midday at the locality for
whioh the calendar is made is in 19054v of Libra,
Date and Place
A comon form for a
fisure of the heavens
at a nativity, in
whioh the degrees or
the cusps and the
situations of the
planets are inscribed.
The chief properties
of the houses are
here indicated, 461.
Another form on next
page which shows the
inequality of the
houses in relation
to the ecliptic.
As remarked Pers. Cat. B.M. 11. 452. P L ~ has 425
but this is by error due to the preceding bTst U
panjum ramaqiin: the words from 1341 - Ab6n.CpL and PP
agree with A.3are omitted; otherwise the calendar is
the same with some inaccuracies.

the moon in 70249, of Virgo, Saturn in 2O261 of
Gemini, Jupiter in 23O191 of Gemini, mrs in 2O181
or Cancer, Venus in 29°10* of Virgo, Mercury 6'21'
of Libra, and ss in 200139 of Virgo. The length
of the day is llh. 1Bm. and the altitude of the
sun at midday 48O2gw, and so the conditions at
midday have been arrived at.
322. Kaif yu-f mustaqImhZ wa gjir ha. Both
sun and moon are direot in their movements, there
being no retrograde phase, and
DIRECT AND similarly the ascending node has no
ILETROGWE direot course, but it is necessary
Pn the case of the other planets to
distinguish between direot and retrograde movements.
In the case of Saturn, if we look at the
day after that disoussed, we find that it shows
three minutes leas, we know therefore that it is
on the retrograde path. The same days show in
the case or Jupiter an increase of 5t,1 and of
Mars 16*, both are therefore direot, as is Venus
L E3 has 50 for 5.
l91

which increases by 1'14'. Her direct course is
rendered more evident by the fact that she moves into
Libra on the following day. ATercury is also direot and
increases by 1028'. A glance at the hour column shows
that there is a decrease of two minutes per day, and
that the day is shorter than the night. The altitude
at midday is also seen to decrease from day to day.
323. Fakaif rraf maudir al-kawkab liwa t mafriid
ghayr nisi al-nahg. The foilowing example wi?l show
how the position of a planet at
CALCUUTION POSITION any particular time may be
STAR AT OTHER TIMES found as long as its position
at midday is known. Suppose
that 7h. 40m. of the day hours have passed, this being
Tuesday; we divide the day hours into two equal
parts, viz. 5h. 39m. the difference is 2h. lm.
Neglecting the minute we can say that two hours after
midday have passed by the time mentioned, because the
number of hours up to midday is less, if it were
greater, these tws hours would belong to the forenoon.
Nor two hours is the 12th of a complete day, and we
employ this to the motion of the sun, which we know
progresses l0 in 24 hours, therefore, a 12th of l0
being 5', this is added to the known position of the sun
giving 19059' of Libra for its position after the lapse

of 7h. 40m. of the day hours. If the time were tuo
hours before midday the sun would be in 1~~49' or
Libra, and its position that of 3h. 40m. after
sunr i se .
An example can also be taken from the moon.
Suppose 2h. 20m. of the night hours have elapsed on
Wednesday, then we add the hours back to Tuesday
midday, making 8 hours, the 3rd of 24. Now the
progress of the moon is 14°39' per day, and the 3rd
of that 4053', which has to be added to the
position of the moon making 1Z017* of Virgo for its
position at the time stated.
The same process can be adopted with any planet
which is direct in its movement, and any other item
in the table which increases or diminishes. We
take for example Saturn as an instance of a planet
retrograding; its rate of progress is 3' aBd
consequently 1' in 8 hours, but as its movement is
contrary to the direction of the signs, this minute
has to be deducted from the position at midday,
therefore 2' 259 of Gemini at two hours or the
night of Wednesday.
So must one proceed by adding or subtracting
with all the items of the table.

THE BSTROLAEE
324. Mii a1 ag$urlEb. The astrolabdis an instrument
of the ~reeks;s nameh?$urlHbiin l. e. mirror of the
S tars, Hamzah of Isfahin derived from
TJ3S ASTROLABE the Persian as if'it were sitgra- 5b2
(star-finder). By Its aid i d b b
easily and accurately to know the time,and how much of
the day or night has passed, as well as other things too
many to enumerate.
The instrument has a back,belly and various separable
parts, which are held together by a pivot in the
centre. Various figures and lines are on the instrument,
each of which has a technical name for purposes of
distinction.
325. ME ard5 al-asturlzb. The astrolabe is round
except forthepro jeotion of the 1kursIt n whioh there
is a hole for the s~ivel,~ rili ah and
PARTS OF THE ring bal ah. In the centre o+
ASTROUDE astrol&s a hole in whioh the pivot
turns; the latter holds the various
parts together with the aid of a pin,the 'horset. On tbe
baok there is a rule, the rida'dah,which turns on the
pivot; ite ends are sharp poixmurI,and towards the
centre from each end there projects a quadrangular
piece (libnah, hadaf an archer's butt) with small holes
servingTTXghtS.
The face of the astrolabe,the other side of the
back,is surrounded by a raised ledge,the Qujrah,fittlng
accurately within which is a perforated plate,the
rankabfit (spider's web),shabaka or rete. Part of this
p m a oomplete ciro'le on whioh are inscribed the
twelve signs of the zodiac; beside Capricorn a sharp
1 For two English works on the Astrolabe, cf. Chaucer's
Conclusions on the Astrolabe 1391 ed. Skeat, Early
English Text Society 1812 and W.H. Morley, Desoription
or a Planisphere Astrolabe, constructed for Shah
usayn in 1712 A.D. London 1856.
Kisspelt in m.
3 P has ZwTzah; Morley p. 8 uses rilLqah for the
cord or strap from which the ring is suspended, and
%mah for the brass swivel between the ring and the
kurep,

point the 'muri', projects from the cirale and oontinually
rests on the hujrah when the rete is turned on the pivot.
Within and without the zodiac circle are sharp triangular
pieces attached to the meshes of the rete with the names of
fixed stars engraved on them - star-pointers. Vhen the horse
ie removed from the pivot, the rete and the discs underneath
it come apart; the latter are construoted for different
latitudes, 'climates*, both surfaces of eaoh disc being used.
Back of the Astrolabe
U
In the larger astrolabes the baok is not only used for measuring
altitude snd shadow, but affords space for a great deal
of astrol~gical information. The signs are there nith their
races, tarns and their lords, the Mansions of the loon, the
parallelogram of two shadows with a table ot triplicities in
the interior; sines, cosines in the upper left quadrant, and
in the right, the parallels of the signs, the meridian altitude
of the sun at various latitudes, e.g. L, and its altltude at
VtIriOuS places, when it crosses the azilnuth of Mecca, e.g. M.
'men the %Jadah is fitted to the baok by the pivot and
secured by the horse on the other side, the pointers ride on
the Gujrah, indicating altitude and shadow.
l05

The figure on the opposite gape does not represent the
fumm,but a simple form of tke baok showing the quadrant
of altitude and quadrant of shadow.
The above shr~ws a simple form of vankabEt or rete
from PL without underlying discs,fitting snugly into the
%mm bounded by the pujrah which is graduated to 360'
grouped in 15s;equal hours,and in this case shown with
the kursi, kmah and $alga attached. The rete can be
rotated,its pointer traversing the degrees of the Qujrak
There are shown 5 star-pointers within and 5 without the
zodiao cirole. When the horse is withdrawn from the pivot
the rete and underlying discs can be removed from tb %D,
Cf. f&me overlesf ,at its right the title of next paragraph.
195a

A diso prepared for a oertsin lztituds. The tbree
great circles are Rrom without, Tropic of Capricorn,
Equinoctial, Tropic 31 Cancer. W, East and West Liae,
E

326. ME asBrnZ khutilt a1-ap?urlSb. If the astrolabe
be held with the back towards on- the kursl uppermost,
the line whioh runs horizontally
LINES ON THE from left to right is the horizon or
BSTROLABE East and West line. The upper left
quadrant is the quadrant of altitude ,
and its margin is divided into ninety equal divisions,
grouped in fives or tens, beginning at the horizon line
and ending at the middle of the kurs'i. These degrees of
altitude" are numbered in tab jadt letters. The opposite
quadrant, the quadrant of shadow, is divided into digits
of shadow beginning with a point diametrically opposite
the middle of the kursr. There is no definite limit for
these digits exoept what is brought about by the
division lines becoming increasingly close as they recede
from that point. (The artist in P. has,incorrectly,
divided the quadrant of shadow in the same way as the
quadrant of altitude. )
On each of the disos under the rete (whioh are
acoommodated in the belly or mother of the astrolabe)
are engraved three conoentrio ciroles, the largest and
outermost of which is named the Tropic of Capricorn,%he
smallest and innermost, the Tmpio of Cancer and the
middle one, the Circle of Aries and Libra or the
equinootial. Each disc is divided into four quadrants
by two diameters, the East and West line and a second
whioh intersects it at right angles, and is divided at
the oentre into an upper part towards the kursf - the
midday line, and a lower, the midnight line,respeotlvely
known as the line of mid-heaven an8 that of the
pivot of earth. The horizon is that aro of a circle
which passes through the Intersections of the Circle of
dries with the East and Vest line; above it and similar
to it are the (muqantarast or parallels or altitude,
divided into East and West halves, by the meridian,
This is also the oase in A0 and ~01, but A0 has
an inserted leaf pp. 196-7 where it is divided at
45' (12 fingers) into umbra recta 1-12 and umbra
versa 12-1. Usually in Persian Astrolabes the umbra
recta is carried to 50 fingers on one quadrant (fig.p.cqs)
and 30 feet on the other, umbra versa being only
indioated in the central "aquare of 2 shadowan.

P P
as is the horizon. The smallest muqanTara is that
at the zenith marked & 900. There are also the
lines of the unequal or temporal hours below the
horizon passing between the Tropics of Cancer and
Capricorn, and numbered from 1-12.
327. FamS al-ag$urlbb al-Sm watl-ni?=
ghayruhum. A complete astrolabe is one that has
ninetv muaantaras numbered
COMPUTE AIiD PARTIAL in abjad ietters 1 to 90
ASTROLABES
from horizon to zenith.
If the instrument is too
small to oontain all these, then only every
second muqantara (half-size) or third, or sixth,
or tenth is lharked (but not fifth although this
form should be made) .l In the smaller astrolabes
the divisions of the zodiao are similarly treated.
The expressions large and small refer to the
number of divisions and the dexterity or otherwise
of the artist.
- - P
Morley p. 8 mentions Khumsf as one of the forme
made.

328. MZ al-aggurl6bEt al-mukhglifah lihadhrhi aljifgt.
hema also astrolabes of different models
from that described without unneoes-
ASTROLABES OF sary detai1,which is a northern as
DIFFERENT FORM distinguished from a southern instrument.
In the latter Cancer occupies
the place which Caprioorn holds in the northern instrument,and
is opposite to Caprioorn,as is the case with
the other signs which in their new positions are still
opposite their former opponents. The diso bearing
parallels of altitude is characterized by the fact
that the ends of the horizon arc and of a few of the
muqantaras are directed downwards with their convexities
towards the kursI,while the others are in the SamJ
position as in the northern instrument.
Several varie_ties of these two forms are distinguished,
like the vasf* whose muqantaras are like myrtle
leaves in shape, the tmutabbal v whiih is drum-shaped ,and
the Imusratan'. There is also the *mubattakht aalled so
beoause th; muqantaras and the zodiac oihe are flattened
into an elliptioal form like a melon. Again same
instruments have additional discs,such as the tablet of
horizons (sarfhat al-amqiyya) and that of *matrahullshurZf
(pl&ce to which the rays are projeoted akpects)
and that engraved with azimuth oiroles passing through
the zenith, lines of the equal and unequal hours,of the
rising of the dawn and the desoent of the twilight.
Again on the ba~k of the astrolabe 1 nes of the
sines,l or the shadow of the azimuths f and of the midday
and afternoon prayers are often indioatad. When
necessary the rule, divided into two halves, is also
lettered, the crooked hour lines, the numbered divisions
of sine8 and arcs being marked on it. But there is no
end to this chapter.
1 janiib for juflb PL.
2 The altitude of the aun at various places when it
passea over the azimuth of the qibla. PL and PP have
~illi silm for ?ill-i sumfit.

329. ~amg al-argqim raid al-?e. The back of the
astrolabe sometimes has the terms or limits of the
planets, the faces and triplicities en-
INFORMATION
ON BACK
graved on It; if there Is room also the
names of the plane ts,while these are
generally Indicated by the Greek mark8
h, Saturn; 4 Jupiter, $ Mare, O Sun, r, Venus,
Meroury, 9 Moon. 13 The Hindus, however, use the
initials of their names for them.
390. Kaif - adhu al-irtifl' bi 'l-asturlzb. In
order to take tEltitude or the sun w1th'~strolabe,auspend
it firmly on a finger of
HOW TO TAKE
ALTITUDE OF SUN
the right hand,the face towards the
sun, then move the rule unt 11 the
shadow of' the one libna nearest the
sun falls on the other and until the rays of the sun
pass through both upper and lower sights,then note the
degree of altitude indicated by the point of the rule,
and whether it is E. or W. i.e. before or after midday.
331. Marrifah a1 11 wa'l-irtifiir a ad h& min
al-gkhlr. d t u a e of the sun 2s been taken
and it is desired to know the
TO KNOW SHADOW AND length or the shadow of a gnomon
ALTITfJl3E. THE ONE (shakhs) at that time.note how
FROM OTHER Any ringers of shadow clorrespond
to the altitude in question,then
'+ from ibu &6har De magn. conjunot.
U 2- +l% $ 7
Wiedemann has reproduoed those of AO~, Byzantin. Zeitsch.
XIX p. 145.
199

the length of the shadow is to the height of the
gnomon as the number of fingers is to twelve.
Conversely, if the length of the shadow be known
and the number of fingers corresponding in accordance
with above proportion, then the altitude oan
be determined by placing the lower end of the rule
on the number of fingers in question.
332. ~a'rifah al-Sli' min irtiflr al-shams.
To determine the ascendant from the altitude, select
the also oonstruoted for the
TO KNOW ASCENDANT place of observation (or as
FROM ALTITUDE nearly as possible) place it
uppermost and fit the rete over
it, then find and mark the muqantara , East or West,
which has the same number as the altitude (if the
astrolabe is not complete its position must be
estimated). Thereafter ascertain from a calendar
the exact place of the sun at that time, and mark
that point on the corresponding sign of the zodiac
on the rete (this may have to be estimated if the
astrolabe is not complete). Then rotate the rate

The translation of paragraph 332 has been condensed
by the omission of the examples of estimation
given in the text, if the Astrolabe is not complete.
The altitude of the sun is e.g. 20°, and the 20th
muqantara has to be found. If the Astrolabe is a suds,
it lids between the 18th and the 24th muqan$araa,and
consequently a third of the distance between these
beyond the 18th line. If it is a thulth, it lies between
the 18th and the 21st lines~thihis of the
distance between these beyond the 18th line.
When the position of the sun has been learned from
a oalendar, this must be marked on the corresponding
sign and degree on the zodiac ring, and this mark
placed over the muqansara determined. The ascending
sign and its degree will now be found at the Eaat
Horizon. If the Eaat Horizon does not correspond exaatly
to one of the divisions of the sign, the degree of
the Asoendant must be estimated -can Its position between
two of these divisions.
This method of estimation must be adopted in all
similar oasea; it would be tedious to have to repeat
the explanation in eaoh case.

until the degree in question is over the muqansare
already marked, and examine what sign and what
degree thereof coincides with the eastern horizon;
this is the ascendant.
333. Kaif yufraf al-mSQTr min al-nah8r. When
the degree or the asoendant has been placed on the
east horizon, see what division of
HOW MUCH OF
MY E~~
the pujra the pointer beside Caprioorn
indioates, then move the rete
from west to east (past the mid-
heaven line in the direction opposite to the
suoaession of the signs) until the degree of the sun
comes to the east horizon, and then note where the
pointer is on the hujra. The difference gives the
number or divisioni between sunrise and the time
the altitude was taken, known as the dll'ir of the
sun (8 244), and as fifteen divisions are equal to
one hour, and one division to four minutes, the
result gives the length of the day that has passed
in equal hours and minutes.
334. Fakaif yufraf al-gli' ='l-irtifii~ 91-
sham min qibal al-mEtI* min al-nahtIr. Given the
number of hours or the
TO KNOW ASCENDANT BM> day that have elapeed
ALTITUDE FROM FORISGOING - to find the altitude
of the sun and the
asoendant. Plaoe the degree or the sun on the east

horizon, and note the division of the Qujra on whioh
the rete point rests, then rotate it to the west for
the number of divisions corresponding to the number of
hours elapsed. Then see what degree of a sign is at
the east horizon, this will be the ascendant, and
obeerve on which muqan$ara, west or east, the degree
of the sun is, its number gives that of the altitude.
335. Fakaif tufraf al-slf8t al-muwaj jah. How to
know the unequal hours. When the ascendant ia laced
on the east horizon, look whese the
TEMPORAL HOURS nadir of the degree of the sun is
among the unequal hour lines below
the horizon, the nadir will be so many degrees of the
seventh sign from it and will mark the hour in
question. As we know whiohl it is we are not ooncerned
with how much of it has elapsed.
336. Fakaif tu rraf hadhihi al-ash*' min sl rZIi t
al-lail. How to ascertain the foregoing - the ascendant
etc. from the-hours of the night.
ASCENDANT &C FROM Since the altitude of the sun
NIGHT-HOURS oannot be taken, if you know by
observation how many hours of the
night have passed, convert these into divisions of the
hujra, then place the nadir of the degree of the sun
bn the east horizon (for the nadir is used by night
instead of the degree of the sun by day) then rotate

the point on the hajra to the division calculated
and look at the east horizon, the sign there is the
sign of the asoendant, and the degree or the sun is
at the unequal hour.
337. Kaif yGjadu irtirBr kadkib al-thabitah.
TO take t h h
astrolabe in the right hand, turn
ALTITUDE OF the partioular star-pointer towards
FIXED STARS the star in question till it is
sighted, then note the degree of
altitude marked by the ru-le, and note whether it is
east or west by its relation to the midday line.
338. Fakaif yQrraf al-$Ellr minhu. To find the
ascendant from the foregoing, place the ti~
of the
star-pointer on the m6qanf;ara
ASCZNDANT FROM corresponding to the altitude,
ALTITUDE OF THESE east or west as the case may
be, then look at the east
horizon, where will be found the sign and degree or
the ascendant, and at the degree or the sun,which
will point to the aatual unequal hour.

339. Kaif yurraf al-mHdir min al-lail. TO know
from the foregoing how muoh of the night has passed,
note the position of the point of
HOW t8UCH OF the rete when the degree of the
NIGHT ELAPSED ascendant is on the east horizon,
then rotate the rete inversely till
the nadir of the degree of the sun is on the east
horizon, note how many divisions of the gujra it has
traversed, and translate into hours.
340. Kaif rraf waat tuliir al-kawkab wa
ylurtlbhu. To f i z the time 61 rising and setting of
a star whether bv -- niaht or
~ - -- - - - -
--
TIME OF RISING AND day. ~lace its ~~inter on the
SETPING OF STAR east korlzon ani see if the
degree of the sun is above the
horizon among the muqantaras, if it is, it risee by
day. Then note where the rete-point is on the
hujra and rotate it backwards till the degree of the
bun reaohes the east horizon. Translate the amount
of movement into hours; these are the hours of the
day whioh have passed before the star rises.
If the degree of the sun is below the horizon
among the unequal hours, then the star rises at
night. Note the position of the point ot the rete
and rotate it backwards till the nadir of the degree
of the sun is on the east horizon, and translate the
divisions traversed into hours, whioh are those of
the night whiah have passed before the rising of the

star. If the time of setting is wanted, use the
west horizon instead of the east and proceed as
before.
341. Kaif taswiyah lil-buyiit al-ithnffrashar.
To equalize the twelve houses, place the degree of
the ascendant on the east horizon,
ADJUSTMENT OF
THE ROUSES
the point of the ecliptic on the
west horizon is the cusp of the
seventh house. Then look at the
meridian, what has arrived there is the sign and cusp
of the 10th house. 1f.C. - If what you find is also
the 10th sign from the ascendant, the angles are
erect. When they are suooeedent, the point indioated
on the astrolabe will be in the 11th sign from the
ascendant, although it must be written down as the
cuap of the 10th house. E.g. if the cusp is in
Aquarius, the house will be formed of Aquarius and
so many degrees of Pisces, while if the cusp is in
the 9th sign, the angles are cadent, and the house
is formed or Aquarius and so many degrees of
Caprioornus. If Aquarius alone occupies the
tenth house, then Leo ie in the fourth, if Aquarius
and Pisces, then Leo and Virgo, and if Aquarius and
Caprioornus then Leo and Cancer. This relation
applies to the rest of the houses; so if you know
one house, you know its nadir.
To determine the cusps of the other houses, turn
the rete inverse.1~ so that the degree of the asoendant
, ~&L;;-;M~~,&
.* ' 9
**S
6
t. qJ3 1, *C. '.
*' ,
0 I
J
->W+?& .
'a, / H b ' I
$1. ~!'$.is,y,lb&

corns uder the horizon, and is placed on the line
indicating the beginning of the eleventh unequal hour, -
i.e. through tw temporal hours = 1/9 of the semi-nocturnal
aro of the ascendant then look at the meridian
line to see what sign is there and what degree; it will
be the cusp of the ninth house and its degree, the
nadir of which is the ousp of the third. Then move the
rete through two unequal hours so that the degree of the
ascendant rests on the beginning of the ninth hour,
the sign and degree at the msridian will be those of
the eighth house, their nadir those of the seaond.
Then turn the rets so that the nadir of the degree of
the ascendant rests on the first line of the third hour
under the west horizon, the sign and degree of the
eleventh house will be at the mridian: their nadirs
those of the fifth: them turn the rete to the right
so that the nadir or the degree of the aacendant rests
on the first line of the fifth hour, the sign and degree
of the twelfth house dll be at the mridian: its
nadir is the sixth. Thus all the houses will be
equalized.1 (Figs. .on pp. 150, 190, 191. )
342. Kaif yu%i al-$81it.min ratad kir. To
determine the degree of the asoendant if another
oardo is known, if the known degree
ASCEM)ANT 1PROM is the western one, place it on the
ANOTHER ANGIX west horizon, if M.C. on the meridian
towards the bursI, if I.C. on the
meridian below the horizon, emd in eaoh oaae look at
the east horizon for the reeult.
Ligros-del saber 11, 274. As to anolher pethod of
Al-Biriini's, see Sedlllot, Materiaur XI, 509.

343. Mafrifah far9 nahr wa masEfah ral8*1-ar$
yuhawilu baina
WIDTH OF A RrOW OR river or a piece of ground the
PIECE OF (=ROUND other extremity of which it is
impossible to reaoh so as to
measure it in the usual way, stand on the bank, hsng
the astrolabe on the right hand and move the rule till
you sight the other bank; fhen turn round without
changing your position and without altering the rule
look through both sights for
a mark whioh you can reoog-
0
eye of observer
nise and measure the distance
between your position and the
mark, the breadth of the
river ia the same. The same
method can be used for a
width of river equal distance piece or land.
344. Marrifah Tumq al-b'ir. To find the depth of
a well, stand on the margin with the astrolabe in
the left hand, the quadrant of
DEPTH OF mLL altitude towards go;, and move the
rule till the opposite margin of
the water or the bottom is seen through both
sights. Then note the number of fingers in the
quadrant of shadow to which the rule points, place
its tip at one finger leas, and go straight up higher
until the opposite margin is again sighted without
2nd point
1st point of
observation
depth

disturbing the position of the rule.
Measure the distanoe between the
two points of observation, and
multiply by the number of fingers
or shadow noted. The result is
the depth of the well, while that
dis tance mu1 tiplied by twelve
gives the diameter or the
well. l
345. Marrlfah G1 minzrah au Qgfif mirmn6 in al-
- m$Ul ilaThi. To find the height 0- mlnaret~wall
the base of which it is possible to
HEIGHT OF MINARfST reach, take the altitude of the sun
minaret
THE W E OF mICH
CAN -& FtEACHED
and oontinue observation till it
attains 45O, then measure the
shadow, this gives the height or
the minaret. If the sun does not
reach 45O at the desired time,plaoe
the point of the rule at 45O and
move forwards or backwards till
you find a point where the top of
the minaret is sighted, then
measure from that point to the
base of the minaret and add your
own height; the result is the
\ height of the minaret.
its shadow
1 For an alternative method cf. Alfonao, Libros del
Saber 11, 287. PO p. 213 leaves out a line between
12th and 13th whioh requires shitting the riG8da to
a finger more, before rising to the 2nd position and
sighting anew,~ol also. The prooedure is the same a8
in 346.

346. Marrifah $51 miGrah au @lit la'
al--El iIaihi . To find the h e i p h t ~ ~ e
column or mountain the base of
HE1G.T OF NINBRET which it is impossible to reach,
W E OF WHICH stand where you are and move
INACCESSIFLZ the rule until you see the top
of the objeot through both
sights just as you take the altitude of a star, then
note the number of fingers in the quadrant of shadow
to whioh it points and move forward8 or baokuards
(according as the ground is most level), if forward
place the rule-point at one finger less, if backward
at one f inger more, and walk till the top is
again visible through both sights. The distance
between the two points of observation multiplied
by twelve is the height of the mountain, while the
same distanoe mu1 tiplied by the number of ringers
of shadow observed at the first point of
observation gives the distance between that point
and the base of the object. Similarly the height
of any object in the air, such as a bird or a cloud
which is so stationary as to allow of the altitude
being taken from two different points, can be determined
by the same method, as well as the distance
between you and a perpendicular dropped to
the ground from the objeot.
top of mountain
I\,
its eight
b \
1 \ s
of perpendicular
its side
,
1st point 2nd point
,
of observation

And now that we have arrived at this point,
having noted the terms used in geometry and arithmetic,
oalled attention to the nature of the
heavens, shown how to read the calendar and to
manipulate the astrolabe, and have completed these
subjects, it is time to deal with the expressions
which astrologers use with regard to the decrees of
the stars, and which are of interest to a querent.
By the majority of people the decrees of the stars
are regarded as belonging to the exact sciences,
while my aonfidence In their results and in the
profession resembles that of the least of them.l
347. Tabir3Y &l-buriij kaif hiya. And first we
shall deal with the relation of the signs to the
characteri stic s-of the four
NATURE OF THE SIGNS elements, separately and in
combination.
As to the nature and temperament of the signs
If they are written down in two rows, upper and lower,
the first sign above and the second below it, and so
on to the last, all those of the upper row are hot
and those of the lower cold, while the pairs so
arranged are alternately dry and moist.
Prefece, India, p. 25. "That he believed in the
action of the planets on the sublunary world I take
for certain; though he novhere s~ys so. It would hm3I.y
be intelligible why he should have spent so much time
and labour in the study of Greek and Indian Astrology
if' he had not believed in the truth of the thing." cf.
Chron. p. 217. He apparently also shared the general
belief in the efficacy of charms 2nd talismans, but his
contenporary Avicenna is very contanptuous in his
refutation of Astrologers. Risflah fi radd al-muna j jimh
cf.Lehren p. 237, Honenaje h D. Fr. Codera. Bardesanes,
a Syrian Philosopher in the 2nd half of the 2nd centurg,
condemned astrology in plain and weighty terms.
210

Hot
Cold
Dry
Aries
Taurus
Moist
Gemini
Cancer
Dry
Leo
Virgo
Moist
Libra
Scorpius
Dry
Sagittarius
Capricornus
Moist
Aqua.15~
Pisces
When therefore you know the active virtues of a sign
whether heat or cold, and the passive virtues, whether
dryness or moisture, it will not be concealed from you
what particular elemsnt of the world and what parktcular
humour of the body each sign resembles. Each sign that
is hot and dry is related to fire and yellow bile,ea&
that is cold and dry, to earth and black bile, each
that is hot and moist to air and blood and each that is
cold and moist to water and phlegm.
The Hindus regard as moist signs Pisces, the
hinder half of Capricorn and the anterioshalf of
Aquarius for reasons given above in speaking of their
representations, viz. that the hinder end of Capricorn
is fish-like, and that of Aquarius water. They do not
however reclson Scorpius as belonging to the moist signs,
but count it with the aerial ones, while Cancer holds
an intermediate position, sonretin~s being regarded as
watery, sometimes as aerial according to circumstances.
348. F 6 al-dhakar minhS =*l-unthd. All the hot
signs are male and the cold female. The planets are
powerful in those signs which
MALE AND lKEK4I.B resemble them in nature and sex,but
they partake of the nature of the
signs in which they are situated so that a planet
obviously &l8 shows a tendency to femaleness by being
in a fenale sign. The Rindus say that all the odd, i.e.
male signs are unlucky and the fenale signs lucky.
349. Far& al-nahzri minhg wa d al-laiii. There is
a general agreement =at all the male signs are diurnal
end the female nocturnal. The
DIURNAL AM) NOCTURNAL diurnal planets are powerful
in the day signs and the
Corrected to posterior in P but not in A.

human or bird figure suspends the balance or simply a
human hand. The four-footed figures are Aries, Taurua,
and Leo, while the hinder half of Sagittarius, sometimes
the front half (of Capricorn on the analogy of
~aurusA) are also so reckoned. Then of these Aries and
Taurus have cloven feet, Leo claws and Sagittarius
hoofs. Asin the people generally from youth up
entertain certain ideas as to the signs, such as that
Leo, Scorpius, Sagittarius and Capricorn (~isces*)
suggest beasts of prey ; Gemini, Virgo, Pisoes and the
hinder two-thirds of Capricorn, birds; Cancer,
Sagittarius, Scorpius and Capricorn, reptiles; and
Cancer, Scorpius and Pisces, aquatic animals.
The Hindus have a redundancy of interpretations
of this kind; they say that the human signs are
Gemini, Virgo, Libra (the fore part of sagittar1us)A
and the hinder half of Aquarius, all of aich they
describe as bipeds, while the quadrupeds are Aries,
Leo, the hinder half of Sagittarius, and the fore
part of Capricorn. Reference has already been mada
to their ideas as to watery and aerial signs.
353. F& al-mu~awwitah minhh wa &a al-
- mu$auwltah.. Gemlnl, Virgo and Libra are Eud-voiced,
of these Gemini is capable
VOICED AND VOICELESS of speech; Aries, Taurus
and Leo are half -voiced,
Capricorn and Aquarius are weak-voiced, while
Canoer, Scorpius and Fisces are voiceless.

Knowledge as to voice and speech is essential as to
whether in a difficulty indications in these signs are
harmful or the reverse.
354. FmZ al-walfid minh5 wa'l-waq'im wa 8;hayrhum.
Indications of the signs as to families. The watery
signs Canoer, Scorpius , Pisces
FERTILE AM) BARREN and the hinder half of Capricorn
favour large families; Aries,
Taurus, Libra, Sagittarius and Aquarius small ones,
while the first part of Taurus, Leo, Virgo and the
first part of Capriaorn indicate sterility. The
production of twins is specially in charge of Gemini,
but also is favoured by Virgo, Sagittarius and Pisces,
and sometimes by Aries and Libra and the last part of
Capricorn. (The tore part of Capricorn and Scorpius
indicate hermaphroditid) ~n consequence of what we
have said Aries and Libra are described as being of
two natures, as are also Capricorn and ~agittarius*.
Virgo is called mistress of three forms, and Gemini
as many-faced, because they denote not only twins but
three or more children.
355. Fa- al-Q91hZi f i 'l-nikEQ. With regard to
marriage, Aries, Taurus, Leo, Capricorn indicate
eagerness therefor, for Libra and
RELATION TO
&URRIAGE
Sagittarius much the same can be said.
With regard to the conduct of women,
Taurus, Leo, Scorpius and Aquarius
denote reserve and abstinence; Aries, Cancer, Libra
and Capricorn corruption and bad conduct, while Gemini,
Virgo, Sagittarius and Pisces denote a mean in this
regard; of the four Virgo is the most virtuous.
356. Fad al-buzj al-mu@imah dhast al-hamm.
Leo, Scorpius and Caprioorn are dark and anxious,
and there is a suspicion of trouble
DBRKAND inVirgoalldLibra.
ANXIOUS SIGNS

357. daliilathg 'a15 jihEt al4lam. Aries denotes
the middle of the East.Leo a ~ointo the left of
that towards %he North,and sagit:
RELATION TO POINTS
OF COPdPASS
tarius one to -the right towards the
South;sinilarly with each of the
other triplicities. Thus Taurus
indicates the centre of the South,Virgo a point to its
left towards the East and Capricorn one to the Tight and
West. Gemini occupies the centre of the West,Libra a
point to
left S right its left
left
and Scnm
and
Aquarius ,
one to
its right
and North,
Canoer
is in the
oentre
of the
North,
Scorpius
a point
to the
left and
west aid
Pisaes
to the
right and
East. A11
are represented
in the acright
N left CCW=m-W
figure .l
358. Fan5 dalShath6 falL al-riyQ. A wind coming
from a quarter associated with a particular sinn is also
associated with that sign-thus the
RELA'MON TO WINDS East wind with Aries,the West with
Gemini,the South with Taurus and the
North with Canoer. Similarly with the intermediate
quarters,a S.E. wind is related to Virao or to Saait-
W
tarius according as it is nearer S. or-E.
1 Which is corrected from the figure in PL and PP where
the fiery (E.1, and airy (W.) triplicities have changed
places. A0 A0 P L ~ correct. (S) earthy, (NI watery-

359. F M dalEl3thS falR afaB al-ins&. The
follorring are the various parts of the body whioh
are related to the several signs.
RELATION TO The head and faoe to Ariee, the
PARTS OF BODY neck and windpipe to Taurus, the
arms and hands to Gemini, the chest,
breasts, sides, stomach and lungs to Canoer, the
heart to Leo, the womb with its contents to Virgo,
the back and buttocks to Libra, the genitals to
Scorpius, the thighs to Sagittarius, the knees to
Capri orn, the shanks to Aquarius and the feet and
heelsi to ~lsoesr
In this matter there is much confusion in the
books, for according to some, not only the head
and face but also the bowels are governed by Aries.
The analogy in this case does not seem to be clear.
But it is clear in the saying or a Brahman that if
we imagine the zodiac to be a man,with Ariee the
head and the soles of the feet directed towards it,
then the allocation of the parts or the body
according to the Hindus coniorma wi* what.we have
said above except that the face is given to Taurus.
The signs are also indicative of the various
diseases of man, or his comple'ldon, figure, face,
and the like, they also govern looalities and
countries, and denote various matters regarding
animals, flre, water, etc. To facilitate study these
are set down in the aooompanying tables.
But God is All-knowing.
The above matter is repeated in the oolumn (360a)
adjacent to 360 which is not reproduced in
translation.
216

LI
Laughing and talkative ,kingly and haughty, fond
Y I of poetry, sharp-tongued.lustfu1. - . brave.
I
Of good judgment,negligent,a liar,a cheat,hb
I
Generous,chaste,excelling in games,fond of
philosophy and astronomy,munif icent ,violent,
l and a wfi~
(has the Qur'an by heart).
I
Indolent, dumb, f ickle and changeable.
E;ingly,formidable,sharp-toogued,hard-hearted,
litigious, knavish ,many troubles, a sinner, f orgetful,powerful
by nature,bold.
Liberal, good manners, truthw, well-inf omed,
pious,a judge, thoughtful, lively, playful, fond
of dance and musio,a QFifi~.
mougntful, poli te, generous, indolent, cowardly,
just judge,plebeian,excited in speech,a musician
and sinmr.a - - h8fiz.
,- .
Generous by nature,anxious,deoeitful,bold,~,
morose, sharp-tongued ,a slayer,a QBfi?, a f 001,
indolent, pleased with himself. bold.
I Eingly,reticent,liberal,tricky,prejudioed,a
capable mathematicfan,aurveyor,thoughtful about
f. the next world,iond of horse8,particular as to
foodsdrink and clothine. - virile.
r
1) Armgant,ialse,choleric,impetuous,changeable,
evil-thinking,anxious,quarrelsome,ppinionati~
fond of games and life,crafty,iorgetiul,shaqq,
bold.
Well-disposed, ohaste ,eager to ac cumulate riches
- eager for magnifloence and manliness,a gourmet,
-L1
bad-hearted, inert, indolent, restful, too anxious
about worldly affairs.
Good disposition,generous, elegant, lustn.11 ,unstable
in his opiniona,of good faith,medioore
X in business, tricky and deceitful, liable to err,
forgetful,foolFsh, bold.
The adjacent column in text repeats part of 359.
I

1 PL, AO, ~ 0 ~ .
219

3
itl k
I -P
urdistan,Ctesiphon,Cyprus,Alexandria,Constantin~~le.Oman.Ral.Far&ana.and
shares in the
4 IThat art of Arnenia Minor which is bevond
-q~n: Parts of ~frica,~a jar,~ahrein,~ibIl ,
Maxwalfidh,Eastern KhurHsBn,and shares in
Balkh and Bdharb~dgEn.
5 ' Turkeatan as far as Gog and Magog,and the
mined cities the~e,hscalon, ~erusalen,Nislbis,
Q the twin cities.~falatya, sist8n,~~lakr~n,~ailam,
]~brashahr,TEs, ~6ghdiiia;~irmidh.
6 lAndalusia,Syria,Crete, the Euphrates and blesopotamia,Jar&uaqa,the
capital of Abyssinia,
San*a,Kufa,the cities of Fars in the direction
or Kirman.and sfsta~ as far &S the borders of
I
I
9
10
'
?
7Y
as Yemen,Tangier,Qiy~d,Khazaria,Q~s,hl,
SEriah, Nahawand , Nahranan, and shares in Turkish
Soghdia.
Persian vIraq,Dlnawar,Igfah.Bn,Rai,Baghdad,
anblIvand,Darband or the Khazars,Jundi-SBbffr,
:hares in Bukhara and Gur@n,the borders of
the Sea of Armenia,and Barbary as far as FJomm,
Makm and Sind,and the river MIhrBn (Indus)
an& the sea between Oman and Hindustan.Eastern
IHindus tan.
1 drzenuo Ndl. 11. 41.
1

1
3
4
5
366 r~la-l-&kin.
As TO PUCES
Deserts,pasturing places for beasts of burden'.
y Wood-sheds,places where fire is used.thleves' -. --
dens ,places- where jewellery is manufictured.
H I Mountainous places ,orchards,pasture 1and.store-
"
-
houses for food,co.w and elephant sheds.
~dountains,hills,mounds,hunting-grounds,river-
E sides,resorts of acrobats and mmblers and - --
musicians, kings' palaces.
Reservoirs,reed-beds,river margins,cultivated
C5 places, trees,wells,rivers,end places of
worship.
-
IJountains ,fortresses, high sanctuaries ,kings'
palaces, desert places, . quarries. - barren saltish
-U
ground.
D vans,woments quar ers,musiciansv houses,
fl tireshing floors, cu:tivated fields.
Small mosques and places or worship, castles,
'h. cultivation,palm-groves, observatories.olains.
/ orchards.
Cas es anc en reservdi S ' ar ours, replat:s,
lwee:iG plaoesi ,f; LRi* s le:tg
X
places,holes of dogs and foxes,lodgings for
strangers. The first part of the sign - indicabs -
stone and gravel and water wheels.
Running and standing water,heated bath-water,
taverns,brothels,canals and ditches,birds
nests and resorts of aquatic biras.
A o es o angels, o y men,&% an pr es S,
mk&ingfplaces, otni-brakes. eke shtred. aalt
I marshes, granarie S.
L
.- -
I
1 A O~ and AB1 have yabr for bifat.
2 P has gEf14jM for gahRrTj. Tanks were plastered with
qzriij, cement.

Such oontradio tions not lnlrequent.
223

373
373. MB al-nazar wall-su a!. As the complex must
follow the simple + d o consider the relations
of the signs to each other.
IN ASPECT OR Each sign is in sextile aspect,
INCONJUNCT tasdZs,to the third and eleventh left
and right of it,and there is a sixth of
the zodiac (60°) between any degree of that sign and the
same degree of those named. Similarly the quartile aspeot,tarbf
*; is between a sign and the fourth and tenth
left and right, separated by 90°,and the trine,tathlIth,
between the fifth and ninth,distant 120' and the opposite
sign,muq~bala,is the seventh, 180~. There are
therefore seven signs to which the sign in question
turns its
face ard
v&lch~
second ard
and the
The signs used are d oon junction,
o~~osition, sextile, $
quartile, D trine. n
225
in aspect
and
are
as incon
junc t
(saqi:) .

374. l6 al-burii al-nutQZbbi wael-nutabL IQah
wat1-mtarhdiyah. s~L whioh are Faextile or thneare
friendly to each other,those
SIGNS FRIENDLY, in quartile unfriendly and that
UNFEIIENDLY, HOSTILE opposite lnlmioal. Thus Gemini
and Aquarius are in sextile to
Aries,Leo and Sagittarius in trine to it,and these are
mutually friendly,while Canoer and Capricorn being in
quartile and Libra opposite are inimical. The inoonjmct
signs to Aries are four, vlz. Tarns, Qlqp,soorpius & Pisoes.
375. ME tartxb al-naqz. The following is the order
in power of the various aspects. The most powerful is
conjunction,i.e. meeting in the same
RELATIIE PO!VER sign, then the opposite , then the dex-
OF ASPESTS terl quartile, sinister quartile ,dexter
trine, sinister trine, dexter sextile
,sinister sextile. When there are two aspects the
more pomrhl renders the weaker one incompetent and
takes away its power.
376. Ha1 ~~uwEf1qtin al-hind fI dhaltka. The Hindus
&re partly in agreement and partly dissent from this
doctrine. They are in agreement in
HINDU OPINION regard to the opposite, quartiles and
trines, but they say that while a
slgn looks towards Its third, the third does not regard
it, and while it does not look to its sixth, the
sixth does regard it. They do not apply the term aspect
to conjunction,for they say that when one stands
erect and looks ahead, one cannot see oneself. With
regard to the relative importanoe of the aspeats they
say that from a sign towards the third and tenth
signs there is a quarter of an aspect, and to the
fifth and ninth, half an aspeat (towards the 8th and
4th three quarte s of an aspect and to the 7th a
complete aspsct)I. They dascrlbe the second and
twelfth signs as inconJunct to the first and It to
them.
Dexter aspects are those contrary to the order of the
signs, so that a planet in Y oasts a dexter quartile
to one in 72 and a sinister quartile to one in D .

377. Eal lilburilj ittif8qEt ghayr al-nazs. THO s@s
equidistant from an equinoctial point fig. 242are said
to be equipol1ent.l because the day
RELATIONS hours of each are-equal to the night
BESIDES ASPECT hours of the other,and their ascensions
are equal2 in all places, 242 such as
Aries and Pisces, Taurus and Aquarius, etc. The correspndence
is by inverse degrees,one being north the other
south, the
B
first of
Aries being
equal to the
twenty-ninth
of pisces,J
and the 10%
to the 20th.
Two
signs revolving
in
the same
A
parallel,
Iiorthor
south (equidistant
f'ron
a solstice)
are describes
as corre~on6
ing in ccurse4
(in itinere),
their day
The vertical lines join equipollent
signs , the horizontal those corresponding
in their course.
ADC. Northern half. CBA. Southern half.
DBB. Ascending. BCD. Descending half.
The ascending signs according to milson
are YVE, r+ %?because when in them the
sun's declination is increasing.
hours are
equal as are
their night
hours, an8
their ascensions
are
identical at
the equator,
such as Genini
and Cancer.
Taurus
and-~eo. The
1 :!uttsf iciain fX ' l-quma - laobuvap~0vrc cb Demophilus.
2 iaavhopa of Ptoleny.
3 The 30th degree being -n?ganled as destitute crP a canpania
so as to associate odd degrees with odd and even with even.
4 I.Iuttaf iqain f X ' 1-tarIqa. bp6bova af Demophllus
isobuvapoGvra of Ptolemy .

correspondence is tilso by inverse degrees, the beginning
of Cancer corresponding to the end of Gmini,and the
tenth of the fower to the twentieth or the latter.
These two relations receive different nanes in the beaks,
and there is no permanence in such naies,but that tern
is best which corresponds to the neaning.
abu Mav&ar hss called tlie two sf gm which have the
same presiding planet (B 440) as concordant in itinere,
and although this is different from the two lcinds of
agreement referred to above,it is a relation which has
to be considered. ';lith regard to the agreement which we
have spoken of ,Abu hfarshar calls the relation of Aries
to Pisces,and of Virgo to Libra by poner,and that of
mini to Cancer and Sagittarius to Capricorn by course,
as natural sextiles, although they do not regaM each
other,but since the nearest aspect to the inconjunct
place is the sextile,he has called them by that name.
Similarly the relations of Aries to Virgo and Pisce~
to Libra by course, and those of Gemini to Capricorn
and Cancer to Sagittarius by powep, he speaks of as
natural opposites, although there is here no aspect.
But in the quartile aspect it occasionally happens
from these agreements as in the case of Taurus to
Aquarius and Leo to Scorpius by power, and in that of
Taurus to 'Leo and Scorpius to Aquarius by course,
that the disagreeable enmity of the quartile lessen8
and it8 evil influence disappears, so that the
significanoe of the relation gains in power,just as
the removal of the inconjunction, obscurity and
evil rrom those sextiles and natural opposites also
takes place.
From those two correspondences to which m have
adverted, power and course, the zodiac is diviled
into two sets at halves, l/ northern and southern
halves, 2 ascending and descending halves ( ?Bvid
and Mblf f .

378. MZi nisf al-falak al-sSrid waVl-h'ibit. The latter
are marked out by the solstices, the ascending half
comprising the following signs:
Capric orn,Aquarius ,Pisces,Aries,
Taurus ,Gemini, and the descending
ASCENDItG AND
DESCENDING
UVXS OF ZODIAC
half the nadirs of these.
The Hindus call these halves *ayanaW,the
ascending
*uttarayanal or north,because although the declination
of the sun in this half of the ecliptic is south,yet the
sun during the whole of' the half keeps its face towards
its northern goal. The descending half is called
' dakshayana ' or southern by similar reasoning.
Signa of the asoending half are described as signs
of short or crooked ascension, because their oblique ascension
is shorter than that in the erect sphere,whlle
those of the descending half are said to be signs of
long or direct ascension, because the ir oblique ascension
is longer than that in the erect sphere. 242.
The crooked signs are also called 'obedient* and
this is due to conoordance in course, because when you
compare try0 signs on one paralle1,the one belonging totht,
descending half comes first by the diurnal movement ,and
the one of the ascending half 1ater;so the former commxb
the latter, which obeys the command and always fol1ows.l
[According to Paulus Alexandrinus.
Wittenberg. 1586 p E 3.
The commanding signs are fmm
Taurus to Virgo : the obedient
signs are connected with
them by vertical lines. The
beholding signs from Gemini
to Aquarius connected by
horizontal lines to those
they regard. So also Valens
p. 24. But Chaucer says l. c.
p. 38 "These crooked signs
ben obedient to the signs
that ben of riht Ascensioun
(Cancer to Sagittarius) ." ]
1 The southern signs were formerly called obedient, see
~ouchk-~eclercq,~*~strologie Grecque,p.l63,as in the
diagram from Paulus Alexandrinus, Wit tenberg, l586 p. E 3.
For Ptolemyts use of the terns commanding and obeying
see Tetrablblos I. 17. The northern signs command bewhen
the sun is on them,the day is longer than the night.
Junctinus I. 69 adheres to Ptolemy*~ noinencleture.
229

379. ME al-muthalla'th~t. Those signs whose nature
as regards two qualities (B 347) is identical are situated
in the zodiac at the angles of
TRIPLICITIES right-angled triangles; they are oonsequently
know as tri-glicities and are
recognised as entitiea,although three in number,the effects
of eaoh being identical or similar. The first
triplioity is formed of ~riea,Iko and Sagittarius, all
of which are fiery in their nature,rrithering and heavy,
while the special domain or each is for Aries,fires in
ordipary use, for Leo those present in minerals and
plants, and for Sagittarius that which is distributed
from the heart of animal8 throughout the body.
The second triplicity composed of Taurus,Vlrgo and
Capricorn is earthy,generous with its malth,and the
interpretation of its effects is that Taurus is responsible
for pastureland wbich is not sonn,Virgo for plants
which hape neither berries nor seeds and small tress,
Capricorn for sonn crops and large and tall trees.
Gemini, Libra and Aquarius form the third triplicity
which is airy in nature,sending ends abroad,and in detail
Gemini is oharacterized by that quiet air which pm
duoea and ,sustains life,Libra by that which oauses trees
to grow,fertilizes them an8 produces fruit, and
Aquarius by destructive storms.
The fourth triplielty of Canoer,Saorpiua and
Pisces is watery in sympathy, Cancer denoting sweet
pure water, Soorpius that which is turbid and Pisces
that whiah is stinking, distasteful and alkaline.
%o.
MZi al-murabbarZt ra bus al-fasiil. Quadrants
of the zoblac and algns of the sea!ons. A~ZS, Taurus
- and Gemini are vernal,
SIGNS OF TEiE SEASONS changeable, govern childhood,
the east and the east wind,
the first watch of day and night. Canoer, Leo and
Virgo are aestival, restful, govern youth, the aouth
and the south wind and the seoond matoh, Libra,

Scorpiw and Sagittarius are autumnal, changeable,
govern adult life, the west and its wind, and the third
watch, while Capricorn, Aquarius and Pisces are hibernal,
peaceiul, govern old age, the north and the north
wind and the fourth watch.
The first sign of each season is called tropical
as it is the turning point, the second fixed, because
when the sun is in it the season is established, and
the third bicorporal. Each one of these is related by
quartile to the others of its kind, and thus Aries,
Cancer, Libra and Capricorn form thelxqdmltetragone,
the indications of which are gentleness ,purity and
sociability with a tendency to science and details.
Then Taurus, Soorpius, Aquarius and Leo form the fixed
tetragone, the indications of which are mildness,
thoughtfulness an8 justice, in many cases of litigiousness
and pugnacity, and sometimes of endurance in adversity
and patience in trouble and injustice. Gemini,
Virgo, Sagittarius and Pisces, the bicorporal tetrame,
indicate amiability, levity, playiulness, thoughtlessness,
discord in business, capriciousness and duplicity.
The influence of the fixed signs according to what
has been said is obvious, that of the bicorporal more
obscure, and that of the tropical between the two.
We must now turn to the essenticl characteristics
of the planets unoonplioated by any other influence,
because the relation of the planets to the signs is
such that when they enter them they undergo certain
alterations; for the planets like the signs are
spiritual forces which change the nature of bodies submitted
to their influence, a retrograde planet for
example, may change a temperament into a choleric one,
or a joyful or anxious one, according as one of the
four elements becornss preponderant and alters the
activities of the spirit and the conditions.
381. Kaif 4ibZr al-kawskib. The planets always
influence m v e r is receptive under them. So the
results of the action of Saturn are in
NATURE OF the direction of extreme cold and dry-
THE PLAIhWS ness, of Jupiter of moderate heat and
moisture, of Llars, of extreme heat
and dryness, of the sun of not inmoderate heat and

dryness, less than characterizes !Aars, the heat
being greater than the dryness. The influence of
Venus is towards moderate cold and moisture, the
latter predominant, of Mercury towards cold and dryness,
the latter rather stronger, which influence
however may be altered by association with another
star. The moon tends to moderate cold and moisture,
the one sometimes dominating the other. For the
moon alters in each quarter in accordance with the
extrinsic heat it is receiving from the rays of
the sun. Comparing it with the seasons of the year,
the first week has a spring-like character tending
towards warmth and moisture, the second summer-like,
warmth and dryness, the third after opposition,
autumnal towards cold and dryness, and the fourth
winter-like towards cold and moisture. Some people
say that moisture always predominates in the moon
rjhatever its station, but as a fact its moisture
tends to warnth with the increasing light of the
first half and to cold with the decreasing light
of the second, because when the extrinsic influence
ceases it can only return to its original condition.
382. F d QBlhE fftl-nuQfisah =*l-sarEdah.
With rersa-the -
~ood and evil fortune due to the
pianets, Saturn and Mars are
MALEFICENT AND maleficent, the fomer especially
EIENEFICENT so; Jupiter and Venus are benef
icent , especially the former.
Jupiter confronts Saturn in clearing-up unfortunate
complications as Venus does Mars. The sun is both
beneficent and maleficent, the formr when in aspect

and distant, the latter when in con junction and near.
Llercury also is either very fortunate or the reverse;
it assists whatever planet is near it, but when alone
is inclined to beneficenoe, the more so in proportion
to its proximity. In virtue of its own nature the moon
is fortunate, but its position wlth regard to the other
planets changes quickly owing to the rapidity of its
motion.
On the whole the effeots of the beneficent planets
may be described as virtue, peace, plenty, good
disposition, cheerfulness, repose, goodness and learn-
,
ing. If these influences are powerful, they are
friendly to each other, if weak, they lend each other
assistance. On the other hand, the maleficent effect
destruction, tyranny, depravity, covetousness, stupidity,
severity, anxiety, ingratitude, shamelessness,
meanness, conceit and all kinds of bad qualities. If
powerful they help each other in enmity, but if weak,
abandon each other, and when alone are active but
cowardly.
Some people say that Saturn is at first inimical
on account of fdars, and later fortunate on account
of Jupiter because it accompanies them in all states.
They say of Mars it is at first fortunate and later
naleficent, and the same or the sun, but we know of no
justification for these ideas, for the principle at the
root of this matter is that any planet which has ite
tso qualities in an extreme degree is maleficent; in
a moderate degree, beneficent, and that if the
qualities are unequally present, then it is neither
called beneficent nor malericent except under certain
conditions.
383. Fahal lilrat S wa'l-dhanab fi hadhii madkhal.
llany astro'logers attribute a definite nature to the
ascending and descending nodes, saying
EFFECT OF
NOON'S NODES
that the former is warn and beneficent
and denotes an increase in all things,
and the latter cold, maleficent, and
accompanied by a diminution of influences. It is related
that the Babylonians held that the ascending node

increases the effects of both beneficent and maleficent
planets, but it is not every one who will accegt these
statements, for the analogy seem to be rather farf
e tched .
384. Fahal lil-hind fI hadh8 rEf. According to the
Hindus, Saturn, Llars, (the sun and the ascending nodejp
are in general maleficent; (t ey do
HINDU OPINION not mention the Dragon's tar3 J'upiter
and Venus are in general beneficent,
and Iercury increases the effects of both beneficents
and maleficents. Of the moon some say that while waxing
it is beneficent, and when waning, maleficent, while
others assert that for the first ten days it is neither
beneficent nor
-
maleficent, during the second ten, benefiaent,
and during the third, maleficent.
385. Faun al-dhakar watl-unth8. All the three
superior planets and the sun are male, Saturn, among
them,being like a eunuch (has no-
W BM) influence on birth)p. Venus and the
moon are fenale, and IBrcury hennaphrodite
, being male when associated vi th the male
planets, and female when with the female; when alone it
is male in its nature. Some people say that Hars is
female, but this opinion is not received.
386. F& al-nehLri ninhg =*l-lailf . Saturn,
Jupiter an3 the sun are diurnal and exercise their
power during the day. Mars, Venus and
DIURNBL AID the noon nocturnal and Mercury is either
XGCTURIAL
one or the other depending on the sign
in which it is, or on the planet with
which it is associcted.. Every planet assists those
reambling it, the diurnal asking assistance from the
diurnal and the nocturnal fron tbe nocturnal.
The sun is lord of the day and the moon of the
night, beaause their influence is exertea during these
periods. Every planet which is under the horizon
during its own period is without influence.
Sone people say that the. dragon's head is male
and diurnal and the tail female and nocturnal, but
this is quite illogical.

387. Hal tabqI dal5lLt &l-kawEkib. The indications
of a plane3 do not always remain constant; they are
dependent on its relations to the
ARE IIEIICATIONS various signs, to other planets and
CONSTANT? to the fixed stars, to the position
as regards the sun and its rays, and
to distance from, or proldmity to the earth. Thus
Saturn which is dry as it rises becones moist as it sets.
The effects which are thus attributable to the
various situations of a planet present themselves in
two forms, the one fortunate, the other unfortunate.
Saturn, for example, which governs matters of the land,
if in conditions of power and beneficence Improves the
agricultural aonditions, blessinga and good luck ensue
and increased profits are realized; but if the conditions
are adverse, the fanning operations are attended
by disappointment, bad fortune and f allure.
,411 the indications of the planetary influences
which are described in the books are set down in the
tables which follow.
388. L M yatakarrar al-shai' wahid al-madlUl
ralaihi inha'l-kawiikib wa lam akhtalii fi bardihCi. It
i r be asked why-ztion
ITER ONE QUALITY -TE3LY is-made of several
ATTRIBUTED TO CERTAIN planets in connection
PLANETS AND NOT TO OTRZIS rith one subject ,when the
same is not the case with
other$- (the s ~ ~ n s This ) ~ is . ~ due first or all to certain
defects in the art, and to oonfusion of reasoning.
The masters of astrology f i rst agreed to arrange things
according to their colours, smell, taste, special
peouliarities, actions and habits and attached them to
planets in accordance with the nature, beneficence or
maleficence of these, but other associations were
suggested by resemblance in time of appearance or of
coming into action. It is rare that only one planet
furnishes the indioations for one subject or object,
generally two or more are associated, as for exanple
when two elementary qualities are present obviously
related to two different planets. Thus the onion ie
related by its warmth to Mars and by its moisture to
Venus, and opium by its coldness to Saturn, and its
P has burji for batrih8.
2 35

dryress to EJercury. So when any one speaks of Saturn as
the signiiicator of opium, it is merely its coldness
that is referred to, and if Mercury is cited in the
same capacity, that is due to its dryness. Those people
who do not use discrimination in these matters are
therefore responsible for the contradictions which
occur in their books.
Again there are groups of objects which have as
general si@ificator one particular planet, while
other planeta are associated with the individuals of
the group, Thus Venus is the signifioator for all
sweet-smelling flowers, but Mars in the case of the
rose is associated with it on account of its thorns,
colour and pungent odour which inc i tes catarrh , while
Jupiter shares with Venus in the case of the narcissus;
Saturn in the case of the myrtle, the Sun in that of
the water-lily, Mercury in that of royal basil, and the
Moon in that of the violet.
Similarly the various organs of a plant are distributed
to different planets. Thus the stem of a tree
is appropriated to Sun, the roota to Saturn, the thorns,
twigs and bark to Mars, the flowers to Venus, the
fruit to Jupiter, the leaves to the moon, and the seed
to Mercury. Even in the fruit of a plant like a melon
the constituent parts are divided among several
planets, the plant itself and the flesh of the fruit
belong to the sun, its moisture to the moon, its rind
to Saturn, smell and colour to Venus, taate to
Jupiter, seed to Mercury and the skin of the seed and
its shape to Ears.
309. Kaif dalEl8t falEitl-jihZIt. I have not seen
in the ordinary text-books any referenoe to a connection
between the planets and the points
RELATION M POIliTS of the compass except in
OF COIJPBSS NayrTzItsl *~ook of Nat~re,~ who
in speaking of the four triplici%
ies refers Saturn to the East, Xars to the West, Venus
to the South and Jupiter to the North.
The Hindus, however, att rl but e to the planet 8
certain powers which they call directional ( jihatr)
this belongs to Elercury and J'upiter at the horoscope,
'1. suter ~bh. Gesch. lrlath. VI, 67 is of opinion that
several works attributed to ~ibrIzl: shouid be credited
to NayrIzZ. kbu'l-'~bb~s P. has NayrIzr. Nayrfz Is
130 miles E. of ShirBa.
2 KitEb a1-maw~lId, not included in the list or
IiayrTzT1s works given in Not. et Ext. VII p. 118.

to the sun and moon at the tenth house, to Saturn at the
seventh, and to Venus and the moon at the fourth. So it
becomes neoeasary to assooiate the East wlth Mercury and
Jupiter, the West with Saturn, the South irith tha sun and
Mars and the North wLth Venus and the moon.
They have also an octagonal figure called rags 1
which they use in trying to secure victory in gambling,
Here they place the sun at the East,Jupiter at the Suth,
Wrs at the South-East , the moon South-West ,Saturn North-
West, Mercury North,and Venus North-East,the West point
being le rt vaoant.
390, -if qismah &L-ayyb bainah;. With regard to
the distribution of the days of the week among the
planets,it is natural that the
PLANECS AS LORDS OF first hour of the first day
HOURS AND DAYS OF WEEK Sunday should be given to the
planet ahioh is the oause of
day and night ,viz. the sun. The seaond hour is allotted
to the next lower planet Venue, the third to Mercury,the
Aro of day
Brc of night
Day of 16 equal hours (40 g;harb) Night of 8 equal hoursw
= 2400 equlno~t. (ZO gharla) = 1200
Day of 12 uneqaal ho~irs.~/llth
aro of day = 200
Night of 12 unaqual burs
1/12th an: ofnight = 1CP
Diagrsnn of equal and unequal hours with
the Lords of the hours for a Sunday.
The Arabs divide the whole day from sunrise to sunset
into 12 day hours and the night from sunset to sunrise
into 12 night hours. In the diagram the day is much
longer than the night ,l6 or our hours to 8. Therefore the
Arab hours are very unequal to ours,and are alao unequal
as the days vary in length, Here 2 spaces are given
to Arab day hours and one to night hours, so 3 Arab day
hours t 4 of ours and 6 Arab night hours = 4 or ours,
1 One of the gama of nard,

fourth to the moon, the fifth to Saturn and so on till
the second day Monday whose first hour falls to the
noon,second to Saturn,and 80 on in the sane way until
another Sunday arrives,when the first hour is again the
turn of the sun. The lords of the hours having been
determined in this way it was natural that the days of
the week should be assigned'to the planet associated
w~th the first hour there0r.l
Some people assert that the odd hours of the
twenty-four are male and the even ones female.
391. Fahal fI hadha ikhtilHf. The Hindus deal with
this matter in a better way. They reckon their day of
twenty-f our hours from sunrise to
HINDU DIFFEFE3fCE sunri se ,and allot the whole day to
one governing planet without making
separate provision for the hours. Their night follows
day,and their hours are equal which appears to be the
most reasonable method. Our astrologers however,deal
separately with day and night and divide them into unequal
hours,so that the lord of the night which follows
a day is the thirteenth planet counting downwards from
the lord of the preceding day and (an easier calculation)
the sixth downwards or the third upwards.
It is on account of this that the unequal hours are
engraved on the astrolabe,but this methoa of division
is oontrary to nature.
392. Kaif qismah al-aq8lfm bainah8. With regard to
the seven climates the first from the equator to its
boundary is given to Saturn the first
PLBNETS BND
CLIMATES
and highest planet and the one with the
widest orbit,because the first olimate
is the longest of al1,the mst generous
in yielding the aeoessities of life,end its inhabitants
resemble Saturn in colour and disposition. The seoond
climate belongs to Jupiter and so on to the seventh
which is allotted to the moon. AbC WCshar regards this
as a Persian view, and says that the Greeks give the
first climate to Saturn, the seoond to the sun, the
third to Elercury,the fourth to Jupiter, the firth to
Venus, the sixth to Uars and the seventb to the moon.
g
Skeat 1.c. p. 23-7, and for the Semaine planetaire
BL. p. 480. Fig. 244.

393. M5 $awEli' al-bilEd wa * l-aqllIn wa a&Bb sEv
M. To fTn7f an association between a particula-ce
and a sign or planet is a matter
ASCENDANTS OF for investigation and research,
CITIES, CLIK4TES
LORDS OF T B E ~
but how are we to draw a horoscope
or ascertain the lord of
the hour for a place,unless we
know acourately the time of the beginning of its construction?
And what city ie there of which such a recollection
is preserved? Even if a religious ceremony
be assooiated with the foundation of a city,the history
of its early conditions has passed into oblivion. Even
suppose that is not so, and that we assume a certain date
of its foundationsand draw a horoscope and calculate the
lords of the hours in accordance therewith ,how are we to
do so for a well-known stream or a.great river,since Iwe
can know nothing as to when water began to flow in it cud
excavate its channel? These questions are futile and
their absurdity is obvious to the intelligent.
394. Mii s6nii al-kawaib. The years oi; the planets
are of four degrees ,least ,mean,great and greatest (g 437).
The last are only used for mark-
YEARS OF TEE PLBNETS ing certain time-cycles,although
some people say that in ancient
days the planets granted such long years of life. Astrologers
of the present day only use the three fonner degrees
for determining the length of life at a nativity,
and the numbers which they thus elicit must not be intarpreted
literally as years,but freely, for sometimas thy represent
years,but sometimes months,weeks,days or hours.
395. Ma firdEr8t al-kaekib. The years of a manrs
life according to a Persian idea are divided into certain
periods ( f irdiir) l governed
FIRDARIA OF PLANETS
by the lords of these known as
Chronocrator S (m 438-9) . When
one period is finished another begins. The first period
always begins with the sun in a diurnal nativity and with
the moon in a nocturnal one;the second with Venus in the
one case,in the other with Saturn,the remaining periods
with the other planets in desoending order. The years of
each period are distributed equally between the seven
planets, the first seventh belonging exclusively to
the chronocrator of the oeriod. the second to it in
j~artnership with the plshet-ne;t below it and so on.'
f irdar,according to De Saumaise from noplob hptov ,
~ouch6-~eclerc~ p: 491 n. The f irdaria appear later-as
waprtipta (Cat. cod. ast. graec. cod. Flor. p. 83).
2 394 and 395 are more suitably placed before 436 in P$-

386-401. Tabii ri al-kavv-&ib wa dal2118thEi. The
general characteristics of the nlanets and &eir
indications as to 396 element-
MATURES OF THE PLBNETS ary qualities; 397 beneficence
AND THEIR INDICATIONS or maleficence; 398 sex; 399
whether diurnal or nooturnal;
400 smell and taste; 401 colour.
Saturn is extremely cold and dry. The greater
malefic. 1:Iale. Diurnal. Disagreeable and astringent,
offensively acid, stinking. Jet-black also black mixed
with yellow, lead colour, pitch-dark.
Jupiter is moderately warn and moist. The greater
benefic. Male. Diurnal. Sweet, bitter-sweet, delicious.
Dust-colour and white mixed with yellow and brown,
shining,glittering.
Mars is extremely hot and dry. The lesser malefic.
Male (some say female). Nocturnal. Bitter. Dark red.
Sun is hot and dry, the heat predominant. Nalefioent
when near, beneficent at a distance. Male. Diurnal.
Penetrating. Pungent,shinlng reddish-yellow,its
colour is said to be that of the lord of the hour.
Venus is moderately cold and moist, especially the
latter. The lesser benefic. Female. Nocturnal. Fat and
sweet flavour. Pure white tending tc straw-colour ,
shining, sccording to some greenish.
Mercury is moderately cold and dry, the latter
predominant. Beneficent . Male and diurnal by nature, but
takes on the oharacters of others near. Complex flavour
and colour, the latter sky-blue mixea with a darker
colour.
Moon is cold and moist, sometime8 moderate,
changeable. Beneficent and maleficent. Fenale. Nocturnal.
Salt or insipid, somewhat bitter. Blue and
white or some deep colour not unmixed with reddish
yellow, moderate brilliancy.

402-406. DalB'ilhB al-mu$le. ah Kaifi It ashk81,
eyy&hB iqllmhx w ajnas al-arTgIn~icatio~ 4s to 402
the properties of things, 403 their
INDICATIONS form, 404 the days and nights of the
CONTINUED week, 405 climates, 406 nature of soils.
Saturn: Ooldest, hardest, most stinking and most
powerful or things. Shortness, dryness, h rdness,
heaviness. Saturday (and Wednesday night) 8 . First
climate. Barren mountains.
Jupiter: Moderate, complete, pleasant, best and
easiest things. &foderation, solidity, smoothness.
Thursday (an8 Monday n1ght)P. Second climate. Easily
worked soil.
Mars: Hot, hard, sharp and red things. Length,
dryness anC ooaraeness. Tueeday (and Saturday
Third climate. waste, hard and stony land.
Sun: Most expert, noble, well-known and generous
things. Revolution, mines, worn-outnese, empty and
vaoant places. Sunday (and Thursday night )P. Fourth
climate. Mountains rich in minerals.
Venus: Most pungent, mosl; agreeable and delioious,
most beautiful, softest and ripest things. Squareness,
dispersion, smoothness. Friday (and Tuesday night)P.
Fifth climate. Soils with abundant water.
Mercury: Uixture of moderate things. Compounded o
two things oi this nature. Wednesday (and Sunday nightA
Sixth climate. Sandy soil.
Moon: Thickest, densest, mistest and lightest
objects. Density, moisture, opacity, lightness. Monday
(and Friday night)P. Seventh climate. Plains and level
ground.

407-408. ~iilahz min al-&kin wavl-maslkin.
Indications as to,407,places and buildings; 408,
countries.
BUILDINGS BND
COUNTRIES
Saturn: Underground canals and vaults, wells, old
buildings, desolate roads, lairs of wild beasts,
deserts full of them, stables for horses, asses, and
camels, and elephants * houses. India, Zanzibar,
Abyssinia, Egypt, Ethiopia between the West and the
South, Yemen, Arabia and Nabatea..
Jupiter: Royal palaces, mansions of the nobility,
mosques, pulpits, Christian ohurohe~ and synagogues,
science, books, ordinary vessels, teachers1 houses,hamlets
of leadworkers. Babylon, Fars, KhurZisGn, the
country of the Teviks and the Berbers in Africa as far
as the Vest.
Mars: (~ire-temples lP, fireplaoes and firewood,
roadside fires and the vessels neoessary for the art of
the potter . Syria, Greece, Slavonia , North-Western
countries.
Sun: Kings* and sultan's palaces. Hi jjaz, Jerusalem,
Elount Lebanon, Armenia, ~liln, Dailarn, Khuriiscn as
faz as China.
Venus: Lofty houses, vessel sl(roads) vhioh hold
much water, places of worship. Babylon, Arabia, Hi jElz
and its neighbourhood, ( islands and sugar-plantationsE
and cities of Mesopotamia and the Middle of the blarsb.
Nercury: Bazaars and divans, mosques, houses of
paintere and bleachers and such as are near orohards,
irrigation channe 1s and springs. Mecca, Madina , rIrEq,
DIlam, GflEn, TabaristRn.
Moon: Molat places, underground or under water
brick-making, places to cool water, streams and roads
with trees. Mosul, AzarbaijRn, the narrow streets of
the omen people everywhere.
1 zarf and turuq are confused in this paragraph.

409-411. @lahE min al-mardaniy6t,al-filizzEt
wa'l-jawair, akbubab =*l-faaRkih. Indications as to
409 mines: 410. - - . metals - . -
RELBTIONS TO ORES, ~ A m U and precik~~ stones;
JEWEIS, GRAINS AND FRUITS 411 ,grains and fruit .
Saturn: Litharge,iron slag,hard stones. Lead.
Pepper,belleric myrobalan,ollves,medlare,bitter pomegranate,
lentils, linseed, hempseed.
Jupiter: Marcasite,tutty,sulphur,red arsenic,all
mite and yellow stones,stones found in ox-gall. Tin,
white lead,fine brass,diamond,all jewels worn by man.
Wild pomegranate,apple,wheat,barley,rice,durra,chiokpeas,
sesame.
Mars: Magnetic iron,shadnZ (lentil-shaped stones)
oinnabar,rouge and mosaics ( faalfusl) . lIron and copper.
Bitter almond, seed of turpentine-tree.
Sun: Jaclnths, lapis lazuli, yellow sulphur ,oxpiment,
Pharaonic glass,marble ,re-algar ,pitch. Gold and whatever
is coined therefrom for kings. Orange and maize.
Venus: Magnesia and antimony. Silver and gold aud
jewels set in these, household vessels made of gold, silver
and brass, pearls,emeralds,shells. Figs,grapes,
dates,origanum and fenugreek.
Mercury: Depilat~ry~arsenicr, amber ,all yellow and
green stones. All coins struck with name and number such
as dinars, dirhams and coppers, old gold and quicksilver,
turquoise, coral, tree-coral . Pease, beans, oaraway,
coriander.
Moon: Habatean glass, white stone S, eme rald, moonstone. Silver
and things manufactured of silver,such as cups,
bangle3,rings and the like, pearls,crystal,beads strung.
Wheat, barley, large and mall cucumbers ,melons.
Sfabbatu'l-khaQrEr , the green seed of Pi stacia terebinthus
according to kl-aaitar ,Not .Ext. %XIII,254, stcmachlc;
good for gps and teeth. In a qit6f of @Sriq (608) evidently
@whish,perhq pqamd as a ccuf'ection 1 pista-i,pangt.

412-413. ~ h h min g al-ashjEr, al-nabEt.
Indications as to, 412, trees; 413, herbage and
crops.
RELATIONS TO
TREES & CROPS
Saturn: Oak-gall tree,citron or myrobelan tree,
olive tree and also willow, turpentine tree, castor-oil
plant,and all those which bear fruits with disagreeable
taste or smell, or hard-shells such as walnuts and
almonds. Sesame.
Jupiter: Trees bearing sweet fruit without hard
skin such as peach ,flg,apricot ,pear and lote-fruit , companions
Venus as to fruits. Roses,flowers,herbs sweetsmelling
or tal1,such plants as are light and whose
seeds fly with the wind.
Mars: M1 bitter,pungent and thorny trees,their
fruit with rough skin,pungent or very bitter such as
bitter pomegranate,wild pear,bramble. Muatard,leeks,
onions, garlic,rue ,rooke t, wild rue, radish,egg-plant .
Sun: All tall trees which have oily fruit,and
those Wose fruit is used dry,such as date-palms,mulberries
and vines. Dodder,sugar-cane,manna,tarangubIn
and shIr-khi sht .
Venus: All trees soft to touoh ,sweet-smelling,
smooth to the eye like cypress and teak,apple and
quinoe. Sweet and oily berries,fragrant and aoloured
herbs,spring flowers and has a share in cotton.
Meroury: Pungent and evil-smelling trees. Savoury
herbs and garden stuff ,oanes and things growing in
water.
Moon: A11 trees the stem or whioh is short such
as the vine and the sweet pomegranate. Grass,reeds,
oanes, f lax,hemp, trailing plants such as oucamber and
melon .

418. DalEllit fa16 dhadt al-arbava. Indications
as to quadrupeds.
INDICATIONS AS TO
QUADRUPEDS &C
Saturn: Blaok animals and those livin in holes
in the ground; oxen, goats, horses, sheep; ermine,
sable ,weasel, cat, mouse, jerboa,&a, large black snakes,
scorpions and other poisonoue: insects and fleas and
beetles.
Jupiter: Man, dolnestic animals and those with
cloven hoofs su& as sheep, oxen, deer, those whioh
are speokled and beautifully coloured, and edible, or
speaking, or trained suoh as lions, chetahs and
leopards.
Nars: Lion, leopard, wolf, wild pig, dog, destructive
or mid wild beasts, venomous serpents.
Sun: Sheep, mountain goat, deer, Arab horse,
lion, oroaodile, nocturnal animals which remain concealed
during the day.
Venus: All those wild animals vhioh have white
or yellow hoofs suoh as gazelle, wild ass, mountain
goat also large fish.
Meroury: Asa, oamel, domestio dog, fox, hare,
jackal, ermine, nooturnal oreatures, small aquatio
and terrestrial animals.
Moon: Camel, ox, oheep, elephant, giraffe,
all beasts or burden obedient to man and domestiaated.
B
NaVh A, shuturmslrgh P, but perhaps for naram sheep
&o. and not for ostriches.
246

419-422. ~aliiliit %l$. al-p-r al-aniisir watlali~~t~aohya*
fi badan al-insan,?r9batpXi~
- .-
Indications as to,419,
INDICATIONS AS TO BIRDS,
ELEbIENTS AND HUIdOURS,
ORGANSOFTHEBODY,
VITAL ORGBNS.
birds and other flier~,420,
the elements and humours,
421,orgsn~oi~imilar
nature, 422,vital organs.
Saturn: Aquatic and nocturnal birds,ravens,
swallows and flies. Earth, black bile and occasionally
crude phle-. Hair, nails, skin, feathers, wool, bones,
marrow and horn. Spleen.
Jupiter: Birds with straight beaks, grain eating,
not bla~k,~ ,geon,francolin,peacock,domestic fowls,
hoopoo and lark. Air and blood. Arteries,qxm an3 bonemarrow.
Heart in partnership with the sun.
Mars: Flesh-eating birds with curved bills,nocturna1,water
hens, bats,all rsd birds,wasps. The upper
part of fire and yellow bile. Veins and the hinder
regions. Liver together with Venus.
Sun: Eagle ,ring-dove, turtle dove, cock and falcon.
The lower part of fire. Brains, nerves,and the hypoohondria,
fat and everything of this kind.P Stomach.
Venus: Ring-dove, wlld pigeon, sparrow,bulbul,
nightingale, locusts and inedible bIr8a . ----- . Flesh,
fat and spinal marrow.Kldneys.
Blercury: Pigeon, starling, cricket a, falcon,aqua~ic
birds and nightingales. Black bile. Arteries. Gallbladder.
MCIOIX IX1~~,cmrhm crowe,herons, chicks,
partridge. Phlegm. Skin and everything related thereto.
Lungs.

423-426. 1.6lahE min al-rat S al-Qawass arQ8' albadan.
~alilzth~ *alB al-asmn. m a t i o n s t m ,
parts of the head: 424,
INDICATIONS AS TO PARTS sense organs ; 425; paired
OF W, SENSES, LXmRS and other organs; 426
OF BODY, TIME OF LIFE period of life.
Saturn: Right ear. Hearing. Buttocks, podex,
bowels, penis, baok, height, knees. Old age.
Jupiter: Left ear. Hearing and touch. Thighs an8
inte st ine S, womb and throat . Niddle age.
Xya: Right nostril. Smell and touch. Legs,
pubesp , gall-blad~ed, kidney. Youth.
Sun: Right eye. Sight. Head and chest, sides,
teeth, mouth. Full manhood.
Venus: Left nostril. Smell and inhaling organs.
Womb, genitals, hands and fingers. Youth an8
adoleecence .
Meroury: Tongue together with Vernrs. Taste.
Organs of speech. Childhood.
Moon: Left eye. Vision and taste. Neck, breasts,
lungs, stomach, spleen. Infancy to old age according
to its various quarters.
ZahLr, zahra is P. for gall-bladder, as in PP.
248

427-428. ~tilahg mln al-ans8b dalEl8t raldvl-
4ild watl-g=. Indications as ti, 427, relations
and connect ions, 428
RELATIONS BND CONNECTIONS figure and face.
FIGURE AND FACE
Saturn: Fathers, grandfathers, older brothers
and slaves. Ugly, tall, wizened, sour face, large
head, eyebrows joined, small eyes, wide mouth,
thick lips, downcast look, much black hair, short
neck, ooarse hand, short fingers, awkward figure, Legs
crooked, big reet.
Jupiter: Chiltlren and grandchildren. Fine figure,
round race, thi ok prominent. nose, large eyes, frank
look, small beard, abundant curly hair reddish.
Ifiars: Brothers of middle age. Tall, large head,
small eyes and ears, and fine forehead, sharp grey
eyes, good nose, thin lips, lank hair, reddlsh, long
fingers, long steps.
Sun: Fathers and brothers, slaves. Large head,
complexion white inclining to yellow, long hair,
yellow in the white of the eye, stammers, large
paunch ai th folds .
Venus: Wives, mothers, sisters, uterine kindred,
delicate ohild. Fine round face, reddish-white cornplexion,
double chin, fat cheeks, not too fat, fine
eyes,, the blaok larger than the white; small teeth,
handeome neck, medium tall, short fingers, thick
calve8 .
Mercury: Younger brothers. Fine figure , complexion
brown with a greenish tinge, handsome, narrow
forehead, thick ears, good nose, eyebrows joined,
wide mouth, small teeth, thin beard, fine long hair,
well-shaped long feet.
Moon: Mothers, maternal aunts, elder sisters,
nurses. Clear white complexion, gait and figure ereot,
round face, long beard, eyebrows joined, teeth
separate crooked at the points, good hair with locks.

429. MglahZ mln al-sifht. Indication as to
disposition and manners. *-
DISPOSITION AND IBNNERS
Saturn: Fearful, timid, anxious, suspicious,miserly,
a malevolent plotter, sullen and proud,melancholy, truthtelllng,grave,trusty,un~lling
to believe good of anyoneyengrossed
in his own affairs and consequently lndicates
discord,and either ignorance or intelligence,
but the ignorance is concealed.
Jupiter: Good disposition, inspiring, intelligent,
patient, high-minded, devout, chaste,administering justice,
truth-telling, learned, generous ,noble, cautious in friendship,egoistic,friend
of good government,eager for education,an
honourable trusty and responsible custodian,
religious.
Mars: Confused opinions,ignorant,rash,evil conduct,
licentious, bold,quarrelsome,unsteady,untrustworthy,
violent, shameless,unchaste but quickly repentant ,a deceiver,
cheerful, bright, friendly and pleasant-faced.
Sun: Intelligent and knowledgeful,patient, chaste,
but sensusl ,eager for knowledge, power and victory , seeking
a good name for helping others,friendly,hottempered
but quickly recovering repose.
Venus : Good disposition, handsome face ,good-natured
inclined to love and sensuality,friendlins ss, generosity,
tenderness to children and friends,pride, joy,patience.
Mercury: Sharp intelligence and uWerstanding,affability,gentleness,open
countenan~e~elegance, far-sightedness,
changeable ,deeply interested in business,eager for
pleasure, keeps secrets, seeking friendship of people,
longing for power, reputation and approva1,preserves true
friends and withdraws from bad ones, keeps away from
triokery, strife ,malevolence, bad-heartedne ss and discord.
Moon: simple& adaptable, a king m ~ng kings,a sermt
among servants ,yod-hearted, forge tful",oquacious, timid,
reveals secrets,a lover of elegance$r~apected by people.
cheerfu1,a lowr of women too anxious, not intelleotual-
~y strong much thought and talk.
1 pure in heart. 2 msr. 3 duplicated. 4 and amusement.
5 about them.

430. ~iilaha min al-afyJ11 wa*l-8;haritiz watlakhlsq.
Indications as to conditions of life and
activities.
ACTIVITIES, INSTINCTS
AND MORU
Saturn: Exlle and poverty, or wealth acquired by
his own trickery or that of others, failure in business,
vehemence, confusion, seeking solitariness, enslaving
people by violence or treachery, fraud, weeping and
wailing and lamentation.
Jupiter: Friendliness, a peacemaker, charitable,
devoted to religion and good works, responsible ,uxorlom,
lau&ing,eloquent,eager for wealth,in addition to affability
some levity and recklessness.
Mars: Marriage, travelling, litigation,business goJng
to ruin, false testimony, lustfu1,a bacl companion, solitary,spiteful
and tricky.
Sun: Longing for power and government, hankering
after wealth and management of' worldly affairs,and imposing
will on the ignorant ,reproving evil-doers,harsh
with opponents. If sun is in exaltation,the position is
favourable to kings,if' in fall to those in rebellion.
Venus: Lazy, laughing, Jesting, dancing, fond of wlne,
chess,draughts,cheating,takes pleasure in every thing,
not quarrelaome,a sodomite or given to excessive venem.
well-spoken, fond or ornaments,~rfums, 8ong,gold, silver,'
fine clothes.
Mercury: Teaching mannera,theolo@,revelation and
logio,eloquent ,tine voice ,good memory for stories,
ruining prospeots by too great anxiety and misf'ortunes,
reariul of enemies, irivolous,eager to buy slaves ancl
girls ,busybody, calumnious, thieving, lying and falsifying.
Moon: Lying,oalumniation,over-anxious tor health
and oomSort,generous,in distributing food,too UXO~~OUS,
levity in appropriate places, excellent spirits.
1 little conjugal happiness, too much marriage.
251

431-432. LIB yansub ilaihg min 81- filial wa'lamrag,
wa tabqat al-as. Indications as to,431,
diseases, 432,classes of
REUTIOIJS TO DISE~SE people.
m CLASSES
Saturn: Sickness,af fliction, poverty ,death,disease
of internal organs, gout. Owners of estates, kingst intendants
,religious of vario s sects, devotees,wicked
people, bores, the om?rworkea,eunuchs, f thieves, the moribund,magicians,demons,ghouls,and
those who revile them.
Jupiter: Sickness,fatigue,fever,death in childbed,
Caesarean section. Kings, vazirs ,nobles,magnates, lawyem,
merchants, the rich and their sycophants.
Mars: Fever. Leadere, cavalry, troops, opponents,
disputants in assembly.
m: -m---. .Kings, nobles, chiefs, .generals,
officials, magistrates, physicians, societies.
Venue: ----- . Noblea, plutocrats, queens,
courtezans, adulterers and their children.
Meroury: -----. Merchants, bapkers, counaillors,
tax-collectors, slavea and wrestlers.
Moon: Diseasea of many kinds. Bings, no:les,
noble matronsq celebrated,an& wealthy - aghuiya -
citizens.
-
l mutatassifan, but here maldiidiin interesting people.
1, hariirir; hawhll, the proper plural is hamalah
pregnht mmen:

433-434. DalGlatG raalCI al-adyEn: suwarhii
allati tasawwaratha . Indi-tions as to;-
religions, 434,pictorial
INDICATIONS AS TO RELIGIONS representations of the
PICTURES OF PLANETS planets.
Saturn: Jews and those who dress in black. Old man
seated on a wolf ,in his right hand the head of a man and
in the left a man's hand; or acoording to another picture
,mounted on a bright bay horse, on his head a helmet,
in the left hand a shield and in the right a sword.
Jupiter: Christians and those dressed in white. A
young man with a drawn sword in the right hand and a
bow and a rosary in the left ,on horse-back; another
picture: man on a throne,olad in variously coloured
robes,a rosary in the left hand.
Mars: Idolaters,wine-bibbers,dressed in red. Young
man seated on two lions,in the right hand a drawn sword
In the left a battle-axe;another picture: mounted on a
bay horse,helmet on head,in t e left hand a spear adarn
ed wlm red mses,pennon flag%,in the right hand head
of a man, clad in red.
Sun: Wearing a crown; bilagians, Pithraists. A man
seated on something like a shield on wheels drawn by
four oxen,in his right a staff on which he rests,in his
left a mac& gurz, beadd kharaz; another picture: man
seated,faoe like a circle,mg reins of four horses.
Venus : Islk. Vioman on a camel holding a lute which
she is playing; another picture: woman seated her hair
unloosened the locks in her left hand,in the right a
mirror in which she keeps looking,dressed in yellowish
green, with a necklace ,bells, bracelets and anklets.
Mercury: Disputants in all sects. Youth seated on
a peaoock,in his rigbt hand a serpent and in the left a
tablet whioh he keeps reading; another picture: man
seated on a throne,in his hand a book which he is reading,
crowned, yellow and green robe.
Moon: Adherents of the prevailing religion. Man
with javelin in right hand,ln his left thirty,you would
think there were three1 hundred,on his head a crown,
seated in a chariot drawn by four horses.
1 ?sIgad P. so00
253
( Jurz)

435. DalBlathE '816 al-ginBrBt . Indications as
to trades, professions, etc.
Saturn: Building,paymaster, fanning, reclaiming
and distribution of water, ( fraudulent transactions,
apportioning money an& heritages,grave-d1gging;aelling
things made of iron,lead,bone,hair;copper,blaak slaves;
knowledge used for bad purposes,such acts of the government
as lead to evil oppression,wrath,oaptivity,torture.
Jupiter: Noble actions,good government,religion,
doing good; interpretat ion of dreams; goldsmiths work,
banking; selling old gold and silver ,white clothes,
grapes and sugar-cane .
Mars: Law-making, selling and W ing armour, blaoksmiths
oraf t, grooms, shepherds, but ohers, veterioary
surgeons, surgeons, ciroumoisers, sellers of hounds, chaetehs,
boars, ruolves, oopper , si okles, beer, qlaes, boxes,wooden
cups,brigandage,contention,housebreakingn,
grave-robbers and prison, torture,execution.
Sun: Receiving,giving an8 selling gold-hrooadee.
Venus: Works of beauty and magnificence ,fond of
bazaars, oommerce ,measuring by weight, length and bulk;
dealing in pictures and colours,goldsmiths uork,tailoring,manufacturing
perfumes, dealing in pearls, gold and
silver 'ornaments ,musk, white and green clothes ,maker of
crowns and diadems ,accompanying singing, compoeing
songs, playing the lute, feasts, games and gaming.
Mercury: Merchants, calculators and surveyors,
astrologers, necromancers and fortune-tellers,
geome trioian,philosopher,dlsputation,poetry,eloquenoe,
manual dexterity eind anxiety for perieotion in everything,selllng
slaves,hides,books,co~na; profession of
barber, manuf aoture of oombs .
Moon: Engaged in business matters,missions,agenoLs,
accounting;atrenuous in religion and divine law,skill
in all bran0hes;praotice of medicine,geometry,the higher
sciences,measuring land and water;growing and cuttin@:
hair;selling food,silver rings and virgins,also indicates
captivity,and prison for the deoeptlaos of wizards.

436-439
436-437. AwihirG min uddiim wa min khalf. 8:mGha.
The orbs1 and yearsi: of theqplanets.
ORBS AM) yEjiX3 OF PZAIETS
Orbs
Years
least mean greatz greatest
Saturn 9'
Jupiter
xars 8'
Sun
Venus
15O
7O
Xeroury
Moon
7'
120
438-439. FirdarZit wa muddah al-sharakah. Periods of
life ( fird~ria-
chmnocrators~
438.and the timss of association.439,
PIRD&U AND THEIR (iikiiths-~~r~tha ~perioa~) the'other
ASSOCIATION TQBS planets with the general chro~wtors+
Chronooratora
fndiurnal Inmtuturaal
57 265
42 7
15 66 284
19 394 1z0 1461 (sothiao cycle)
8 45 82 1151
20 40 76 461
25 W* 108 520
Times of association
-3 years 2 yeagt no aae&lation times with the
whether day or nigh planets
1 The orb of a planet is the distance within wllich its influence
(amr) can affect another when applying to conjunction
or aspeat. The figures are as in Porphyrius p. 204,but vary
in modern books.
8 Cf. 394 and 522. The great pars are the sums of the
Ptolermlc te- of each planet 453;the least or 4 ad"$"
have been related to their periods of revolution,of O to the
Metonio cycle,of ? to its orb,while those of 8 and 8 and the
lained. In the oase of Q an8 D,
but cr. mt.vai. p. 157 and B.L.~
where Q and treated like other planets.
3 Vettius Valens p. 164 he.$ another explanation for the
gre t years ( T ~ A E I trq) ~ Ot the planets:-
h % of O great years + % great > - 57 (note 372)
of Q great years + suast = 79
or o? D * * + least = 79
$$of)
+leaetof?+-66
9ZofD +leastof~-84(tbesumcdtXur~-82)
6- 4 * + leest or 6 = 76
4 A span of 75 years is thus provided for.

-
440. M3 bugut al-kawgkib. We now proceed to discuss
the relation of the planets to the signs.
The zodiac belt is divided intotwo
D0ZfICIL;ES OF halves, the first extending fron the
THE PUNXTS beginning of Leo to the end of Capricorn,
and this half is given to the
sun whose domicile is the first sign, viz. Leo. The
other half is given to the moon; it extends fron the
beginning of Aquarius to the end of Cancer in which
sign its domicile is. As the other planets have two
methods of novement retrograde and direct, so also
they have each two domiciles one on the sun side and
one on the moon side, at equal distances from the interval
between Leo and Cancer. Beginning with lblercury
the nearest planet, Virgo on the sun side and Gemini on
the moon side are assigned to it as domiciles, then
Libra and Taurus to Venus, Scorpius and Aries to Mars,
A
Sagittarius
and
Pisces
to Jmiter
and
Capricorn
and Aquarius
to Saturn
as
D in the
annexed
figure.
C
ABC The Sun half.
ADC - The N~on half.

441. Fahal yastad +l al-kawkab. One of these
doxalciles 'is alvrays nore congenial to the planets and
it is said that there they are more joyful
DOMICILS3 in account of tempermnt , fornation,and
PRSFl3RRED
sex. The sun and noon,homever,as they are
not confined to one domicile find condit-
ions in all. But of those which have tso,Xercury prefers
Virgo to Gemini ,Venus Taurus,liiars Aries, Jupiter
Sagittarius,Saturn Aquarius.
The opinion of the Hindus agrees in some respects
and differs in others; they say that liars finds Aries
nore congenia1,the noon Taurus,the sun Leo,Mercury Virgo,Venus
Libra,Jupiter 3agittarius,and Saturn Aquarius.
They call such situations *miilatrikuna'] and assert that
a planet occupying one of these has more influence than
in its own domicile.
442. 1.:E al-wab&. The signs opposite to the doniciles
of the planets are said to be their detriment$-or
DETRII4EITS aebilities (arable,:iabgl ,~ersian, bityarah).
The Hindus
while recognizing
the
iiomiciles do
not know this
expression.
The detrinents
are shown in
the acconpw
ing fi~ure.
1 India 11.225.
25"

443. hG ashrsf al-Eiawakib wa hu
certain signs &ich are described as
tion (sharaf) of the planets, like
EXALTATION AND the thrones of kings and other high
FALL OF PLBNETS positions. In such signs the exaltation
is regarded as specially related
to a certain degree, but there are mny differences
of opinion in this natter, some saying that it extends
to some degrees in front of or behind the degree in
question, while others hold that it extends from the
first point of the sign to that degree, and again
others that it is present in the whole sign aithout'any
special degree. Below are the signs and degrees according
to the Persians and Greeks,
Saturn . . . . . m . 21' of Libra
Jupiter ...... 150 of Cancer
Uars ......... 28O of Capricorn
Sun ......... l90 of Aries
Venus ...... 270 of Pisoes
Mercury
150 of Virgo
Moon ......... 30 or Tauvs
Dragon's Head
So or Gemini
Dragon's Tail .'. . So of Sagittarius
The opposite signs and degrees are regarded as
places of dejection for the planets, when in them, they
are said to be in their 'rail* (hubtlt), and are therein
oonfined and their condition deteriorated.
444. Ha1 fi al-ashrLf Xhil3t. There is no difference
of opinion as to the signs of exaltation, but the
Hindus differ as to the degrees in
'HINDUS DIFFER certain cases. *hey are agreed that
AS TO DEGRES the exaltation of the sun lies in 100
of Aries, of Jupiter in 5O of Cancer,
of Saturn 20' of Libra, the others as above, exoept
. 9
. v:
f>l;&y&~&Lk",
Z
r
-- U,. 9
. (. ,. 39 @-T +.G'

with regard to the Dragon's Bead and Tail which are not
nentioned by them in this corulection as is quite proper.
445. ArbEb al-nuthallathat ES hiya. Each triplicity,
379, has a lord by day and another by night, also
a third which shares this responsibil-
LORDS OF HIS ity both by day and night. Thus the
TZIPLICITIES fiery triplicity has as lord the sun
by day, and Jupiter by night, while
Saturn is a partner both by day and night. The earthly
triplicity has Venus by day, the moon by night, :,!am
being in this case the partner. The airy triplicity
has Saturn by day, ILercurjr by night and Jupiter as
partner, while the watery triplicity has Venus by day,
Lfars by night and the noon as partner.
Their Ldds
However ~ashwiyitel astrologers associate all
three planets at the sam time with each triplicity,
and merely make the following distinction between day
and night, e.g. the lords of the fiery triplicity are
the Sun, Jupiter and Saturn by day, and Jupiter, the
Sun and Saturn by night and the rest on this analogy.2
They do not desert their position (1. ar*ba) on consideration,
but have filled their b o o h decrees
based thereon, and propositions deduced froa these
(1.tarrir)
446. blunagarah al-kawgkib f 1 al-buru ' kaif hiya.
Whenever t-lanets are in signs which age in aspect to
181-~Iriini had a poor opinion of the Hashwiyites - v.
Chron.p.90, and 527 and 529. As to their doctrine, a
creed of the oomon people as conpared with the more asistocratic
aod intellectual '&tazilites,and the origin
of the name v,Van Vloten - Hashwiya et Nabita. Inter.?!I.
Congr.1897 and Goldziher - Livre de Ibn Toumert.p.65.
Alger 1903. Die t.sci.term p. 396.
2 The first page of i;L has a table &owing this arrangement,

ASPECTS OF PLAXZTS
IIT SIGNS
each other 373, they also are
said to be in aspect; if they are
in the sans sign they are describ-
ed as conjunct mjtamrin, while if they are at the see
degree the conjrmction is said to be partile (muqtarin).
If one of them is in a sign third from the other, they
are in sextile aspect to the right or left, if in a
fourth sign, to be in quartile, if in a filth in trine,
and if in the seventh, opposite, Should their degrees
be equal they are styled muttasilk for then between
these aspects it is possible t6 construct either a regular
hexagon, or a square or a triangle in the zodiac,
or to divide it into two - 373-
447. Kaif sad6 ah al-kawskih wa vad;iwathi?. Frienb
ship or enmitybtwzen the planets is, according to us,
based on what we have said as to
FRIENDSHIP ILNI) their domiciles, but astrologers
ENMITY OF PLANETS have different theories on this
matter. mere are those who base
them on the temperament and nature of the planets themselves,
Saturn and Jupiter being regarded as inimical
because the one is dark, maleficent and extremely distant,
lRhile the other is shining, beneficent and only
moderately distant. There are others who base them on
their elementary qualities, those that are fiery being
inimical to the watery,and the airy to the earthy,while
there are still others who found them on the relative
situations of their domiciles and exaltations,if the
aspect of these is inimical then their lords are also
inimical: further any planet whose domicile is twelfth
from the house occupied by another planet is inimical
to the latter. %'hen the basis of enmity is arrived at
in any of the ways we have enumerated, then that for
friendship and indif rereno0 be comes obvious.
$4. "B-
. ' ,*
*
-i,+!?!dJ5,&L LL~I, L&~JLYL~L;,,~ '
p& I ~+'s'u?, ' & y ~ & ? + ~
3 "'
,I
/ /
7
* .o?. ~y+$>~.~'j
9 Z t

The views of Abu 'l-Qasim, the philosopher,based
on the foregoing considerations are shown in the c ol~s
of the subjoined table.
The astrologers of our day however,lay little stress on
the friendship or enmity of the planets in the matter
of judicial astrology. The Hindus on the other hand regard
them as equally important or more so than the domiciles
and exaltations, we have aocordingly set down
their opinions in the accompanying table.
1 read iatirbh.
2 5( inW.
3 kin BB.

As far as friendship or ennity is concerned, they
are liable to change, because if a planet neets another
in the loth, llth, 12th, 2nd, 3rd, or 4th houses,l if
friendly the friendship be cones conple te, if indifferent
becomes friendly, and if inimical indifferent. Also if
it meets another in any of the other houses,the effects
are precisely the reverse of these.
448. 1:; al-nhbahr. ;7e shall now sy-~eal. of the
different parts of the sias and the fate of the
- planets therein.
HALF-SIGN
Half of a sign is called 'hour' by
the Hindus (nh bahr in Persian) .e The
first half of every male sign belongs to the sun and
the second to the moon, and on the contrary, of every
female sign the first half belongs to the moon and the
second to the sun. My friends, in this matter continue
to obtain conclusions which differ from the above or
are directly opposed the reto, and indec d the distinction
between the two cannot be compared with that between
light and darkness, as we have said and shall continue
to say,but the people who have made use of this d1st;ind;
ion are agreed upon its value,in spite of the opinions
of others.
the first face of Aries is Ears, of the second
the sun, of the third Venus; of the first of Taurus,
Fercury and so on in the order of the planets from
above downwards till the last face of Pisces.
450, l& al-g=, The so-called tfiguree? are in
reality a l s o faces,but called so ( ?uwar) because
the Greeks,Hindus end Babylonians associat-
FIGURES ed with each face as it arose the figure of
a personage human or divine,3 and in the
1 Cf. the statement India 11 524, where a planet's nature
is said to undergo a change towards friendliness in
the Eastern and towards enmity in the Western houses
without reference to meeting another planet there.
2 Cf. India I 843 where the 'centres of the signs? should
be the 'half signs*.
3 For a list of the Egyptian divinities according to
Hermes, v, Ruelle, Rev. de Philol. 1908 p. 247.

case of the Greeks the faces were also associated with
such of the other 48 cmstellations ascending at the
sme time.1 But this duplication of constellations is
mentioned in connection with affairs, designs and undertakings
which are peculiar to the country in question,
and is used to obtain decrees with regard to these.
;;re shall not undertake to give an account of it both to
save s?ace,and because it would be useless,as the astrological
books we have are destitute of any instmctions
for using it.
451. 1.i; al-darI 'an. By the Hindus these thirds
of a sign are calledJdar~g& or Drikan (decanate), but
their lords are different fron those of
DECAPJATES the faces, because the first decanate has
as lord the lord of the whole sign, the
second, the lord of the fifth sign from it, and the
third, the lord of the ninth sign.2 The lords of the
faces and of the Hindu decanates are set down in the
table.
Signs
Aries
Taurus
Gemini
Cancer
Leo
Yi rgo
Libra
Scorpio
Sagit -
tarius
Caprbn
Aquarius
Pisces
Lords
loo
Mars
Mercury
Jupiter
Venus
Saturn
Sun
MO on
Mars
biercury
Jupiter
Venus
Saturn
of faces
- -
Of darijan
20° 30 O loo 20°
Sun Venus ars Sun
Xoon Saturn enus E.Iercury
Mars Sun ,ercury Venus
Mercury Idoon
Venus Mercury ~ercury Saturn
Saturn Jupiter Venus Saturn
Sun Ve nu S Jupiter
?,loon Saturn JupiterMars
Mars Sun
Mercury ?ban
Jupiter Mars
Saturn Venus
Saturn Mercury
Jupiter Xoon
30'
Jupiter
Sat urn
Saturn
Jupiter
Xars
Venus
lvie r cu r y
Ldoon
Sun
Mercury
Venu S
b&rs
7CupavariMov~a - cf. ~ouch6-Leclercq lc.125 and passim.
Boll, Sternglaube, 1926, pp. 60, 142...
2 The lords of the decanates are the lords of the signs
in the order of the triplicities 379, Aries, Leo, Sagittarius
&c.

l phu: " I
452. Ha1 istafamal ~afrlemiyiis athlEth al-bur5 j.
Ptolemy has also made use of the thirds of the signs.
He determined by experience and obgerva-
PTOI;EMYrS tion of the signs the changes in the at-
SIGN-THIRDS mosphere which are indicated by the
signs as a whole, by the individual
thirds in these in longitude and by their northern and
southern parts in latitude. So whenever the action of
the planets on the weather and of their situations at
the times of conjunction and opposition in longitude
and latitude when weather prognostics are sought it is
not easy to estimate the combined effect of all of
these influences,as well as of the association and separation
of the planets and the fixea stars. The following
table is taken from Ptolemy.
Indications of
Whole Sign North Part South Part 1st Third . 2nd Third 3rd TMrd

453. l& al-4udiid.l These are unequal divisions of
the signs known as terms, P.marz:with each one of then
a planet is associam People however differ
TERMS in this matterasome holding to the chaldean,2
i.e.the ancient Babylonian mthod,others to
that of ~stariitiis,3 while others again adopt the scheme
of the Hindus.'~one of these are employed by professional
astrologers,who are unanimous in using the
Egyptian tenns,because they are more correct. Those who
have expounded Ptolemy's works use the terms which he
records having found in an old book,and which he has inserted
in his Tetrabiblos. We have constructed a table
showing both the Egyptian and the Ptolemaic terms:there
is no use discussing any others.
Sigha m tian Lord
of Terms
825
h27
624
k26
v24
628
92s
G24
k26
h26
$25
628
k30
330
h30
h30
S30
Q30
g30
1230
830
$30
$30
3L30
Ptolemvts Lords of
4. 6 914 v21 626
$I 87 ?l5 +22 a26
+l3 20 $26
36 +l3 $20
36 ql3 919
$5 7 y13 &l8 424
1 The table from PI, is substituted as an example of its
calligraphy.
2 Vettius Valens, p. 14 seq. for characteristics of each
term. v. B.L.pp.206-210.
3 This form occurs in A and P and in AbQ EiIarsharts Madkha1,f.
190-3,also as As$ar$UE in B.M.Add.23,399 of
Abuvl-Hasan rAIT,and appears in the Latin translations
of the'latter works as Aristotua (Ubumasar,Introd.1489,
V.8.)~ttarathyh,(cf.Bouchd-~eclercq,p.215 n.)Asthoatol,
(Bonatus,l550 p,46&rofessor Margoliouth suggested it
was probably the nams of a Greek astrologer.
A variant in AB* f 83a 1 4, ~ras3rGtii points to (LW
Erasistratos, who,Dr.Withington shows me,accoraing 40 a
list of books in a Greek translation of a work of biash~llah,(Cat.Cod.~strol.~raec.cod.~lor.P.~l-2
was the
author of several astrological books ,among them one

454. ~~udid al-hinduwsn, The iIindus use only one
series of term for all the male signs, and the sme
series in the inverse direction for the
HIPDU !!!EWE3 female signs. This is called their trIshiinash,l
or the divisions of the thirtyi:
degrees. The result of the arrange~ent is that the division
of the sign is not the saae in the two sets,and
consequently when it is desired to know which tenn applies,it
is necessary to reckon it out, The series is
shosm in the annexed table as repo-ted to us -
Terns of male
Terms of fenale
signs from the 5 5 8 7 5 sinns from the
beginning a/c
beginning &/c
to the Hindus 5 5 &- 8 g to the Hindus
_t t
455. 81-nuhbahr, The Hindus regard the ninth part
of a sign(nuhbahr) -3020' - which they oall nuvznshaka,
as very important. \hen a planet is in its
lTINTHS OF own dcpicile and ninth,that ninth is called
TRE SIGNS ?bargutam' or most important. The table
shows the ninths of all the signs;the lords
of the ninths are the lords of the signs concerned. The
first ninth of the tropical signs, the fifth of the fixed
and the ninth of the bicorporal ones are called *bar@-
tam?(vargottam).s This is an entirely Hindu method on
which all are agreed. biy friends have altered the order
*cPl WpraPZ@v icf.395 n.! In a similar ltst by AbO.
1,larshar occurs i BtBhog 103 Aprauiu~~o~(1. A~au~u&?ou)
There is no hint in Wellmaqfs article (~auly,~eal-
'
EncyQ of any astrological leanings on the part of the.
real Erasistratus.who flourished in the centurv after
Ptolemy and ~alens.
The terms of *~star;itus~ are distributed between
the seven planets (1u~ad&al,f.l93). The first term of
each- is devoted to the planet whose domicile it is
(fig.447)and the following ones to the other six in descending
crder:e.g.
Aries. 6 4 4 5 3 2 6 E 30,
@and > occur only once in the first terrn,the other
planets twice. There are slight mistakes in the terms
o f u n = ~ p
India 11. 213, trih&ibGaka.
2 A0 thalfithin ~ 0 AB % AEI thulthain PI, has sIyak burj
with marginal correction sixak.
3 India I1 223:in TB. barguah.

of the lords of the ninths and have arranged them in
the order of the spheres,but it is better that we abstain
from usim it.
1st 3O20' Aries Capricorn Libra Cancer Tropical
Uars Saturn Venus llloon signs
6040v Taurus Aquarius Scorpio Leo
Venus Saturn Mars Sun
Fixed
10° Gemini Pisces Virgo Bicor-
Mercury Jupiter Jupiter Mercury poral
13O20' Cancer Aries Capricorn Libra Tropical
Moon Mars Saturn Venus
5th 1e040' Leo Taurus A q W Scorpio Fixed
Sun Venus Saturn Mars
20' Virgo Gemini Pisces Wttar. Bicor-
Mercury Mercury Jupiter Jupiter poral
23'20 * Libra Cancer Aries Cagricmn Tropical
Venus Idoon Mars Saturn
26O40' Scorpio Leo Taurus Aquarius Fixed
Mars Sun Venus Saturn
9th30° Sagitlm Virgo Gemini Pisces Bicor-
JupiterMercury Mercury Jupiter poral
The 1st 5th and 9th of these columns form respectively
the fiery,earthy, airy and watery tripJicities, 379.
456. al-ithn6 Sshri. Bt. A sign may also be divided
into twelfths (ithna Ja=hriYZt g~ of Z~SO*, each
of which has a iod,tdeiefirst twelfth
TKELFTHS OF having as lord the lord of the whole
THE SIGlJS sign, 440 the second, the lord of the
next sign in succession, and so on to
the end of the series. As multiplication is easier than
division,and it is difficult for any one to subtract by
2 1/2 degrees, people simplify the calculation by multiplying
the number of Gegrees and minutes of the particular
twelfth,the lord of which one wishes to know,

Lords of
by twelve, and then for every 30' counting one sign in
the direction of succession from that in which the
twelfth is; the last oomplete 300 indicates the sign
whose lord is the lord of the twelfth in question. The
lords of the various twelfths of the signs are shown in
the table.
This is the dkvision as to which the Greeks and
the Hindus are in agreemsnt, but I have always been
surprised that my friends have not altered it according
to the succession of the signs or some other scheme.
For if you proceed according to such a mthod you do
not commit other absurdities to mention dhich this is
not the place,
zGz?@k
Twelfths of the Signs
T u n - # X
Mars 1st 12th llth 10th &h 8h %h &h 5th 4th 3rd 2nd
Venue
2nd 1st 12th 11th 10th 9th 8th 7th 6th 5th 4th 3rd
Bmry 3rd 2nd
Moon
1st 12th llth 10th 9th 8th 7th 6th 5th 4th
4th 3rd 2nd 1st 12th llth 10th 9th 8th 7th 6th 5th
Sun 5th 4th 3rd 2nd 1st 12th llth 10th 9th 8th qth 6th
Memmy 6th 5th 4th 3rd 2nd 1st Uth llth 10th 9th 8th 7th
Venus 7th 6th 5th 4th 3rd 2nd lat 12th llth 10th 9th 8th
Mars 8th 7th 6th 5th 4th 3rd 2nd let 12th llth 10th 9th
J'uptbr 9th 8th 7th 6th 5th 4th 3rd 2nd 1st 12th llth 10th
Saturnloth 9th 8th 7th 6th 5th 4th 3rd 2nd 1st Uth llth
Saturn llth 10th 9th 8th 7th 6th 6th 4th 3rd 2nd 1st 12th
ApBm 12th llth 10th 9th 8th 7th 6th 5th 4th 3rd 2nB
1st

457. l& al-darajEt al-mudhakkarah wa.1-mueannathah.
m y controversies exist as to the sex of the various
degrees of the signs, and these dif-
U BNU fer very much as to their basis.
IZMAXd DEGilEES Fthatever decrees you elicit from a
method founded neither on proof nor
analogy nor on the order which the intelligenoe demands
remain obsoure until we cease to follow a path whioh
leads nowhere. There is no sense in people who prooeed
on such lines, but, nevertheless, they accept indications
from the sex of the signs in the same way as from
the signs themselves.

etc., while some of our predecessors considered the
first twelve and a half degrees of a male sign to be
male, and the second, female, the next two and a half,
male and the remaining two and a half, female; proceeding
in the inverse manner with the female signs.
With regard .to schemes not based on order, a table
like that whioh we append, must be consulted (in which
the female degrees are marked with an S).
458. l& al-dara Lt al-mudi ah watl-mu~limah. The
dietinctlon dram be$neen l u m i h k d e g r e e s 1s
like the last not founded on any system
BRIGHT BM) and consequently recourse must be had
DARK DEGREES to the subjoined table.
Astrologers,however,use it for making decisions as
to colours,good and evi1,streagth and weakaess,joy and
sorrow,difficulty and ease. But no two books are to be
found whfoh agree on this matter,nor are they likely tc
be found.
The table shows several degrees of light end darkness,brilliant(b)
nai ir, luminous (L) mu& dusky (d)
sutmah, dark or sh* (a) muelim, whne some degrees
are empty or void (v) kkdli.
Aries d3 85 68 b4 s4 b5 sl
Taurus d3 L7 d2 b8 v5 b3 b2
Gemini v5 b2 63 b5 v2 b6 67
Cancer 67 b5 d2 L4 s2 b8 s2
Le 0 b7 86 v5 b9
Virgo Q5 L4 v2 b6 v4 87 v2
Libra b5 85 M d3 b7 U
Scorpio d3 15 v6 L6 s2 L5 d3
Sagittarius b9 d3 b7 a4 67
Caprioornus 67 b3 85 b4 62 L4 b5
Aquarius s4 b5 d5 b8 v3 X3
P ~ S O ~ S d7 b4 v6 a10

459. lrPB al-daraj6t al-2Zida.h fi al-satadah wa
al-SbEr. There are also degrees which increase and
diminish fortune. The former
DEGREES IlJCREBSIXG OR are those in which if the lord
DIMINISHENG FORTUNE of the period whether sun or
moon, or the degree1 of the
ascendant or the part of fortune is situated, the good
luck and power of each is doubled. The latter are like
pits, iibZr, in which the planets are enfeebled in their
action, being neither able to effect good if lucky nor
evil if unlucky - the tendency is therefore towards
peace. Both are shown in the following table.
Ngrees increasing fortune in the upper row, (pits
abar, A ch&hB P) in the lower.
The S indicates mistakes in m: braokets omission.
1 lord of the ascendant dB1 .
271

460. Ui al-mawEdir al-dgllah al-afat fI alfain.
There are certain situations which are said to
be injurious to the eyes. These
PLACES I~JURIOUS have nothing to do with the signs,
TO TEE E7L5S although some people say that there
is a hint of this action in Libra
and Scorpius, but they are places which contain certain
nebulous stars, or certain animal figures from other
constellations xhich are able.to cause this injury. The
really nebulous stars are four in number, one in the
left hand of Perseus, and this one does not count because
its latitude is high, and it is far from the
course of the planets; a second, behind the aselli on
the surface of Cancer, this has to be reckoned with;
a third is behind the 19th mansion of the moon,which is
described in books Waling with the heliacal rising of
the stars (iiutub al-anwgr 166) as the venom (humah) of
the Scorpion, and this is of the number,a fou?th,as is
the tip1 of the arrow of Sagittarius; again small stars
in a group have a cloudy effect such as Haqrehthe 5th
mnsion of the moon &ich is coaposed of three stars
in the head of Orion. Ptoleny regarded them as cloudy,
but they need not be included on account of their high
latitude. The Pleiades also resemble Haqtah and belong
to this series since their latitude is low, the moon
passes by them and the sun also comes near them. Now
those two luminaries represent the two eyes and their
action vision.
The dangerous places in the animal signs are those
like the sting of Soorpius,nishtar P, the (point of the
P) arrow,nushaba of Sagittarius, and the shaukah sharp
tail of Capricorn, because its hinder endmh-like .
The hinder end of Leo is also included, as is the star
between the eyes of Scorpius and the water below Aquarius
maqabb al-d.. Ve know of no nebulous star towards
themnder ead of Leo except the_ tuft between his tail
and the Great Bear known as dafirah, khich is composed
of small stars non-luminous,'looking like a cloud
shaped like an ivy-leaf, the *hulbah' of the Arabs, or
;Q>~J+&&;W&~\,
r y '4
a~\*GJLs . .-
y&kzd>&f\
' &\&\&,&l\ * \
.* . .. c W, L&+\;Y! 23
-?13Zy&
U'; C. 1 *'-
kid y.+i&&+kj~d>\ c L'J\J\&+
py'; :. P'
,U~~*J~~~~&!&
a* 2.
, Z , 4
1 Several EdSS have rain for sinn.
272

tuft of the lion's tail. Its northern latitude is
twice as great as the south latitude of Haqlah, and
therefore we think that it cannot be reckoned in this
series, besides the dangerous weapons of the lion are
his teeth and claws, not his tail. The stars between
the eyes of Scorpius extend from the diadem to the heart,
and are scattered luminous stars. The water under Aquarius
is conposed of four small stars near each other
situated below the point where the beginning of the
flow of water is pictured. Some people call this place
the urn of Aquarius, but there are no starsthere, and
so an urn is assumed in the hand of the man from which
the water flows, just as a sword is assumed in the
right hand of Perseus.
Our foregoers settled the position of these stars
in their time, since which 60G years have elapsed; we
however show them in their present position (1340 of the
era of Alexander) but it must be remembered that their
position increases by a degree every 66 years,l I.e.
approximately a minute a year.
This is the table, and Cod is all-knowing.
1 About 72 - The addition of 12030' to the above figure
gives approximately the present longitude of these
stars.

460
Stars from certain signs which harm the eyes
We now proceed to consider the aonditions in the
signs from their relation to the horizon, which we have
already referred to as the 'housesT and their adjustment
341, and we adopt the sane order as that used in discussing
the indications of the signs and the planets, to
facilitate the recognition and comprehension of the
data ascertained.
L MS. has here xtndr al-iakkah (llpheccalComna borealis),
present longitude 11010' Scorpius.
One would assume.Shaukah to be a spike of Capricorn,
and not the tail, but the longitude corresponds to beneb
al- jadi.
274

461
461. m1Blgt allati takhusp licl-mawelid.
SPECIAL IIJDICATIONS OF THE HOUSES PECULIAR TO NA!MVITIFS
Soul, life ,length of life, education, native land.
Suckling,nutriment,disaster to eyes if overtaken
by ill-luck,livelihood,household requisites,
assistants profession or children.
Brothers ,sisters,relations,relations in-law,
jewels ,friends,migration, short journeys,
intelligence, knowledge, expertness in religious law.
parents,pandparents,descendants,real estate,
fields, houses ,wa ter-supply ,howledge of
genealogy,what sucoeeds death and what happens to
the dead.
Children,friends, clothe8,pleasure, joyY1ittle
acquisition of pr~pertg~accumulated wealth of
father,what was said of him at his burialservioe
.
Sickness,defeots of body,ovemrk,if unfortunate
accident to legs,loss or property,disease of
internal organs, slaves ,maids, cattle .
Women, conoubines, giving in marriage ,marriage-
feasts, contentions, partnership, losses, lawsui ts.
Death and i ts causes,murder, poisoning, evil
effects of drugs on body,inheritance,wife*s
property,expenditure, poverty ,extreme indigenoe,
feigning death.
Travel,religion, piety,fate , seriousness,
attainment of knowledge from the stars and
divination, philosophy, surveying, sharp disoernment
, trustworthiness, interpretation of vi sions
and dreams.
Rule of Sultan, goqernment with council or
nobles ,absolute authority, sucoess in business,
comerce , professions ,well-behaved children,
liberal1 ty.
Rappinesa ,friends ,enemies, oonoern for
next world ,prayer and praise, friendship or
wmen,love ,dress, perfume, ornaments, commeroe,
longevi ty.
Enemies ,misery,anxieties, prison,debt, fines,
bail, fear,adversi ty,di sease, prena tal fanoies
of mother , cattle ,harbours, alaves , aervanta,
annies,exile, tumults.

IMDICATIONS RELATING TO HORhRY QUESTIOPlrS
I
Asking horary questions, important publio
matters.nobilitg,advancement -.
in rank,witchoraft
and spehs.
Examining the querent,lending and borrowing,
counting Priends.arri-l of stranger,enemies or
friendsrmandate 6f amir,winds when they blow.
Secrets and news and comentaries,well-born
ladies,journeys by water.
Old and hidden things, treasures, thieve:
hiding-places ,schools, fortresses, fetters ,~dismissal
from office] ,opening abscessee,lancingA
and oautery, stepfather, prison.
Messent;ers,right guidanoe,bribery,rectitude,
distant places,poor harvests,securing the wealth
of the ancients, feasts, food and drink.
Lost and escaped,some lost trifle which does
not turn up, affairs or women and eunuchs, suspicicn,
hatred, calumny,violence, disaipation,decei t,
terrors, prison,enemy,poverty ,moving from place to
plaoe .
The absent,thief,places where travellers
assernble,treasure,death of contemporaries,forei@
travel, sudden murder [for a taif le] ,denial,
obstinacy, claiming a right, cheapness and dearness.
Buried and hidden treaaure,things ruined or
10s t or old,middens and rubbish-heaps, sickness of
friends, lawsui ts without a oaae, folly ,contention,
pride,dullness of the market, leisure.
Failure, abandoned business, books, information,
~basaadors,mirdoles,r~da, brothers-in-law.
Kings ,notables, judges, the celebrate& in all
olasaea,arnir and his conduot in ofrice,things
newly legitimized ,wine, step-mother.
The treasury of the Sultan,ita ofiiaiala,
trouble in the office, foreignerqs child,
servants child, (read tab&) things whioh are
sound, beautiful, advantageous, the beginnings or
affairs,friendship of the great,bribery,food.
Fugitives, writers, those who neglect devotion,
a preoious gem,prisoners, the matter whioh preoeded
the question, oroperty or oppressors, thieves,
lost property,soorn,envy and fraud.

473. gwEil ukhar mutaralliqah ralal-l-buyEt.
CHARACTERISTICS OF THE HOUSES IN GROUPS. OF TIBEE & SIX
I I1 I11 . IV V VI VII V111 IX
Body l~ody
and lsom say bcdy out Soul: nor Soul:
Soul without soul I some say
because it is body with contains the
at a dark Soul, be- houses of
place until cause it Is death and
it emerges situated travel
into light between
I because it I
& Soul: 1 Body wlth- l Neither body l
light and
I I daskness I I
I right
I -
I left
without
body:
on account
of
rapid
ascension
et ImMerate
l blaok
I slow
green
moderate
I
1
I
white
slow
good defioient
I
IMC
I
aalves nawa = ship
divided underground
by llne night of planet
from allied to rightness
or to and shortness.
C.
I
India I1 221.
ohatra = parasol
above ground
day of planet
allied to lef tness
and length,
I
I

474. Kaif hgl al-bait idha ishtaroka rihi bur 'gn.
When a how- formed of two signs, if these are :bout
equally represented, the lords of
WHBN HOUSE FORMED the signs are also the lorda of
OF TWO SIGNS the house, if both are in aspect;
if only one is in aspect it becoxes
the more important, while if both are inconjunct, that
is superior whiah has the greater number of dignities.
The victory must always be siven to that onf whioh has
the highest number of degrees in the house.
2
475. i!B sahm al-sa'gdah. The Part or Fortune
is a point of the zodiac, the distance of whiah irom
the degree of the asoendant in the
PUT OF BORTUNX direction of the sucoession of signs
is equal to the distanae of the moon
from the sun in the opposite direction. 3 The method or
determining this is to find the place of the sun (Place
l), then that of the moon (Place 2); the ascendant ia
Place 5. Then subtract Place 1 from Place 2 beginning
with the signs. If in Place 1 this is a higher number
add 12 signs to Place 2 and subtract. Next turn to the
degrees and subtract as before, if Impossible, deduot
one sign from Plaoe 2 and add 30° and then subtraot.
Then finished with the degrees, proaeed with the
minutes the result is the distance of the moon from the
sun. Then add Place 3 by signs,degrees and minutes,
and look at the result; if the minutes are more than 59
carry a degree to the degreea,if they are more than 29
1 According to modern astrologists to that sign which
contains the cusp of the house.
2 Cf. ~ouchd-Leolercq p. 299 seq.
3 O r the distance of the sun from the sscendant is
epal to the distance or the moon from the part of
fortune in the same direation. Fig. 341,

carry one to the signs, and if the eigns are more than 11,deduot 18,the result
is the Part of Fortune.
P
(P
3
The Part of ~ortuneG(diurna1) fig. 1 is the dlstance oidfrolu B aooording to
the suooession Of the sign8 measured from the aeoendant in the same direction,
(nooturnal) fig, 2 is the distance or> from0 aooording to suooession and
meamred fiom the asoendant in the same direotion. The Part of Daemon Q
(diurnal) fig. 2 is the distanoe oiO from D aooording to suooession and
measured from the asoendant in the opposite direction; (nocturnal) fig. 1 is
the dis tanoe of from 0 aooording to succession, and measured fiom the
asoendant in the opposite direotion. The two inner lines refer to the Part of
Fortune; the two outer to the Part of Daemon - modified from BL. fig. 35.

Take the rollowing as an example. The ascendant is
8'201 of Virgo, the sun is in 27O44' of Cancer, ahd the
moon in ls025t of Taurus. These are placed in tl3ree
rows as above deeoribed.
~un Hcmn ~ecendant( l)
Place 1 Plaos 2 Place 3
Signs 01 01 05
Degrees E! 7 15 08
Minutes 44 25 20
The number of the signs or the sun being higher than
that of the moon, 12 must be added, making 13, from
which the 3 of the sun must be deducted, leaving 10.
The degrees oi the sun are also hi@Sler than those of
the moon, therefore 1 must be deduoted from the signs,
leaving 9, and 30 added to the degrees, making 45, from
which 27 falls to be subtraoted, leaving 18. Similarly
with the minutes 1 degree must be carried to them,
leaving 17 and 60 added making 85 from which 44 subtracted
leaves 41. The result of the subtraction of the
sun's place from the moonrs is therefore 9s 17' 411, to
which the plaoe of the asoendant being added givea
14s 25' 61'. From the last fibwe 60 must be deduoted
and oarried aa 1 8egree to the degrees, and from the
first 12 must be deduoted leaving 2, so that the result,
the Path of Fortune, ie 2s 260 011, viz. 26O 01* of
Gemini.
This is the method of oalculation adopted by
Ptolemy for the part of fortune which he never altered,
but others proceed in this way for diurnal nativities
while for nooturnal ones they put the moon2 in the
first place, the sun in the second, and the asoendant
in the third, whence neoessarily many disputes.
Aso. 5s 8O 20'
6s 250 45'
3s 27O 441
B 60
2 In nhici c:se tie $ would be in- 20' 39. at the
same distance from the asoendant in the direotion of
succession - and in Fig. 341 in jf! 13' 50*.

476. Fa ha1 ghayr sahm al-sar8dah safim Bkhir.
Ptolemy reoognized only one Part of Fortune, but others
have introduced an excessive number
OTHER LOTS !MUN of methods of casting lots at
PART OF FORTUNE nativities. We reproduce in tables
those whio AbU Marshar has
mentioned. ?
In each case there are three things to be attended
to, Place l/ the beginrling, tmubdd*, Place 2/ the'end,
'muntahcl*, and Place 3/ the casting-off point, 'malqdl ,
whioh are treated as in the preoeding paragraph, the
position in a figure of the heavens of the fortune or
lot in question being thereby determined. Theee three
points are oalled regpeotively, 'manqcg* rmanqii~ minhu*
and vmuzZd ralaihi*. Sometimes the same arrangement ie
used for both diurnal and nooturnal nativities, but
frequently points 1 and 2 are interchanged for nocturnal
ones.
It is imposaible to enumerate the lots which have
been invented for the solution of horary questions,
and for answering enquiries as to prosperous outcome
or auspioious time for action; they increase in number
every day, but the following 97 different lots, 7 of
which belong to the planets, 80 to the houses and 10
to neither are those most commonly in use.
Madkhal Kabir - ft. 293-300 are, occupied with a
detailed description of the various lots and f. 331
seq. with the summary used by 81-BIrEnX.
2 The amount subtracted, that from whlch it is
aubtraoted, the amount added.

Number of brothers
Death of brothers
k sisters
O
)L
loo
or m
Bscendant
samt
change
Fourth House
Parents
Death of Parents
Grandparents
anoestors k
relations
Real estate a/o
Hemes
Real estate a/o
some Persians
Agriculture,
tillage
Issue of affairs
'>

Sixth House
90. Disease, 'def ecta ,
time of' onset
of them a/o
Hermes
31. Disease a/c to
some or the
ancients
52. Captivity
- Four Fortune
k 6
AEIC endant
same
Seventh Eouae
34. Marriageofmen
(Heme s )
35. Marriage a/o
w~irsl
36. Triokery and
deoeption of
men and women
37. Interoour se
38. Marriage or
women (Hemes)
39. Marriage of
women (Valens)
40. Misconduot by
women
41. Trickery % deoeit
or men by
women
42. Intercourse
43. Unchastity of
women
44. Chastity or
women
45. Marriage of men &
women (Hemes)
46. Time of marriage
(Hermes)
47. Fraudulent marriage
& facaclilltatw i t
1 O ~&A~S. Vettius Valens.
I
Sixtegn Fortu
sqe

Sons-in-law k Amendant
Lawsuits
8
zh
change
Death
The Anairetai
(al-quttal)
Year to be feared
at birth for
death, famine
dant
change
Place of murder
and sickness
Danger and
Violence
Journeys
BY water
Timidity and
hiding
Deep reflection
Understanding and
wisd~m
Tradi tions, knowledge
of
af fair8
ICnowleclge whether
true or false
Lord
IX
)1.
D
4
9
0
7
Cusp
IX
IS'-
p
D
0
k
n
n
n
n
W
W
same
change
D
n
n
W
same
Tenth House
Noble births
- Twelve
Fortunes
Kings and Sultans
Administrators,
vazirs, etc.
3
ohange

Sultans victory
oonque s t
Of those who
rise in
station
Celebrated persons
of rank
Armies and
police
Sultan. Those
concerned in
na tivities
Merchants and
their work
Buylng and
selling
Operations and
orders in
medioal
treatment
MO t her s
Bscendant
n
0
W
W
n
W
n
n
:hange
n
same
zhange
same
3 hange
n
n
n
Eleventh Hou
Glory
Friendship and
em1 t y
Known by men and
revered,
constant in
affairs
Success
Worldliness
Hope
Friends
Violence
Abundance in
house
ran Fo:
Q
11
0
zr-
?.
p
.I
Q
unes
Asdant
n
n
n
W
n
n
W
I1
>hange
n
n
n
n
n
same
n
n

Liberty of person
Praise & aocepta
tion
v
0
+ - v
u08"-
dant
ohange
W
W
Twelfth House
Enmity a/c to
some of the
Ancients
Enmity a/o
xemes
Bad luok
*
Altogether 7 B'ortunks
80 to the Houses.
Ten Fortunes not
Haila j
Debilitated
bodl ee
Horsemanship,
bravery
Boldness, violence,
and murder
Triakery and
deoei t
Neoessity and
wish
- Three
k
Lord
XI1
F \ @
Formes
8-
Cusp
XI1
belodg to the Planets
1 1 1
related o Planets or
Degree
d or8
mendant
@
-4
Lord
Aso.
3
3
V R
I1
n
n
n
W
n
same
W
W
and
Touses
same
ohange
n
n
W
same

94. Requirements and
necessities
a/c Egyptians
95. Realization of
needs and
desires
96. Retribution
97. Rectitude
E?-1
" 1
sane
change n
477. Fahal mukhtalif famal hadhihi al-sihsm wa
ha1 yatafaqa ithnBn minha. There are people who adopt
methods differirw from the above under -- --
DIFFEREECES some circumstanc~s; e.g. with regard to
IN PRACTICE the lot of parents when Saturn is under
the rays or the sun, they take from
Jupiter to the sun by night or vioe versa by day, and
cast from the asoendant. Again in the oase of the lot
Em grandparents, if the sun is in Leo, they take from
the beginning or Leo to Saturn by day, and by night
in the opposite direction. And if it is in the domioile
of Saturn then from the Sun to Saturn by day, and vioe
versa by night, in both cases cast from the asoendant
even if Saturn is under the rays or otherwise
afflioted .l Should two lots indicate the same point,
it is regarded as very fortuaate. In some of these

cases the instructions for day and night are the same,
in others different as may be seen from the table, in
the former event there is no advantage to be derived
from a separate calculation.
478. Fahal map hadhihi min sihgm. This natter of
casting lots is a very long one, so that one might
think there is no end to it. .For instance
OTHER LOTS there are those which are cast at the
turn of the year (the entry of the sun
into Aries) on worldly matters and affairs of empire,
and those which are cast at conjunctions and oppositions
of the moon to elicit pmgnostics as to weather, as to
sucoeas of ventures, and other horary questions. We
append in tables the opinions of others on these
matters nhioh we have derived from books on the subject.
479. Fahadhihi siGm tasta f i taG8wT1 sinT
al- *Elan wa '1-qirhnh t.
LOTS WHICH m CAST AT AWIVERSARIES OF THE
WORLD-YEAR , 249, AND AT CONJUKCTIONS
1. The sultan's
lot
2. Byanother
QJaY
4. Battle
MC 0
Deg .
Leo.
Con j .
0
l MC anniv.
~
Degree
conj .
Lord of
V11
(Degree
of 1)escendant
)
same
l l I:?:;l *
5. Second way a/c I 1 .
n
n
n
fur khan 1
--
Y
*
armies
L In B. Fal? cultivation.
n
n
2 90

8. Conquest
9. Triumph
10. Of 1st
oon junc tion
11. Of 2nd
conjunction
I
conj.
ASCen.
conj.
~egrea
conj.
Degree
conj.
The following 1
the four quarters, a
of the moon.
1, Earth
2. Water
3. Air and
wind
4. Fire
5. Clouds
6. Rains
7. Cold
8. Floods
ts are associated
the con junction
r,
l'
Y
0
5
Y
0
7-
r
Lord
of his
domicile
8
3
$
h
4
PL~ has gap here to 489.
291

Lots as to prognostios regarding crops &c.
Wheat
Barley,
meat
Rice, millet
(P. ,+wars)
Maize
Pulse
Lentils and
iron
Beans,
oniona
Sesame,
grapes
sugar

479
Lots cast in connection with horary questions
1. Secrets
2. Urgent wish
3. Time or
attainment
4. Information
true or
not
5. Injury to
business
8. Freedmen and
servants
7. 'Lords and
mas tere
8. Marriage
Q. Time for
aotion
(whlzs)
10. Time ooougied
therein
11. Dismissal or
re s ignati on
12. Time thereof
( WblT S)
1 Lord of
880.
Lord
hour
Ur8
hour
v
Lord
aso.
%
1,
?
0
4
h
Lord
or the
affair ,

13. Life or death of
absent person
14. Lost animal
15. Lawsuit
16. Successful issue
17. Decapitation
18. Torture
3
0
A Y
O
3
R -
$
IJ
2?-
a
72
Ascen.
It
?P
W
Cusp
n,,
CUSP
IX
same
W
U
V*
n
W
480. F- al-saGn wa.1-bahimata'n. On the
practice of sortilege by two arrows and the interpretation
of animal omens.
ARROWS AN11 AN'INLdLS
The book of Hemes known as the 85 Chapters discusses
the indications derived from both. As to omens
from two animals, XEshbrllah mentions that a blaok
animal should be interpreted as Saturn and a yellow one
as the Sun. As to sortilege by two arrows none of the
interpreters has been helpful in furnishing an explanation
with regard to them except MBahttWllah whose
examples are founded on the lives of kings. Other
members of the profession are inclined to adopt long
calculations by many and devious methods neither
restricted nor free from error, Some of them at the
entrance of the Sun into Aries in disoussing the
permanenoe of empire and the probability of rebellion
take the first arrow as equivalent to the distance of
the sun from the middle of Leo, and the second to that
from the moon to the middle of Cancer, both cast from
the asoendant, and the same for day and night, while
others who have studied the subject most earnestly
assert that the first arrow represents Saturn himself
and the seoond Jupiter. What has been written on this
subject alone would make two large books.

481. ~amz al-tasmTm vat1 tashrrq viarl ta-hrTb.
We now p r o ~ ~ with d the l various posittons of
the planets in relation to the sun,
CBZm which are responsible for the most
ORIENTBLITY complete changes which closely
OCCIDENTALITY resemble changes in their indications,
due to the vicissitudes of natural
condi tions. 152.
If a planet should be within less than 16' of conjunction
with the sun or have passed it by less than
the same amount, it is designated as samimv,l The
superior planets, however, are only in* such a posi tiop
In the middle of their direct course, while the inferior
planets are in it in the middle of' their direct and
retrograde courses. In regard to 'tashrIqv orientality,
the inferlor planets in the middle of their retrograde
course resemble the superior in the middle of their
direct course. If the superior planets and the inferior
ones in the middle of the retrograde course exceed the
minutes of ta mTm a112 are said to be *mu$tariqt,
oombust, mti? their distance from the sun is eO;
thereafter they are no longer so styled but are said to
be under the rays, In this condition they remain like
prisoners in confinement until the distance of Venus
and Nercury from the sun amounts to 120, of Saturn and
Jupiter to 15O and of Ears to leO. This point is
described as the beginning of *tashr'Iqv or~entalit~,~
but they are not necessarily visible at this period,
for the time of visibility varies with each country and
climate. But the term tashrIq is properly limited (to
the heliaoal rising) and after this they are designated
'musharriqv , which the Persians call 'kan3r-i riizIv.
Thereafter the higher planeta differ from the lower,for
the former continue tending eastward till they are 30°
samlm, in the middle ot the heart, (Lane) of the sun.
In astrological works, cazimi. The Cent. Dict. suggests
a derivation from qalb and shams, but Kapamfm, as if
the heart, is m9re probable.
2 End of lacuna in PI,.
3 They are now west (right) of the sun, rise before it
in the east, and become morning stars.

from the sun, and after which they are said to be
weakly oriental till a distance of 90' is attained,
and the name tashrfq does not cease to be applied for
at sunrise they are in the eastern quarter, while
whenever the 90° is exceeded -the term orientality
ceases to be applicable. Thereafter the first
stationary point is reached, after which the
retrograde movement sets in; when this is ooncluded
there is again a stationary point before the direct
course is entered. Arrival at opposition to the sun
occurs In the middle of the retrograde path, which
is thus divided into two sections, 1st and 2nd.
The higher planets after their station until
they are distant 90° from the sun are in the east
at sunset, but when less than 90° incline to the
west, and when the distance is 30° this situation
is called the beginning of occidentality (taghrIb),
till Mars is laO, Saturn and Jupiter 150, and thereafter
they are under the rays, until only 6' separate
them, when they are cornbust, until only 16. remain
when they are again in taanIm,
In the Almagest the opposition of the higher
planets to the sun is called the b ginning of the
night ( hpbruxo(), l (atrHf al-lall)i, (kangr-i shah)',
it is a si tuation rhibh is peculiar to the higher
planets, for under it they rise at sunset. The Persiane
however, are in the habit of using the expression
KaGr-1 shab for both higher and lower planets, but
that condition whloh they call the beginning of the
night is really oocidentality, therefore they add
west, so as to distinguish between the two.
3- The MafAtIh al-rulUm defines the expressions KanEr-i
riz and KanSr-l shab Incorrectly as respectively
visible at night and visible in the morning.
2 ~ 6 ~

482. HB1-i suflifn az pas tashrf . We said that
the orientdllty of Venus and Meroury %curs on the
retrograde ~athl and is not
INFERIOR PX&mJ!S oomp'leted till a distance of
dlrTER TASHR~Q 30° from the sun in both cases.
Thereafter they are stationary
and then oomes the direot course to their greatest
(western) elongation, after whioh they again begin to
approaoh the sun. All of these situations are called
oriental, until 120 separate them from the sun, the
beginning of their matutine oocultation in the east.
They are under the rays until 7O from the sun and are
then combust till they reaoh the limit of sadm and
oonjoin with the sun in the middle of their direat
oo~rse.~ Thereafter they pass out from sdm, when
their situation in the west resembles that of the
higher planets in the east to the extent whioh has
been noted of them in regard to combustion and being
under the rays and visibility at evening twilight.
Then they gain their greatest eastern elongation and
stop before they again retrograde, passing through
all the stages the distance8 of whioh we have noticed
till they return to tasdm on the retrograde course.
483. Fahal nfa 11 al-zullrah fI dhalika ran
futktria. -.- T e a m to distinguish between
Venus and ~eroury as regards
HOW VENUS DIFFgRS orientility and ocoidentality,
FROM MFZiCURY HERE as has been done between .-- Mars -- -
on the one hand and Saturn and
JUpiter on the other, (astronomers are agreed that
no suoh distinotion is necessary between these two
planeta) for Venus has a very high latitude, and
sometimes conjuno tion oocurg when it has attained
its highest north lat~tuda,~ it then remina visible,
so that the expressions combust and under the raye
cease to be applioable, although the plane t is in
those positions; similarly at tasmfm when the north
after irterior con junc tion.
Superior con junction.
3 149,6O 22q.

latitude exceeds 7O, it must not be described as
samimah nor muhtariqah but simply as accompanying the
sun, muqarinah:
484. Fa- hK1 al- mar min al-shams. The position
or the moo^ regar8 - to the sun as to tasmnn and
combustion is similar to that of
RE~IVE POSITION the other planets, as l8ng as the
SUN m MOON distance is less than 7 east or
west of' the sun; beyond that it is
under the rays till the distance increases up to 12'
which is approximately new moon; thereafter the various
distances described as phases (254) which produoe
the quarter, half, three quarters and complete illumination
succeed, and are followed at the same distances
on the other side of opposition by similar figures.
485. Famii al- tasmiin 'an al-shams watl-taesur.
Astronomers agree that all three higher planets from
the time of conjunction to
POSITION RIGIFli opposition, and both lower planets
m LEFT OF SUN from con junction on the retrograde
to that on the direct oourse, and
the moon from opposition to conjunction are to the
right (west) of the sun, while the higher planets from
opposition to conjunction, and the lower from conjunotion
on the direct to that on the retrograde oourse, and
the moon from conjunction to opposition are on the left
(east) of the sun.
486. gal tataaharvar tat thTrEit al-kaw8kib
bitaghayyw aQ61hii. It may be asked whether with the
changes in situation of
INFLUENCE OF PIAlCE2.S UNDER the planets described,
CHANGED C ONDITIOI?S their action also
ohanges. If their aotion
did not change, there would be no advantage in paying
attention to theee situations. Astrologers are howrever
agreed that the maximum inf luenoe of the planets is at
tasmzm, and during this the indications are of
happiness and good news; they are also agreed that euoh
influence is at its minimum in combustion, until it
arrives at a point where unluokiness changes to
ruination. However, dietindtions are made in accordance
with the concord and discord of the nature of the
- .-
**.If yjl/ cl&\*,&~\,
P u t
&>L AA- , w3 ,
F~~~dl

planets, as e.g. heat may become increased and
moisture diminished, consequently the injurious
influenoe of combustion is less with some planets and
greater with others. After oonjunction, the planet,
when under the rays, is like a sick person advancing
to oonvalescence, and when oriental attains full
strength and is in a position to bestow all It
benefi ts. The Persians call this i ts razirate ,l(and
any one who wishes to do a good act, does it at this
time.)P They extend this name to the whole of the
position right of the sun, until at a distance of 30'
from the sun the benefioial action begins to stop, and
the indioations of happiness to beoome moderate, till
at 60° the aotion changes, this point is called the
minor unlucky point, 75O the middle unlucky point, and
oombustion (on the retrograde)p the major unlucky
point. The planet at the first resting place appears
strangled, hopeless, in the first seotion of the
retrograde course sluggish and depressed, while in the
seoond section hope of sucoour is given, whioh is
confirmed in the seaond station, delivery being near
at hand, while the direot aourse indicates, as its
name suggests, prosper1 ty and power. Similarly the
nature of the planets alters from their rising to
their setting in the excentric orbit, being dry during
the former and moist in the latter, without however
the nature of their aotion being affected. Also from
rising to setting in the orbit of the epicycle, for
from the oriental phase to the first stop they are
moist, then to the middle of the retro~rade course
warm, then to the second stop, dry, and baok to
orientality cold. The reason of the change in the orbit
of the epicyole is that the aotion of the latter is
bound up with the sun, and it is said that nearness
to the sun means dryness and distance moisture.
Combustion also changes the nature and other
conditions like rising and setting whioh bring about
1 aastfirlyyah. (dastm vazrr bad)P position of
authori ty.
299

action in the epicycle different from that in the
excentric orbit. The circumstance that the planet is
posited in moist plaoes of the signs or terms gives
friendliness; again, in the matter of maleness and
femaleness they change, becoming male when oriental
and female when accidental.
Again among the signs the planets also are
ZIffeoted by the indications of the whole sign, just
as the soul depends on the condition of the body, and
so a male planet becomes effeminate when in a female
sign, and is even affeoted by the male and female
degrees of a sign, so that there are mixed indications
of eunuohism and hermaphroditism, effeminate men and
masculine women.
So also in quadrants of the sphere in relation to
the horizon the planets may ohange in the matter of
sex, and also at the cardines. The effect or situation
at the oar8ines however Is simply to inorease the
influenoe of the planet, so that good fortune at a
cardinal point is increased, espeoially if the sign
be a fixed one. Calamity and adversity are also
intensifled in a fixed sign espeoially if cadent to
the oardines, while they are weakened in a tropical
sign eepeciallv if not oadent.
Some people assert that the west is favouraB1e to
the lower planets, and the east to the higher, but
you must understand that this is derived only from
the analogy of maleness and femaleness, the east being
male and the weat female, while the oriterion of
the differenoe between them is distanoe from the sun.
It has been shown that the orientality of the
superior planets occurs on the direot course after
oombustion, on this account they are then more
poweriul beoause as it were, they are esoaping from
distress and oalamity; oomparable to this is the
vespertine visibility of the inferior planets, which
also ooours after combustion on the dlreot course.

The oocidentality of the superior planets occurs
likewise on their direct course as they prooeed to
oombustion, so to this is comparable the matutine
occultation of the inferior planets also on their
direot coursa. The orientality of the inferior
planets resembles that of the superior ones in as
much as in both cases it takes place after combustion:
if the inferior planets were at that time direct
there would be entire agreement or all in the matter
of orientality. But the occidentality of the
inferior planets, when their movemnt becomes slow,
is a muoh more injurious and weakening influenoe than
the occidentality of' the superior ones because the
former have now turned their faoes both towards the
retrograde oourse and oombustion; so the superior
planets in their oooidental phase are safer than the
inferior, beoause it ia only sucoeeded by their
occultation.
Be have extractsd from ~arqiib b. rehgq al-~indl'
all that a beginner requires to know with regard to
the different indioations of the planets a5 to their
pcnreriul iniluenae in orientallty and their weakness
in oocidentality, although these ditlterenaes do not
amount to being exaot oppoeites.
. -
@ Y 3 . fr.,. L. "'LUJ~,
blj&kJC,*iL A 9 4,- n
'1 The *Philosopher of the Arabs* - 9th Century. For his
philosophioal work of. Hiigel, 81-KindI, Leipzig 1857 :
for his soientifio work Wiedemann, XXXVI, XLII, MN:
for his astrologioal writings Loth, Al-gindT ale
Astrolog, Leipzig 1875. V. note to 250.
301

487. DalBlathE wa hiya
muaharriqah.
488. DallilathB: wa hiya
mugharribah.
INDICATIONS WHILE ORImAL INDICATIONS QlHILE OCCIDEWlkL
and to Venus.
i l
to things searet and oonoealed,and
espeoially it
points to the ill condition
of creaturea resembling the
light at that stage.

489. A@ al-ittisal wa'l-insirBt. The terms
application and separation (ittiFand ingir8f) refer
to the formation of aspects between
APPLICATION the planets and withdrawal f ronz such
BND SEPARkTION positions. These are dependent on the
signs, and the same names are
employed whioh we have already explained in regard to
the aspects of the signs, 37.3 viz. conjunotion, two
sextile, two square, two trine md opposltlon. When tvicr
constellations are in aspect, planets within them are
also in aspect, when the former are not in aspect, the
planets in them are inoonjunct and concealed from each
other. When two planets are in the same sign or in two
signs in aspect to each other and at the same degree,
they are said to be conjoint in reality, and the one
whoss orbit is lower is said to apply itself (ittagala)
to that whose orbit is higher, because the lower one
is swifter and constantly overtakes the slower one,
Consequently the moon applies itself to all the planets
and is applied to by none; Meroury applies itself to
all except the moon, Venus to all except the moon and
Mercury, the sun Nars and Jupiter to those above them,
Saturn alone applies itself to no planet because all
are below it. When of two planets in aspeot, the
degrees of the inferior one are less than those of the
superior planet, the inferior one is said to be
prooeeding to conjunction and when greater to be
separating fiom the superior. At the time of aonjunatlm
the lower plan t is said to be conferring oounsel
(dgiir tadbir) f on the higher and the latter receiving
counsel from it (madfGrilaihl) . This is aon junation in
long1 tude .
490. Pahal limabdh* al-ittisil hadd. Aa applioeticm
18 like meeting, and separation lzparting, so an
inferior planet when it enters a sign
BEGINNING OF
APPLICATION
where it comes into aspeot with a
superior one, begins to show its
movement towards conjunction, whioh
inareases till conjunction ia completed, unless
some thing else intervenes such as i ts being outstripped
by another planet, or deserted by the superior planet
I dafaa 1s here used in its sense of giving, not that
of repelling.

leaving the sign in which it was before completion, or
by i tself becoming retrograde and thus rrustra ting
completion. But there is muoh difference of opinion as
to the amount and limits of completion, Some people say
that it begins at 5 degrees and continues till the
degrees are equal, the 5 'dead* degrees,49l,being made
the basis or this interpretation. Others say 6 degrees,
beoause it is the firth or a sign, and the average of
the planets* terms ,4555. Others again say 12 degrees,
the distanoe at whloh the light or the moon is obsoured
by the sun, and still others, 15 degrees, the orb or
the sun, while others say the average of the respeotive
orbs of the planets in question (436). Again many
assert that only oomplete oonjunotion need be attended
to.
Separation begins when the degree or the inferior
beoomes even a minute higher than that of the superior,
but, on acoount or the traoe or influence which remaina,
the completion or separation should be determined by
the amount assigned to the beginning of application.
491. Famg al-dara jEt al-maygitah. The 'dead
degrees r e ? ? e g o n d the
asoendant in the direotlon
THE *DEAD* DEGREES opposite to the sucoession or the
signs. Ptolemy does not reokon
these as bebonglng to the twelve houses,. and does not
regard them as cadent to the ascendant, but if there is
a planet in them he associates it with the ascendant.
492. Faha1 lilit tiszl nauT gnuyr al- tiilf . There
are two other kinds of 6onjunotion besidek=t in
longitude, viz, in latitude and in
COBJUI'?CTION ONLY nature. The former ocours when the
IN LOWITUDB? latitude of two ~lanets is the sama
either north or south, and the
degrees or latitude are equal. Then they are said to be
conjoint by latitude. If the degrees are not equal one
muet look whether that of lower latitude is rising in
the quarter in question, and whether that of higher
latitude is setting in the same quarter, if so, they
are said to be moving towards conjunction. If the

latitude of the setting planet is lower than that of
the rising one, they are separating. If both are rising
one must see whether the extreme latitude of the lower
is not less than that of the higher one, if so, they
are moving towards conjunction; if less, that cannot
occur. If both are setting, and that whioh has the
higher latitude is quioker id setting, they are said to
be proceeding to oonjunotion, whether that is completed
or not, because that of lower latitude ma move to the
other side (or the other may overtake it)$.
The superiority of conjunotion by latitude to that
by longitude is due to the fact that it does not occur
exaept when the planets are in aspect.
There is another advantage viz. that suppose an
inferior planet applies itself to a superior in
longitude and then to a third in latitude which is
inoonjunct to the superior one, then the latter does
not oontinue in conjunction by longitude at the same
time.
Conjunction by nature occura when two planeta are
in equipollent signs, 377, and takes place when they
arrive at corres onding degrees in these.
g
E.&
Jupiter is in 20 of Aries and the moon in 5O of
Pisoes, when the latter has attained to 100 of Pisoea,
whioh is the corresponding degree to 20° or Bries, the
oonjunction by nature is oomple ted. The oosdi tion
beoomes fortified if' the planets are in aspect during
this oonjunction in nature. Similarly If two planets
are in corresponding degrees in signs oorreepondent
bg direction, thg oonjunotion is aomplete; e.g.
Jupiter is at 20 of Aries and the moon at 5O of
Virgo, then oomplete oonjunction will ooour at 10' of
Virgo. Aspeot here also improves the oondition.

493. ?!G al-mushahadah wa'l-muziivamah. The exgressions
testimony and dignity (shahgdah va rnuz~~amah)~ are
synonymous terms and are applicable to e
TESTIEONY planet in two different ways. One con-
BfTD DIGNITY cerns the fortunate position which it
may occupy, nasfb, bag#: (bahrap) if e.g.
it should be lord of the hou&,440, in which it is
situated, or be in its exaltation,443, or in any otaer
position congenial to it, it may have one or more of
these dignities. If however it is not in a favourable
situation it is said to be peregrine (gharfb), while if
either in its detriment,442, or its fall, 443, calamity
is added to the alien situation.
The other kind results f'rom something outside the
situation of the planet,and is of three varieties. lst,
when it is in a situation favourable to another planet
and on this account has the advantages of that other attributed
to itswhether that be lordship or a house or
exaltation; 2nd, depending on the disposition or essential
nature of the planet,as e.g. the testimony of Mars
is connected with war and lawsuits,of Jupiter with
riches and estates,or Venus with amusement and marriaas: -,
Srd,dependent on time,such as day for the sun and
night for the moon,or the lordship of the day or hour
or the like.
494. Ha1 1ilshahadRt tartfb. The dignities have a
certain order of precedence, Xost important ia the
lordship of the house, next,
ORDER OF PRECEDENCE exaltation, then, tern, then
OF DIGNITIES triplicity, lastly, face; and
ao, a certain scale of numbera
1 Verbal noun of zari?una If1 to beoome chief a c Lane =
muzQamah the replacing the 2 (as in 502 AI35 but
MuzEl 'am a dignified planet and muzarallai yyah dignity in
the abstraot also ooour. D.S.T. p. 618 muzllramah is the
claim of' a planet for dominion (zafkh) In a sign in
which it has a fortunate poaition (ghat) for paw) and
such a planet 18 oalled the muzaram of that slgn or
sMhid,witnees. YRrU p. 289 %uzStamah i.e. ham suoh as
lordship of house,exaltation or the liken. ~6zj.1 593
gives a faulty definition of muzram with a partial quotation
f'rom Slane Prol. I1 219 n. 1 as a promittor (Wch
need not be a dignified planet or a planet at all) and
as occupying the second place in the zodiac in the dlrection
of the Succession of Signs - a definition of
promittor in conn ction with the operation of directian
f
V. 521: A O and ~ AB have murlgbslla (alienated) by mistake.

has been assigned to them,viz. 5 to the house,l 4 to
exaltation, 3 to term, 2 to triplicity and 1 to face.
The dignitlea of the various planets may therefore be
added up and oompared with eaoh other, so as to see
which is pre-eminent. It is related that an authority
on this subjeot assigns 30 to the lordship of the ascendant,20
to exaltation,lO to lordship of face,5 to
that of term, 3 1/2 to that of triplicity, 4 1/2 to
that of the hour, and finally to the sun or moon,whichever
is lord of time,as muoh as to the lordship of the
asoendant. The figures are then added and oompared.
This is the praotioe of the detrologere of Babylon and
Persia, who regard the lordship of the face as very
important. But among the Astrologers of the present day,
the triplioity is regarded as having precedence over
term and faoe,and indeed the latter is often oonsidered
of no acoount. Further in certain circumstanoes changes
may take place in this order, e.g. the lord of exaltation
may take preoedenoe over the lord of the house in
mattera of empire and government in high places. It is
neoessary to bow that these dignities are strengthened
by aspeot, or by other oonditions whioh replace aspect,
beoause if the numbers of two planete add up equal, one
of rhioh ie in aapot and the othbr inconjunot, the
former is preferred even if its favourable poeitione ead
testimonies amount to less than those of the latter.
495. lbB al-mubtazz. The word 'mubtaez* means a
2 riyerr al-bait, a standard allowance to the house.
2 One of the meanings of bazza is to gain the mastery,
&ane. The derivatives in -afh'Irn are not reoorded in
the ordinary diotionarie8,but the MafiitIh al-rulIZm p.229
haa al-ibtizhz,the posseasion by a planet of many dignities
in a sign, the planet itself is oalled rnubtazz
%laihi. The TaihXm has ibtizazi hralaihl, mastmy
o n @ . The word has undergomy oonaia%rable change
in the Medieval Astrologies. Aba Marahar AE al-mubterr;,
Ha11,22 seq. al-mutez,Aloabitius p. 81. al-mutem.
Junc tinus I, 1307. Al-mutaz, id eet planeta qui habuerit
dignitatrrm in ascendepta gradu. 533.
id... 141, U-muten,hoc est vinoen6,hctbens plures
dignitatea. Wilson, Almuten, The etrongest planet in a
figure in sasential or accidental dignities. The change
from z to m or n is prohably due to the circumgtsnce
that 231% frequently used as a oontraction dr substitute
for m and n. Cent. Diot. and X,E.D. Blmuten for 0. FT,
al-mutaz = al-rnurtaz as if from azza VIII - ingenious
but not in aocordanoe with the history of the word.
S07

-
viotorious planet and victd may be arrived at in two
ways; l/ mutlaq absolute
TRE RULING PLANET (essential),dependent on dignities
"a--" due to position in the orbit,or in
relation to other planets or to
the horizon; 2/ muqayyad limited (accidental),when
these dignities are referred to one of the charaoteristic
properties of the trelve houses. 523.
496. 1.18 al-ha is wa ma al-@a. The terms l~ayyizd
and *halb*me'lged in meaning,and they share one
oondition viz. that when a diurnal
AND =B planet, Z86, is above ground by, day end
beneath it at night,and when a nocturnal
planet is above ground at night and beneath it by
day,it is said to be in its Qalb,and a planet is
described as in or not in its halb. When in addition to
this a planet is male, 385, and in a male sign,348, or
female and in a female sign, the condition PS called
hayyiz,and a planet is said to be in or not in its
payyiz. Moreover it is obvious that bayylz is more oomprehensive
than palb,beoause every Qayyiz is a Palb but
not every palb a haygiz.
AbG Marshar in this matter has increased the number
of male and female degrees. It should be known that
Mars in this matter of Qayyiz is different from the
other planets,beoause it is both male and nocturnal; if
it is above the earth by night and below it by day and
in a inale sign,it is then in its payyiz.3
497. b~a' al-mun6karah. mn8kara (oontention) is
nearly the reverse of yyiz and occurs when a diurnal
planet IPin the domicile 440 of a noc-
CO-ON turnal one, and the latter is in the
domicile of a diurnal planet; or when a
nooturnal planet is in the domicile of a diurnal one,
and the latter is in the domicile of a nocturnal planet?
The Arabic 'Qayyizt 'natural place * is the translation
of the Greek ablps~t~, preferred position. Cf. BL. p.
103 n. 2 and p. 39.
2 The initial verses of r811 b. dbi al-~i jEl*s Astrologioal
Brjuzah are devoted to al-mubtazz.
3 Hayyiz translates the Greek & r p e ~ r and ~ is translated
'dhtoria or ductoria sire securitas* 3onatus p. 135.
haim for haiz, Aloab. l7r, aym. Bona tus p. 671. See note
to 495.
4 E.g.\ inT and d in t or % in and +, in .

498. M; farah al-kawkab. The planets are said to
be joyful, powerhi, happy and in good spiri ts when they
are in oongenial sections (puptiz)
JOY OF THE PLANET
of the signs 449-453,in their Qalb
or payyiz;the quarters friendly to
them N. S. E. or W. 389,and also when far from the sun
those which were previously in distress, like the
superior planets when oriental and the inferior when
ocoidental in their direct course. They are also in
their joys in those preferred houses whioh we discussed
(469) - this is the best known of all - and finally
they are joyous in those quadrants depending on the
horizon; the superior in the inoreasing quadrants the
inferior In the deoreasing ones (203).
499. BQ al-iqbll wa*l idbSr. Prosperity (iqbal) is
assooiated with the oardines,as theee ingicate a happy
PROSPERITY
AND ADVZBSITY
mean; adversity (idbib) with the
cadent houe S ,whi oh point to destruction
and exoese. Being in those houses
whioh are suooedent to the angles is
beyond the half-way line to prosperi ty,for they are the
paths leading there from adversity. But this prosperity
and adversity are not all alike, just as the oardines
are not alike but are higher and lower in glory and
dignity. And indeed the cadent houses are not alike in
their destruotive influences,beoauae although the 3rd
and 9th houses are cadent,the 6th and 12th are not only
oadent but are also inconjunat to the horoscope.
500. M; al-hi&. A planet is said to be besiege&
(gigHr) whm6=%a between two others,as e.g. when a
planet in sign 1 is surrounded by others in
BESIEGED signs 2 and 12. It also occurs when three
planets are in one sign,the middle one
whose degree is less than the one and higher than the
other is said to be oorporally (bi'l-jirm) besieged.
Again a planet is desoribed as besieged by the rays,
when in front of It is another in sextile or quartile
and another behind it in like aspeot. When besieged by
two infortunes 3822 the influences are extremely bad,
while if between two for tunes, they are extremely uood .
1 Wiedemann LXIV, 208 has noted the astrological meaning
of these words usually associated with the
trepida tion theory 196.
2 In the l:ai8tSh alPlUm PisEr is restrioted to this
oondition. (~i miyih ishan dhstrst yfi muz8pam-i iS
b8shadPmin mugfxdaqahan min muzapemah m) part note 310.
30 9

501. ME al-tuhmah. A planet on which a number of
unfavourable conditions is heaped,and in evil case on
account or being ombust or retrograde, or
SUSPICION in its detrinent or fall or in a oadent
house,or inoonjunct,or antagonized by infortunes,or
whose aspeots are inimical is said to be
suspect (muttahlm) in its significanoe. (If it shows
any promise, it is unable to carry it 0ut.P)
502. MB al-inr& waql-muklIfSt. If a planet is in
its fall or in a pit,459,or In a sign in which it haa
no proper section,it is ae it were con-
BENEFACTION
AND REQDITAL
fined in a tight place or cave. If now
one of the planets friendly,447, to it
or its sponsor appliesl itself to it,
and gives a helping hand to deliver it frm its
calamitous situation, i t is desoribed as conferring a
favour on it,and is called a benefaotor (munqm).Again
if the benefaotor arrives at a sMlar disadvantageous
situation,and is applied to by the first planet, this is
oalled requital (mulcCfEt).
503. h16 dhull-yamInain wa dhuql-yasErain. When a
planet ia In the cardo of mid-heaven and ite sextile
and quartile rays fall together above
TWO RIGET AND earth,it is said to have %WO right
TlRO LEPT HANDS hands,if these fall below earth two
left hands. The indications of the
former are sucoess and victory.
504. ME IrhaltI'al-sair. If while within a sign a
planet does not enter into conjunction with another,
although in aspeot to other planets,
VOID OF COURSE it is said to be void or oourse
(khBIIqs-saif),and is regarded as
having separated from conjunotion whether In that sign
or not. (This name is given to it beoause the field is
empty and it moves without any companion.P)
505. wahshf al-sair. When a planet is in a sign
and no 0th-inet has been in aspect with it from the
time of Its entry to that of its exit. it is
FERAL said to be feral- in its course (wahshf rs-sair).
This is practically impossible wit$ the
superior planets and the sun, and can rarely occur, but
with the moon it is necessarily the case and frequently
ocours. If the moon with its rapid motion did not exist,
mln mupgdaqiyyah au muz8*amiyyah.

this might very well happen to the inferior planets ,one
of them moving rapidly the other slowly. Some people say
that when the moon is feral, this is a substitute for
oonjuno tion with the planets in whose terms it happens
to be within the sign,but this opinion is trivial
(muhalhal) and quite unsupported.
506. BIUS dhE atimm kaun al-ittlg8il. That a
*familiari%y*l oi tte various forms Piszssed should be
completed between the inferior planet
C0MPI;BTION OF oonferring counsel (al-dlfir) and the
CONJUNCTION superior receiving it (al-madifi
*ilaihi) 489, there must neither be
return (read) nor evasion (faut) nor intervention
(i rtirEd) nor refranation ( IntikZth) nor abscission or
light (iattal-nttr) nor prevention (manr). Eaoh of these
will be distinguished and interpreted.
1. Xeturn. This happens to a superior planet when
re tropde or under the rays, for from weakness it is
unable to hold what is offered to it,therefore returns
and daes not accept it. If the situation is such that
t'nezelreception between them,or if the inferior planet
is at an angle or both or them are at angles,or succedent
houses, the end of such return is satisfaotory. It
however the inferior planet is in the weak situation
described,and the superior one at an angle or in a
succedent house,the result is destructive even if at
first hope was inclicated. If both are in a weak situation
from the beginning to the end there is nothing but
destruction and ruin.
2. Evasion. This occurs when an inferior planet is
about to oonjoin with a superior one;beiore tbb teloesplm
the latter moves out of the sign,and the inferior planet
applies itself to another planet either in the same or
another sign, the first aspect never having been
completed.
3. Intervention. This oocurs when an inferior
planet tends to become conjunct wlth a superior one,in
the latter part or whose sign there is posited a thira
planet lower than the superior and higher than the
inferior planet. Before the inferior planet oomple tes
An astrological expression for relation of planets
by aspeot, con junction, equality or deolina tion
(antiscions) $0.

conjunction, the third intermediate planet retrogrades
towards the superior planet and passes it by, till the
inferior inevitably conjoins with it and not with the
superior one.
4. Abscission of light. If it should happen that
the intemdiate planet is not in the same sign as the
superior one, but in the next and retrogrades into it,
this intervention is one of two methods of cutting off
the light. The second method is when an inferior planet
tends to conjoin with a higher one and a third still
higher is situated towards the latter part of the sign,
then before the inferior planet can conjoin with the
intermediate one, the latter moves. to the higher one
and passes or aonjoins with it. The inferior planet
does not conjoin with the intermeaiate one but with the
superior later.
5. Refranation. If an inferior planet tends to
conjunction with a superior one but before completion
becomes retrograde the familiarity is said to be
frustrated by refranation.
6. Prevention. When there is a third planet in a
sign be taeen the inferior and superior ones, i t prevents
the con junction of the former with the latter until it
itself has entered into conjunction. 7ib.en two planets
tend to form a familiarity with a third at the same
tirne,the one by means of oorporal conjunction, the
other by aspect, the former renders the latter vain if
their degrees are equal; but when their degrees are
different, and the one casting the aspect is nearer to
completion than the one tending to conjunction, the
former is preferred. (When however two planets apply
themselves by aspect to a third at the sane time, that
is preferable, whose reception occurs fir~t.~) Certain
aspects must have an advantage over others, just as
corporal conjunction has over aspect,so that the more
powerful aspect should interfere with the weaker, but
astrologers have not pronounced on this matter.
507. M"a al- ab-Cl. Reoeption. When an inferior
planet arrEdTiZ of the dignitis. groper to a
superior one, and makes known to it the
RIZOEPTION
relation thus establiehed, there is an
exohange of compliments such as 'your
servantt or *neighbour*. If firther the superior
planet happens to be in a situation p'roper to the
inferior one, mutual reception takes place, and this 18
iortified, the richer the situation is in dignities,

eepeoially when the aepeots indioate no enmity nor
malevolence. When reception does not take place the
result is negative.
508. &B al-d8f 1'. We have already stated 489-506
that al-d8fir is the applioation of one planet to
another and is described-as bill-
!PHE DONOR
tadbir. The inferior planet making
application is not specif ied as dsfir
unless it is in a dignified situation proper to it
without regard to the situation of the superior, the
madfufilaihi, this oonjunotion is called dafv alqiiumh,
and if in one proper to the superior planet,
dafr al-;abIrah,which is the same as qabill described
above,or else the inferior planet is in a plaoe proper
to itself which also happens to be congenial to the
superior planet; this is called daf * al- tabrratain,
because the natural properties of both ar8 united. The
same expression is used when one (an inferiorp) planet
in Its hayyiz conjoin8 with another (a superior onep)
in its bayyiz, the planets being both either diurnal
or nocturnal, for the hayyiz requires two conditions
to render it complete,B96.
509. al-murEdafah. When a retrograde inferior
planet follows and overtakes a retrograde auperior one,
the situation is called fmurSdafah*. Here
l?OLLOWER
there is no return on account of the similarity
of their situations but if there is
reception the indication is for the successful termination
of busineae which lnas threatened with ruin, However
this conjunotion, although there is no refusal, is
not equal to one in the direct oourse but is far
inferior in signifioanoe.
510. Ha1 Em ma Zim al-ittisgl wafl-na ar shai*.
There are othef :ondlt?ons which are eiiicacfr
besides aspeot and conjunction. Then
SUBSTITUTES FOR an inferior planet and an intermed-
COBJUPlC'1?ON AND iate one both apply themselves to a
ASPXCT superior planet, the latter is called
a cdhctor jam* l, because it assemble6
the light or the o thers. If these are in aspeot to each
other, this is jua t as good as conjunction with the
colleotor; if they are not In aspect, that oolle~tlOn
b.
rye
r
U') -
9,\
' Q!I&J
:*..;'ie 4
F.+
L
W h
I ~ \ ~ \ ~ ~ , L.',J- . J [ U
+q.c*+J , ,. . 8 + *\ ld*
*9u/
L5.g,l&-,&:l!
a ' . p Y* t-? 2 .- *, &>*
,
c >>JK&++U~~+
'4 b
/, •
-F-* 4 .t
1 "U , L*
> G.
J~L&AS I> -193-31 . r JGY~

of their light by another planet is effective in place
of conjunotion although they are inoonjunot.
If an inferior planet separates from an intermediate
one which is inconjunct to a superior planet,
and thereafter conjoins with the superior one the light
of the intermediate planet is transferred to the latter.
This is called 'naql' or translation and occurs between
two planets which are (inconjunct or between two which
are*) in aspect but far from conjunction. This
condition is effective in lieu of conjunction.
There is another form of translation, when the
inferior planet con joins with the intermediate one, and
the latter has already been in conjunction with the
superior planet; it is just the same as if the inferior
had applied itself to the superior. This occurs when
the inferior planet ie inoonjunct to the superior one
beoauae, when in aspeot, it is swift in arriving at the
conjunction with the superior one.
In the books, one always finds the naql of hqars
by the sun to Saturn described as the greater naql and
that of the moon by the sun to Saturn as the lesser
naql. If two planets are inconjunct to a third or to a
certain place in the zodiac, and then both conjoin with
one which is in aspeot to both and also to that third
or that place, the result is like mirrors refleoting
from house to house. This has also been called (radd?
but in view of what we have said before about radd,the
use of that word is ambiguous. There is also another
aspeot of real translation which is not much enlarged
upon,except in relation to separation; they say that
when an inferior planet withdraws from con junction with
a superior one and conjoins with another then naql
ooour6,light being transferred A.om the one to the
other and as this translation is an effective substitute
for oonjunction,it follows that it should not be
void of the effect of separation. However some other
word than (radd* should be used for this condition perhaps
sarf or %ks (conversion or inversion) to remove
the Gbigui ty,

511. M3 fat? al-b6b. '{hen two planets whose mtm
are oppose~jdin,s is called opening the doors.
So the conjunction of the sun or
OPENING THE DOORS moon with Saturn indicates quiet
rain,fYne drizzle or snow-storms,
that of Venus and Kars torrential rain, hail, thunder
ancl lightning, and that of Iiercury and Jupiter the
opening of the doors of the winds.2
512. Kaif yakUn quwwah al-kawakib wa duTfhE. In
dealing previously with the relations of the planets to
the sun, to each other, to their
STRENGTH BND IEaKIESS own orbits,to the zodiac,and
OF TEE PLANETS to the horizon,we have discussed
as far as possible the
good and evil. effects of each,as well as the summe&
effects of more than one. Each planet has a most
favourable situation,and when some advantage is lost,
its power is diminished to a like extent. The converse
is true with regard to unfavourable situations.
A planet is at the height of Its power when the
following conditions are present. MO tion direct,rapid
and increasing, far from the sunt s rays, oriental if
superior,occidental if inferior,in aspect to both sun
and moon,and these in a fortunate state, besieged by
fortunes or aspecting them, relieved of infortunes, associated
with fixed stars of the same charaoter, rising
in l ts own orbi t,passing above the Infortunes acd below
the fortunes,north latitude increasing, happening to be
in domiciles of the fortunes, or their huzb or in a
place resembling its own nature, or in ho;s&s most
aongenial to it, in Its own Qayyiz, at an angle or
The context shows that it is not opposition in the
Zodiac (as Dozy incorrectly quotes from MuQIt) but opposition
of natures,447,or of domiciles which is responsible
for the atmospherio phenomena. PI, hag QElhSi
ishgn; PP kh6nihGi ishln; the def in1 tig in Mupi:,
buylithw. The figure in 440 shows that the domlC1leS of
the pairs in question are opposite.
2 If you see the moon separate from Venus and apply
itself to Nars or V.V. this is also opening of the
doors,Albohazen Haly p. 396.
# I # U *'
&Q\&,, 'p L$i\*&,,&b&b!$
9
9 Y,
*'#
P, '3
J,J~~\,~~~>
S 0 9 "A- * ,.),
U *\&I,\ ALL&+&&\, $; 14!9\ 6 U,&
0 % r< t

sucoedent thereto,in a quadrant of the same nature, and
increasing,elevated high above the malefics and
conquering.
But when slow, [retrograde,under the rays oocidental
if superior,and if inferlor moving slowlyli westward
towards retrograde,inconjunct to sun and moon, or
in an unfriendly aspect to them, wi
thout reception, the
infortunes in an inimioal aapeot,or besieged by them,
associated with fixed stars of a contrary nature,
setting in own orbit, so that the malefics pass. above
and the benef ioa below,decreaaing south latitude, in
unluoky houses, in parts of signs foreign to them, in
detriment or fall, in a contrary payyiz, distant from
the angles or succedent houses, in a quadrant of
different nature, at the nadir or their joys, and conquered
by the malefics high above them; this is the
acme or weakness. But in all conditions there is
always an admixture of good and bad, often difficult
to interpret, and requiring all the resources of the
art as well as experience and industry.
513. Fahal tanfa511 al-nayyiran fi dhalika *aid
al-kawlikib. In regard to the foregoing there is oonsiderable
differenoe be-
HOW SUN AND MOUN tween the sun and moon on
DIFFER FROM !WE PLANETS
IN THIS
the one hand and the other
planets on the other. When
both of the luminaries are
in aapeot to eaoh other, ant to the benef ics, and are
in their own sections of the signs or those or the
benefits, both of them are strong, But if they are in
situations unsuitable to them, and the malefics, full
of enmity are above them, and the benefice below, or
are eclipsed, or near the dragon's head or tail,
especially the latter by less than 12O, both of them
are weak. The moon is especially so when near (mup81q)
or in conjunction, or on the wane, or under the
1 line dropped.
316

earth,or in the cm'oust way, 514, ail of ahich increese
its weakness.
Many people include among tce inauspicious
situations for the mbon the being in the last ?art of a
sign, and in the 12th~ of both mlefics, settin< in the
south, and being in the ninth house fron: the ascendant,
all of which are not exclusively a~plicable to the
moon,especially the last part of the signs, where sll
the terms belong to the malefics,45J, a situation bad
for all the planets, as are the 12th~ referred to.
There is also to be considered the quarter of tte
heaven, and the faot that the ninth house from the
ascendant' is the nadir of the joy of the moon,469, and
this is peculiar to it.
514 Mii al-tari ah al-muhtari ah. The combust way
is the l ~ s ~ . & h ~ ~ ~ . & of sSoorpius.
t
These two signs are not congenial to
THE COFIBUST WAY the sun and moon on acoount of the
obsourity and ill-luck connected wim
them, and beoause each of them is the fall of one of
the luminaries, 443. They also contain the two malefics,
the one by exaltation (Libra, Saturn), the other by
hoilse (scorpius , tlars) . The peculiarity however which
has given the name muhtariq is that the exaltation of
Saturn is near, the fkll of the sun being on the one
hand and that of the moon on the other, while the
adjacent parts of both signs are oooupied by terms of
I,fars. 453.
515. 11d kan sinf tan asiin ahkgrn al-nu urn. There
are as nanTdm6ns of aztrolosi as therajare elements
in the universe. These may
DIVISIOXS OF
JUDICIAL ASTi{OLOGY
be either simple or compound and
on both the influence of the
planets is active. The former on
the whole do not submit to such influence, nor to any
change,exoept where they come into oontact with each
other, when, because they are mutually opposed and
violent,they are always in strife. such admixture does
take place on the surface of the earth, but is only
completed by the heat of the sun's rays. So all four

elements beoome united, and the surface is the plaoe
appointed for the aotion of the planets, whioh extends
as far as the power of their rays penetrates by reason
of the presence bf interstioes. Then these rays return
by a contrary motion and carry wl th them the aqueous
vapour whioh they have produoed, and they rise from the
earth until they reaoh a point where the power of suoh
movement becomes weak. So this motion and agitation is
the oause of all the vioissitudes and disasters of
nature , the resultant phenomena being either permanent
or temporary.
Anything therefore in the way of heat or oold or
moderate temperature, of moisture or drgnesa owing to
movements of the ataosphere, or of the various forms
of moisture carried by the wlnds such as oloud, rain,
snow; everything that is heard in the air suoh as sharp
claps and rolls of thunder; everything that is seen suoh
as lightning, thunderbolts, rainbows, halos, meteors,
also shooting stars, comets and similar atmospherio
phenomena; everything that ooours in the earth in the
way of tremors, and subsidences, and in the water as
tempests and floods, and the flux and reflux of the
tides - a ll these form the subject matter of the first
dlvieion of astrology. These phenomena are not permanent
or rarely so; rain, snow, oomets and earthquakes
are those whioh have the longest duration; were they
not sufficiently widespread their conoentration in one
spot would be disastrous.
A aeoond division is that whioh is ooncerned
with the mixed elements, suoh ae occur in plants and
animals, and is of two kinds, affeoting the whole of
a population or only a part thereof. Famine may be

taken as an example of the former, due to failure of
crops or brought, and epidemios such as spread from
country to country, like the plague and other
pestilenoes which depopulate cities.
The latter variety is more localized and soattered
in its appearances, it results from psychioel
phenomena, suoh as battles, struggle for power, ohange
or dominion fram one land to another, depoeition or
kings, revolutions, emergence of new religions and
sects, so that this chapter is a long one and this
variety the more important of the two.
The third division is specially concerned with the
environment of the individual human or other, the
events which affect him in the course or his life, and
the influences which remain behind him and in his
progeny, while the fourth has to do with human activities
and ocoupations. All of these sre founded on
beginnings or origins 'mabiidIf possibly trivial.
Beyond these there is a fifth diviaion where suoh
origins are entirely unknown. Here astrology reaches a
point which threatens to transgress its proper limits,
where problems are submitted which it is impossible to
solve for the most part, and where the matter leaves
the solid basis of universals for one of partioulars.
When this boundary is passed, where the astrologer ie
on one side and the sorcerer on the other, you enter a
field of omens and divinations whioh has nothing to do
with astrology although the stars may be referred to
in connection wlth them.
516. F- al-mabid1. allati bZhZ tuvaf durfib algism
al-am1 . The fundamental principles whf6-
agplioable to enquiries in the
PRIICCIPLES BY WHICH first and seoond - of -- theae ------
INQUIRIES BELONGING divisions of astrology are
TO THE FIRST DIVISION substantiallv the same. Thev
ARE KNOWN are based on-the greater,
intermediate and leaser oonthe
exact places at which these occur and
the asoendants at these times; further on the thousands
known as haaZirEt, ~andreds,tens and the iirdaria. There
Al-kind1 conceived that theae played the same r81e
for events in the macrooosrn as does the horoscope for
the life of the individual.

are people who take from the aonjunction and opposition
of the moon whiah preceded the enquiry,and substitute
this for the above,and there are others who depend on
the nearest eolipses past or future, or which the most
hurtiul are those of the 6Un,eSp6~iall~ if of Considerable
extent.
517. M8 taral dhalika na tafsrrhu. The degrees at
which satuZZ npiter meet in aonjunc tion. to~etheb
with the tiaaenaant or-that-
ANALPSIS AND time,and the asoendant of
INTERPRETATION OF THESE the year of the Conjunction
all move in the direction of
the euocession of signs through a whole sign in a oomplete
solar year, The point arrived at is called a
terminus (intihR1); moreover this terminus of each year
is in the sign next after that in whioh it was the year
before, and in the same degree thereof, e.g. if the
terminus or the first year was in 100 of Cancer, that af
next year would be in 10' of Leo. The matter of the
thousands and what followa them is in the like oase,and
there is no difference between them except in the
different amount of time allotted to the dtigrees and
signs. This is a usage of the Persians and became known
to ua through their language. l
We have stated before that acoording to ~bii
Malshar the years or the universe are 360000,~ the
deluge being in the middle of these. This statement
occurs in his book called *The Book of Thousandsr where
the degrees of the zodiao are eaah made equal to a
thousand years, so that the fraction belonging to a
year 16 3 3/5 seconds. This is the great division;
secondly, the signs are made equal to a thousand years
eaah; this is the term of thousands. Thirdly the Signs
are made equal to sinale years. the terminus of vears
being thus -produced as we- said'bef ore. Fourthly the
1 Aocording to AbU Mavshar in his Kitab al-ulUf. when
the heavens were first set in motion all the planets,
the sun included, were in aonjunation; when the same
phenomenon again presents itself, which may not
oocur for millions of years, the world will enter on
a new peri~d. Reinaud, &bull-ride, I. CXCI. The Book
of the thousands on religious houses treats of birth,
duration and end of the world, and fixes the times
when great ahanges in Em iree and Religions will take
glace. dvEerbelot, IT. 655.
204.

degrees are made equal to Single years, and this is the
small division.
Between the units and thousands two other terms
are introduoed, one in whioh each sign equals a hundred
years and another in which each is ten. Nothing is said
with regard to the share of the degrees in the oase or
the tens and hundreds such as we have spoken or in the
case of the thousands and unite.
Re have previously disoussed the extent of the
firdgria, and plaoed in a table their order at nativities
(438-9). But here the order changes and that
of the signs whioh oontain the exaltations of the
planets is adopted (443); viz. 1st Aries whioh has the
exaltation of the Sun; 2nd Taurus of the Moon; 3rd
Gemini of the Dragon's Head; 4th Cancer, of Jupiter;
5th Virgo, of Meroury; 6th Libra, of Saturn; 7th
Sa'gittarius, or the Dragon's Tail; 8th Caprioorn, of
Mars; 9th Pisoes, or Venus 443. The order is therefore,
Sun, Moon, Dragon's Head, Jupi ter , Meroury,
Saturn, Dragon's Tail, Mars, Venus, and then back to
the Sun. The distribution of partnerships is as
before, but the lords or exaltation have preoedence
over the lords of the firdEria, whioh however preserve
their own order and the partnerehip in their own
sections, exoept in the oase of the Dragon's Head and
Tail, whioh do not enter into partnership and are
therefore alone in their firdiiria.
These are the principles whioh must be relied
upon and used at every anniversary or the world-year1
and its quarters, also at every oonjunotion and
opposition of the moon, espeoially those whioh ooour
immediately before the anniversary and the quarters.
518. FamB al-adwRr al-madhkurah 'inda al-qir8nflt
wa arMlcha. The revolutions whioh are mentioned in conneotion
wl th conjunotions,517
REVOLUTIONS REFERRED n. 2,have a duration of 360
TO AT CONJUNCTIONS
AND THEIR QUARTERS
solar years. They are divided
differently into auarters. bY
some people equaliy into 90 '
The entranoe of the Sun into iriee. mt id 1020 the
Perigee must have been some 14' E of the winter
solstice in whioh case the relative duration of the
Seasons would be S 92.8, sp. 91.4, W. 88.6, AU. 88.12.

years eaoh as it quarters of the eoliptio, by others,
substituting the relative duration of the seasons of
the solar year Into a first quarter of 90 years, a
seoond of 85 1/4, a third of 90 and a fourth of 94 3/4.
519. F& al-mabBdS* allatti bihE khtaep a1 ism
al- than* n ya tamayyaz min al-amal. mTaai t i o - 6 .
principles laid down
PRINCIPLES SPECIAL TO THE for dealing nith
SECOND DIVISION BibTD DIFFERENT questions of the first
FROM THOSE OF THE FIRST order, the follow in^
are adopted for thzse
of the aeoond. The turn of the solar year and of its
quarters,the oonjunctions,oppositions,quarters and other
phases of the moon,alm the experienoes of people in all
places as to the rains (an~Zr,166) on the days of the
past year, mrther, the eclipses, combustions, con junctions,
retrograde movements of the planets whioh have occurred
in the year. There are aetrologere who note the ascendant
at the time of the entry of the sun and moon into
the signs,and deal in the same manner with the five
planets, but this Is obviously going out of the way
W+ thout advantage.
520. FamS al-Glkhud6h. That planet is known 8s
the ~ZlkhudiI (Persian for) lord of the year1 which,at
the anniversaries of the world-year
LORD OF THE YEAR (solar year), isat the ascendant or
one of the angles with dignities in
its om degree, or if there is nothing there, that
whioh is in a suooedent house. It there is nothing
there also, then it is that planet which is not
inoonjunot with the ascendant or its lord. According to
the Hindus it is that planet which is next in order of
the lords of the days; to eaoh planet a year being
given. They make a great deal or this.
521. B- al-maMdXc allati bihE yatararraf al-
Qim al- thnith. The prinoiples adopted for clues tions
of the-third order are aa follows:
PRINC3[.Pm OF TRE For every creature there is a time
THIRD DIVISION of its fire t appearanoe ,and decrees
are then sought from the ascendant
and the figure of the heavens as to ita condition. This
Seation is exolusively devoted to man,and must not be
RalY P. 255, VI. 3. alcalcadeny; oel id est annus et
cadeny id est daminus.

employed for plants, crops or animals. l There are two
initial points,sowing or conception,and time of appearanoe
(wa t al-nujh) or birth. From the arrangement of
the starP,the ha 2 beoomes knom,and the kadkhud&S
the ruling pla&f the house., (mubtazzfxt] 4 the gift.
(allowances of length of life), t e a ditions,
zl5Pst and doguc tions nuqsln. t-%g~f~om, $nd the
mur erers (qawatir)5 w h m a n end to it.
At the anniFersaries of the birth there beaome
the progresslone (intihZilEit),the apheses (taw'irit), e tbe
lord of the revolutionary figure (?qib al-dam) ,the divisor
or distributor of the fortunes of life ( jRnbakhtEr
or al-q~sim)7 and the mudabbir its partner8 in administration,the
lords of the weeks,and the firdaria.
1 These are included in the Pereian version.
9 Hyleg of the Latin and Xnglish renderings, Creek
crcpdrrl~. According to Vullers the derivation of hayliij is
unoertain. It is equal to the Pers. ~ad6nu (mistress of
a family) interpreted by astrologers as signifying the
body of the *nativet as opposed to Kadkhuda (master of a
family) signifying the soul. Under the root 'hlj* Lane
mentions the myrobalan rrui t (Pers. halIla ,brab. hafllaj)
whiah in the stomaoh is like a ood housewife in *h.
Bonatus p.677. Ylam v. note 495%V. Both haylij and
KadkhudE are signifioatom and their marriage deterndms
the length of life but cr. Nall. I1 355. For an inoorraat
defini tion of haylii f see Fagnan. Add. aux diotim. babes.
3 Persian for head of a household (in Turkish pronounned
I(iaytZ,a steward) ;translation of oinobean6rq~ )rq~
yevaacs~ ) , the alcochoden (atelchodela.acolpodebia &o for
other renderings see Abu Marahar E 1111) of the trans-
&a tiong. 4 v. 495. 5 plural of qs ti c, translation of
avaiPeTac 6 The aphetic theory rests essentially on
the assimilation of the Zodiac to a rouLette on which We
llfe of the individual is projected with more or lear:
forae from a certain point of departure (an aphotio
place) and is arrested by certain destruotive (anaeretb)
places before hav ng passed a quarter or the oiro1e.U.
p.411. TasyIr &rats - direotlo defined by Junotinus
p.379. v. 523. Athazir Haly p. 157 v. 254.
7 'quem Arabes vero Algebutar ,Persae autem zamoctar appellant
* Junc t. p. 1068. Both (and numerous other variants
such as alieriustar Haly p.157, algerbutaria, bbu Matshar
E 1111 De mag. oonj. Ven. 1515) represent the Persian
jHnbakht8r. M'U p. 231 has bg mistake jKnbakhtin, which
Suter suggested should be janbakhswn , probably influe&
by the Asabio & Latin tern. Wiedemann p. 242.
8 Partioepe Junct. 1.0,
3e3

522. MG tatsIl dhllika wa tafsrrhu. As to the
analysis a~erpretation of these, the infant (alkauliid)
is at first delioate al;dprreak,
INTEFPBFTATION is unfavourably affected by the leaet
IN D ~ L ohange in its conUition,and it is inpossible
to have oonfidenoe in its
survival until it has attained the age of four years.
These are oalled the years of rearing by the astrologers,
The first thing they do in these years is to asoertain
whether it is going to SWVIV~ or notland when in their
opinion it is sufficiently strong to be reared,they lc&
whether there is a haylEj or not. This they searoh for
in five places; l/ the lord of the time ,day or night; 2/
the moon by day and the sun by night; 3/ the degree of
the asoendant; 4/ the part of fortune; 5/ the degree or
con juno tion or opposi tion of the moon preoeding the
birth. The haylfj is one of these. After it ha8 been ds
termlned aoooriling to the proper rulea,l then the most
powerful planet as regards dignities (muzBr'h) of
those in aspeot2 to it is the kadkhuda. If it is at an
angle a large number is assigned,if sucoedent an intermediate
one,and if in a cadent position a small one.
Theae are the numbers whiah we diaoussed under the
years of the planets (437) and acoording to the oonditktn
of the kadkhudH as regards power or weakness, these numbers
indioate years of life or month6 or days or hours.
These are the gifts or allowances (ratfya) of the
kadkhudz. In the event of its being in a Gleflcent or
weak position,every fortune which is in a friendly aapeot
to it,or is in reoeption with it,adds its amallest
naber to the allowance, in the form of years or months
acoording to the strength ar weakness aforesaid ,while
every infortune in inimioal aapeot deduots such a number.
These are styled the additions and deductions. The
result is the longest period of life to whioh the
native oan attain,if one of the anaeretai4 does notinterfere.
Sometimes in a nativity there is no haylaj,
in whioh oase the length or life must be estimated from
the numbers of the fortunes present. The anaeretai are
moreover malefic in themselves and their rays are inimioal
like oertain fixed stars which are knoh for their
1 The hay18 j must be in an aphetical plaoe,either near
the ~ast- or-lest Angles or in the IX,X or %I house.
2 An alternative definition is given by. Junct. p. 141
"the most powerful planet in an aphe tioal place".
3 Chron. p. 90. 78 on the length of human life. &JVA~~~~~.~,~J~\
9 J&Y (L) C
4 Saturn and Mars.

evil effects 460. When the direotion arrives at them,at
the time when the half-year or quarter or yearly allowance
is due,disaster results and then the fortunes can
do nothing against the unfavourable situation.
There are astrologers who regard the situations at
the thirds of the year as gifts of the kadkhuda in plaoe
of the positions at the quarters. But there are nany
anaereta1,among them the degrees of the ascendant and
of the moon,if one of them interferes with the other,
and again the cusps of the 4th,7th and 8th houses.These
are separately dealt with in the books.1
Each year the ascendant is ascertained when the
sun cones round to the same minute of the ecliptic in
which it gtood at the birth, i.e. the anniversary
(tahwIl), and also every month when the sun arrives at
the'same degree and minute it occupied in the radical
or revolutionary figure. The lord of the ascendant at
birth is the lord of the first year,that of the second,
the planet next below in the order of the spheres, and
so the lords of the revolutionary figures for Succeeding
gears are reached in the same fashion as you proceed
with the lords of the hours,390. The Babylonians adopt
the same method,but start with the lord of the hour of
birth, instead of that of the ascendant, the Second
being next in order below.
The termini of the years are determined as follows;
a sign being given to each year,the end of the second
year is in the second sign at the same degree as the
asoendantaand so wlth the third. When the signs and degrees
of the yearly terms have been learnt,eaoh year is
divided into (thirteen) months of 28 days 1 hour 51
minutes and a sign to each given.so that the last month
ends at the same-degree as the radioal asoendant has
1 Apparently Capella was regarded as one. Then Ab'i Sahl
on leaving ~hwariwn with Avicenna was overtaken by a
sandstorm he foretold his death within two days beoause
the direction of the degree of his Ascendant would
then reach Capella (not Capricorn as in translation)
tva gn qEiPifast1,chahLr Maqiila p. 87.
2 At w~lich time a theae of the heavens or revolutionary
figure is constructed in the same way as the tradical'
figure 'a@' at the birth.
3 ~ccordini: to Hemes,De revol. nativ. I1 p.219 and
Junot. p.1051 the dominus anni is the lord of the sign
of the year (as distinct from the Salkhud5 of worldyears),
and to Wilson p.280 that planet whioh has most
dignities and is strongest in a revolutionary figure.

the same sign as the first,while the first month or the
next year has the same sign as the year; similarly a
sign is given to eaoh of thirteen periods of 2 days 3
hours 50 minutes, the end of the last of these periods
coinciding with the end of the monthly tem.1
The lord of the week is determined as fol1ows:take
the days elapsed since birth and divide by 7,note the
produo t,and count on the same number of signs from the
asoendant of the pdix,the one you arrive at is the
sign of the week. Then count the remainder whioh is
less than 7 from the lord of the asoendant in the
direotion opposite to the suooession of the signs, the
sign you thus arr ve at is the lord of the day of the
week in question. 3 There are astrologers who prooeed in
the direotion of the signe,not contrary thereto.
523. s8i1ir al-ma'dlldllt ma%E. We have referred
previously to the Apheta and its direction in ,regard to
termini. the thousands and cyolee.
OTHER THINGS TO BE Here its meaning requires to a
RECKONED WITH certain extent to be explained,
beoause in nativitiee the aphesis
is not caloulated by the equal degreee of the eoliptio
but by degrees of asoeneion. So the aphesis from the rlegree
of the asoendant and the planet which is situated
there is caloulated by oblique ascena on at the locality
in question,one year for eaoh degree. t So aleo the
aphesis of the planet at the oooident angle ell be acoording
to it8 desoension at the looality,beoauee the
setting of any eign at a lmality is equal to the aeoeneion
of its nadir. Howevsr with regard to the M.C. and
1.0. and any planet sltuatsd there,the aphesis ie in all
looalities by-asoension in the right sphere. SO ir a
lanet is not transitinu one of these four degrees but
Cf. ;Tuna tinus D. 1138 rhr, is more acoumte. The year is
into 13-months or 286 2h 17m LW, ~m,l~m ,&d the
ai~idita
month into 30 days oil 22h 289 35" 16m 10k t
2 Or the last oomplete weak.
3 But probably not its real lord,390.
4 This is Ptolelny's method oil determining the length of
Life by the time taken by one planet to reaoh a oertain
point of the aodiac or the former poeltion of anotter m
et b the diurnal movemspt oalcula ted in lanetary hour8
(4121h or it. &l-l am) ~arh rpv hptpaPav or degrees
oil oblique asoension. A year being assigned to eaoh degree,90
pars would be the allaaanoe tt the points were
separated by the semi-diurnal aro,whioh oonver ted into
degreee of right asoension might be considerably more.

a point between two angles,its ascension is Compounded
of those of the adjoining angles,and the calculation is
a long and difficult business.
An arc of direotion is always calculated from the
hayll j, the significator of life ,and never from any
other point except in special cases. The KadkhudZi is
the significator for the length of life. The degree or
the ascendant is always made apheta whether there is a
hay15 j or not. When at an anniversary or any other time
there is ascertained the point at whioh the direction
of the haylEj has arrived,the lord of the term in question
is called qiislm or divisor,lin Persian, jEn-bakh*,
bringer of the fortunes of life. The nape qssim coKe8
from the ciroumstance that beoause life is situated between
the radioal place of th'e haylfj and the anaeretio
point (qH$ir),the interval is divided into sections by
the terms of the signs,and the lords of the terns bawm
the lords of these sections. Any planet which is in the
term of the apheta or direots its rays to it becomes a*
sooiated nith the administration of that seotion.
With regard to the ruling planets (mubtazza t) : in
the various houses of the planets are numerous dignities
and assooiated therewith preeminence in the posseesion
of these (ibtiz8ziyya). The mubtazz without qualif ioation
is that planet which at a nativity is predominant
(mustaulT) by virtue of numerous dignities at the ascendant
or its lord,or at the five aphetio points in the
radix (a01 al-maulid) and similarly at its anniversaries.
The firdEria we have already discussed both in relation
to the years of the world and to nativities.
524. Fakaif Qabt al-mawilllfd wa 'amalm. Prooedure
to be observed aarth.
When the chilcl ie born you must
PROCEDURE AT
A NATIVITY
take the altitude of the sun if it is
day,and work out the ascendant and i ts
degree. This is the horosoope of the
nativity. If it is night,then the altitude of a wellknown
fixed star whioh is on the rete of the astrolabe
must be taken. Do not concern yourself nith the planets
which would only involve you in difficulties,nor with
the moon,for working with it would be a mistake unless
it is necessary. Further if by day or night. the condition
of the heavens is suoh by reason of oloud or the
1 The divisor is important for indioating the profession
a native should enter. Junot. p.1070 from Ubohazen
Haly f. 95 and also to a certain extent faloeloaden~',
520. p. 255,see VI. 3.
327

like, that you cannot get an observation, then only the
determination of the time remains.
When you know how much of the day or night has
passed, the ascendant can be oalculated by the method we
have desoribed. The number of hours elapsed can be detennined
in two ways,t;he first by baving a water-cloak
or other apparatus for measuring time going before the
labour oomes on,the clook having been set by sunrise or
sunset or the like. men the birth takes place, the hour
must be noted. The other way is to set the clook going
at the time of birth if previous notice has not been
received,and watch it until it is possible to take the
altitude of the sun or a star. It is then possible by
counting baok the numbers of houra shown by the clook
to get the exaot time.
If there is no clook available, all that is neoeeaary
is a oup of any material whioh will hold water;
a hole must be made in the bottom of any dimension you
please,and when the child is born you may proceed in
one of two nays at ohoioe,first by letting water into
it and eeoond by allowing water to esaape from it. If
you shoose the former, place the oup on the surface of
olean water,watoh till it fills and sinks. Imnediately
take it out and empty it,and place on the water again,
and count the number of times it sinks until the sun
or a star is visible. A mark must then be made at the
point the water has reaohed ,to indicate the fraction to
which it had sunk. Then take the altitude and note the
time,and prooeed as before till as many einklnge, toge
ther ri th the f raotion marked, have taken place ae
noted. Then take the altitude again and determine the
number of hours from the seoond time the oup wae placed
on the water,and oount baok the same amount from the
time the sun beoame visible ,which gives the time of
birth.
It you choose the second wag,place the oup on
something like a trivet,and take a pitcher full of
water,and fill the oup,when all the water has poured Or
trickled out, fill again and count the numbers of
pitohers used till the aun or star is visible,if there
is water in the cup make a marksand prooeed as before
with the determination of the tim.
525. Ir lam taha a raaad al-m t m6dh5 Tmalg
Should M -&hen
made a$ the timrof
blrth,the determination of that
IF TIME NOT NOTED time is beyond the reach of s0ie-
USE OF l AEtIMODAR for there is no way of knowing it

ut astrologers by eatlmation and conjecture arrive at
one little different in the Sign of the aSCendant,when
an attentive observer employs cautious questioning. B U ~
it is neoessary that there should be a certain degree
for the asoend nt,so they find a way,by using an indicator
(namiidzr) e whioh furnishes one whioh they assume to
be the degree desired. The indicator moat in use is that
or ptolemy,Z whioh if it does not disolose the exaot Begree,is
the best substitute. The method in question is
to ascertain aa acourately as possible the time cowicated
to you,and determine the asoendant,the oardines
and the places of the seven planets. Then find the degree
of the conjunctlon of the moon whioh ocourred before
the birth if that was in the first half of the
month,or else the degree or opposition,if in the latter
half. Then determine whioh planet has the most digniti'es
and te~timoniee~then the one that oomes next,and so
prooeed with the others till the last and note the
result. The most important testimony is being in aspeot
to that degree,for when two planets are equal in
the number of their dignities,the one in aspeot whatever
that may be,is preferable. Then examine which of
the two most dignified planets is nearest to an angle
by counting the number of their degrees. Thereafter
transfer the angle to the degrea of the nearest planet
and derive the asoendant from that. If the degrees of
the two planets are very distant from an angle, take the
next planet in order of dignlty,and examine the others
till you find that whioh is nearest to an angle and
prooeed as before.
There are astrologers who do not attach any importanoe
to the relative distanoe from or nearness to
an angle but aimply make the degree of the angle which
is nearest to the most dignified planet3 the place
(irom which to derive the asoendant) without altering
its degree to that of the planet and prooeed as we
have said.
526. Fakaif *Yaf mas at al-nutiah. The essential
condition whioh m?es it oo:sl-discover the
thperament , consti tution and form
TIME OF CONCEPTION
of a native as well as the conditions
which take place in him
1 The animodar of $he Latin translations 'Re~tifi~ation'j
on the use (and futility) of namcdlrs (numii8hEr) in
relation to the Nativity. Chron. p. 290.
Tetrabiblos. Bk. 111, cap. 111.
3 P. has *the same as the degree of the latter'.

during lire within the mother's womb is the ascertain,
ment of the time of conoeption. Authorities insist or
use being made of this. It is possible to learn from
the mother or the father if they agree the beginning or
the phenomena of pregnancy,the direction of which they
have month by month or week by week ascribed to Saturn
or Jupiter and eo down through the spheres.
The prooedure adopted by astrologers is founded on
two principles either of whioh is satisfactory if
properly exeouted: l/ it is assumed that the degree of
the asoendant at birth is the same as the degree at
whioh the moon stood at the time of conoeption, and 2/
oonverwly,that the degree of the asoendant at the
time or oonoeption is the same as that in which the
moon stood at the time or birth. In the first place it
ia desirable to asoertain from the mother whether It ie
the 7th, 8th, 9th or 10th month of pregnanoy, having
done so look a t the ascendant and the configuration of
the heavens at the time which has been approximately
arrived at; if the moon is at the degree of the asoendant,give
to the asoendant of conoeption the same degree.
Then the child has completed so many full revolutions
of' the moon before birth, either 7 (L91 days 6 hours),
8 (218 days 13 hours) - here be aarehl not to say that
an 8 months child is not viable - 9 (245 days 21 hours)
or 10 (273 days 5 hours).
If the moon is not at the degree of the ascendant,
whether above or below the earth, if above, look how
many deg ees seprate them, and take a day for every
la ll9,f and for every degree 1 hour and 5/6, and
every minute of a degree 1 5/6 minutes of time, and
subtraot the result in days hours and minutes from the
days of that month or which you have been informed.
If the moon is below the earth, take the distance from
the asoendant to the moon, and proceed in the same way,
but add the result to the days of the month in
question. So the greater or less number which you
The mean tropical movement of the moon in a day.
330

arrive at is the time spent by the Infant in the womb.
count back therefore from the time of birth the number
of days and hours,the result is the time of conception.
Thereafter asoertain the po~itlon of the moon,and when
you know its degree make this the degree of the asoendant,
for this is approximately accurate irom the data
available.
527. Fa- al-qiem al-r8bi '. For horary questions
of the 4th order,the asoendant or the beginning or the
matter in hand must be ascertain-
THE FOURTH DIVISION ed,whether that be det6rmined
already as in the case of a
nativity,and therefore known,or whether a time has to
be seleoted or ohosen as a starting point. The purpose
of this section is to select a suitable time for carrying
ou* same business so as to insure the presence of
fortunes and the absenoe of infortunes, just as we proteot
ourselves on the surface of the earth from the
rays of the sun, by seleoting northern aspects,and
shady spots and using mois tened punkahs and ioe-houseal
In this matter pay no attention to the silly talk in
whioh the ?ashwiyites persiat and their denial of what
we have accepted in this matter of 'eleotiona
(lkhtiysr).g
The essence of this seotion is so to adjust the
cardines that the malefic8 are as distant as possible
both in themeelves and their rays,while they are to
be kept illuminated by the benefioa and their light,
espeoially the ascendant and its lord, also the moon
and the lord of Its house, and the signifioator of the
business which is the subjeot or the inquiry. Also see
to the moon and the lord of the asoendant and the
signifioator that tliey are in aspeot to each other, and
place them in auoh a position that they all oast an
aspeot to the asoendant lest the election should turn
out to have bad eifeots. This is a long and wide field
of enquiry into whioh it is imposeible now to penetrate
furtber.
528. YamR al-qim al-khanis wa mabtidr'hlil. Rules
for puestions of the firth order.
THE FIFTH DIVISION AND ITS PRINCIPLES the fact that
a - uyue a-ma n a wa* a a-ma im
LaisFh81 harlva zditp&; af YP. has
'who are alwaya crying out wWo~ld that-a miMiole could
happen to us that this oalamity should be frustrated
and that we should be made happy"'.
531

528-530
the nativitlea of querents regarding various oontingencies
are for the most part unknown,astrologers deal wi.m
the statement or the querent as a starting point just as
if it were a nativity. The ascendant of the time is taken
and investigated,as well as its lord and the moon and
that planet whioh the moon is leaving, These are used as
aigniiioators for the querent,and as the matters on wmch
guidance is sought belong for the most part to the 7th
house and its lord ,or to such other /house in which the
queetion is comprised,461, and i ts lord ,also to that
planet with which the moon is about to conjoin,there is
no reason why with a little oare and attention an anshould
not be found somevhere among the twelve houses.
This division is known as that of the questions.
529. Fama al-maslalah al-bIkuri h. In oaee or an
idle1 request or one for a general prenostlc the custom
~f the majority-or-astrologers is
IDLB AND f3EPJEZW.L follow the same procedure as in otkr
QUFSTIONS questions .namely to ascertain the
ascendante of the time of- the
They then examine the aspects as they would at a nativity
and make oonolusions i.e. as to the remaining period of
life and the conditions therein.
There are however astrologers who inorease the
range of horoscope inspection by claiming to elicit the
past life of the querent. Hashwiyite astrologers,inc~
to falsification,when suoh a question is asked bid their
clients return and sleep on the matter for three night&'
and conoentrate their attention on it during the day,arul
then question them. After satisfying myself as to their
writings I know of no method or dealing with them except
insisting on exposing their vicious deorees:! and their
leading the querent into crime by the bad advioe giv&hfm.
530. Fam3 al-khabTJwat1-gamrr. ~habr* refers to
hidden objeots (conoealed in the hand) and damair to
seoret thou hts reserved-by the
MWDHT REBDIKG queren t-grcater i enominv -- is -
likely to be the part of ~stroio~ers
than that resultina from hasty dealing dth suoh
1 bTk8rr 1s a Persian - .- word- . ----
8 Whioh he appears to have done in his "KitUb al-tanbzh
raid SinFfrat al-tamwrh".
3 For instances of suooessrul thought-reading cf. -the
tales of 81-tlindi and ~l-~IriinI in the ChahSr Maqala
p.64,irom whioh the meaning of damIr may be gathered.
That given in Prol. I. 233 '~ensdes seoldtes du destin'
is too reatrioted.

questions and in oomparison how numeroue are the luoky
hits of Magiclane who keep up a patter while they are
on the look-out for tell-tale indioations and aotione!
Now we have arrived at a point of the science or
the stars which I have regarded as sufficing for the
beginner; any one who exceeds the limits set out above
exposes him~lelf and the aoienoe to derision and saorn,
for suoh are ignorant of the further relations or the
art and eeyeoially of those rbioh have been asoertained
with certainty.
Conolusion of the Baok or Instruction on the
Elements of the Soience of Astrology
Composed by Abu al-RaIhSn Muhammad b. Ahmad
al-BIriinT. Fday the Merhy of &od be upon'him.
Abundant Mercy. And His blessings on
M~+awnad,his descendants the pure in heart.
A11 glory be to God first and last.
As the Colophon has no date, the following from
the first fly-leaf of the MS are added.
By the accident of time this book came into the
possession of the poor dependent on Allah the allsufiicient
~u$ad b. ~sfad b. Mihrla'r al-~ustaurI. May
the Most High God improve his cirournstanoes,and favour
the realisation of his hopes in this world and the
next. May he oause him to select aright the winning
arrow from the quiver. In the month of Allah, RajaB
the Dear, 839 BH. (Jan. 1436 A.D. ).
He, the Guide. This book came into the possession
of the poor-slave in need of the Meray of our Lord the
Creator 'Ala b. Al-nunain b. rA18 al-Sahqr. May God
overlook his sins b$ Muhammad and his family and his
generous asaooiates. 1n' 1;he year 889 m. (1485 A.D. )
Praise be to God firs? and last and may He bless our
Lord and prophet Muhahad, the best or mortale, and
all prophets and saints.
Well endowed is he who with sufficient humility
uni tes intellect and Soul
For these two form a fortunate star-oonjunotion
whioh has an enduring influence with the people*

(Prepared by Mrs. F.G. Gardner)
Abjad 41-3
Algebra 37-40
Aliqu~t parts 11
A1-rcuten 308
Altitude 132-6; by astrolabe 199-203
Amplitude 129
Angles 3-4; zodiacal 149-50
Anniversary 150
Anomaly (mean and true) 94-6
Apogee 31 planets 64, 104; of sun 88; epiayoles
93-109 .
Apparition, stars 3 l perpetual 131-2
Arcs 4; angles in 10; similar 22
Aristotle on oelestial spheres 45
Arithmetic 23-37
Ascendant 149, 200-3
Asoending and descending 110
Astrolabe 194-7; uses of 197-209
Astrology 210; zodiacal 210-73; planetary 231-62;
Signs and planets 262-8; judlalal divisions 317-39
Astronomy 43-210
Autumn 185
AuzEn 140
Aviaenna on astrology 210 n
Ayane 229
Azimuth 134
Bargutam 266
Beardless man 181
Bhuktl 105
Brahmanda (ninth sphere) 44
Calendars 186-91
Cardinal points 49-50
Cazlmi 296
Chameleon 47
Chronocrators 239, 255
Chronology 161-73
Cir0le 4, 5, 10, 11, 20-2; Indian 49, 56-8
Citiee in olimates 143-5
Climates 138-45

CO-ascension8 145-7
Combust of planets 64; way 317
Complements of arc and sine 5; of parallelograms 9
Cones 18-19; seotions 19
Conjunotions of moon 64-5; 150-2; of planets 151-2;
of sun and moon 152-3; completion of 311
Constellations, zodiaoal 69-70; northern and southern
72-6; names of stars in 77-8
Creation, seasons 3f 182
Cube 17; numerical 28
Cupola of earth 140
Cycles 171-2
Cylinders 18
Dakshayana 229
Danger in heavens 272
Dates 171, 183-4
Dam and twilight 51-3
Day, cause of 49; 51-3; world days 113-4; length
130, 138; arc 191; of week (Hindu) 165; of
nonth (persian) 170; special 183-6; lapse or,
by astrolabe 201-4
Decanates of signs 263
Decimal notation 36 .
beolinatlon parallels 56, 59-60
Deferent of epioyole 92
Degrees of cirole 57; 'dead* a 4
Depression (altitude) 132
Divisions of earth 141-2
Earth 45-6; size 118-20; land under sea 120-5;
latitude and longitude 126-8; olimates and
.dlvislona 130-42; oities 143-5
Eclinses 154-6n -- - --
l$cliptic 55; equinoctial points 56-7; size 118
Elements, the four 119
Epicyole 61, 92-4
Equant of epicycle 93
Equations 38-40
Equator 124-5
Equinox 56; equinootial oircle 55
Eras 172-4
Ereot posture L25
Bther 43
Fasts and feasts 1'14-86; Jewish 175-6; ChrIstih 177-95
Persian 180-2; Greek 183; Soghdlan 184; Magian 185
Firdarla 239, 255
Figure 4
Fortune, inorense and decrease 271; Part of and
horarv indications 279-95
Galaxy 87
Geometry 1-25
Ghari 55
Gnomon 9; shadows of 133
Ealb 308
Hayyiz 308
Heavens 45
Horary Questions 276-93
Horizon - 48
xours 53-5
Houses of zodiaoal belt 149, 275-95
Injurious places in heavens 272-4
Intercala tim 164
Islands 122-6, 143
Kalpa 113
Lakes 123-4
Land. diS~03iti9n of 120-6
~anki 142)
Latitude, celestial parallels 56; stellar 59;
olanetarv 60. 102-3: lunar 101; terrestrial 126-8
Letters (us" numerals) 40-3 .
Llne 3
Liquorioe 47
Longitude 126-8
Lord of year 322
Lots (in nativities) 282-95
Map (wo~ld) 124
Mercury, spacial novenent 98-9
Meridian 49; shadow and altitude 135
Meru (Miru) 140
Mile, Arabio 119 n
~ontis i61; 165-70
Moon, sphere 44-5; 64-8; 81-6; 96-7; 101; 152-7;
160. 233; in nativities 240-58; 316
~oroccan algebra 41

Movements 474; of sun 89; of planets 191
Puhiirta 55
Nativities, figuve of heaven 190; terms 265-74;
indioations 276-95; principles of divisions 322-4;
procedure 327- W
Nebulae 69
Night, see Day
~~mbers'-Z4-37
Nm.eralo, Arabia and Moroccan 40-2
Nuvgnshaka 266
Oblong 7
Occultation 131-2
One (unity) 25-4
Orbits see sun, moon, planets, stars 91, 101-7
orientamy and occidentality 296-9
Parallaxis 158
Parallel lines 3-9; of declinatim and latitude 56
Parecliptic 88
Perigee of planets 64, 137; of sun 88-9
Permutation 12
Planets, names 60; spheres and movements 44-8;
60-4; orbits 91-g; rates 94; positions 96-7,
99; movements 108-14; size 115-9; Con junationa
150-2; positions 192, 204; 9a-e 231-9';
indications 240-54; orbs and years 255;
domiciles 256-9; aspsots 260-1; related to
signs 262-8; to sun 296-302; applioation and
separation 303-4; dignities 306-17
Point 3; cardinal 49
Poles of sphere 20, 55
Position see planets, stars, sun
Prayer time 52 n 4, 137
Prime vertical 136
Prism 18
Proportions 11-4
Quadrilateral figures 7
Ratios 11, 14, 15, 17
Rising and sett;ng of stars 204
Samdhi 52 ,
Sankalita 29, 31
Scorpions 182
Secant 23
Seas 121-4
Shadow 49-50; 133, 137, 1S9
SiddhZnta 113
Signs see Zodiac
Sine r 5
Solid 2; regular 20
Solstice 56-8
Space 2
Spheres 19-22; celestial 43-5
Square 7; power 17; numbers 32
stars 46-8; 58-9; 68-9; 73-86; 115-8; 147-50
Steel-yard 17
SU~ 44; 47-9; 88-91; 157-60; 199; 296-8; 316
Surd 32
Surface 2-3
Tangent 10
Thaneshwar (TBnTshar) 140
Thought reading 332-3
Towns, latitude and longitude 126
Transit, in conjunctions 151-2
Trapezium 7
Trepidation of orbits 101
Triangle 5-0; 16
Trigonometry, spherical 26 n
Triplicities 230, 259
TrishHnash 266
Twilight 51-3
Ujjain 140
Unity 29-4
Value of U 57
Vetch 47
Years 162-4; 171; new year 180
Zodiac, s*pnbols 43; signs 58; constellations 69; succession
87-8; houses 149; calendars 187; nature Z1D;
compass and winds 210; indioations 217-24; mutual
relations of signs 225-8; 2scending and descending
halves 229-32; relation to planets 256-8; degrees
269-70; fortune 271; indications in houses 275-95;
part of fortune 279-02